tlpl-~~ CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA UNDERGRADUATE CATALOGUE 1992-1994 CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA 250 University Avenue California, Pennsylvania, 15419-1394 (412) 938-4000 UNDERGRADUATE CATALOG 1992-1994 Volume 92 Number 2 California University of Pennsylvania is one of the fourteen institutions of higher learning of the State System of Higher Education of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania California University of Pennsylvania is A MEMBER OF the Association of State Colleges and Universities the American Association of Colleges of Teacher Eduction ACCREDITED BY the Middle States Association of Colleges and Secondary Schools ACCREDITED IN TEACHER EDUCATION BY the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education ACCREDITED IN SOCIAL WORK BY Council on Social Work Education ACCREDITED IN ATHLETIC TRAINING BY the National Athletic Trainers Association ACCREDITED IN NURSING BY the National League for Nursing California University of Pennsylvania admits students of any sex, race, color, national and ethnic origin to all rights, privileges, programs and activities generally accorded or made available to students at the University. The same policy is followed with respect to all employees regardless of rank or classification. The University does not discriminate on the basis of sex, race, color, religion, sexual preference, present or previous military service, ethnic and national origin in the administration of its educational policies, admissions processes, scholarships and loan programs, employment practices and athletic and other University administrative programs The University does not discriminate on the basis of handicap in admission or access to its programs. Inquiries regarding Title IX compliance and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 may be directed to the Title IX Coordinator (412) 938-4351, the Social Equity Officer (412) 938-4185, the Title 504 Coordinator (412) 938-4076, or the Director of Office of Civil Rights Region ill, U.S. Department of Education, Philadelphia, PA 17101. This catalog contains regulations, facts, and requirements that were correct at the time of publication. The governing personnel of California University of Pennsylvania reserve the right and authority to alter any and/or all of the statements contained herein. In keeping with the educational mission of the University, the educational and financial policies and procedures are continually being reviewed and changed. Consequently, this document cannot be considered binding and must be used solely as an informational guide. Students are responsible for keeping informed of official policies and for meeting all relevant requirements. 1 CONTENTS ACADEMIC CALENDAR, 1992-1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 THE UNIVERSITY . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Majors & Programs Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 APPLICATION AND ADMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 FEES AND EXPENSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 FINANCIAL AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 COLLEGES, DEPARTMENTS, AND MAJORS . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . 105 Divisions of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-120 Departments, Majors, and Courses . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121-348 GOVERNANCE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Governance of the State System of Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . Governance of California University of Pennsylvania . . . . . . . . . . . . . Faculty and Officers of the University . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . Professors Emeriti . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 . . 350 351-354 355-376 377-378 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2 Academic Calendar: 1992-1994 Spring 1992 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Spring Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Easter Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Commencement Monday, Tuesday Wednesday Friday Monday Thursday Monday Friday Saturday January 13-14 January 15 March 6 March 16 April 16 April 20 May 1 May2 Fall 1992 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Labor Day Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Thanksgiving Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Monday, Tuesday Wednesday August 31-September 1 September 2 Friday Tuesday September 4 September 8 Tuesday Monday Thursday November 24 November 30 December 17 Spring 1993 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Spring Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Easter Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Commencement Monday, Tuesday Wednesday January 18-19 January 20 Friday Monday March 12 March 22 Thursday Monday Friday Saturday April 8 April 12 May7 May 8 ACADEMIC CALENDAR 3 Fall 1993 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Labor Day Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Thanksgiving Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Monday, Tuesday Wednesday August 30-31 September 1 Friday Tuesday September 3 September 7 Tuesday Monday Tuesday November 23 November 29 December 14 Spring 1994 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Spring Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Easter Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Commencement Monday, Tuesday Wednesday Friday Monday Thursday Monday Friday Saturday January 17-18 January 19 ~ - March 11 March 21 March 31 April 4 May 6 May 7 Fall 1994 Registration/Orientation Classes Begin Labor Day Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Thanksgiving Recess Begins after classes Ends at 8:00 a.m. Classes End Monday, Tuesday Wednesday August 29-30 August 31 Friday Tuesday September 2 September 6 Tuesday Monday Friday November 22 November 28 December 16 5 THE UNIVERSITY -The Campus and the Region -Some History -Programs Offered -Equality of Opportunity -The Missions, Goals, and Objectives of the University THE UNIVERSITY 6 THE CAMPUS The University is in the Borough of California, a community of approximately 6000 residents, located in Washington County, on the banks of the Monongahela River, about an hour's drive south of Pittsburgh. It is accessible via Interstate 70, Exits 15 (PA 43), 16 (Speers), or 17 (PA 88, Charleroi) or via U.S. 40 (PA 43 or 88). The recent completion of the first spur of the limited-access Mid-Mon Valley / Fayette Expressway (PA 43) links California to the federal Interstate system. The University is approximately 30 minutes from Exit 8 (New Stanton) on the Pennsylvania Turnpike, and an hour from Greater Pittsburgh International Airport. The main campus consists of 33 buildings situated on 59 acres. A modem football stadium, including an all-weather track, seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, playing areas for intramural sports, and picnic facilities is located on some 83 acres at the George H. Roadman Recreation Center on Route 88, approximately two miles south of the main campus. The Area The geographic location of the University gives the resident student opportunities to explore and pursue a wide variety of activities. Located in the Appalachian Plateau, an area of low rolling hills, the University is a short drive from camping, hiking,fishing, hunting, white water rafting and canoeing, and skiing activities in the Laurel Mountains. In addition to cultural activities provided on campus, the student has easy access to the Pittsburgh metropolitan area. This provides the student an opportunity to enjoy the Pittsburgh Symphony, the Pittsburgh Ballet, the Civic Light Opera, the David L. Lawrence Convention Center, the Pittsburgh Steelers, Penguins, and Pirates, various museums and all of the excitements and attractions of a major metropolitan area. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA: A BRIEF HISI'ORY For more than a century, the institution that is now California University of pennsylvania has been growing and changing, until now it has developed into a varied and vital multi-purpose university. California is one of the fourteen state-owned institutions of higher education in the State System of Higher Education, but it has its unique history, and we present some of the highlights of it here. (Fuller information may be found in the book by Regis J. Serinko, California State College: 1he People's College in the Monongahela Valley, published in 1975.) THE UNIVERSITY 7 1852: A two-story Academy, offering education from kindergarten through college was established in the recently founded community of California. The institution was supported by local taxes and the donations of some of the residents of the community. 1864: A ten-acre plot for the Academy, still the center of the University, was purchased. 1865: The Academy obtained a charter as a Normal School for its district and became a teacher-preparatory institution. 1874: The institution was renamed the South Western State Normal School. 1914: The Commonwealth acquired the institution and renamed it the California State Normal School. The curriculum was now exclusively a two-year preparatory course for elementary school teachers. 1928: The institution became California State Teachers College, returning to its previous status as a four-year degree-granting institution, with increasing opportunities for growth and development. Under the presidency of Robert Steele (1928-1951), California began to concentrate on industrial arts and atypical education (what is now called special education) and otherwise expanded its curricula. The campus grew to 35 acres, and a number of new buildings were erected. 1959: During the presidency of Michael Duda (1956-68), liberal arts curricula were introduced, and the college became California State College. In 1962 a graduate program was introduced. The degrees of M.A. and M.S. were initiated in 1968. During Dr. Duda's presidency more than a dozen new buildings were completed, and the size of the student body and faculty increased more than four-fold. 1974: During the presidency of George H. Roadman (1969-1977), the college developed a special mission in Science and Technology, to complement its traditional roles in Liberal Arts and Education. 1983: On July 1, 1983, the college became California University of Pennsylvania, in recognition of its multiple roles and purposes, in the State System of Higher Education, during the presidency of John Pierce Wat_kins. The College of Science and Technolo&y became fully operational, offering programs in such varied areas as mathematics and computer science, industrial management, nursing, energy technology, robotics, and electrical engineering technology. THE UNIVERSITY 8 Si monumentum requiris, circumspice. DR. JOHN PIERCE WATKINS, president of California University of Pennsylvania from 1977 to 1992, is a member of the California class of 1953. He taught in the Edgewood schools and received a master's degree at West Virginia University before returning in 1957 as a professor of English at California, where he has spent the remainder of his academic career. Dr. Watkins received his Ph.D. in English in 1963 from the University of Pittsburgh, where he was a Danforth Fellow from 1960 to 1962. At California his courses in medieval literature and in Shakespeare are particularly remembered. He served as chair of the English department and as vice-president for academic affairs before becoming president. He has traveled widely in this country and abroad on behalf of this university and has served on numerous state, regional , national, and international bodies dealing with higher education. Since 1977, California University has experienced unprecedented development. The university has been reorganized into four vice-presidential areas of responsibility. The College of Science and Technology was founded and given a special mission in the State System in that area, and the academic organization of the university has consequently been restructured. So many new programs have been introduced in Science and Technology, Education and Human Services, Liberal Arts, and the Graduate School that a majority of students are now enrolled in programs that did not exist 15 years ago. The university has strengthened its commitment to social equity in recruitment and retention of students, staff, and faculty. The new Manderino Library has become a center for state-of-the art information technology. An attractive, commodious, and secure campus provides an appropriate setting for study or work. Major buildings have been renovated-chief among them certainly Old Main, which has been restored to its former grace, dignity, and utility. Academic achievement has been encouraged and rewarded by increased scholarships and awards, Learning Centers, an Honors program, and a presidential Honors Convocation. Students have benefitted from improved residence halls and dining facilities, new programs for physical fitness and recreation, broadened athletic programs, and an expanded Student Union. Special provisions have been made for educationally, socially, economically, or physically disadvantaged students and for mature, non-traditional students. Increasing numbers of new faculty members have come to California, from throughout the country and abroad. Generous provisions have been made for faculty professional development in both teaching and research, and the faculty and administration have been increasingly successful in procuring grants for their own programs and research and for the university. California's tradition as a center for teacher education has increased through such programs as the Teacher Enhancement Centers, which bring together experienced faculty from both the public schools and the university. Since 1983 the Mon Valley Renaissance has brought the university into partnership with local business, industry, and government to help revitali:ze the economy of the region. By 1992, California University of Pennsylvania has become not only a center for public higher education but a multi-purpose university serving the various needs of Southwestern Pennsylvania. 9 THE UNIVERSITY JOIIN PIERCE WATKINS THE UNIVERSITY UNDERGRADUATE ACADEMIC MAJORS AND OPTIONS In order to provide educational opportunities for students with different backgrounds and interests, the University offers a wide variety of academic programs. All of the degree programs are based on a broad general education designed to assist the individual to develop skills in communication, grow in cultural and intellectual interests, and develop the ability to do critical thinking. This extensive foundation in the arts, sciences, and humanities is enriching and essential in providing a liberal education for all students. The University offers degrees from four separate divisions: the College of Education and Human Services, which awards the bachelor of science degree in education in thirty major programs, and two associate degree programs and the bachelor of arts degree in two programs; the College of Liberal Arts, which awards the bachelor of arts and the bachelor of science degrees in forty-three; the College of Science and Technology, which awards the bachelor of science degree in forty-six programs; and the associate of science degree in ten areas; and the Graduate School, which offers the master of science, master of arts, and master of education degrees. The following programs are offered at the undergraduate level. I. BACCALAUREATE DEGREE PROGRAMS COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS Anthropology Art Art: Teacher Certification (with W&J or Carlow College) Communication Studies -Public Relations -Radio & Television Earth Science -Meteorology -Oceanography Economics English -Business & Commercial Writing -Creative Writing -Journalism -Radio & TV Writing -Scientific & Technical Writing French Geography -Applied Geography -Travel & Tourism Geology German History Humanities Area Industrial Organizational Psychology International Studies -Business & Economics -Foreign Language -Geography - Political Science Parks & Recreation Management Philosophy -Philosophy/Pre-Law Political Science -Pre-Law -Public Administration Psychology Russian & Soviet Studies Social Science Area Sociology Spanish Theatre Urban Studies General Studies in Liberal Arts (for undecided students) THE UNIVERSITY 11 COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOWGY Administration & Management Biology -Pre-Chiropractic Medicine -Pre-Dentistry -Pre-Medicine -Pre-Osteopathic Medicine -Pre-Optometry -Pre-Podiatric Medicine -Pre-Pharmacy -Pre-Veterinary Medicine Business Administration -Accounting -Business Economics -Computer Based Systems Management -Finance -Human Resources Management -Management -Marketing Chemistry Electrical Engineering Technology Environmental Studies -Environmental Conservation -Environmental Pollution Control -Environmental Resources -Environmental Science Graphic Communication Technology -Electrographics -Photolithography (Offset) -Screen Printing Industrial Management Technology -Management & Computer Science -Manufacturing -Printing Management Industrial Technology Manufacturing Technology Mathematics Mathematics & Computer Science Applied Computer Science Medical Technology Mortuary Science (Cooperative) Natural science Physics Pre-Engineering General Studies in Science & Technology (for undecided students) COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES Athletic Training Athletic Training/Dual Major Early Childhood Education Elementary Education Elementary & Early Childhood Education General Studies in Education (for undecided students) Gerontology Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped and Early Childhood Education Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped and Elementary Education Secondary Education -Art (See Liberal Arts above) -Biology -General Science -Chemistry -Comprehensive Social Science -Communication -Earth Science -English -French -German -Mathematics -Physics -Spanish THE UNIVERSITY 12 Social Work Special Education -Community Service Personnel -Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped -Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped with Physical Education & Recreation Speech Pathology and Audiology Technology Education Il. ASSOCIATE DEGREE PROGRAMS Besides the many four-year baccalaureate programs, California University also offers a variety of two-year vocational programs to meet the educational needs of students who wish to pursue career-oriented education. The degrees are designed to prepare students for technical and vocational occupations immediately upon graduation. Such areas as Automation Technology (with options in robotics and numerical control), Drafting Technology, Administration and Management (with options in accounting, computer-based systems management, and banking), Computer Science Technology, Screen Process Printing Technology, Electronics Technology, Early Childhood Education, and Community Living Arrangements provide the educational base for exciting careers in the nineties and beyond. COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY Accounting Administration & Management -Computer Based Management Systems -Banking Computer Science Technology Automation Technology -Numerical Control -Robotics Drafting Technology Electronics Technology Nursing at Washington Hospital (Degree from Washington Hospital) (Apply to Washington Hospital) -Pre-Nursing at Washington Hospital (No Degree) Screen Printing Technology COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES Community Living Arrangements Early Childhood THE UNIVERSITY 13 ill. CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS (for those with previous certification or degree) COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES Early Childhood Certification Elementary Certification Technology Education Certification Mentally and/or Physically Handicapped Certification Secondary Education Certification -Biology Certification -Chemistry Certification -Communication Certification -Comprehensive Social Science Certification -Driver's Training Certification - Science Certification -English Certification -Environmental Education Certification -French Certification -General Science Certification -German Certification -Mathematics Certification -Physics Certification -Spanish Certification IV. UPPER DIVISION PROGRAMS (available only to those with previous special certification and/or degree) COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY Nursing (BSN-Upper Division for RNs) -Pre-BSN Nursing (prerequisites needed for RN s) Electrical Engineering Technology (completed Associate EET program) COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetist Public School Nursing (for RNs) (for CRNAs) Dental Hygienist (for Dental Hygienists) THE UNIVERSITY 14 EQUALITY OF OPPORTUNITY California University of Pennsylvania acknowledges that equality of opportunity is the cornerstone of a free and democratic society. As a state-owned institution, it accepts the duty of putting the principle of equal opportunity into practice. As an institution of higher education, it accepts the responsibility of teaching that principle by its policies and actions. Consequently, California University of Pennsylvania commits itself, ethically and legally, to the equal opportunity policies of a system of fair and open recruitment and acceptance of students regardless of sex, race, color, religious creed, lifestyle, affectional or sexual preference, disability, present or previous military service, ancestry, national origin, union and political affiliation, and age. Nevertheless, mindful of the reality of past injustices and present societal needs, the university reserves the right to employ a limited use of racial, ethnic, and sexual criteria to accomplish remedial objectives when necessary. Once students are admitted to California University of Pennsylvania, the same rights, privileges, programs and activities are made available to all without regard to arbitrary and irrelevant criteria. Financial aids, especially scholarships, guaranteed loans, National Direct Student Loans, grants, work study programs, assistantships, and internships, are provided on an equal opportunity basis. Likewise, advisors and counselors are available to all students. Special programs, in particular have been established to meet the needs of students who meet the federally prescribed financial and academic criteria. Residence halls are available on a first-come, first-served basis to all students without regard to race, national origin, or religion. However, in the case of living arrangements, sex and disability distinctions are made to better serve and accommodate all students. Finally, in accordance with recent federal and state legislation, architectural and programmatic modifications have been implemented to ensure that no qualified student is prevented from succeeding at California University of Pennsylvania because of disability. In addition, California University of Pennsylvania engages in an open and equitable system of recruitment and employment of faculty and staff candidates. It practices a nondiscriminatory system of compensation, including pay, promotion, tenure, transfer, education, training and other benefits of employment. Finally, California University of Pennsylvania prides itself on having created a workplace and learning environment free from discrimination and harassment. If situations or conditions to the contrary occur, an immediate and appropriate redress will take place. Persons aware of such situations or conditions are encouraged to contact the Social Equity Officer (938-4185), or the Title IX Coordinator (938-4351), or the Section 504 Coordinator (938-4076). THE UNNERSITY 15 THE MISSION, GOAI.S, AND OBJECTIVES OF CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY' OF PENNSYLVANIA California University of Pennsylvania's mission is to provide quality education at a reasonable cost. To this end the university: (1) offers undergraduate instruction in the liberal''arts, education, human resources, the professions, business, science and technology; (2) offers a graduate education to, and beyond, the master's degree, in certain areas of study; (3) helps meet the region' s economic, social, cultural, and recreational needs; (4) fosters research and service; (5) encourages the intellectual growth of its faculty, as well as of its students. California's special mission is to develop programs in science, technology, and applied engineering. Goals California University of Pennsylvania is a multipurpose, regional university firmly committed to offering students of widely varied ages, backgrounds, interests and needs, a broad range of education opportunities and experiences. Thus, the university endeavors to provide a contemporary array of degree programs-associate, baccalaureate and masters-which will enable the student to develop as an intelligent, caring individual who will be able to function as a contributing, productive member of society. The university recognizes the important relationship that exists between those disciplines which enhance one's ability to think critically, reason analytically, communicate effectively, maintain historical perspective and promote good citiz.enship and those disciplines which provide the specialized knowledge and the critical intellectual skills to perform effectively in a wide variety of settings. To this end, it is the purpose of the university to prepare men and women to meet the challenges of the world of work: in education, business, industry, government, the professions, the human services, and graduate and professional schools. The principal goal of the College of Education and Human Services, the university's oldest division, is to maintain a diversity of contemporary curricula appropriate for the preparation of new teachers and the improvement of teachers already in the field. More recently, the college has elected to sponsor the development and delivery of a variety of special programs for the purpose of educating practitioners in a number of human service areas. Through traditional courses of study, the College of Liberal Arts attempts to teach reflective thinking .that enables graduates to make responsible social decisions in a multicultural world. The Liberal Arts programs are designed to present students with options that THE UNIVERSITY 16 call upon precise knowledge, cultural perspectives, aesthetics, and personal and social communication skills in order to create informed, as well as technologically literate, graduates. As the newest division of the university, the College of Science and Technology's goal is to make available an array of scientific, technological and career-oriented programs which prepare students for the increasingly complex demands of the industrial, business, health fields as well as for further study in graduate and professional schools. The goal of the Graduate School is to provide an opportunity for those who already have undergraduate training to further develop their experience at the graduate or postgraduate level. As a regional institution, the university strives to present a diversity of programs and services for those residing in its service area. A principal goal of the Office of Development and External Relations, especially in its Mon Valley Renaissance program, is to provide different kinds of assistance related to economic development. The university also offers to local residents access to many social and cultural activities. Objectives The faculty and students of the university are participating members of an educational institution charged with preservation, discovery, and dissemination of knowledge in the arts, sciences, technologies, vocations and professions, and with the creative application of that knowledge in their lives both as individuals and members of society. The objectives of the university are: (1) To provide a liberal education which aims at developing analytical thinking and individual initiative and responsibility; (2) To provide flexible, innovative programs and support services that are responsive to a broad range of student and regional needs; (3) To provide a professional faculty and an effective administration; (4) To create and maintain a learning environment in which the rights of all are respected; (5) To provide a wide range of learning opportunities for students interested in associate, baccalaureate, graduate, and non-degree programs; (6) To promote effective communication among faculty, students, administration, and the general public; (7) To provide a diversity of intellectual, cultural, social and recreational activities and experiences for the university and surrounding communities; (8) To encourage thoughtful and responsible faculty and student participation in local, state, national, and international affairs; (9) To require high standards of teaching and scholarship and to encourage participation in professional activities; (10) To foster academic research which contributes to human knowledge and the vitality of the institution; and (11) To maintain an on-going system of self-evaluation whereby the goals of the institution serve as the criteria for determining the institution's effectiveness. 17 GENERAL INFORMATION -Orientation -Computer Facilities -The Library -Learning Resource Centers -Honors Opportunities -Placement and Career Services -Cooperative Education -Internships -National Student Exchange -Visiting Student Program -Veterans Affairs -Athletics -Women's Center -Campus Ministry -Confidentiality of Records -Public Safety and Security GENERAL INFORMATION 18 ORIENTATION A comprehensive one-day orientation program, under the direction of the Offices of Academic Affairs and Student Development, is conducted for entering students and their parents during the summer months before the student's beginning fall semester. This initial formal encounter with the University community provides students and parents with an intimate view of the University's total program, including both academic and social aspects. Students and parents discuss the academic requirements of various curricula with academic personnel and review an individual student's interest, capabilities, and career plans. At the close of the program the students have registered for their first semester of courses, and both parents and students have made valuable contacts with University personnel, in both areas, academic and student affairs. GENERAL INFORMATION II 19 COMPUTER FACILITIES I COMPUTER CENTER The University Computer Center is located in the basement of Manderino Library. Staff offices are open Monday through Friday from 8:00 a.m. until 4:00 p.m. User facilities in the World Culture Building are available for student use at least 80 hours each week. In addition, dial up access is available almost 24 hours a day. The computer facilities at the University are separated into two distinct functional areas. The first area deals with the providing of computer resources to meet the instructional and research needs of the University, such as student access for coursework and the Manderino Library VULCAT on-line catalog. The second area deals with providing resources to meet the administrative needs of the University, including, for example, the following functions: student scheduling and registration, library circulation control, revenue and accounts receivable, student data base maintenance, personnel data base maintenance, and the University budgeting system. Computer Accounts Any student may obtain a computer account by stopping in at the computer center office in the basement of Manderino Library to fill out a user account request form. The forms are available from the Computer Center secretary. There is no charge for the service or for the use of the computer. Students enrolled in courses where VAX computer assignments are given have an account generated for them automatically. Other students must fill out an account request form, which must be signed by a faculty advisor or instructor, then returned to the Computer Center office. Individual user account requests normally take 24 hours to process. User Guide An Introductory Users' Manual for VAX/VMS Users is available for $3.75 at the information desk in the lobby of the Student Union. This manual is a must for all new or infrequent VAX users. It describes some of the essential bits of knowledge required to effectively utiliz.e the VAX computers on campus, including how to log in here at California University of Pennsylvania, how to use the file editor, and how to compile programs. GENERAL INFORMATION 20 World Culture User Center The World Culture User Center located in the basement of the World Culture building is the main center for campus VAX access. This facility contains a VAX terminal room, various printers, a graphics room, a PC micro laboratory, and two classrooms. Tektronix 4105 terminals and a 4696 color ink-jet screen copier are available to support computer graphics courses. The PC micro lab currently houses IBM-PCs, PC clones, Maclntoshes, and Apple microcomputers. Entrance to the User Center is through the University Avenue (west) entrance or via the elevator. Hours are, generally, Monday through Thursday, 8:00 a.m. to 10:30p.m.; Friday and Saturday, 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m.; and Sunday, 3:00 p.m. to 10:30 p.m., but may vary. The User Center is usually closed Saturdays during summer sessions. Other Campus Facilities Every department has microcomputers for student and staff use; only some of the major facilities are listed here. Two specialized VAX terminal laboratories, the Computer Aided Design and Drafting laboratory and the Numerical Control Machine laboratory, are located in the Coover Annex and operated by the Industry and Technology department. These laboratories are reserved for students taking specific computer-aided drafting and numerical control course. Each laboratory is equipped with Tektronix 4107 and 4207 terminals with graphics tablets. Additional campus microcomputer laboratories are located in and operated by various departments on campus, including Industry and Technology, Business and Economics, Mathematics and Computer Science, Education, and the English Department's Word Processing Laboratory (see page 21 below). Instructional Applications The University maintains the following applications packages in support of instructional computing. Graphic packages run using the Tektronix 4100 series and 4200 series terminals are available in the World Culture and Coover Annex terminal laboratories. SPSS-X Statistical Package for the Social Sciences, Extended EQINOX Computer Aided Manufacturing and Numerical control. ANVIL-5000 Computer Aided Design and Drafting. GKS Graphical Kernel System (subroutine library). PLOT- IO Tektronix graphical subroutine packages. KERMIT and XMODEM PC to VAX file transfer packages. VULCAT Library On-Line Catalog. TeX and LaTeX Typesetting packages. POPLOG PROLOG AND LISP development package. GENERAL INFORMATION 21 Campus Network University VAX computers, terminal laboratories and many campus buildings are connected together using a high-speed "Ethernet" local area network. This industry-standard network allows users to share and more easily access campus computing resources. Computer Center Facilities The VAX computers which service the campus are maintained by the Computer Center. The main system consists of a five node VAX cluster composed of the following processors: one 14 megabyte 11/780, one 32 megabyte 8350 dual processor, and three 16 megabyte 8250 single processors. An HSC50 intelligent disk processor supplies the cluster nodes with access to any of the four gigabytes of disk storage currently available. Data backup is done using a TU78 6250 BPI or TU80 1600 BPI tape drive. A 1200 LPM Fujitsu printer and a 600 LPM LP26 printer produce administrative printouts. Additionally, a Microvax II system supports the Computer Aided Design and Drafting users. User terminal access to all systems is via the Ethernet network. Some direct wire connections remain to the 11/780 and microvax processor, but these will be replaced in the future. WORD PROCESSING LAB The Word Processing Lab in Dixon Hall has more than 40 computers for the use of students. During the regular academic year, the Lab is open at least 70 hours a week (including weekends), and during the summer for 40 hours a week. The lab is staffed by trained student workers, and a faculty coordinator is usually on duty during the day. Both MS-DOS and Macintosh computers, and a variety of word processing and related software, are available. In addition, the lab provides fast, high-quality, dot matrix and laser printing. For more elaborate art, layout, and design work, the lab offers desktop publishing equipment and software, including major layout and art programs, pre-packaged art, big screens, a scanner, and a light table. Students in the Professional Writing Program receive instruction in desk-top publishing. Apart from the purchase of an inexpensive storage disk, there are no fees or charges for the use of the Word Processing Lab. The atmosphere is informal, and students in all curricula are invited and encouraged to use this friendly, high-tech writing facility. TEACHER EDUCATION COMPUTER LABORATORY The College of Education and Human Services maintains a computer laboratory in the Keystone Education Building, Room 402. The facility is equipped and designed to train prospective teachers to use computers as tools to support their teaching and instructional management roles. 22 GENERAL INFORMATION Equipment includes 16 teaching stations, each consisting of one of the Apple Macintosh family of computers with one hard drive, one floppy drive, and a color monitor. In addition, each station is part of an AppleTalk Network linked to a Macintosh Ils. Each position is linked to a laser printer or one of several dot matrix printers. There are more than 100 titles of instructional software available for examination and evaluation. The laboratory facilities are used for formal instruction for the course EDF 301, Computers for Teachers, about one half of each weekday. During the remainder of the day until 10:00 p.m. the laboratory is staffed and available to complete assignments for the course, which is required of all Teacher Education majors, or other uses students may have. Other than the inexpensive data disks, there is no cost to students. GENERAL INFORMATION 23 TIIE LIBRARY At the entrance to the University, the Louis L. Manderino Library is one of the most prominent and most important buildings on campus. With more than a quarter million books in open stacks, subscriptions to 1700 newspapers, magazines, and other periodicals, it is first of all the chief and most accessible source of information on any subject. With a seating capacity of more than 1500, it is also a place to study and to read, whether the reading is required for a course or a term paper, or for browsing or recreational reading. During the fall and spring semesters the library is open 15 hours a day during the week and 9-10 hours a day on weekends. During the summer, the library is open 13 hours a day Monday through Thursday and eight hours a day on Friday and Sunday. During examination periods towards the end of the semester, library hours are extended still further. Computeriz.ed information retrieval has made library research faster, more thorough, and more efficient at Manderino. Instead of a card catalog, the library has VULCAT, its "on-line" catalog that enables the student to sit at any of a dozen or more terminals and, by means of an easy series of commands, not only quickly locate any books in the library's collection but print out automatically the titles and call numbers of those books. VULCAT can also be accessed from various on-campus terminals and, by means of a telephone modem, by anyone who has a home computer. To look up magazine or periodical articles, another set of terminals and printers runs computerized CD-ROM discs to current bibliographies-replacing the need to consult printed volumes of them issue by issue and year by year. Chief among these discs are: The Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature, the Business Periodicals Index, the Applied Science and Technology Index, the Cumulative Index to Nursing and Allied Health Literature , the Social Sciences Index, the Humanities Index, the MLA International Bibliography, the Education Index, and ERIC (including the Current Index to Journal in Education.) Through a Tower System these on-line sources may be used by a number of people at one time. Other specialized sources on disc include the Fortune 500 Prospector (of particular use to Business majors), U.S. Census data, PC Globe and PC USA, which feature maps, a Word Cruncher disc (containing, among other things, the complete works of Shakespeare, historical documents and speeches, and many complete works of American literature), and Books in Print. Brief tutorial sessions, specially written pamphlets, and individual assistance from specialist librarians in bibliographical instruction assist the student who may be unfamiliar with such on-line searching. The library also offers such services as a large Reference Collection, inexpensive photocopiers, out-of-state telephone directories, a large collection of college and university catalogs, a pamphlet file, syllabi for all courses offered at the University, a certain amount of computer software, a collection of specially housed art slides, and data on important business and industries. Some of the special services in or available through the library are: • Library privileges at 92 other local colleges and universities. • A Curriculum Library for Teacher Education students, with a large collection of children's books and textbooks. GENERAL INFORMATION 24 A Media Center with both hardware (such as videocassette and tape players) and software (such as films, records, and tapes) that the student may use or, in some cases, charge out for class, home, or dorm use. • Government documents of many different categories. Manderino Library is an official Federal Government Document Depository and regularly receives, in bard copy, microform, or CD-ROM format, large numbers of these documents-for example, census data, reports, maps, and books. The Documents Librarian will assist with the use of this important resource. • Hundreds of thousands of documents on microform in the ERIC system relating to all aspects of education, and easily located through the CD-ROM discs. • Special files on business firms-local, national, and international. The staff of the Manderino Library are "user-friendly" and welcome any suggestions not only for books to add to the collection but for improvement of services. • 25 GENERAL INFORMATION LEARNING RESOURCE CENTERS WRITING CENTER The Writing Center is a non-credit service provided by the English Department to assist students and faculty from every academic discipline with writing projects. Located in Dixon 119, the Center is open during the regular academic year from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. The center also offers writing assistance during summer sessions on a slightly more limited basis. The Writing Center lends its assistance in these ways: (1) Tutorials are offered on a one-to-one basis. Tutors may be peers, graduate assistants, or English instructors who are trained to provide conference-based writing assistance. (2) Tutors function as coaches and collaborators, neither evaluating writing, lecturing students, nor completing students' work. Instead, students collaborate with writers in ways that facilitate the process of writers finding their own answers and developing their own ideas. (3) Each student's individual needs are the focus of the tutorial. Students are encouraged to participate actively in setting the agenda for how the tutor and student will spend their time together. (4) The Center serves the university and the entire community, including writers completing academic papers, business and lab reports, school applications, resumes, graduate theses, writings for contests, and any other writing projects with which writers are involved. The Writing Center, which offers tutoring by appointment or on a walk-in basis, is a free service to all University students. READING CENTER When your class reading assignments make you feel as if you've just entered the university jungle, come to the Reading Center for a free one-hour tutoring session. Staffed by one faculty member and two graduate assistants, the Center teaches techniques to improve reading comprehension and vocabulary. The Center offers help in identifying main ideas, making inferences, drawing conclusions, understanding concepts and facts, test-taking skills and building vocabulary. Students make appointments to work privately with a tutor or schedule an independent lab session that is staff directed. A recent addition to the Elementary Education Department, the Reading Center is housed in the Keystone Building, Room 200A and is open from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. GENERAL INFORMATION 26 MATHEMATICS LABORATORY Offered in the Mathematics Laboratory in 115 Noss Hall are the following services and resources: 1. Mathematics and computer science tutoring. 2. Computer software for mathematics courses and for math anxiety. 3. Reference books for mathematics courses and for math anxiety. If you wish to take advantage of the free tutoring service please call 938-5893 to schedule a 30-minute appointment. Before calling, we ask that you read your text and start your homework. If you have trouble completing an assignment, schedule an appointment for a tutoring session. We have computer-directed-instruction software and 12 Apple Ile microcomputers available for your use. The computer software includes topics from basic mathematics through calculus. We also have some mathematics-anxiety software. Most people feel up-tight about mathematics in some way or another. If you're one of these people, you may want to try some of these materials. (Mathematics anxiety books are available too.) The Mathematics Laboratory is usually open from 9:a.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Mondays to Thursdays during the fall and spring semesters and the summer and from 9:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. on Fridays during the fall and spring semesters. The phone number is 938-5893. CARE: Services for the Learning Disabled California University meets the special needs of learning disabled students both in high school and as undergraduates at the University with CARE-the Center for Academic Research and Enhancement. More information and application procedures may be obtained from the CARE office, (412) 938-5781, in the Keystone Education Building, Room 112. Summer Program The Summer Program brings learning disabled students who have completed their junior year of high school to live and study on campus for five weeks. During this period the students are given intensive remedial instruction in reading, mathematics, spelling, English, social skills, study skills, survival skills, and Learning Strategies. Following classes each day are mandatory study sessions, as well as evening recreational periods. Students who successfully complete the first summer are invited to return the following summer after their senior year of high school. This second-summer program offers continued remediation and study skills, with increased emphasis on preparation for college. A limited number of places may be available to new applicants who have completed their senior year of high school but did not participate after their junior year. GENERAL INFORMATION 27 The Summer Program serves approximately 24 students each year on a fee-for-service basis. Procedures and standards for admission to the university for the learning disabled are the same as those for all other applicants. The two programs described are available to the learning disabled student enrolled at the university. Application for admission to these programs is a separate procedure and requires documentation separate from that which is submitted to the Admissions Office at California. Such documents should be sent directly to the CARE office. Specialized Support Service Program The Specialized Support Service Program (SSSP) serves a maximum of 40 participants on a fee-for-service basis. The SSSP operates under contractual agreement with the participants, parents, and the CARE staff. In the first semester, all students must participate in Structured Academic Management Seminars for two hours a day, four days a week. Subsequent levels of participation are based on the participant's academic performance. The seminars provide: • Development of a daily study plan with assigned monitors. • Assistance in sequencing course assignments into manageable tasks. • Daily monitoring of academic performance, including student training in recording assignments and grades. • Individual and small group tutoring in specific content areas with CARE staff. • Referral for tutoring to other campus resources. (See the descriptions of the Writing Center, the Mathematics Laboratory, the Reading Center, described on pages 25-26 above, and the Department of Academic Development Services on page 121 in this catalog.) • The assistance of community-based specialized tutors when needed. • Word processing equipment, software and the necessary training. The CARE staff also monitors student academic performance, sends progress reports to parents on students' overall academic status, assists in scheduling, and works closely with students' academic advisors. Additional services such as extended test time, oral testing, use of the Kurzweil Reader, etc. are provided as needed. Modified Basic Support Program The Modified Basic Support Program (MBSP) insures the availability of basic support services to all identified learning disabled students enrolled in the university who elect to receive such services but are either not eligible for participation in the Specialized Support Service Program due to program capacity or choose to receive a less intensive level of service. The following services are available to students in the MBSP: • A regularly scheduled, weekly conference with a member of the CARE staff. • Review of assignment and study patterns. • Guidance for referrals to existing University resources. 28 GENERAL INFORMATION Assistance in the development of self-advocacy as required by the learning disability. • Guidance to assist the student to work independently within the University setting. Enrolli:nent in the MBSP is unlimited, and there is no fee for these services. • GENERAL INFORMATION 29 HONORS PROGRAM The University Honors Program has been established to promote and reward outstanding intellectual achievement. Each year, the applications of all new freshmen and transfer students are reviewed, and those students with the very highest indicators of past and future academic success are invited to participate in the Honors Program. Students in any undergraduate program or division of the University may participate. The Honors Program allows academically talented students to work at their own level of ability, in courses at any stage of their undergraduate career, but it also provides special opportunities for the inquiring mind to explore important or interesting subjects that are not commonly offered in undergraduate curricula or that cut across traditional academic boundaries. Certain courses, designated as Honors Courses, are restricted to members of the Honors Program, and they are offered at all class levels. Some of these Honors courses may be interdisciplinary, cutting across the boundaries that often separate different fields of study. A course in history, for example, might entail art, music, and literature and cover not just a single period of time but many different eras and civiliz.ations. Other Honors courses may represent advanced study, singly or with others, in the Honors student's major field of study. These two kinds of courses are open only to members of the Honors Program; and enrollment is kept low, to encourage close interaction between student and professor and to ensure close attention. Some of the other, "regular" University course offerings at all levels may have an Honors component. In such courses, Honors students fulfill the same requirements as other student in the class but perform certain additional independent work agreed on by student and professor. In all such courses, successful completion of the course or of its Honors component is indicated on the student's transcript. In addition to this course work, Honors students may participate in a number of special activities, seminars, projects, etc. Guest speakers, who are eminent specialists in their fields, address the Honors students from time to time. A special Honors Center, with its own small library and computer, is reserved for the use of Honors Students. Inquiries about the Honors Program may be made of the director, California University of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, (412) 938-4535. GENERAL INFORMATION 30 HONOR SOCIETIES Many units or departments of the University sponsor undergraduate (or graduate) honor societies that recognize high levels of academic accomplishment in particular fields of study. These societies meet regularly with specially assigned faculty advisers, to discuss matters of professional interest, to honor new inductees, to conduct research either independently or in cooperation with faculty members, to attend scholarly meetings, or to p~re students for graduate study or career opportunities. Some of these societies are described in further detail elsewhere in this catalog; fuller information on all of them may be obtained in the appropriate offices of the University. Alpha Mu Gamma (AMr) National Collegiate Foreign Language Honor Society Alpha Psi Omega (A 'tO) National Honorary Dramatics Fraternity Beta Beta Beta (BBB) National Honorary Biological Society Gamma Theta Upsilon (r0Y) National Honorary Geographical Society Epsilon Pi Tau (EIIT) International Honor Society in Industry and Technology Honor Society in Education Kappa Delta Pi (K.::lII) Lambda Alpha (AA) National Honorary Anthropology Fraternity Omicron Delta Epsilon (O.::lE) International Honor Society in Economics Pi Gamma Mu (IIrM) National Social Science Honor Society Pi Kappa Delta (JIU) National Honorary Forensic Fraternity Rho Phi Alpha (P~A) National Honorary Parks and Recreation Administration Fraternity Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE) National Honorary Earth Sciences Fraternity Sigma Pi Epsilon Delta (EIIE.::l) National Honorary Fraternity in Special Education Sigma Tau Delta (CT'.::l) National Honorary English Fraternity Phi Alpha (~A) Social Work Honorary Fraternity Phi Alpha Theta (~A0) International Honorary History Fraternity Chi Gamma Psi (Xr't) Honorary Fraternity in the Field of Science HONORS AT GRADUATION Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating class. A minimum of 64 earned credits at California University in a baccalaureate degree program is required to receive commencement honors. For the criteria for Commencement Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and Procedures of this catalog. SEMESTER HONORS Full-time students are awarded on the basis of grade-point average at the end of each semester. For the criteria for Semester Honors, see page 54 in the Academic Policies and Procedures portion of this catalog. GENERAL INFORMATION 31 HONORS CONVOCATION The University recognizes, encourages, and rewards academic excellence of master's, baccalaureate, and associate degree-seeking students by naming Presidential Scholars at an annual Honors Convocation in the Spring semester. This award is a unique distinction, separate and apart from Commencement Honors. A baccalaureate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have a cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 in a baccalaureate program and have completed 64 credits (if a junior) or 96 credits (if a senior), of which at least 30 must have been taken at this university (calculated beyond an earned associate degree or other first degree, if applicable, and in the present baccalaureate degree program). An associate degree-seeking student designated as a Presidential Scholar must have a cumulative G.P.A. of 3.25 at California and have completed 45 credits, all of which must have been taken at this University. Both full-time and part-time students may, if qualified, be named Presidential Scholars. At the Honors Convocation, presentations are made by honor societies, a Distinguished Graduate Award is presented to a graduate of the University, and distinguished faculty members are formally recognized. The convocation is followed by a reception at which certificates are presented to the Presidential Scholars by the deans of the divisions of the University. DISTINGUISHED SERVICE AWARD The Distinguished Service Award, a Student Government award, is granted to the most outstanding women and men of each graduating class. The awards are made on the basis of participation in activities, character, citiz.enship, leadership, and personality. The election of persons to receive the awards is made by a committee composed of students and administration. COOPERATIVE EDUCATION Cooperative Education allows students to be employed-whether in business, industry, government, or service organiz.ations-in paid positions directly related to their academic majors or career plans. Cooperative Education positions are pre-professional, monitored by faculty members, and coordinated by the University. Students may be employed part or full-time, and may choose to work during fall, spring and/or summer. Undergraduates as well as graduate students in all academic majors are encouraged to participate provided they meet the eligibility requirements. It is expected that the student's cooperative education experience(s) will span over two semesters or summers while enrolled at California. Cooperative Education positions are advertised through "Co-Opportunities," which is published every two weeks. Students who enroll in Cooperative Education are eligible to apply for advertised positions. Additional information and appointments with members of GENERAL INFORMATION 32 the Cooperative Education staff are available in the Placement and Career Services office in the Morgan Learning and Research Center. INTERNSHIPS Internships allow students to earn credit in their major fields of study while gaining practical experience in productive organizations-usually off campus. Such positions may nor may be salaried. Interns are usually in their junior or senior year, and approval must be obtained from the department chairperson or the campus supervisor of the internship program. Inquiries about internships should be made at departmental offices or at the deans' offices. THE NATIONAL STUDENT EXCHANGE (NSE) An Opportunity to Widen Your Educational Horizons Besides the educational opportunities offered on this campus, California University offers you the chance to attend another school in the NSE network at little or no more cost than you pay at California. This is an excellent chance to widen your educational horizons. In consultation with the campus NSE coordinator, academic advisor, family and friends, you select schools that will complement and supplement the course offerings at California University while fulfilling your own personal and academic goals. You can take advantage of the academic strengths of the other universities in the NSE program, for they have become extensions of our campus. California University's NSE coordinator, located in the Program Office, California Memorial Union, 938-4306, can tell you about the ease with which the process of exchange works and what will be required of you for participation. As you examine your own reasons for going to another school, you will see that they are similar to some of the wide variety of reasons expressed by the over 30,000 students who have been hosted at schools in the network since it began in 1968. Most students exchange for a combination of reasons, selecting schools that provide a particular academic interest or diversification along with the opportunity to live in a different geographical or cultural setting. California students return from exchange with new perspectives on their education and a better appreciation of their home region, family and campus. They frequently become more independent as learners, reflecting the self-reliance and self-confidence gained as a result of having taken a decisive role in planning their education and future and carrying through with those plans. They know more about their limitations and capabilities and develop an increased appreciation for the vast differences in ideas and value systems that exist in different geographic locations with different ethnic and racial groups. The following institutions are members of the NSE: Alabama State University University of Alabama University of Alaska, Anchorage University of Alaska, Fairbanks Northern Arizona University California California California California California State State State State State Polytechnic University, Pomona University, Bakersfield University, Dominguez Hills University, Fresno University, Northridge GENERAL INFORMATION California State University, San Bernardino Humboldt State University Sonoma State University Colorado State University Fort Lewia College University of Northern Colorado University of Southern Colorado Western State College of Colorado Eastern CoMecticut State University University of Delaware Florida International University University of South Florida Georgia State University University of Georgia University of Guam University of New Hampshire Rutgers College, Rutgers University Trenton State College William Paterson College of New Jersey Eastern New Mexico University New Mexico State University University of New Mexico Hunter College of the City University of New York SUNY Center at Stony Brook SUNY College at Buffalo SUNY College at Potsdam East Carolina University North Carolina State University University of North Carolina at Charlotte University of North Carolina at Wilmington Bowling Green State University Oklahoma State University Eastern Oregon State College Oregon State University Portland State University Southern Oregon State College University of Oregon East Stroudsburg University of PeMsylvania Indiana University of PeMsylvania University of Hawaii at Hilo University of Hawaii at Manoa Boise State University University of Idaho Illinois State University Northeastern Illinois University Indiana University-Purdue University at Fort Wayne University of Northern Iowa 33 Fort Hays State University Pittsburg State University Murray State University Grambling State University Louisiana State University University of Maine University of Maine at Farmington University of Southern Maine Towson State University University of Maryland at College Park University of Massachusetta at Amherst University of Massachusctta at Boston Oakland University Moorhead State University University of MiMesota, Twin Cities University of Missouri-Columbia Montana State University Southwest Missouri State University University of Montana University of Nebraska at Kearney University of Nevada, Las Vegas University of Nevada, Reno West Chester University of PeMsylvania University of Puerto Rico, Cayey University of Puerto Rico , Humacao University of Puerto Rico , Rio Piedras Rhode Island College University of Rhode Island College of Charleston South Carolina State College University of South Carolina Winthrop College Northern State University South Dakota State University University of South Dakota Memphis State University University of the Virgin Islands University of Utah Utah State University Virginia State University Central Washington University Western Washington University West Virginia University University of Wisconsin, Eau Claire University of Wisconsin, Green Bay University of Wisconsin, River Falls University of Wyoming 34 GENERAL INFORMATION VISITING STUDENT PROGRAM IN THE STATE SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION In addition to the National Student Exchange Program, students at California University may choose to enroll for a time at any of the other 13 institutions in the Pennsylvania State System of Higher Education; and similarly students from those 13 may enroll at California. These institutions are Bloomsburg, Cheyney, Clarion, East Stroudsburg, Edinboro, Indiana, Kutztown, Lock Haven, Mansfield, Millersville, Shippensberg, Slippery Rock, and West Chester Universities of Pennsylvania. The purposes of this program are to allow students at one institution to participate, for a limited period of time, in courses, programs or experiences not available at their home institution, without loss of institutional residency, eligibility for honors or athletics, or credits toward graduation; and to expand options available to students in such matters as student teaching , clinical experiences, internships, and international exchange programs. Fuller information may be obtained from the office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs. Catalogs of the participating institutions may be consulted in the offices of the college deans, or in Manderino Library. The procedures and standards for this Visiting Student program are as follows. (They apply equally to students in any of the 14 SSHE institutions.) 1. The student must have satisfactorily completed at least 27 credits at California, and be in good academic standing. 2. The student must obtain advance approval from California University to complete specified studies at a sister university under this program. Each university specifies the approval procedure for its own students' participation and for students from SSHE universities. 3. The student must present evidence of approval from California University and evidence of visiting university acceptance at time of registration at the sister university. 4. · A student may complete up to 18 credits in a single semester and up to 16 credits of summer work as a visiting student. 5. All credits and grades accrued at the sister university will be accepted in full by California University, and thereafter treated as California University credits and grades. 6. The student registers at, and pays tuition and fees to, the State System university visited. A student wishing to divide a courseload between two institutions during the same term registers and pays appropriate tuition and fees at both universities. OUTCOMES ASSESSMENT California University is in the process of implementing a broad program of outcomes assessment. This program will utilize information about incoming students as baseline data, follow the development of those students throughout their academic career and track them as alumni after graduation-in order to ensure and improve the quality of academic life and GENERAL INFORMATION 35 of the graduates of this university. Certain components of this are already in place, including sophomore and senior testing in the Department of Psychology, Admission to Teacher Education, and the use of the NTE for teacher certification. PLACEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES The primary purpose of Placement and Career Services (PCS) is to assist students in developing, evaluating, and effectively implementing appropriate career plans. Undergraduates, seniors, graduate students, and alumni may obtain general advice and information on career and job search strategies. On-campus interviews and informational sessions are scheduled for students interested in meeting with representatives from business firms, government agencies, industries, and school districts seeking candidates for employment. The "career center" houses career planning and company literature as well as information on current job opportunities. Students are encouraged to visit the PCS office in the Morgan Learning Research Center to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Schedule a session with the computeriz.ed guidance system . Use the career center, including videos, audiotapes, and computeriz.ed software resources. See a staff member about any career issues, including questions about graduate and professional school. Attend career workshops, job fairs, and special programs . Learn about alumni who will discuss their jobs . Investigate cooperative education job opportunities . Set up a credentials file . Make an appointment for a "mock" interview . See listings of full-time, part-time, and seasonal jobs . Pick up guides to resum6 writing and interviewing, and other handouts . Get the most up-to-date information on company recruiting visits . Sign up for campus interviews and information sessions . Learn what other services are available . VETERANS AFFAIRS The Office of Veterans Affairs, located in the Health Center (Ext. 4076/4077), is open from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Evening hours may be arranged by appointment. The director is Mr. Arthur Bakewell. All matters pertaining to veterans and those entitled to veterans' benefits are handled in this office. VA forms and enrollment certifications for all eligible students applying for benefits are processed here. All Veterans, Reservists, National Guard personnel, and eligible dependents applying for entrance to the University should contact the Veterans Affairs Office at an early date so that 36 GENERAL INFORMATION necessary VA paperwork can be processed to assure timely payments of educational benefits. Veterans are also advised to take advantage of the University's program to award college credits for military service schools. See page 80, on Admissions, in this catalog. The on-campus Veterans Club also has its office in the Health Center. The club sponsors the Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans Scholarship Fund. Two $1000 scholarships are currently awarded. See page 92 below for more information. INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS The University sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women. The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer. Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (RobinErsland); for women, basketball (Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully monitored. Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. The University has outstanding facilities for athletics. Adamson Football Stadium, a modem facility located at the George H. Roadman University Park, has spacious locker rooms and a training room. The stadium has a seating capacity of 4,500 and an excellent all-weather track. Also located at the University Park are seven tennis courts, a baseball diamond, a softball field, soccer fields, cross country course and several practice areas for varsity sports and intramural activities. Hamer Hall, located on the main campus, has three basketball courts, an Olympic-size swimming pool, a training room, a weight room, and a wrestling workout room. The building has a seating capacity of 3,600 for basketball games, and the natatorium can accommodate more than 250 spectators. Herron Hall, also located on the main campus, houses a full-service Recreation and Fitness Center including racquet ball courts, several exercise rooms, weight rooms, saunas, steam rooms, a whirlpool, and a swimming pool for students and staff at the University. The Student Activities fee permits students to make use of all these facilities when their use has not otherwise been scheduled. GENERAL INFORMATION 37 WOMEN'S CENTER The Women's Center in Clyde Hall is a service provided primarily for the female students of the University. However, the male students as well as community residents are welcome to participate in the activities of the center. The main goals of the Women's Center are to supplement the academic education of the students and prepare them to deal with barriers in life. The activities are designed to help students grow and develop an understanding of how women can impact the future. Options are highlighted that are available to women through special programs and individual counseling. Additionally, programs are provided to help students find creative ways to solve problems and manage the ever changing roles of women. The Center recognizes the needs of women and serves as a conduit to see that the needs are addressed. The services provided are advocacy counseling information, interest assessment, special events, and activities, support groups, workshops, special events and activities. Opportunities are available for students to serve on the Advisory Board of Directors, serve on special events committees, share ideas for programs and participate in the Mentoring Program. CAMPUS MINISTRY Spiritual development is an integral part of the process of education and of human growth. A Campus Ministry Office, with a staff of professional campus ministers, fosters the development of spiritual and religious student life. The Campus Ministry of California University of Pennsylvania is at present temporarily housed in the Herron Fitness Center, Room 313. Office hours are from 10:00 A.M. until 4:00 P.M. on weekdays while the University is in session. Campus ministers are on call twenty-four hours a day. Some of the services provided are worship, pastoral counseling, spiritual direction, information about local churches, and literature from participating faiths. The Campus Ministry sponsors or co-sponsors a variety of religious or service programs. Students and their families, faculty and staff of the university are welcome to come to the Campus Ministry Office at all times. They may also call the Campus Ministry at 9384573. Campus Ministry cooperates with Student Development and Services and with other university departments for the well-being of the students. The Catholic chaplains are funded by the Catholic Diocese of Pittsburgh. The Protestant chaplain is funded by the United Campus Ministry Council of California, who also place members of the Coalition for Christian Outreach. Although the chaplains are members of particular denominations, they serve all students, regardless of church affiliation. The chaplains will put students in touch with a priest, minister or rabbi of their chosen denominations. GENERAL INFORMATION 38 OFFICE OF DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS The Office of Development and External Relations assists with fund-raising, maintains relations with the alumni of the University, informs the public about the activities of the University, and develops programs and activities that promote understanding for and support of the University's goals. Through this office, the University provides information and services to alumni, governing boards, political groups, parents of students, employees, other colleges and universities, the business community and donors. It informs the public of the activities of students, alumni, professors, administrators, student organiz.ations and athletic teams. Both staff and volunteers working in this department assist in the three principal fundraising activities: an annual campaign of fund-raising, deferred or planned giving, and capital campaigning. ALUMNI ASSOCIATION The alumni of California University of Pennsylvania have been organized since 1939. This organization numbers more than 30,000 graduates and former students of the University. The Association advances the growth and development of the University through individual and group endeavor, fosters beneficial relationships among alumni, students, and the University, and encourages outstanding academic and extracurricular achievement by undergraduate and graduate students. There are a number of services available to alumni, including a quarterly publication, The California Review: use of the library and other University facilities; help from the Placement Office in locating a job; scholarships for students; and many social events, including Homecoming, Alumni Day and the many area chapter meetings of California alumni. The Office of Alumni Relations, located in Dixon Hall, is the center of alumni activity on campus. The office maintains the alumni records, assists in conducting the affairs of the Association, and serves as the communications center and clearing house for all alumni activities. Alumni are always welcome. CONFIDENTIALITY OF RECORDS The University's policies on the confidentiality and disclosure of student records are based on the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 (Public Law 93-380), as amended. /1 !11VN01 8f~~ -h_ft--tima- GENE. J iINFORMATION JltS-r 5AY f/Yf<_OLLfd I. Introduction ~ pub-liml 9 5-tw-,5 ~ Official student records are established and maintained in a number of administrative offices for a variety of legitimate educational purposes. In assuming responsibility for the reasonable protection of these student records, the University recognizes its obligation to comply with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974. Important sections of this federal law are summarized below. II. OwMrship of Records All records kept concerning students, including those records originating at other colleges or universities and required for admission, as the property of California University of Pennsylvania. III. Definition of a Student A student is defined as any person currently or previously matriculated on an official basis in any academic program of the University. IV. Public Infonnation Regarding Students 1. The following is classified as public and may be released without the prior consent of a student: a student's name, address (both local and permanent), telephone number, place and date of birth, academic curriculum, dates of attendance, date of graduation, degrees and awards received, most recent educational institution attended, participation in student activities (including athletics), and height and weight (for athletic teams). 2. Students may request that any or all of this information not be made public. Such requests must be submitted in writing to the Office of Academic Records or (in the case of graduate students) to the Dean of the School of Graduate Studies before the beginning of any academic term. V. Duclosure of Student Records 1. Upon proper identification, students my inspect their own official records in the presence of the administrator in charge of records. 2. After a request to inspect a record has been received, the request must be honored within a reasonable period of time: according to federal law, not to exceed 45 days. 3. Limitations on the Right of Access by Students The following materials are not subject to inspection by students: a) Confidential letters and statements of recommendation which were placed in the educational records before January 1, 1975. b) Financial records of the parents of the student, or any information contained therein. c) Medical, psychiatric or similar records that are used solely in connection with treatment. Such records can be reviewed by a physician or other appropriate professional of the student's choice. 4. Disclosure of Infonnation to Third Parties In most circumstances students have the right to withhold their records from external third parties requesting to inspect these records. Exceptions to this general principle are as follows: a) Disclosure of student information will be made to a third party if written consent is given by the student in question. b) Information concerning a student will be released if properly subpoenaed pursuant to a judicial proceeding. GENERAL INFORMATION 40 c) All necessary academic and/or financial records of students may be disclosed to the appropriate persons or agencies without a student's prior consent in connection with a student's application for, or receipt of, financial aid. d) Further limited disclosure of certain kinds of information may be required in special circumstances in compliance with the federal law previously cited. VI. Student Challenge to Record Entries 1. Students have the right to submit written or typed rebuttals to negative information contained in their files. A rebuttal statement shall become part of the file, and in cases where the negative information is reviewed by or transmitted to a third party, it must be accompanied by the student's statement of rebuttal. 2. Students may challenge the accuracy and/or appropriateness of material combined in their files. Once such a challenge has been made in writing, it will be the responsibility of the University official in charge of the file to determine the validity of the challenge, if possible. The University official shall make a written response to the challenge of the student, specifying the action taken. Should a factual error be found in any materials, the University official is authorix.ed to make the appropriate corrections. 3. If options 1 and 2 of this section are unsatisfactory, students may request a formal hearing to challenge inaccurate, misleading, or inappropriate information in their records. The University Record Hearing Committee shall conduct a hearing in accordance with the procedures outlined in Public Law 93-380, as amended. 4. The substantive judgment of a faculty member or administrator about a student's work, as expressed in grades and/or written evaluations, is not within the purview of this policy statement. Such challenges by students may be made through the regular administrative channels already in existence for such purposes. VII. Responsibility of University Officials 1. University officials in charge of student files are responsible for the reasonable care and protection of such files in accordance with University policy. This includes the responsibility for the release of confidential information only to authorix.ed persons. 2. A log sheet, indicating the inspection or release of a student's file, must be kept in the student's file. 3. University officials may classify student materials and records under their supervision as active or inactive as circumstances warrant. At the discretion of the University official in charge, inactive records may remain in the file but need not be circulated. these inactive records may be reviewed by a student upon request. 4. A University official may take the initiative in an attempt to purge unfavorable evaluations, or opinion records of a prejudicial nature, in a student's file. This may be done by returning the material to the person who submitted it or by requesting from the author that the material be destroyed. Vlll. University Officials Respomible for Student Records The following University officials are responsible for student records within their respective administrative areas: 1. The Vice-President for Academic Affairs 2. The Vice-President for Student Development and Services 3. The Vice-President for Administration and Finance GENERAL INFORMATION 41 These officers are responsible for the proper maintenance of all official student records under their jurisdiction in accordance with the policies of this statement and the relevant state and federal laws. If further information is required, a student should contact the appropriate University official with respect to the type of student records in question. UNIVERSITY PUBLIC SAFETY/SECURITY SERVICES The Department of Public Safety at California University of Pennsylvania is a fully recogniz.ed law enforcement agency as authoriz.ed by 71 P.S. §646, the Administrative Code of 1929 as amended and Title 18 of the Pennsylvania Consolidated Statutes, (Crime and Offenses) and 24 P.S. § 20-1006-A(14) 20-2010A (5) of the State System of Higher Education Act. The department consists of professionally trained individuals capable of responding to requests for assistance in routine and emergency situations. The department, a diverse group of police officers, communications, and secretarial staff, provides continuous 24 hour assistance to the University community. The staff includes a director, assistant night operations supervisor, two shift supervisors and ten additional commissioned police officers who have received training at the Pennsylvania State Police Academy. Three public safety communications officers and one departmental secretary contribute to the operation of the department. Public safety personnel are certified in the use of emergency medical airborne evacuation policy and procedure for transportation of the seriously ill or critically injured. Additional services offered to University students, faculty, and staff consist of parking and traffic management, criminal investigations, health, fire, and safety surveys, special event planning, accident investigation, and crime prevention information and presentations. Pursuant to the Pennsylvania College and University Security Act, and the Federal Crime Awareness and Campus Security Act of 1990, post-secondary institutions, including colleges and universities, must provide information with respect to campus crime statistics and security policies of the institution and prepare, publish and distribute to all applicants, students and employees, annually, information with respect to these areas. The information is compiled by California University, and made available through the Office of Admissions, the Office of Student Development, and the Office of Public Safety. 42 GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION ACADEMIC POLICIES AND PROCEDURES -Courses and Grading Procedures -Graduation Requirements -Earning a Second Degree -Transcripts -Academic Requirements -Withdrawals -Rea~ion 43 44 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES Students are responsible for securing current information about university policies and for meeting all relevant requirements as listed in this catalog. The university reserves the right to change policies, cu"iculum requirements, and other provisions as needed and at any time. Students are required to follow the provisions of the catalog that is in effect at the time of their initial enrollment. Students who have interrupted their education for more than one year are subject to the provisions of the current catalog. Faculty advisors are available to assist students in planning an academic program, but students have the responsibility for meeting all requirements for their degrees. Students are urged to take advantage of the advisory and consultation services available at the university. Students should feel free to consult with professors, academic advisors, department chairpersons, the deans, and the vice-president for academic affairs. All of these university representatives maintain regular office hours for student consultations. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 45 COURSES, ACADEMIC STANDING, GRADING SYSTEM, WITHDRAWALS FROM COURSES, ETC. Course Numbering System Courses numbered 100 to 499 are undergraduate courses. Courses numbered 500 and above are graduate level courses, but in certain circumstances, with the approval of the professor and in the senior year, students may be allowed to take some courses numbered in the 500's, for undergraduate credit. Courses are numbered in the following way: 100-199 Freshman level Sophomore level 200-299 Junior level 300-399 400-499 Senior level Generally, courses whose numbers end in 9 (such as 209 and 459) consist of independent study or individual tutoring. They require the consent of the professor and of the department, the dean, and the academic vice-president. Courses whose numbers have 8 or 9 in the middle (such as 481 and 491) are seminars or workshops. Some courses are sometimes offered as both undergraduate and graduate courses. Such "dual-listed" courses require additional work on the part of the graduate students but may be taken only for undergraduate credit by undergraduate students. Credits Credit for course work is recorded in credit hours. For most courses, one credit hour represents one class period a week for about fifteen weeks. For laboratory classes, the ratio may differ somewhat from one department to another, but usually two or three hours of laboratory work are worth one academic credit. A full-time student is one who is taking twelve or more credit hours. Therefore, a student taking fewer than twelve credits is considered a part-time student. In order to progress normally from one class to the next, a student should take an average of 32 semester hours a year, or 16 credits a semester. Attendance Regular class attendance is a prerequisite to successful class performance. University policy permits class absence for cause but places an obligation for successful completion of course work on the student. There is no single, university-wide policy on class attendance or on cuts; but professors may establish their particular policies on absences, assess reasonable penalties if students do not observe these policies, and treat unexplained absences as unexcused absences. The student must, in all cases, arrange to make up examinations ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 46 or other work missed because of absence, according to terms and a schedule agreeable to the prof~rs. It is the student's responsibility to inform professors of the cause of any absence - if possible, in advance. Students should notify their college Dean of lengthy absences due to illness or other causes; and appropriate documentation may be required in such cases. The Dean will in turn notify the professors concerned. Requests for absence due to official university activities, such as field trips or athletic contests, must be made by the appropriate university official. The Health Center does not medical excuses. Under certain circumstances (see pages 66-67 of this catalog) the Health Center will notify professors about students' absences (or other failure to fulfill academic obligations) due to medical conditions; on the basis of this notification, individual professors in turn will determine whether or not to excuse the absences. The temporary grade of Incomplete is not automatically awarded even if excused or explained absences have prevented completion of required work by the end of the semester. mue Residence Requirements Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty credits at California University to qualify for a degree. These credits may be taken in regular day or evening classes. Overload Students may register for 18 credits. Students who are doing student teaching in the College of Eduction and Human Services, however, may take additional courses only with the special approval of the dean of that college. Students wishing to register for 19 credits must obtain written permission from the dean of that College of the university in which they are enrolled. Students wishing to take 20 or more credits must receive written permission also from the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. However, only in exceptional circumstances is permission to register for 20 or more credits granted. A fee is charged for all credits in excess of 18. In the summer, for more than six credits for either of the five-week sessions or for more than 12 credits throughout the summer term, written permission must be obtained from the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. Because of the brevity of the summer session, registration for overload is discouraged. Grade Point Average To calculate a grade point average (GPA) divide the total number of grade points earned in regular courses at this university by the total number of credit hours attempted. For example, if a student has attempted a total of 60 credits, with 12 credits worth of A ( = 48 grade points), 24 of B ( = 72), 15 of C ( = 30), 6 of D ( =:= 6), and 3 of F ( = 0), that student would have a total of 156 grade points, or a GPA of 2.60. You do not take into account, in computing your GPA, the following: courses transferred from other institutions, advanced placement courses, courses passed by examination, courses in which a P grade was assigned, CLEP credits, or credits granted for military service. If you repeat a course, only the repeat grade is counted. If you fail a ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 47 course which is taken under the Pass/Fail option, a failing grade is, however, counted in the GPA; but no record of a failing grade is kept if you challenge a course by examination and fail that examination. Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100 - do not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine grade point average. (See page 78 of this catalog.) Good Academic Standing In order to remain in good academic standing, you must maintain a certain grade point average, depending on the class that you are in, as follows: Freshman 1.75 Sophomore 1. 85 Junior 1.95 Senior 2.00 Academic standing is based upon credits earned, not credits attempted. Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100 - do not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine good academic standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.) A student who does not achieve the proper GPA may be subject to either Academic Probation or Academic Dismissal, as presented below. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 48 GRADING SYSTEM Grade Grade Points Per Credit Hour Interpretation A Superior attainment 4 B Above average 3 C Average 2 D Below average; lowest passing grade 1 F Failure 0 AU ~ - Not calculated I Incomplete Not calculated IF An Incomplete for which the work was not completed within a calendar year; computed in the Grade Point Average and not removable from a student's academic record Not calculated p Passed Not calculated w Official withdrawal from the university within the first six weeks of a semester (not counted in the GPA) Not calculated - WP Withdrew passing after the first six weeks (not counted in the GPA) WF Withdrew after six weeks with a grade of D or F (counted in the GPA) wx Administrative withdrawal from the university (not counted in the GPA) Not calculated uw Unofficial withdrawal from a course which the student never attended or for which there is a verified registration error (not counted in the GPA) Not calculated Not calculated 0 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 49 CLASS ST ANDING The following credit hour ranges apply: Freshmen 1-31 credits earned Sophomores 32-63 credits earned Juniors 64-95 credits earned Seniors 96 or more credits earned These class designations are based on credits passed, not on credits attempted. Although developmental courses - ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099 , and EDE 100- do not count towards graduation, the credits earned in them are used to determine class standing. (See page 78 of this catalog.) Transfer credits may be counted only after an evaluation of official transcripts has been made by the appropriate dean. Incomplete Grades 1. The Incomplete is used when a professor is convinced the student can complete work or make up work which has been missed or is incomplete because of reasons acceptable to the professor. However, in all cases, the professor has the option of submitting a final grade based on work completed. The professor may refuse to accept late work. However, when appropriate explanation and documentation of an illness are given, professors will not penalize students if makeups are possible or if grading on work completed is reasonable. (See the sections on Class Attendance, page 45, and on the Health Services, page 67, in this catalog.) 2. An Incomplete (I) should be removed by special arrangement between the student and the professor within one calendar year after the receipt of the incomplete grade. (The student is not required to register for the course again.) 3. After the work has been completed, the professor will submit a Change of Grade form to the Academic Records Office. 4. After a lapse of one calendar year, the incomplete grade is converted to I-F. The I-F grade will be considered in the computation of the student's grade point average as an F grade. This I-F can be removed only when the course is repeated. 5. For a student who withdraws from the university immediately after incurring an I grade, if the Incomplete is not made up before one calendar year has passed, the Incomplete grade automatically becomes an I-F grade. Students who return to the university before a year has elapsed have nevertheless only one full year since the I was received to complete the work of the course. 6. If a student's name appears on a professor's grade roster in a course but that student never attended the class, no grade is assigned by the professor. In such cases, the grade of UW (unauthorized withdrawal) is assigned by the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. 7. Graduating seniors must resolve their Incomplete grades by the last day of classes of the term in which they intend to graduate. Otherwise, these Incompletes immediately become I-F's, and graduation may be correspondingly affected. I CJ y z rnd- f:Ju,yyU- -t-tLtGA ,I' ~ t? I .d )/J / .-vi , "--~ "' , v A - t& AC~ EM ~ P/F ~ PROCEDURES . ' In any course in ·ch the grading is either P or F and the professor records a grade of A, B, or C, the grade is recorded as P. If the grade is recorded as Dor F, the grade becomes an F. Grades of P are counted in the cumulative total of credits, but not in the student's grade point average. Grades of Fin such courses carry no positive credit and are figured into the grade point average. Repeating a Course You may repeat a course previously taken at this university. If you repeat a course, only the later grade (excluding grades of will be counted in your grade point average, although the original grade will remain on your transcript. n Withdrawal from Courses If you withdraw from a course before the end of the sixth week of a semester, no academic penalty is assessed. If you withdraw from a course after the end of the sixth week, however, your professor will report the grade you were earning when you withdrew, and it will become a permanent part of your academic record, as follows. If you were earning a grade of A, B, or C, a grade of WP will be recorded, and it will not affect your grade point average. If you were earning a D or F, a grade of WF will be recorded, and the credits will be used to compute your grade point average. WP and WF grades are also used if you withdraw from the university within a semester. You must officially withdraw from a course, using forms available at the Office of Academic Records. Ceasing to attend class does not constitute official withdrawal. Add/Drop Class schedules may be changed during the add/drop period using the schedule adjustment forms. All schedule changes are governed by the following regulations in the Office of Academic Records. 1. All schedule changes must be approved by the student's advisor and College dean, as necessary. 2. Courses may be added: during the first two days of a semester; during the first day of a summer term; or, for any class (such as an evening class) which has not yet met for the first time, during the first week of classes. 3. Students may drop courses without academic penalty (i.e., no grade assigned): during the first six weeks of a semester; before the end of the second week of a five-week summer term; or before the end of the fourth week of a ten-week summer term. 4. After the deadline for dropping a course without academic penalty, students who drop a course or courses officially will receive WP or WF grades. Each professor will assign the appropriate grade and the College Dean will translate A, B, and C grades to WP, and D and F grades to WF. 5. No student is permitted to drop a course: during the last three weeks of a semester; during the last two weeks of a five-week summer term; or during the last three weeks of a ten-week summer term. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 6. 51 Leaving a course without officially dropping it in the Office of Academic Records may result in the assignment of an F grade by the professor. If the professor does not assign a grade, the designation of UW (unauthoriz.ed withdrawal) will be assigned by the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. Grade Reports Within two weeks of the end of each semester or the summer sessions, a full grade report will be mailed to you at what you have recorded with the university as your permanent home address. For this reason, you should be certain the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services has your correct permanent address. In compliance with the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, such grade sent to you and not to your parents or guardian. reports A grade report will not be sent if your academic records have been sealed for failure to pay your university fees in full. are APPEALING A GRADE OR OTHER ACADEMIC DECISION In appealing a grade, a student should first contact the professor who issued that grade to discuss the reason for the grade. If the student is not satisfied with the professor's explanation, the student should then contact the professor's department chairperson. This latter contact must be in writing and must be filed with the chairperson within thirty university calendar days after the beginning of the subsequent fall or spring semester following the term in which the grade in question was given. f accord is not reached at the chairperson level, the student may then appeal to the College dean. The final source of appeal is the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. this final step should be taken only if there is no possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced that arbitrary and/or capricious standards were applied. In the case of other academic decisions, the student should follow the same appeal procedure insofar as possible. In matters relating to student conduct and discipline, the Vice-president for Student Development has authority to review appeals: see the section on University Conduct and Regulations, pages 70-71, in this catalog. In matters relating to financial aid, see the section on Financial Aid; in matters relating to teacher certification, see page 114 of this catalog. It must be understood that it is not the policy of the administration to change a grade duly assigned by a professor. It is the policy of the administration and the faculty to provide students with an opportunity to voice their concerns on all matters, including grades. COLLEGE LEVEL EQUIVALENCY PROGRAM (CLEP) The university offers the opportunity to earn undergraduate credit through the College Level Equivalency Program (CLEP), which has two testing categories, the General Examination and the Subject Examination. 52 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES The General Examination is a series of tests in five separate areas: English Composition, Natural Sciences, Mathematics, Humanities, and Social Sciences/History. A student may earn up to thirty credits by passing the appropriate tests in this area. The Subject Examination comprehensively tests a single subject, such as General Psychology, Statistics, etc. A student who passes one of these examinations is awarded credit for a comparable course at the university. The CLEP program is administered by the Office of Career Planning and Placement Services in the Leaming Research Center. There is a fee of $25.00 for evaluation of the CLEP results and recording the results on the student's transcripts. (The university no longer grants credits for Life Experience.) CREDITS BY EXAMINATION You may earn credit for certain courses by passing examinations in them. In order to do so, you must first obtain permission from the chairperson of the department that offers the course, and the Vice-president for Academic Affairs; you must register for the course and pay a fee separate from other tuition and registration fees . Only the grades of P (Pass) or F (Fail) will be recorded, and they will be further identified by the symbol CE. DEGREES: WHEN CONFERRED Degrees are conferred in May (at the end of the spring semester), in August (at the end of the summer session), and in December (at the end of the fall semester); but Commencement is now held only once a year, in May. Students who graduate in August or December may participate in the Commencement exercises of the following May, but their diplomas and official university transcripts record their date of graduation as of the month and year in which their degree was conferred. Certain programs that require study at participating off-campus institutions may not conclude their academic year until after the May Commencement. Students in these programs graduate in August and therefore do not participate in Commencement until the following May. A graduate of California University of Pennsylvania is a member of the class of that calendar year in which the degree was conferred. That is, if one graduated in May, August, or December of 1991, one is a member of the class of 1991. It is immaterial what year one may have attended Commencement. UNDERGRADUATE CREDIT FOR GRADUATE COURSE Undergraduate students who have completed their course work in their major and related fields may enroll in graduate courses for undergraduate credit if they meet the necessary requirements for those courses. Individual departments determine the prerequisites for each course. Graduate status may be a prerequisite for admission to some courses. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 53 GRADUATE CREDIT LOAD FOR SENIORS Undergraduates who are in their last term on campus and who are completing or have completed all the requirements for their undergraduate degree may enroll in graduate classes for graduate credit. They must fulfill all requirements for entrance into Graduate School (other than the undergraduate degree or teaching certification). Graduate credits that are used to fulfill undergraduate requirements may not also be used to fulfill requirements in a Master's program. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS Graduation requirements are the prerogative of the deans and their faculty. All requirements are subject to change as necessary and at any time. Students should become acquainted with the graduation requirements for their programs. Students are responsible for meeting all graduation requirements and for submitting the required forms on time. Compliance with the following general policies and procedures will help students prepare for graduation: 1. The period during which application for graduation must be made is posted throughout campus and printed in the Schedule of Classes and in the California Times. Students must apply for graduation in the appropriate dean's office by the deadline. Graduation will be delayed if this requirement is not met. 2. A minimum of 128 semester credits, including the satisfactory completion of all required courses, is necessary for graduation. Developmental courses - ENG 100 (English Language Skills), MAT 098 (Basic Mathematics), MAT 099 - (Introductory Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills) do not count towards graduation, though the credits earned in them are used to determine class standing, grade point average, and eligibility for cocurricular activities. 3. An overall grade point average of 2.5 is required in the Teacher Education cu"icula. An overall grade point average of 2. 0 is required in most cu"icula. Certain other curricula may require minimum grades in courses in a student's major. 4. In the College of Education and Human Services, candidates in teacher education programs must complete Student Teaching. 5. All bills must be paid in full before graduation can be approved. 6. Students in all curricula must complete a minimum of thirty credits of the last sixty credits at California University of Pennsylvania. 7. All credentials for graduation, including an application for a teaching certificate where appropriate and transcripts of credits from other institutions, must be submitted on time. Graduation will be delayed if a student's record is incomplete. 8. Attendance at the.Commencement exercises is appropriate, unless unusual circumstances warrant graduation in absentia. Permission to graduate in absentia is granted by the President of the university, or his designee. Candidates for graduation are required to ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 54 contact the President's Office, or his designee's office, and request permission to be excused from the Commencement ceremony. Honors at Graduation Commencement Honors are awarded to a limited number of students in the graduating class, according to the schedule below. A. minimum of 64 earned credits at California University in a baccalaureate degree program is required to receive commencement honors. Credits, grades, and quality points earned as part of a previously completed associate or first degree are not calculated for commencement honors designation. Highest Honors (Summa Cum Laude) 3. 75 to 4.0 High Honors (Magna Cum Laude) 3.50 to 3.74 Honors (Cum Laude) 3.25 to 3.49 Semester Honors (Dean's List) Full-time students are awarded honors (that is, placed on the Dean's List) on the basis of grade-point average at the end of each semester as follows: Highest honors 3.75 to 4.0 High honors 3.50 to 3.74 Honors 3.25 to 3.49 These semester honors correspond to the grade-point averages required for graduation with honors. REGISTRATION Specific instructions as to the conduct of each registration are announced to students in the California Times and in the separately published Schedules of Courses for the Fall, Spring, and Summer terms. 1. A student must be regularly admitted to the university before permission is granted to register. A written verification of official admission to the university is required for registration. 2. An official registration is contingent upon academic eligibility to register. (See: Probation; Dismissal.) If a registration has been completed in violation of this rule, it will be revoked. 3. Each student is required to register in person according to the registration schedule announced by the university. 4. Each student must comply with all registration procedures and complete the registration within the deadlines set by the university. 5. A registration is not complete until: a. All required registration materials have been properly completed and turned in on time. b. All university fees have been paid in full . Students who have preregistered but have had their schedules canceled for non-payment of fees may have their schedules reinstated before classes begin without payment of any further fee for late registration. Such reinstatement is contingent upon the payment of all fees. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 6. 55 However, if such students do not take advantage of this special period of reinstatement, they must register afresh, without guaranteed placement in the courses they originally chose, and are assessed a fee of $15.00 for late registration. Failure to register in the official manner may cause the registration to be canceled or the student billed for incorrect class registrations. DUAL MAJORS, SECOND MAJORS AND SECOND DEGREES California University grants the following degrees: B.A.; B.S.; B.S. in Education; B.S.N; and A.S. (All except the last are four-year, baccalaureate degrees.) These are referred to below as degree areas. A careful distinction must be drawn between the following different objectives and opportunities and between the means to achieve them: (1) a Dual Major; (2) a Second Major; and (3) a Second Degree. These opportunities, as explained below, are the only ones offered: the university will, for example, award only one degree from any degree area. None of these opportunities should be confused with any certification programs, such as those in Teacher Education. 1. More than one major: (a) A Dual Major is the pursuit of two separate baccalaureate majors simultaneously. These majors may be in a single department or two departments, and each must be recorded in the appropriate dean's office. Courses from one major area may be used to satisfy requirements in the other major. Both majors are recorded on the transcript, but all requirements for each major must be satisfied before the degree is conferred, and only one degree is conferred. (b) A Second Major may be pursued only (a) after the completion of a baccalaureate degree and (b) in the same degree area as a first major. It does not lead to a second degree. The prospective student must apply through the Office of Admissions, register the intention of pursuing a Second Major, and fulfill any of the requirements of that Second Major that have not yet been satisfied. 2. A Second Degree may be pursued by any student (a) who has previously earned an associate or baccalaureate degree from any regionally accredited institution (including California University) or (b) who is currently pursuing a degree at California University. The second degree must be in a different degree area from the degree already earned or being pursued. A student who is not currently in a degree program at California University must apply for the second degree program through the Office of Admissions. Transfer credits from other institutions and prior credits from California University of Pennsylvania may be used to satisfy requirements for the Second Degree. A 56 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES minimum of 30 credits must be taken in the Second Degree program by transfer students. A minimum of 158 credits must be accumulated whether the degrees are earned simultaneously or consecutively. All departmental, college, and university requirements for the Second Degree must be satisfied. The transcript records the Second Degree and the date of its completion. (The University will not award an associate degree to a student who holds a baccalaureate degree in the same area.) Transcripts are issued by the Office of Academic Records, Room 103 in the Administration Building. Each transcript costs $2.00, and payment must be received before the transcript is issued. Checks and money orders should be made payable to California University of Pennsylvania. All transcripts are issued according to the provisions of the Family Education Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 as amended: see also the section on Confidentiality of Records on pages 38-41 of this catalog. A request for a transcript must be made in writing, to ensure that academic information is not improperly disclosed. Telephone requests for transcripts cannot be honored. The request may be made by completing a form in the Office of Academic Records or by writing a letter to that office indicating (a) the number of transcripts required, (b) the type of transcripts required (i.e., undergraduate, graduate, or both), and (c) the name and address of the person or institution that the transcript should be sent to. (Transcripts are issued to a third party on condition that the recipient will not permit any other party to have access to them without the written consent of the student.) If a transcript is issued to a student, a notation to that effect appears on the transcript. Transcripts marked in this manner are sometimes not considered "official" when presented to a third party by the student. Transcripts are issued as quickly as possible, but in busy periods of the academic year there is necessarily some delay. Requests should therefore be made well before the transcript is due elsewhere. No transcript will be issued to a student whose financial obligations to the university have not been met in full. TRANSFER CREDITS If you are a transfer student who has previously attended another college or university and you are now applying for admission to California University of Pennsylvania, you may receive credit for that work as explained in the section of this catalog dealing with Application and Admissions. If you are already a student here and wish to take a course at some other college or university, you should get approval to do so from your advisor and from the dean of your college at California University before you register for and take that course. To transfer credits to California University: 1. Take courses that can be used to satisfy university or major requirements. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 57 Be sure to compare college catalog descriptions. Transfer credits are usually determined by their equivalency to California University courses. Only courses in which a grade of C or better is earned will transfer. Remember, credits transfer, but grades do not. Transfer credits cannot raise a quality point average; therefore, do not take repeat courses at another institution. Courses taken at a community college, the equivalents of which are designated as upper-level courses at California, do not transfer. To be certain of transferability, complete the appropriate transfer form, which may be obtained from the office of your dean. / f-n✓ '1,,,,,, ,,J, ~{/--IU~t'-u/. A freshman carrying fewer th ve er its is su ,fectTo o ast1c action at the end of the term in which the total num credits attempted reaches or exceeds twelve. Probationary action applies to upperclass students (excluding freshmen with fewer than twelve credits) regardless of the number of credits scheduled in the term. This rule also applies to part-time students. A student who fails to meet the minimum cumulative grade point average for the appropriate class category is placed on academic probation. See page 47 above, Good Academic Standing. Transfer credits that have been officially accepted are counted in determining the student's proper class category. At the end of a probationary semester that classification will be removed if the student achieves the required minimum cumulative grade point average for the appropriate class category. A student may be extended on continued probation beyond a single semester with a cumulative grade point average below the required minimum, provided that the grade point average for the probationary semester is at least 2.00. Before registering for a new term, students on extended probation must have their schedules approved by the dean of the College of the university in which they are enrolled. CHEATING AND PLAGIARISM Truth and honesty are the subjects and the necessary prerequisites for all education. Consequently, students who attempt to improve their grades or class standing by cheating on examinations or plagiarism on papers may be penalized by disciplinary action ranging from a verbal reprimand to a failing grade in the course. If the situation appears to merit a more severe penalty, the professor may refer the matter to the appropriate dean or to the Vice-president for Academic Affairs, with a request for more formal disciplinary action by the university's Discipline Committee, which may result in suspension or expulsion from the university. 58 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES DISMISSAL FOR ACADEMIC REASONS The university reserves the right to refuse the privilege of further attendance to students who have failed to meet the minimum scholarship requirements. See the sections above on Good Academic Standing, page 47, and Probation, page 57, of this catalog. If a student's cumulative grade point average remains below the required minimum after a probationary term, and the term grade point average is below 2.00, that student will be dismissed for at least one semester. To apply for readmission after academic dismissal, see Readmission, below, page 60. WITHDRAW AL FROM THE UNIVERSITY A student who decides to withdraw from the university during any academic term, regardless of the reason, is required to report to the Office of Academic Records and obtain withdrawal forms. After the completion of a withdrawal interview the student must obtain a clearance form from several offices of the university, including the Business Office. Upon receipt of the clearance form and review of the student's records and status, the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services will certify as to the type of withdrawal. If a withdrawal cannot be arranged in this way, the student must notify the Office of Academic Records by telephone or by letter immediately. All withdrawals are governed by the following regulations: 1. An honorable dismissal is granted to a student who withdraws from the university in the official manner, bas met all financial obligations to the university, and bas been properly cleared by the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. 2. If the student withdraws officially, a W grade is recorded for each course scheduled. AW grade carries no academic penalty and is not counted in the student's grade point average. For an official withdrawal from a five-week session, W grades will be recorded during the first two weeks only. 3. After the sixth week of the semester, a student who makes an official withdrawal receives WP or WF grades in all courses scheduled. Professors assign A, B, C, D, or F grades, and the Dean assigns WP grades to A, B,and C, and WF to Dor F grades. For five-week courses the WP-WF grades are assigned after the end of the second week. 4. No student is permitted to withdraw officially from the university during the last three weeks of a semester or summer term. 5. Leaving the university without notifying the Office of Academic Records and making an official withdrawal may result in automatic failure for all courses scheduled. It also makes the student ineligible for any refund of fees, and may affect academic status and/or financial aid. Improper withdrawals of this type will be classified as "unauthorized withdrawal" and the designation "UW" used for all registered courses if another grade bas not already been assigned by the professor. ACADEMIC PROCEDURES 59 WITIIDRAWALS: ADMINISTRATIVE Administrative withdrawals of students are initiated by university officials for compelling reasons given below. All such withdrawals are governed by the following regulations and procedures. The university administration has the authority to withdraw a student from the university and to revoke that student's registration at any time for the following reasons: 1. Registration in violation of university regulations (e.g., academic ineligibility to register). 2. Failure of the student to comply with academic requirements (e.g., unsatisfactory class attendance). 3. Failure to pay university fees by the deadline. 4. Disciplinary suspension (or dismissal) for the remainder of an academic term or indefinitely. 5. Severe psychological or health problems such that the student cannot be permitted to continue in attendance. 6. Other reasons deemed appropriate by the proper administrative officer. Except for academic ineligibility, the date of the administrative withdrawal is used to determine the amount of fees to be assessed or canceled. (In most cases, the regular fee assessment and refund policies of the university prevail.) If a student registers in violation of the academic eligibility rule, the registration is declared invalid and the fees paid by the student are refunded in full. No grades are recorded. Policy for recording grades: For administrative withdrawals during the first six weeks of a semester (or two weeks in a five-week summer session), the grading symbol WX is recorded for all courses on the student's schedule. No other grades, including Incompletes, will be assigned. After six weeks (or after two weeks in a summer session), the date of the administrative withdrawal and the reason for the withdrawal are considered in assigning grades. 1. For disciplinary suspension or dismissal, only WP or WF grades are recorded. 2. For psychological ~r health reasons, WX or I (Incomplete) grades are assigned. (Professors must consent to assigning Incompletes; otherwise, WX grades are recorded.) 3. For failure to pay fees, only WX grades are recorded. 4. The WX grade is not computed in the student's grade point average and therefore carries no academic penalty. 5. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services has the authority to backdate an administrative withdrawal if circumstances warrant such action. 6. Disciplinary suspensions or dismissal during a term is initiated by an appropriate authority in the Student Development Office and written notification is sent to the Office of Academic Records. The Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services then cancels the student's registration, notifies other administrative offices on a "need to know" basis, and informs the faculty members involved of the action taken. 60 ACADEMIC PROCEDURES READMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY Students who wish to return to the university after an absence of three consecutive terms must apply for readmission to the office of the dean of the undergraduate college-Education and Human Services, Liberal Arts, or Science and Technology-in which they were last enrolled. Students who wish to change their major to a different curriculum in a different College of the university from that in which they were formerly enrolled must first be reacimitted to the College in which they were formerly enrolled. Student who have been dismissed for unsatisfactory academic performance will be considered for readmission only if they have satisfied the conditions for readmission that were stipulated at the time of their dismissal. Usually , students are not considered for readmission for a minimum of one semester. In the case of suspensions or dismissals for disciplinary reasons , students must (a) satisfy the conditions for readmission that were stipulated at the time of their dismissal, and (b) receive permission from the Vice-president of Student Development to return to the university. In all cases, applications for readmission should be submitted at least one month before the registration date for the term in which the student desires to enroll. If a readmission involves a change of curriculum, the student must apply to the Dean of that college of the university responsible for the new major. No former student can be readmitted to the university until all past indebtedness bas been paid. 61 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES -The Student Association, Inc. -Student Congress -Residence Halls -Fraternities and Sororities -Intercollegiate Athletics -Health and Counseling Services -Services for the Disabled -Student Conduct 62 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES Inherent in the university's mission is a commitment to the total development of all students. The Office of Student Development, under the direction of the Vice-President for Student Development and Services, is administratively responsible for the implementation of this commitment. The central focus of the Student Development program, therefore, is the personalii.ation of the university experience, with concern for not only individual intellectual development but for personal, social, and physical development as well. Many of the services and opportunities provided by Student Development are described in other places in this catalog, especially in the section on General Information. For additional information and regulations governing student life and conduct besides what is given below, students should refer to the current edition of the Student Handbook. Student Development provides services to students in the following areas: Athletics Minority Affairs Commuter Center Recreation Counseling Center Residence Hall Programming Dining Services Student Association, Inc. Disabled Services Student Government Student/Parent Orientation Discipline Drug/Alcohol Program (CHOICES) Summer Camps Fitness Veterans Affairs Health Center Wellness/ Awareness Women's Center Housing International Students The principal administrative personnel responsible for the Student Development Program are: Vice President for Student Development and Services Dean of Students Dean for Student Services Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer Associate Dean for Residence Life Associate Dean for Housing/Conferences Director, University Dining Services Assistant Dean for Student Services Associate Dean for Student Support Services/Social Equity Officer Director, Center for Student Growth and Development Director of Counseling Center Coordinator, International Education Coordinator, Veterans Affairs Director, Drug and Alcohol Program (CHOICES) Director of the Student Association, Inc. Business Manager of the Student Association, Inc. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 63 Director of Health Services Director of Athletics STUDENT ASSOCIATION, INC. The Student Association, Inc. (SAi) is a non-profit corporation financed in part by the Student Association fee, which is paid each term by every student. The Executive Director is a university employee, who directs the affairs of SAi, and serves as the liaison between SAi and the university. Programs provided by the Student Association are determined by the Student Congress and the Student Association Board of Directors. Student Association fees are collected, budgeted, appropriated, disbursed and accounted for by SAi with the concurrence of the president of the university. SAi coordinates the co-curricular activities provided by the university, including Homecoming, the University Park, concerts, plays, musical production, movies, outdoor recreation, the Herron Recreation and Fitness Center, dances, picnics, TV Channel 29, WVCS Radio, and other special events. Intercollegiate athletics are also funded by SAi. In addition SAi coordinates the activities of student clubs and organiz.ations. The Student Handbook provides a complete listing of active student clubs and organiz.ations. Publications coordinated by SAi include a monthly calendar of events, The Student Handbook, an organiz.ational handbook, The California Times (the student newspaper), and a number of informative brochures. SAi is responsible for the development and maintenance of the George H. Roadman University Park, an 87 acre area located one mile from California on Route 88 South. Facilities include tennis courts, practice football, baseball, soccer, rugby, and intramural fields, picnic areas, and Adamson Stadium. STUDENT CONGRESS Student Congress is the official student governing body. It represents and serves the entire student population. It provides for a student forum, establishes channels for the communication of students' concerns to the proper administrative and faculty personnel, implements programs and activities that enrich campus-life, and creates opportunities for students to exercise and to develop leadership skills. HOUSING California University of Pennsylvania provides residence hall accommodations for approximately 1500 students in six separate residence facilities. Women's residence halls are Clyde and Stanley Halls, Men's residence halls are Johnson, Longanecker and McCloskey Halls. Men and women are accommodated on separate floors of Binns Hall. 64 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES The university does not supervise or maintain any off-campus housing. Lists of offcampus housing are available, through the Commuter Center, but the housing office does not approve or disapprove of such housing. Students are urged to take necessary precaution in seeking off-campus housing. As a campus or town resident each student is extended courtesies and services extended to all residents of the Borough of California. Students in tum are expected to adhere to all ordinances and regulations enacted by the borough, and violations will be treated accordingly. Questions regarding off-campus housing should be directed to the Assistant Dean for Student Services, Room 134, Memorial Union building, (412) 938-4021. Application for Housing Freshman students are urged to live in the university residence halls provided space is available. Freshmen and transfers who indicate the need for on-campus housing receive the appropriate application forms with their acceptance letter. On-campus housing is at a premium at California University and there are a limited number of spaces available. Students are encouraged to apply no later than May 1. Upper-class students should contact the Housing Office, California Memorial Union, California University of Pennsylvania, California, PA 15419, if they wish on-campus residence hall accommodations. A limited number of spaces is reserved for returning residents each fall, and specific instructions for securing a space are distributed in the halls each March. If students meet required deadline submission dates, housing will be provided. The university retains the right to assign all students to certain residence halls, floors and roommates in the best interests of the university. Housing contracts are for one academic year, September through May. This contract commits the student to university housing for both the Fall and Spring semesters. Contracting for a room for an academic year or Spring semester does not guarantee that housing will be provided in subsequent years. Room Deposit An advance room deposit of $100.00 is required with the contract in order to reserve a room for the following academic year. The deposit is held in the student's account and applied toward the Spring semester. First-year students who wish to reside in a residence hall will receive a housing contract with their Admissions Packet provided space is available. The contract and card must be signed and returned to the Revenue Office, California University of Pennsylvania, with the $100.00 deposit. Up~r-class students are also required to pay the $100.00 room deposit. They may obtain specific instructions on obtaining a housing contract from the Director of Housing, Student Development Office, Student Union. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts are posted for each academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or total forfeiture of the deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for that semester's room and board charges. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 65 RESIDENCE LIFE Each university residence hall is supervised by a staff that is headed by a residence hall director. California University employs five full-time residence hall directors who live in the residence halls. These professionals are readily available to students who may request direction or assistance. The residence hall director, with the assistance of graduate assistants and undergraduate resident assistants, has charge of the residence facility including programming activities. A detailed description of the university's Residence Life Program, residence facilities, and residence hall rules and regulations is included in the Residence Hall Handbook. EVENING TUTORING PROGRAM In cooperation with the Academic Services department, an evening tutoring program is based in two of the residence halls. This program is available to all students. A detailed schedule of evening tutoring sites and hours is posted throughout the campus each semester. The residence hall directors and their staff provide assistance in selection of and scheduling appropriate tutors. DINING SERVICES California University offers a dining services program which allows students to choose the time, place and service they prefer. All who reside in a university residence hall are required to accept assignment to the board program. The program entitles students to 14 meals per week at the various dining facilities, as well as a $100 per term Flex Fund Account. Off-campus and commuter students may enroll for the 14-meal board plan or one of the other meal plans available for non-resident students. The assignment is for one full semester and may not be terminated. Flex dollars are included in each plan and are nonrefundable other than upon complete withdrawal from the university during the term. Specific questions and a detailed brochure may be obtained from the Director of University Dining Services, Student Union Building, 938-4443. INTERCOLLEGIATE ATIIl..ETICS The university sponsors a comprehensive athletic program for both men and women. The athletic program is regulated by the policies of the Athletic Council and administered by the Director of Athletics, Dr. Tom Pucci. It is governed by the Office of Student Development with the Dean of Students as the senior administrative officer. Fourteen varsity sports are available to students: for men, baseball (coached by Chuck Gismondi), basketball (Jim Boone), cross-country, football (Jeff Petrucci), soccer (Dennis Laskey), track and field (Jack Henck), and wrestling (Robin Ersland); for women, basketball 66 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES (Paul Flores), cross-country, softball (Linda Kalafatis), tennis (Richard Saccani), track and field (Jack Henck), volleyball (Jing Pu) and soccer (Dennis Laskey). There are numerous assistant coaches and graduate assistants. The training staff includes the members of the Department of Sports Medicine. Academic progress of varsity athletes is carefully monitored. Students who desire to participate in intercollegiate athletics must meet the academic standards of California University, PSAC, ECAC, and NCAA. Specific requirements may be obtained from California University's Athletic Director, the Chairperson of the Athletic Council, or the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. SOCIAL FRATERNITIES AND SORORITIES Local fraternities and sororities function under the control of their respective councils, the Interfraternity Council and the Panhellenic Council. These organizations are subject to university authority and regulations. The following social fraternities and sororities are represented at California: FRATERNITIES Alpha Kappa Lambda Alpha Phi Alpha Delta Chi Delta Sigma Phi Kappa Alpha Psi Phi Beta Sigma Phi Kappa Theta Phi Mu Delta Phi Kappa Sigma Omega Psi Phi Sigma Tau Gamma Theta Xi Acacia AKr A4>A "1X "1E4> KA't 4>BE 4>K0 4>M"1 4>KE Oi'4> SORORITIES Alpha Kappa Alpha Alpha Sigma Tau Delta Sigma Theta Delta Zeta Sigma Kappa Sigma Sigma Sigma AKA AET "1E8 "1Z EK EEE ETr ex HEALm SERVICES The mission of the University Health Services is to provide high quality health care for our students; to direct our students to other health care providers when appropriate; to provide emergency care for all members of the university community; to promote the holistic concept of a healthful life for the university community; to address the specific health needs of those members of the student population with special problems; and to conceive, develop and implement relevant health education programs for the university community. The Downey-Garofalo Health Center is open 24 hours a day, seven days a week while the university is in session. A staff of full-time registered nurses is on duty at all hours. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 67 A qualified physician is on duty for four hours a day, Monday through Friday, during specified hours. University health services are available to all registered undergraduate and graduate students. Employees, both faculty and staff, conference participants, visiting athletes and other visitors will be given emergency treatment if such an emergency occurs on the university campus. For the most part, the Health Center is an out-patient facility. However, from time to time, emergencies may be accommodated overnight. In some cases, short-time confinement of students coming from homes located a great distance from the university is also approved. The university physician will determine when a student should return home for treatment and recovery. He will also refer students to local hospitals in emergencies and for other treatment beyond the capabilities of the Health Center. In cases of emergency, Mon Valley Hospital will generally be used for primary care. The final decision in hospital selection is the student's. MEDICAL ABSENCES Students unable to attend classes because of illness should contact their professors, explain their absences, and arrange completion of any work that may have been missed. The Health Center does not ~ue medical exc~, but will send written notification to professors only in the following circumstances, provided that the student must initiate the request: (1) If a student consults a health care professional at the Health Center, and the health care professional determines that the student has or had sufficient medical reason not to attend class (or to fulfill other academic obligations), notification will be sent to the student's professors but only if the student makes a request at that time. (2) If a student has consulted a private physician, who has determined that the student has or had sufficient medical reason not to attend class (or to fulfil other academic obligations), and the physician notifies the Health Center to that effect in writing, notification to this effect will be sent to the student's professors. (3) If a student is confined for longer treatment or care at the infirmary section of the Health Center, verification of the confinement will be sent to the student's professors. If a student is hospitalized elsewhere or requires extended recovery with bed rest, written notification should be sent from the attending physician to the Health Center, which will notify the student's professors. Upon notification from the Health Center or any other health care professional, the professor may decide whether to consider the notification as a valid excuse from class or other academic obligations. A professor may call the Nurse Supervisor of the Health Center for verification of a student's visit, but a visit can be verified only if a student was actually seen by a health professional. The delivery of high quality health care is the heart of the Health Center. Our personal convictions and our legal obligations insure that all areas of the Health Center are under strict rules of confidentiality. Medical information will be released by your written consent, 68 STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES by a properly executed subpoena, and to appropriate university offices in an emergency if knowledge of the information is necessary to protect ·the health and safety of the student and other individuals. COUNSELING AND PSYCHOLOGICAL SERVICES The Counseling Center staff provides personal, social, psychological and career choice services to students with problems that interfere with their adjustment and effective educational performance while at the university. If you are having trouble understanding your feelings, maintaining satisfactory social and interpersonal relationships, or coping with academic demands, it may be beneficial to see a counselor, social worker or psychologist at the Counseling Center. You can call the Center at 938-4191, or contact the receptionist in the Center's office in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center for an appointment with a licensed psychologist, or counselor. You can make the appointment yourself or be referred by a professor, fellow student, staff person or management personnel. You can talk to a counselor in private with assurance that the discussion will remain confidential. Most appointments are of an individual nature, but special interest groups can be organized. The special interest groups may meet on a weekly basis dealing with stress, test anxiety, self-disclosure, interpersonal relationships. parents, occupational choice, depression, sex or other topics of interest to all members in the group. In addition, interest, intelligence, aptitude and personality tests and questionnaires may be used to gather more information about yourself. Through counseling you will learn how to interpret this information and make better choices in university life. The professional counselors have extended their services by developing a strong referral system locally on campus and off campus. Referrals can be made to any department or office on campus for financial aid, student work-study programs, tutoring, academic advising, and other matters. Further, there is a close liai&<>n with the Student Development Office, residence directors in the residence halls, the Health Center, the Speech and Hearing Clinic, the Rehabilitation Office, the Veterans Affairs Office, the Women's Center, the Campus Ministry, and other divisions of the university. A formal agreement has been entered into by and between Southwestern Pennsylvania Human Services, INC. (SPHS) and California University of Pennsylvania to provide diversified counseling services. Under this agreement SPHS and its affiliated corporations provide certain rehabilitative and therapeutic treatment services to students and employees of California University upon referral to the agencies by the university, its agents and associates or the students or employees themselves. These services include drug and alcohol assessment and treatment, mental health services, and primary health care services. Also, other health and social services which are requested by the university and are within the scope of SPHS and its affiliates may be provided. For further information on the drug and alcohol program on campus, see the section on CHOICES on the page following. Please call 938-4191 or drop in at the Health Center. Office hours: 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. daily, Monday through Friday. Weekend and evening sessions are by appointment. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 69 CHOICES CHOICES is the drug and alcohol education and prevention program on campus. Its office is in the Downey-Garofalo Health Center. It is one approach by California University of Pennsylvania to provide a drug free community. CHOICES provides programs for the University and surrounding communities aimed at increasing awareness of alcohol and drug related issues. These programs include consultation, counseling, education, selfdevelopment, substance-free activities, and support groups for co-dependency and Adult Children of Alcoholics. CHOICES is made up of three primary components: the Consortium, BACCHUS, and the Assessment and Intervention Program. Each of these is an integral member of the program's development and expansion within the campus community. The Consortium is a combined effort by California and eight neighboring universities to provide a forum for discussion of relevant and current issues in drug and alcohol prevention and education as well as the sharing of developmental programming ideas. The Consortium offers both our campus and other universities access to a resource library consisting of videos, books, pamphlets, and other information related to drug and alcohol use and abuse. BACCHUS (Boost Alcohol Consciousness Concerning the Health of University Students) is a student organization developed under the guidance of advisors from the office. BACCHUS strives to help individuals explore their attitudes and behavior regarding alcohol and drug use. BACCHUS is an educational component focusing on self-responsibility and conscientious decision making. The final element in the programming is the Assessment and Intervention component. This program is designed to assist those whose behavior may be harmful to themselves or others because of alcohol or drug abuse. Through this program offers an opportunity for students to learn facts and to dispel myths concerning the use of alcohol and other drugs. Through group interaction activities students gain a sense of self and the impact their actions have on others. CHOICES knows that decisions about life can be tough at times. Learning about alcohol and other drug related issues may help you make positive and responsible choices. SERVICES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES Disabled students are provided an equal opportunity to participate in student services and activities conducted by this university. No qualified disabled student is, on the basis of disability, excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, and or otherwise subjected to discrimination under any academic, research, occupational training, housing, health, insurance, counseling, financial aid, physical education, athletics, recreation, transportation, other extracurricular, or other post-secondary program or activity offered or sponsored by this university. University programs and facilities are accessible to the disabled, and special needs of disabled students are recognired. The Disabled Student Service Office in Room 114, Clyde STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 70 Hall, provides individualired assistance to those in need. Information on disabled students services may be obtained through the Coordinator, Services for Student with Disabilities. Students in need of attendant services should contact the coordinator at the earliest practicable date. Learning Disabled Students On the special program - CARE - for learning disabled students, see pages 26-28 in this catalog. Parking for Disabled Students Numerous parking spaces have been reserved for the exclusive use of disabled persons who have mobility or other physical problems. These spaces are reserved for such use at all times. Disabled persons who require special parking privileges must apply for a special temporary /permanent parking permit at the Office of Public Safety. STUDENT REGULATIONS Students are adults and are expected to take personal responsibility for their own conduct. The university will react appropriately to incidents as they occur off campus. 1. The possession or use of alcoholic beverages or drugs on university property is prohibited. Students are reminded that Pennsylvania law prohibits the use or possession of alcoholic beverages by those under twenty-one years of age. See the section on alcohol and drug use - CHOICES - on page 69 of this catalog. 2. Gambling in any form is prohibited on campus and in university owned and supervised buildings. 3. Matriculation and identification cards are for personal use only. They are valid only for the term in which the student is enrolled. Falsification of these cards or the transfer of one to another person is strictly prohibited. These restrictions also apply to dining hall cards. 4. Students and student organiutions are not permitted to make any purchases in the name of the university or the Student Association, Inc., without written authoriution of the proper officers. Those who fail to comply with this regulation are personally liable for payment of those items purchased. 5. Men and women students may not visit each other in their residence hall rooms except during hours when visitation is permitted. Visitation hours are posted in each residence hall. Any exception to these hours must be authorired by the residence hall director. 6. The possession or use of firearms, firecrackers, or other explosives on campus or in student living quarters is prohibited. 7. Tampering with fire equipment and setting off a false alarm are prohibited. 8. Unlawful entry to any university building and the theft or destruction of any university property are prohibited. 9. Students who participate in any demonstration which is disorderly, riotous, destructive and disruptive are subject to legal action by the Commonwealth, the local government, and the university. Disciplinary action may also be taken by the university. STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES 71 10. A notice requesting a student to report to a professor or an administrative official has priority over any other activity and requires compliance on the date, day and time indicated. Should a conflict arise, the student must contact the professor or administrative official before that date, day and time indicated to arrange rescheduling of the conference. 11. Any person on university premises or in buildings supervised by the university is required to produce identification upon the request of a professor, administrative official, or employee of the Campus Safety force. 12. Any student who possesses, sells or uses any drug or medicine including narcotics, the issuance of which is not controlled by prescription, is subject to disciplinary action by the university and legal action by the civil authorities. 13. The university has a strict policy concerning solicitation by groups or individuals on campus. Permission must be obtained from the Vice-President for Student Development for any group or individual to sell items on campus. 14. THE UNIVERSITY WILL TOLERATE NO VIOLATION OF THE FOLLOWING HAZING REGULATIONS. The term hazing shall include, but not be limited to, any brutality of a physical nature, such as whipping, beating, branding, forced calisthenics, exposure to the elements, forced consumption of any food, liquor, drug or other substance, or any other forced physical activity which could adversely affect the physical health and safety of the individual, and shall include any activity which would subject the individual to extreme mental contact, forced conduct which could result in extreme embarrassment, or any other forced activity which could adversely affect the mental health or dignity of the individual. Willingness of an individual to participate does not relieve an organization of responsibility for the act. The university has the following options in cases where groups or individuals are found guilty of hazing: fines, withholding of diplomas or transcripts, probation, suspension, or dismissal. 72 73 APPLICATION AND ADMISSION 74 APPLICATION AND ADMISSION APPLICATION AND ADMISSION Requests for applications and all correspondence concerning admissions should be directed to the Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services. Applicants are encouraged to write or call for an appointment to visit the University. The address of the Admissions Office is 250 University Avenue, California, PA, 15419-1394; the telephone number is (412) 938-4404. All applications are individually evaluated. As soon as applications are complete, a decision is reached and applicants notified. Every attempt is made to complete this process within two weeks. GENERAL ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS Admission standards have been established by the University to select those students who will be most likely to succeed in the various programs of the University. 1. General Scholarship. An applicant for admission must be a graduate of an approved or accredited secondary school or have an equivalent preparation as determined by any state's Department of Education. 2. Aptitude and Ability Standards. An ability to do work in higher education should be evident from an aptitude examination such as the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT). In certain instances, other kinds of evidence may be used to determine the ability to do such work. 3. Character and Personality. Applicants must be able to demonstrate that they possess the personality traits, interests, attitudes, and personal characteristics necessary for an advanced education. 4. Admission to Special Curricula. A student seeking admission to a special curriculum may be required to take an appropriate aptitude test in the special program or have earned specific credentials. EVALUATION OF STUDENT APPLICATIONS Many variables are taken into consideration in reviewing applications for admission. The admissions committee weighs as many of the following as possible: class rank, cumulative grade point average, type of curriculum completed in relationship to the proposed major, guidance counselor or another recommendation, on-campus interview, standardiz.ed test scores, activities, and maturity. APPLICATION AND ADMISSION 75 SPECIFIC ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Freshmen Students attending a post-secondary institution for the first time are considered new freshmen. All students in this classification must submit a completed application, application fee, high school transcript, and GED certificate (if applicable). Results from the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American College Test (ACT) must be sent, if available. These test results are beneficial to students and advisors as programs are individually tailored. B. Tramfers Students who wish to transfer to this university must submit a formal application, application fee, and official transcripts from all institutions attended after secondary school. Students must be in good academic and social standing at the last institution attended in order to qualify for admission to the university for the following semester. In cases where students have been out of school for at least one semester, special consideration will be given. If a degree has not been earned beyond high school, applicants must also submit the high school transcript, including the results of all standardized test scores. See pages 79-80 below in this section of this catalog for information about how transfer credits are evaluated. Transfer credits are not evaluated before application for admission has been made. C. Tramients Students who wish to enroll at California with the expectation of transferring credits to their home institution and do not wish to receive a degree from California University of Pennsylvania are classified as transients. Students must submit a letter or form from the home institution with appropriate authorization. The document must list those courses which are approved for registration. Transcripts are not required. A formal application with application fee must be submitted. An appropriate approval letter with courses listed must be submitted for each semester for which transient status is requested. In all cases, admission is granted for the approved semester only. D. Early Admission for High-School Students High school students may be eligible for admission to California University of Pennsylvania provided the following requirements have been met. a. The student must complete the application for admission form and pay the application fee. b. The applicant must have completed the sophomore year of high school and be enrolled in a college preparatory curriculum. c. An early admission clearance form must be completed with all necessary signatures affixed. 76 APPLICATION AND ADMISSION d. The student's high school transcript must be submitted and reflect a cumulative grade point average of 3.00 for the past two years. (For up-coming juniors, ninth- and tenthgrade averages will be used.) The student's status will be classified as provisional for each session while still in high school. The student must submit a completed early admission clearance form and a transcript for each session that enrollment at California University is desired. At the completion of the student's high school program a second application must be submitted with the final high school transcript. A second application fee is not required. At this time the student will be in a degree program. e. f. g. E. Graduates of California University Post-associate and post-baccalaureate students who have graduated from California University must re-apply (with application fee) to the Admissions Office. F. Other Post-Baccalaureate Students Students who have not graduated from California University of Pennsylvania and want to enroll in undergraduate programs must file an official application, application fee, and the official transcript from the institution granting the baccalaureate degree with the Admissions Office. G. International Students International students are required to submit an application for admission to California University of Pennsylvania. In all cases, a special international student application must be completed. All transcripts, a statement of financial support, and letters of recommendation must be submitted. Assuming that all records indicate that an international students will be successful, final admission is contingent upon acceptable clearance from the education authorities of the home country and from the Department of Justice, Immigration and Naturalization Service, of the United States. Applicants from foreign countries must have competency in the use of the English language as demonstrated through the Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL) examination. International students must subscribe to the insurance plan of California University. For identification purposes, international students should obtain a United States Social Security number. H. Special Students Students who have completed all secondary school requirements may take courses at the university without being a candidate for a degree. Special students must submit a completed formal application, application fee, and all appropriate transcripts. For special students, all regulations and fees are the same as for degree students. APPLICATION AND ADMISSION 77 I. Veteram Veterans of the United States armed forces who have not attended an institution of higher education since their honorable discharge are unconditionally admissible to California University. STUDENT CREDENTIALS All credentials presented in support of an application for admission become the property of the university and cannot be returned to the student. The complete file will be retained according to the provision of University policy and the Family Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as amended. All information filed in support of the application must be complete and authentic. Any false information may be used as grounds for denial or dismissal. SPECIAL OPPORTUNITIES California University has shown that some students can succeed and even excel when given individual attention. Our university provides an environment where students are known as individuals and receive additional help from faculty, administrators, and students. In addition to the standard support services, California University of Pennsylvania offers a Department of Academic Development Services, which provides tutoring and counseling for all age groups. See the section on that department, on page 121 in this catalog. Academically and financially needy students may be eligible for special state and federal programs as administered through Academic Development Services, which provides tutoring and counseling for all age groups. c_ARE __: _PR_o_G_RA_M_s_F_o_R_T_HE_L_E_ARNIN ___ G_o_IS_A_B_L_E_o_ _ ___.l · L -_ _ _ For information about special programs for the learning disabled - both high-school and undergraduate students - see the section on CARE in the General Information section of this catalog, pages 26-28 above. DEVELOPMENTAL COURSES All entering students (including transfer students but excluding those in the Nursing curriculum or those who have already earned an associate or higher degree) must, before their first registration at California, take three tests to determine their levels of competency and placement in mathematics, English composition, and reading. Students who do not achieve certain predetermined scores on these tests must enroll in the appropriate 78 PUCATION AND ADMISSION developmental courses 1 and make use of the appropriate Learning Centers in Mathematics, Writing, or Reading. These courses are ENG 100 (English Language Skills), MAT 098 (Basic Mathematics) and MAT 099 (Introductory Algebra), and EDE 100 (Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills), which are all described in the course listings in this catalog. For information on the Learning Centers, see the General Information section of this catalog pages 25-26 above. ese deve op courses are preparatory to a university academic do not count toward the fulfillment of the number experience, the credits awarded in th of credits for graduation; nor may the be used in fulfillment of General Education requirements or academic major require nts. However, the grades achieved in these courses are used in the establishment of the grade point average, of class standing, of eligibility for financial aid, and of eligib" ity for participation in co-curricular activities. This policy on developmental co does not affect the transfer of all appropriate its from other institutions. READMISSION For readmission after an absence from the university see page 60 in this catalog. SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBERS Social Security numbers, which serve as the permanent student identification number, must be entered on the application for admission. Students who do not have a social security number should obtain one. PENNSYLVANIA RESIDENCY Residency is determined at the time of admission. Change of residency may only occur by appealing to the Residency Appeals Committee. For further information, contact the office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs after admission and prior to registration. 1However, transfer students who (a) have not already earned an associate or higher degree and who (b) have completed the equivalent of English 101 or a college-level course in mathematics with grades of C or better at another institution but (c) whose diagnostic test scores indicate that they should take the appropriate developmental courses are not required to repeat those courses or to take the developmental courses at this university. Nevertheless, such students are strongly urged to take the developmental courses and to take the opportunity for additional help provided by the Mathematics, Reading, and Writing Centers. APPLICATION AND ADMISSION * ~1Jiv.CV, ~-11/ 79 {W.fi.~ ADVANCED PLACEMENT CREDIT A student who has taken Advanced Placement examinations under the auspices of the College Board may receive credit for them at California, provided the score is 3.00 or higher. TRANSFER CREDIT EVALUATION Prior to receiving a transcript evaluation,students must first make formal application to the University through the Admissions Office, submitting all transcripts and the required application fee. University officials are not permitted to evaluate transfer credits provisionally. 2. For credit towards the Bachelor's degree, a maximum of 75 credits may be transferred to California from two-year community or junior colleges,.98 credits from four-year ~olleges or universities, or 98 credits from a combination of two-year and four-year colleges and universities. No more than fifteen credits towards an Associate degree may transferr to California University. 3. Courses taken at another school under a Pass/Fail option will be transferred under the conditions of California's Pass/Fail policy. 4. Developmental courses are not transferable. 5. Grades of D are not transferable unless they are counted as part of an associate degree granted at a public institution or a community college. 6. Courses are considered for transfer to California in the following order: (a) Courses for which the grade earned was A, B, or C; (b) Courses for which a Pass grade was given; (c) Courses for which the student received a D grade as part of an earned degree. 7. No courses for which a D grade was received will be transferred after a total of 64 credits has been transferred. 8. When credits are transferred, only the credits are counted as advanced standing; the grade point average of transfer courses is not calculated with California University earned courses. Although credits will always transfer according to these provisions, regulations that govern the national professional accreditation of certain programs offered at California University of Pennsylvania may sometimes not permit some courses taken in programs not similarly accredited at other two- and four-year institutions to be transferred as the equivalents of courses that may be similarly entitled or described in this catalog. 1. 80 APPLICATION AND ADMISSION Community College Graduates: Special Provisions The University subscribes to the Articulation and Transferability Agreement between the State System of Higher Education and Community Colleges. This agreement applies to transferability of credits from Middle States or other regionally approved two-year and junior colleges. The details of this agreement are: 1. Since completion of an associate degree demonstrates a student's motivation to complete a baccalaureate degree, preference for admission will be given to applicants who have completed the associate degree. 2. A transfer student who has completed a two-year degree program should normally expect to complete a baccalaureate program in two additional years. In certain specialized programs of the receiving institution, however, a longer period may be necessary for majors in these programs. 3. The D grade obtained by two-year college students is treated by the senior institution in the same manner as the senior institution treats the D 's of its indigenous students. Placement of the D grade on the program distribution sheet may vary from program to program. 4. Secondary school transcripts as well as test scores are considered as a guidance tool and not a determinant of transfer to the four-year institution. The awarding of the associate degree is considered to have satisfied the high school graduation requirements. VETERANS: COURSE CREDIT FOR MlLIT ARY SERVICE Veterans may be awarded credit for their military training and military schools. All veterans. reservists, and National Guard members who have been honorably discharged (or honorably discharged from active duty) may be eligible for credits. Credits are awarded only in the category of Free Electives. Each veteran or reservist seeking such an award must submit a copy of DD 214 to the Director of Veterans Affairs. Army veterans who entered the army after October 1, 1981, should submit an A.A.R.T.S. transcript; Air Force veterans who served after 1974 should submit a C.C.A.F. transcript. Evaluations based on the latest American Council of Education Guides will be forwarded to the appropriate Dean for approval. ATTRITION Information relating to the retention/attrition of students at the University can be obtained through the office of the Vice-President for Academic Affairs. Generally, more than one-half of students who matriculate as baccalaureate students will graduate. Information on this subject may be obtained through an individual appointment with the Vice-President for Academic Affairs. 81 FEES AND EXPENSES 82 FEES AND EXPENSES BASIC FEE (TUITION)• The basic fee (tuition) covers the cost of instruction, registration, the keeping of student records and library services. Full-time students: For full-time students (scheduled for 12-18 credits) who are residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $1,314 a semester. An additional $110 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18. Part-time students: Part-time students (scheduling 11 credits or fewer) who are residents of the Commonwealth are charged $110 per credit. Out-of-State students: For full-time students (scheduling 12-18 credits) who are not residents of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania,•• the basic fee is $2,446 a semester. An additional $204 per credit is charged for credits scheduled in excess of 18. Out-of-State, part-time students: Part-time students who are not residents of the Commonwealth are charged $204 per credit. OTHER FEES Student Union Building Fee Schedule Spring 1992, Summer 1992 Seniors Full-Time Part-Time Part-Time 12 credits or more 6 to 11 credits 1 to 5 credits $ 10.00 5.00 2.50 •AIL FEES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE. 1he amount shown for the basic fee (tuition) is in effect for the 19911992 academic year. Please contact the Revenue Office for current fee information . ..An in-state student is defined as one who is a bona fide resident of and domiciled within the State of Pennsylvania for a reasonable period, net less than one year, immediately preceding the student's registration for a tenn or semester in any Commonwealth-supponed college or university in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. Miners are generally presumed to be a resident of the place of their parents' or guardian's domicile. 1he establishment of domicile is primarily a matter of continued residence and intention. Generally, Pennsylvania domicile is considered to be established upon the completion of at least 12 months of continuous residence within the State at the time of registration for courses. FEES AND EXPENSES 83 Juniors Full-Time Part-Time Part-Time 12 credits or more 6 to 11 credits 1 to 5 credits $ 40 20 10 Sophomores and Freshmen Full-Time Part-Time Part-Time 12 credits or more 6 to 11 credits 1 to 5 credits $ 75 38 19 Fall 1992, Spring 1993, Summer 1993 Undergraduates Full-Time Part-Time Part-Time 12 credits or more 6 to 11 credits 1 to 5 credits $ 75 38 19 This fee is not refundable. University Senice Fee $ 75 9 or more credits 40 1-8 credits This fee is not refundable except for academic dismissal or administrative action to revoke a registration. Student ASM>ciation Fee All students are charged an activity fee according to their academic status as follows : 12 or more credits $100 6-11 credits 46 1-5 credits 24 This fee is refundable through the Office of Student Association, Inc. Room and Board Charges The cost for living in a university residence hall is $800 per semester for a double room. (Most rooms are doubles.) The cost of meals is $800 per semester for 14 meals a week, or $580 for 10 meals a week, or $430 for 7 meals a week. 84 FEES AND EXPENSES Advance Deposit All first-year students, including transfers and readmitted students are required to submit a $75 advance deposit payable to California University of Pennsylvania. This fee may be mailed or hand delivered to the Revenue Office, Administration Building, California University of Pennsylvania. It is to be paid in advance of registration and is credited to the student's account for the first semester. Room Deposit An advance room deposit of $100, held in the student's account and applied toward the spring semester, is required in order to reserve a room for the following academic year. First-year students who wish to reside in a residence hall will receive a housing contract with their Admissions Packet. The contract and card must be signed and returned to the Revenue Office, California University of Pennsylvania, with the $100 deposit. Upper-class students are also required to pay the $100 room deposit. They should obtain their housing contracts from the Director of Housing, Student Development Office, Student Union Building. Schedules and deadlines for housing contracts are posted for each academic year. Withdrawal from the contract will result in partial or total forfeiture of the deposit. In addition, the student may be held liable for room and board charges for that semester. Late payment fee A $15 fee is charged when a student fails to pay fees during the registration period or by the date established in an approved deferment plan. Dishonored check charge Students making checks payable to California University of Pennsylvania which are not acceptable to the bank because of insufficient funds are charged $15 for each such check. The original amount plus the $15 charge must be paid by money order or certified bank draft. Personal checks will not be accepted. The Student Association, Inc. charges $12 for dishonored checks. Damage charges Students are held responsible for the cost of damage, breakage, or loss and/or the return of University property. Degree fee A fee of $10 must be paid by each candidate for a degree from California University of Pennsylvania. A student is not permitted to complete graduation from the University until this fee has been paid. The fee is payable when the student has been notified of clearance for graduation. 85 FEES AND EXPENSES CLEPFee A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the administration and recording of CLEP (College Level Equivalency Program) credits regardless of the number of credits awarded. Co-operative Education Fee A one-time fee of $25 is charged for the recording of Co-operative Education experiences, at the time when the student wishes to have them recorded on the official transcript. PAYMENT OF BILLS All fees are assessed at the time of registration. Payment may be made by cash, check, money order, or certified bank draft made payable to California University of Pennsylvania, or by VISA or MasterCard. No personal check will be accepted in payment for past-due accounts or to clear a returned check. Delinquent Accounts No student may be enrolled, graduate, receive semester grade reports, or receive a transcript until all previous charges are paid. FEES AND EXPENSES 86 Summary of Fees (Per Semester) Full-time Resident Students Basic Fee University Service Fee Student Union Building Fee Housing Fee Meal Fee (14 meals) Student Association Fee In-State Out-of State $ 1,314 75 $2,446 75 800 800 100 800 800 100 ... ... Full-time Commuting Students Basic Fee University Service Fee Student Union Building Fee Student Association Fee $ 1,314 75 ... $2,446 75 ... 100 •See schedule on pages 82-83. REFUND POLICY A refund or credit will not be allowed unless the withdrawal is properly made in the Office of Academic Records. Except for emergencies, the date of notification is considered the effective date of withdrawal. Financial aid recipients who intend to withdraw from the University must be cleared by the Financial Aid Office as part of the withdrawal procedure. Refunds are paid only by request, which must be made on the appropriate form, available at the Revenue Office (Room 119, Administration Building). For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule: 1st and 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund 3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund 4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund 5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50% refund After the 5th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there is no refund of flex dollars, used for university dining privileges, except on withdrawal from the university. FEES AND EXPENSES 87 SUMMER SESSIONS Basic Fee (Tuition) The enrollment fee for any of the regular summer sessions is $110 per semester hour for Pennsylvania resident undergraduate student, and $204 per semester credit hour for nonPennsylvania resident undergraduate students. University Service Fee For nine or more credits in the summer, the fee is $75; for one to eight credits, the fee is $40. This fee is not refundable. Student Union Building Fee See the schedule on pages 82-83. This fee is not refundable. Student ~ation Fee For 12 or more credits in the summer, the fee is $100; for 6-11, $46; for five or fewer, $24. Housing and Dining Hall Fee In 1991, summer rates for housing in a university residence hall were: for the ten-week session $810 for the 19-meal plan, $710 for the 12-meal plan; for the five-week session, $405 for the 19-meal plan, $355 for the 12-meal plan. Summer rates for 1992 will be established early in the spring semester of 1992. Smnmer Refund Policy For both the Basic Fee and for university housing, partial refunds, or credit, are based upon a percentage of the fees charged and paid according to the following schedule: 5-Week Session 1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 % refund After the 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . NO REFUND 10-Week Session 1st Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80% refund 2nd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70% refund 3rd Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60% refund 4th Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 % refund After the 4th Week ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO REFUND 88 FEES AND EXPENSES Refunds on board (dining) charges will be made according to a pro-rata schedule available in the Revenue Office and in the Office of the Vice-president for Student Development and Services (Room 129, California Memorial Union). It should be noted, however, that there are no flex dollars for summer. Special Conditions for Summer Sessions The first day of classes is used as the starting date in considering the first week for determining a refund or billing adjustment. If a student registers for two or more sessions and then decides to withdraw from a session before the start of that session, a refund or credit will be pro-rated by using the parttime credit fee. No refund or credit will be pro-rated for the Student Union Building Fee or University Service Fee. ACADEMIC MANAGEMENT SERVICES BUDGET PAYMENT PLAN This Plan allows you to pay University fees for Fall and Spring in 10 monthly payments commencing June 1, 1992. The cost of this Plan is $45, which includes Life Benefit Coverage. There are no other fees or interest charges. Information concerning this Plan will be forwarded to you separately. If you wish, you may call Academic Management Services directly, (800) 556-6684 for information. 89 FINANCIAL AID: GRANTS SCHOLARSHIPS EMPWYMENT WANS 90 FINANCIAL AID Financial aid is a critical factor in providing students with the opportunity for a college education. All financial aid is intended to supplement the family's financial resources, not as a substitute. GWSSARY OF FINANCIAL AID TERMS Aid: CSS: CWSP: Grant: NEED: Perkins Loan: PLUS: QPA or GPA: SAR: Scholarship: SEOG: Stafford: Total package of funds awarded to meet university expenses. College Scholarship Service: Organization which analy:res Financial Aid Forms (F.A.F.'s) (not used by California University of Pennsylvania). College Work Study Program: Work on campus, controlled by the University and funded by the Federal government. Gift aid which is not repaid, based on need. Negro Educational Emergency Drive: Local grant program for African-American students demonstrating need. Formerly National Direct Student Loan: Federal program allocating need-based loans through the university. Parent Loans for Undergraduate Students: Federally backed loan available through local lenders. Quality Point Average: Cumulative grade point average used to determine academic eligibility. Student Aid Report: Result of the Pell Grant analysis, sent to student; student must submit all three parts to the university. Gift aid which is not paid back: based on academic or cocurricular excellence. Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant: University-based Federal grant awarded to students with highest financial need. Stafford Loan Program: Federal loan program which subsidi:res borrowed funds through hometown banks, etc. Eligibility based on financial need. APPLICATION PROCEDURE (ALL NEED-BASED PROGRAMS) Students wishing to apply for need-based financial aid must file a "Pennsylvania State Grant and Federal Student Aid Application." All California University of Pennsylvania aid applicants (including applicants from states other than Pennsylvania) must file this application to receive full aid consideration. Priority will be given to applications filed by April 1. Transfer students must also complete a "Financial Aid Transcript" for each college, university, or post-secondary school previously attended. This form is required whether or not aid was received at the previous school. These forms are available in the Financial Aid Office. FINANCIAL AID 91 BASIS AND MEIBOD OF AWARDING FINANCIAL AID Student financial aid is provided on the basis of the applicant's documented financial need. Financial need is defined as the difference between the estimated university costs and expected family contribution. Grants and loans are credited directly toward costs incurred at the university; any excess funds are refunded to the student. Earnings from student employment are paid directly to the student on a bi-weekly basis. Students' financial aid entitlements are based on their enrollment status at the end of the fifth week of e.ach semester. Students who drop below twelve credit hours before the sixth week should expect reductions or cancellations in the amount of aid that will be credited to their account. Part-time students taking at least six credits are eligible to apply for assistance through the following financial aid programs: Pell Grant Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant Perkins Loan College Work-Study Stafford Loan PLUS Loan SLS Loan Alternative Loan Part-time students may apply for aid in the same manner as full-time students. The aid awarded is dependent upon the student's financial need and availability of funds. RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF FINANCIAL AID APPLICANTS Every student has the right to apply for financial aid and also to request and receive reconsideration of the financial aid decision. Students also have the right to know how their financial need and family contributions are calculated. Students and parents are expected to provide accurate information on all application materials and may be asked to provide a photocopy of their latest federal income tax return. The Federal Government requires the Financial Aid Office to ensure that financial information from all sources is accurate and truthful. When forms are used to establish eligibility for federal student aid funds, false statements or misrepresentations may subject those providing the information to a fine or imprisonment or both, under provision of the U. S. Criminal Code. Students also have the responsibility to notify the Financial Aid Office of any change occurring in their financial position from that which was reported on the application (e.g., eligibility for Social Security or veterans' benefits, receipt of scholarships, grants or other assistance, change in residency, etc.). FINANCIAL AID 92 FINANCIAL PLANNING Students planning to attend California University of Pennsylvania should be aware that the cash from many of the financial aid programs is not available until approximately nine weeks into the semester for which the funds are intended. Students should plan to come to the University with enough personal money for early-term purchases (books, materials, art supplies, etc.) without depending upon financial aid funds. SCHOLARSHIPS The AAUW Scholarship: The California University of Pennsylvania Branch of the American Association of University Women has established a $400 per year scholarship to a full-time, female upperclass student over 30 who wants to complete her undergraduate degree at the University. The scholarship may be renewed if a 3.0 academic grade point average is maintained. Those interested should contact the Financial Aid Office (412) 9384415. The Alwnni Scholarship: Ten renewable scholarships are given to freshmen entering with an SAT score of at least 1050, a grade point average of 3.25, and a rank in the first or second tenth of their graduating class. No application is necessary for renewal. APSCUF Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded by the Association of Pennsylvania University Faculty (APSCUF) to an undergraduate man and an undergraduate woman. Freshmen must have an SAT score of 1050 and have been ranked in the upper 20% of their high school graduating class. Upperclassmen must have accrued 32 credits with at least a 3.5 grade point average from the University. A recipient of this scholarship cannot have received any other academic scholarship. Those interested and eligible may obtain application forms from the office manager of the University APSCUF Office in Keystone (412) 938-4293. The Colonel Arthur L. Bakewell Veterans' Scholarship Fund: Two $1000 scholarships are offered annually by the California University Veterans Club. They are given in the amount of $500 per semester. Recipients must (1) be honorably discharged veterans; (2) be full-time undergraduate students who have completed 32 credits; (3) have a minimum of a 3.0 grade point average; and (4) have attended California University the previous semester. Eligible veterans should contact the Veterans' Affairs Office (412) 938-4076. The Gabriel P. Betz Scholarship: This scholarship is an annual grant of one $500 award or two $250 awards to students who are juniors majoring in geography. A departmental scholarship committee announces the awards during the fall semester. Applicants who are seriously considering graduate work in geography should submit a transcript of their undergraduate grades to the departmental committee. Interested students may contact Professor Harry J. Orsag in the Earth Science Department (412) 938-4255. The John Bitonti Memorial Scholarship: This $200 scholarship is given in the spring to a Speech Pathology and Audiology major who has completed at least four of this department's courses. The student must be a full-time undergraduate who has completed 33 credits with a 3.0 grade point average and who is involved in departmental activities. FINANCIAL AID 93 The student is committee-selected. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Speech Pathology and Audiology Department (412) 938-4175. The Board of Governors' Minority Scholarship: This scholarship, which waives tuition every semester for four years, is given each year to 15 entering freshmen with a 2.5 grade point average and SAT score of 725. Interested students should contact the Admissions Office (412) 938-4404. The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship: A $500 award is apportioned by majority vote of a scholarship committee to a student or students majoring in Social Science, Economics, or History and Urban Studies who have completed between 45 and 60 credits at the University. Applicants must submit a dated and signed letter of intent, a recent transcript showing outstanding academic ability , and proof of financial need as determined by the Financial Aid Office. Those interested should contact the Social Science Department (412) 938-4042. The California PT A Scholarship: The California High School PTA awards a $500 scholarship to a freshman student who has graduated from California High School. The scholarship is awarded based on academic performance and financial need. Applications are available in the California High School's Guidance Office. The California University of Pennsylvania Faculty Scholarships: The California University of Pennsylvania Faculty awards renewable scholarships of from $750 to $1500 per year to a selected number of freshmen. Minimum qualifications are: (1) admission as a full-time student at California University of Pennsylvania, (2) a combined SAT score above 1200, and (3) rank in the upper 10 % of the high school graduating class. Inquiries should be directed to Dr. Albert Maruslcin , Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino Library (938-4095). The J. Robert Craig Scholarship: Five hundred dollars for the first semester is awarded to an incoming freshman exhibiting excellence in the natural sciences. Proof of this ability must be verified by a letter of recommendation from the applicant's science teacher. Interested freshmen should contact either Dr. George Frangos (412) 938-5748 or Professor Clyde W. Clendaniel (4 12) 938-4148. The Earth Science Faculty Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded to a student majoring in Earth Science, Geography , or Geology. Applicants must have a minimum of 3.0 grade point average in their maj or. The award is made at the end of the junior year. Those interested should contact Dr. William J. Procasky of the Earth Sciences Department (412) 938-4180. The Eberly Family Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to noneducation majors who have demonstrated academic promise. The awards are restricted first to Fayette County residents, second to Southwestern Pennsylvania residents, or third to Pennsylvania residents. The scholarship value is up to full tuition for an academic year. Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to continue receiving the award. No application is necessary. The Dr. Calvin Fleming Scholarship: Awarded to an outstanding student in the Natural or Physical Sciences. For additional information, contact Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino Library (938-4095). No application is necessary. 94 FINANCIAL AID The David W. Hambacher Scholarship: A $500 scholarship is awarded in the freshman year to a student whose composite SAT score is 1200 and who was in the upper 10% of the high school graduating class. All eligible entering students are considered. Those interested should contact the Psychology Department (412) 938-4100. The Lillian E. Hammitt Scholarship: This award, for one academic year with the possibility of renewal, is given to a full-time undergraduate enrolled or planning to enroll for credit in the performing ensemble. Applicants must be recommended by their previous instructor and must give a live audition. College of Education students are given preference. The amount of the award varies, depending on financial need. For additional information, contact Mr. Gene G. Suskalo, Chair, Music Department (412) 938-4242. The Eleanor C. Bibbs Writing Award: A $100 award for a Composition 101 paper and a $100 award for a Composition 102 paper are granted in the spring. Information may be obtained from Dr. Edward Chute, Director of Freshman English, in Dixon 231 (938-4301). The Delila C. Jenkins Scholarships: These renewable scholarships are awarded to Freshman Education majors demonstrating financial need. The scholarship value is up to full tuition for· an academic year. Each recipient must maintain good academic progress to continue receiving the award. Applicants must submit the Pennsylvania State Grant and Federal Aid application to be considered. The Minor Major Memorial Award: This award is given to a scholastically outstanding student in any of the English curricula. There is no application. Inquiries should be directed to Professor Ronald L. Forsythe in the English Department (412) 938-4070. The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award: An Award of $200 to $500 is granted each year to full-time undergraduates with at least a 3.5 overall grade point average. The applicant must be enrolled in the College of Liberal Arts and must have completed six credits in Anthropology. No application is necessary. Inquiries may be made by contacting Dr. Albert Maruskin, Chairman of the Faculty Scholarship Committee, in Manderino Library (938-4095). The Mon Valley NAACP Scholarship: A $600 renewable scholarship is awarded to a Freshman who graduated from one of the following school districts: Charleroi, Belle Vernon, Ringgold, Monessen, Yough, California or Bentworth. Nominations must be made by each school district. Minimum qualifications are: (1) a combined SAT score of 750 or ACT score of 19; (2) rank in the upper 25% of the high school graduating class; (3) a cumulative 2.50 grade point average; (4) demonstrated financial need beyond other financial aid grant programs; (5) an African-American high school senior; and (6) admission as a fulltime student at California University. Inquiries can be made by contacting the Admissions Office (412) 938-4404. The Doris Nevin Scholarship: This $500 scholarship is awarded at the end of the junior year to a student exhibiting qualities of leadership, service, and an interest in physical fitness. Applicants must have a grade point average of at least 2. 75 and must have completed at least two Physical Education classes. Those eligible and interested should contact the Women's Health and Physical Education Department (412) 938-4350. The Kurt Nordstrom Memorial Scholarship: This scholarship is awarded each semester to a student majoring in Printing Management. A departmental committee announces its decision each semester. Interested students may contact Professor Richard Grimm of the Industry and Technology Department (412) 938-4085. FINANCIAL AID 95 The Mary Noss Freshman Scholarship: A $400 award for the freshman year only is given to one student in each of Washington County's fourteen public and two parochial high schools. The recipients, chosen by a committee in each high school, must attend the University full-time. High school counselors will provide information. The Non-Traditional Scholarship Award: This $200 non-renewable scholarship is awarded to a student who has experienced a break in continuous flow between high school and college. Applicants must have completed one year of full-time enrollment (24 credits) at California University of Pennsylvania. The scholarship will be awarded on the basis of academic performance and unmet financial need. The Pennsylvania State Grant and Federal Student Aid application must be submitted. The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship: One to four scholarships, up to $1,000, are awarded each year to students majoring in one of the University's foreign languages. Applicants must have a.grade point average of at least 3.0 in the language studied and attained second semester sophomore, junior, or senior status. Applications for the scholarship must be made by April 1. Additional information may be obtained by contacting Professor Elsbeth Santee, chair of the Foreign Languages Department in South Hall: (412) 938-4i47. The Sports Medicine Scholarships: Five scholarships up to $250 are awarded to outstanding Athletic Training students, excluding incoming freshmen, who have a minimum grade point average of 2. 75. All Athletic Training Curriculum students are considered. Questions should be directed to Mr. William B. Biddington in the Sports Medicine Department (412) 938-4562. Other Scholarships: Periodic awards are made by various university departments, organizations, affiliates and alumni. For information concerning these funds, students may contact the Financial Aid Office. ROTC SCHOLARSlllPS AND STIPENDS The University offers participation in the Reserve Officers Training Corps. Students enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a monthly, non-taxable stipend of $100 for ten months of the school year during the last two years of the program. Advanced freshmen and sophomores may compete for two-, three-, and four-year merit scholarships. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat book rate, and a $1000 yearly stipend for the length of the scholarship. Applications for these scholarships may be secured from the ROTC office. Through the Simultaneous Membership Program a student may be a member of ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National Guard unit at the same time. The student receives the ROTC stipend and drill pay (approximately $120 per month) from the reserves. For additional information call or visit the ROTC on campus, at 938-4074. GRANTS Pell Grant: This Federal aid program is designed to provide financial assistance to attend post-high school educational institutions. This grant is intended to be the "floor" of the FINANCIAL AID 96 financial aid package and may be combined with other forms of aid in order to meet the cost of education. The amount of a Pell Grant is determined by the student's and family's financial resources. Pell Grants range from $200 to $2,400. The Pell Grant award, unlike a loan, does not have to be repaid. Students are eligible to receive a Pell Grant for 5.5 years if they received a Pell Grant prior to July 1, 1987. Students receiving a Pell Grant for the first time after July 1, 1987 are subject to a five-year limitation of Pell Grant assistance. Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants: Awards from this program are made to students with exceptional financial need. The minimum a student may receive is $100 per academic year. Eligibility is limited to undergraduate students who do not have a bachelor's degree. Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance Agency Grants: The PHEAA State Grant program assists qualified students who need financial assistance to obtain higher education. These grants are based upon admission to California University of Pennsylvania and the need for financial assistance from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania as determined by the Higher Education Assistance Agency. High school seniors can secure further information and application forms from their high school guidance office. These grants are available only to residents of Pennsylvania who enroll on a full-time basis. Students are eligible to receive a maximum of eight semesters of state grant assistance. Other State Grants: Several states, including Massachusetts, Vermont, Connecticut, West Virginia, Rhode Island, and Ohio, have state grants which can be transferred to schools outside the state. Interested students may obtain information concerning these programs from their high school guidance counselors or from the appropriate State Higher Education Agency. LOANS .1 Perkins Loan (formerly named National Direct Student Loan): High school graduates who have been accepted for enrollment at California University of Pennsylvania, or students enrolled at least half-time and who demonstrate financial need, may receive consideration for this student loan. Continued borrowing under the program from year to year depends on the availability of funds. Repayment of principal and interest begins six months after students end their studies for borrowers who received their first loan prior to July 1, 1987, or nine months after students end their studies for borrowers who received their loan after June 30, 1987. This loan bears an interest rate of five percent a year and repayment of principal may be extended over a ten-year period. The normal minimum monthly repayment is $30. Borrowers becoming full-time teachers in public or other non-profit private elementary or secondary schools with a high enrollment of students from low-income families or becoming full-time teachers of handicapped children may be eligible for complete cancellation of the loan. In addition, a borrower who becomes a full-time staff member in a preschool program of the Economic Opportunity Act (Head Start) in certain states may also be eligible for cancellation of the loan. FINANCIAL AID 97 Peace Corps: Borrowers serving as volunteers in the Peace Corps are eligible for cancellation of 15-20% of the total Perkins Loan obligation, depending on the length of active service in the Peace Corps plus the accrued annual interest. Most government sponsored loans, such as GSLs, defer repayment during the time a person serves in the Peace Corps. Plus, there are academic credit programs for returned Peace Corps volunteers, and over 50 graduate schools offer scholarships to former Volunteers. Borrowers serving in the Armed Forces of the United States can have a maximum of 50 percent of the loan canceled at the rate of 12 1/2 percent a year, plus interest, for each complete year of service in an area of hostilities. Interest and principal payments are deferred during any period in which the borrower is carrying at least one-half the normal academic work load at an institution of higher learning, or up to three years if the borrower is on full-time active duty as a member of the Armed Forces of the United States, is a volunteer under the Peace Corps Acts, or is a volunteer under the Economic Opportunity Act (VISTA). Any loans made prior to June 30, 1972 are subject to previous regulations. California University of Pennsylvania approves and makes the loans and is responsible for collections. Stafford Loan (Subsidized): The education of students from middle-income groups frequently places a financial burden on the families, particularly if there are a number of children who want to attend a university. In many cases, because of limited resources, the student is not awarded sufficient amounts of aid on the form of employment or grants. Even when commercial credit sources are available, repayment generally runs concurrently with the years the student attends the University. To help these young people and their families, a (subsidized) Stafford Program is in operation. The laws governing the Stafford Loan Program changed in October, 1986 and based eligibility for this program entirely on financial need. Students may borrow up to the amount of unmet need but not over the yearly program limits of $2,625 per year for first and second levels and $4,000 for subsequent undergraduate levels. Repayment of the principal of the loan is not required until six months after the student leaves or graduates from the University. The Federal government will pay the interest during the time the student is enrolled at least half-time in the University. the loan bears an interest rate of eight percent a year through the fourth year of repayment for all first-time borrowers after July 1, 1988. The interest rate increases to ten percent beginning with the fifth year of repayment. Repayment of the principal may be extended over a ten-year period. The minimum monthly repayment is $50. The necessary Stafford Loan application may be secured at any bank or financial institution. Stafford Loans are available to students from other states through the Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA) or agencies similar to PHEAA within their own state. Stafford Loan (Non-Subsidized): This loan program is administered by the Pennsylvania Higher Education Assistance Agency (PHEAA). It provides additional loan resources to students and parents in situations where eligibility for the subsidized Stafford Loan is denied or significantly reduced because of income eligibility restrictions. The identical loan limits, FINANCIAL AID 98 interest rate and principal repayment conditions apply to the non-subsidized loan as to the subsidized loan previously described. The difference between the two types is that for the non-subsidized loan borrower is responsible for payment of the interest during the in-school period. Students who have filed a PHEAA Stafford Loan Application through their lending institution will have their maximum eligibility for the subsidized loan determined first. PHEAA will then automatically offer the applicant a non-subsidized loan for the difference between the loan limit and any amount of subsidized loan approved. Out-of-state students may secure an application from the financial aid office and apply directly to PHEAA. PLUS Loans: This loan program permits parents to borrow for dependent undergraduate students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on a debt burden analysis of their income. The applicable interest rate on all PLUS loans is variable. The current rate may be obtained from your lender. Unlike the Stafford Loan Program, PLUS loans are not interestsubsidized. Repayment of the principal and interest normally begins sixty days after signing the promissory note. Applications for PLUS loans are available at most local lending institutions. Supplemental Loan for Students (SLS): This program is currently limited to independent undergraduate students and graduate students. Applicants' eligibility is partially based on a debt burden analysis of income and expenses. The applicable interest rate on all Supplemental loans is variable. The current rate may be obtained from your lender. The Supplemental Loan program is also unsubsidized. Repayment of principal and interest may be postponed for various reasons as specified by program regulations. Applications for Supplemental loans are available at local lending institutions. Emergency Student Loan Fund: Emergency short-term loans up to $200 are available to California University of Pennsylvania undergraduate students. Applications are available at the Financial Aid Office. EMPLOYMENT College Work-Study Program: Students who need a job to help pay for university expenses may be eligible for employment by California University of Pennsylvania under the federally supported College Work-Study Program. Students usually work about eight hours a week while attending classes full-time. During the summer or other vacation periods when they do not have classes, students may, with proper authorization, work full time (37 .5 hours per week) under this program. In three months of summer employment under the Work-Study Program, an eligible student may earn $1 ,000 or more. This amount, supplemented by weekly earning during the second year, may contribute substantially to a student' s total educational costs, including necessary clothes, transportation and personal expenses. A student's eligibility depends upon the demonstration of financial need. FINANCIAL AID 99 Student Employment (non-CWSP): Employment under this program is provided as funds permit. Work assignments and work schedules are similar to those for the Federal Work Study Program. Interested students can receive further information and the employment application through the Financial Aid Office. SCHOLARSHIPS/WANS Paul Douglas Teacher Scholarship: The shortage of qualified teachers throughout the United States led to the establishment of this federal program. Students ranking in the top 10 percent of their high school class who are enrolled or planning to enroll in a program of study at California leading to certification to teach in a preschool, elementary or secondary school may apply for this competitive scholarship. Awards range up to $5,000 per academic year. For each yearly award received, students must agree to teach two years. This obligation is reduced to one year if the scholar teaches on a full-time permanent basis in a school in an area which federal regulations define as having a teacher shortage. The scholarship reverts to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations. Applications are available in high school guidance offices and this university's Financial Aid Office. Scholars in Education Award: The State of Pennsylvania also responded to the critical shortage of qualified secondary mathematics and science teachers in Pennsylvania by establishing this program. Students enrolled or planning to enroll in a program leading to a teaching degree in secondary mathematics or science with an SAT score of at least 1000, a high school rank in the top fifth of their class and a college or high school rank in the top fifth of their class, and a college or high school grade point average of at least 3.0 on a 4.0 scale in their science or mathematics coursework are eligible to apply. Recipients must agree to teach one year in a Pennsylvania secondary school for each yearly scholarship received. The value of the yearly award at California is $1,500. The scholarship will revert to a loan if recipients do not fulfill their teaching obligations. Applications are available in high school guidance offices or this university's Financial Aid Office. SPECIAL BENEFITS Veterans' Benefits are available to many veterans who are discharged from the Armed Forces or active members of the National Guard or Reserves. Additional information may be obtained by phoning the Veterans Affairs Office at (412) 938-4076. Vocational Rehabilitation is a service to conserve the working capacity of persons with an impairment who still have reasonable expectations of becoming employed. Students who might qualify for vocational rehabilitation aid to attend college should contact their county Office of Vocational Rehabilitation. FINANCIAL AID 100 OTHER SOURCES OF FINANCIAL AID There are also many other avenues from which to obtain aid. These include relatives, local clubs or organizations, businesses, summer earnings, special scholarships, etc. Your guidance counselor, local civic leaders or local librarians are of great help in researching such avenues of financial assistance. SATISFACTORY ACADEMIC PROGRESS To be considered for all Title IV student financial aid programs (namely, Pell Grants, Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grants, Perkins Loans, Stafford Loans, PLUS Loans, Supplemental Loans, or the College Work Study Program), the University requires students to maintain satisfactory academic progress. The academic progress requirements are composed of two parts: PART I The minimum requirements to meet the first part of the University's definition of satisfactory academic progress for financial aid are as follows: 1. All first-time students are exempt from aid denial due to lack of academic progress for the first two semesters of attendance at the University. Progress during the first two semesters, however, does determine eligibility for the subsequent years. 2. Full-time students must earn 24 credits during the Fall and Spring semesters combined. 3. Part-time students must have attempted at least 12 credits before being evaluated. The number of credits part-time students must earn will be prorated according to their enrollment status. (For example, a student who schedules 12-16 credits over both semesters of the academic year must complete 12 credits.) PART II In accordance with the University's published requirements to maintain "good academic standing" (see pages 47 and 57 of this catalog), a student who is placed on academic probation for having failed to maintain a satisfactory Grade Point Average is also placed on financial aid probation for one semester. At the end of that semester one of the following three situations must occur: FINANCIAL AID 101 Either (1) The classification of probation is removed when the student achieves the required minimum Grade Point Average for the class category; or (2) The classification of probation is continued if the student achieves a 2.0 Grade Point Average or better during the probationary term but fails to achieve the minimum cumulative Grade Point Average for the student's category. In this case, eligibility for Title IV Federal Aid may be continued; or (3) If the student's cumulative Grade Point Average for that semester is below 2.00, that student is academically dismissed and denied Title IV Federal Aid until the minimum Grade Point Average for that student' s class category is achieved. A student who is academically dismissed and therefore denied Title IV Financial Aid may be re-admitted to the University but must attend without the benefit of Title IV Federal Aid until the required minimum Grade-Point Average for his/her class category has been achieved. Academic standing is reviewed following each semester: see page 47 in this catalog. The University does not award assistance from Title IV programs beyond a maximum of 5.5 academic years (11 semesters). FOR SPECIAL GRADES I (Incomplete): Since credits are not awarded for this grade, until an Incomplete grade is resolved, a course in which it is received does not count towards fulfilling requirements for financial aid. If the Incomplete grade is resolved by the beginning of the following semester of attendance and a passing grade is received, the credits will be counted. W (Withdrawal) : All categories of Withdrawal earn no credit towards graduation or towards satisfying the credit requirement listed above. P (Pass): If this grade is awarded, the credits apply towards graduation and towards satisfying the credit requirements listed above, but the grade-point average is not affected. Repeating a Course: The last grade earned is always used in calculating the grade-point average. If a student repeats a course, the credits are awarded only for the semester in which it was repeated, not for the first time the course was attempted. FINANCIAL AID 102 USE OF SUMMER SCHOOL TO MAKE UP DEFICIENCY A student deficient in credits and/or grade-point average at the end of an academic year may use the following summer to eliminate the deficiency, but no financial aid is provided to help defray these summer school costs. Students who are subject to academic dismissal owing to insufficient grade-point averages may seek readmission through the dean of that college of the University in which they are enrolled. If summer school work is taken in order to improve a grade-point average (and therefore to become eligible again for financial aid), it must be taken at California University of Pennsylvania, since transfer grades are not computed into a student's gradepoint average. Summer school work taken for the purpose of achieving minimum credit requirements for eligibility for financial aid need not be completed at California University but must be transferable to California. Before credits earned at another college or university can be transferred to a student's record at this university, the student must seek and obtain permission from the appropriate dean of the college of this university. APPEAL PROCEDURE If a student feels that an academic deficiency that has led to loss of eligibility for financial aid is due to extenuating circumstances (such as illness or injury), a written appeal must be submitted to the Director of Financial Aid which details the situation. the Director may, if the circumstances warrant, grant a maximum of one semester of financial aid to a student who does not meet the requirements for academic progress. If the Director denies the request for special consideration, an appeal may be made to the Vice-President for Administration and Finance. REGAINING ELIGIBILITY A student who has been denied financial assistance for lack of satisfactory academic progress regains eligibility in the semester following the one in which requirements for minimum credits for academic progress and/or grade point average have been fulfilled. FINANCIAL AID 103 REFUND POLICY Title IV financial aid recipients who withdraw from the University during the refund period outlined in this catalog may not be entitled to receive their full refund. The portion of the refund that must be returned to Title IV programs is the lesser of the amount of assistance received under all Title IV programs other than under the CWS program or the amount determined according to the following formula: Title IV Aid Institutional Refund X Total Title IV Aid (exclusive of CWS Program earnings) awarded for the payment period Total Aid (exclusive of all work earnings) awarded for the payment period For the purpose of this formula, an institutional refund is defined as the amount paid for institutional charges by financial aid and/or cash payments minus the amount retained by the institution for the portion of the semester that the student was enrolled at the institution. The portion of the refund allocatable to the Title IV Programs will be restored to the programs from which the student received aid in the following order: Perkins Loan Program, GSL Program, PLUS Program, SLS Program, SEOG Program, and Pell Program. Any portion of the refund restored to the GSL, PLUS, or SLS Programs is returned to the student's lending institution. 104 DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS 105 THE DMSIONS OF THE UNIVERSITY THE DEPARTMENTS THE CURRICULA THE COURSES 106 DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS PROGRAMS AND DEPARTMENTAL COURSE ABBREVIATIONS The following departmental and program abbreviations are used to identify courses. If no department appears in the third column, consult the office of the Vice-president for Academic Affairs. CODE PROGRAMS BY DISCIPLINE DEPARTMENT ACC ANT ART ATE BIO BUS CAW CCU CHE COM COP CPE Business and Economics Social Science Art Sports Medicine Biological and Environmental Sciences Business and Economics Mathematics and Computer Science csc EAS ECE ECO EDE EDF EDS EDU EET ENG ENS ESP FIN FRE GCT GEO GER HIN HIS HON Accounting Anthropology Art Athletic Training Education Biology Business Computer Assisted Workshop Co-Curricular Activity Chemistry Communication Studies Cooperative Education Coaching Certification Program Computer Science Earth Science (including Geology) Early Childhood Economics Elementary Education Educational Foundations Secondary Education College of Education and Human Services Electrical Engineering Technology English Environmental Studies Special Education Finance French Graphic Communications Technology Geography German Harrisburg Internship History Honors Program Physical Science Communication Studies Health and Physical Education Mathematics and Computer Science Earth Sciences Elementary Education Business and Economics Elementary Education Educational Studies Educational Studies Industry and Technology English Biological and Environmental Sciences Special Education Business and Economics Foreign Languages and Cultures Industry and Technology Earth Sciences Foreign Languages and Cultures Social Science DIVISIONS AND DEPARTMENTS 107 HPE HSD IAR IND ITE LIT MAT MGT MKT MTE MUS NUR PHI PHS PHY POS PSN PSY PTE RNA RUS soc sos sow SPA SPN TED THE XCP XGE XHS xss XUA Health and Physical Education Highway Safety and Driver Education Industrial Arts Industry Industrial Technology Literature Mathematics Management Marketing Manufacturing Technology Music Nursing Philosophy Physical Science Physics Political Science Public School Nursing Psychology Petroleum Technology Registered Nurse Anesthetist Russian Sociology Social Science Social Work Speech Pathology and Audiology Spanish Technology Education Theatre Career Planning Gerontology Arts in Human Service Soviet Studies Urban Affairs Health and Physical Education Health and Physical Education Industry and Technology Industry and Technology Industry and Technology English Mathematics and Computer Science Business and Economics Business and Economics Industry and Technology Music Nursing Philosophy Physical Science Physical Science Social Science Counselor Education and Services Psychology Earth Sciences Counselor Education and Services Foreign Languages and Cultures Social Science Social Science Social Work Speech Pathology and Audiology Foreign Languages and Cultures Industry and Technology Theatre Academic Development Services Gerontology Art, Theatre Foreign Languages and Cultures History and Urban Affairs 108 COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES The College of Education and Human Services is composed of the departments of Academic Development Services, Counselor Education, Educational Studies, Elementary Education, Gerontology, Health and Physical Education, Social Work, Special Education, Speech Pathology, and Sports Medicine. The Departments of Counselor Education, Educational Studies, Elementary Education, and Special Education, are concerned with teacher education; the Departments of Academic Development and Services, Gerontology, Health and Physical Education, Social Work, and Sports Medicine form the Human Services component of the College. The department of Speech Pathology and Audiology offers an undergraduate program but it does not lead to teacher certification; certification is offered only at the graduate level in this department. Information about these departments and their programs will be found in the next portion of this catalog (except for Counselor Education, which offers only a graduate program). The university is accredited by the Commission on Higher Education of the Middle States Association. The program in Social Work is accredited by the Council on Social Work Education. The program in Athletic Training, in the department of Sports Medicine, is accredited by the National Association of Athletic Trainers. The programs in Teacher Education are accredited by the National Council for the Accreditation of Teacher Education (NCATE), and certified by the Pennsylvania Department of Education. A grade-point average of 2. 50 is required for graduation in all teacher education programs. For teacher certification, a student must pass the NTE (the National Teachers' Examination.) TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAMS California University of Pennsylvania has a long and distinguished history of preparing teachers for the schools of the Commonwealth. When you graduate you will join nearly 30,000 teacher education alumni. The College of Education and Human Services has developed and maintained a reputation of excellence in the preparation of teachers. Because of its accreditation by NCATE, and its requirement of the NTE, California's graduates are able to obtain a teaching certificate in every state in the Union. If you attend California University as a Teacher Education student you may enroll in any of the following majors: Comprehensive Special Education, Elementary Education (Kindergarten to Grade Six), Early Childhood Education (Nursery School to Grade Three), Technology Education, and Secondary Education. The Secondary Education Curriculum provides an opportunity to major in Science (Biology, Chemistry, Physics, Earth Science, General Science, or Environmental Education), English, Communication (English, Speech, COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES 109 and Theatre), Mathematics, Modem Foreign Languages (Spanish, French, German), and Comprehensive Social Science. Certification in Art Education is available through a cooperative program with Carlow College and with Washington. and Jefferson College. (See the Art Department, page 123, in this catalog.) It is also possible to have a dual major. For example, some students choose a dual major in Elementary/Special Education or Early Childhood/Special Education. The College of Education and Human Services also offers a special program for graduate nurses in the Public School Nursing Program. Dental Hygienists are also eligible for enrollment in a program leading to a Bachelor of Science Degree in Education and certification as a Public School Dental Hygienist. The programs in Gerontology, Athletic Training, Speech Pathology, and Social Work lead to a Bachelor of Science degree, but not to teacher certification, although it is possible to combine a major in Athletic Training with any Teacher Certification program. Upon completion of a Teaching Certification program in the College of Education and Human Services you will receive a Bachelor of Science Degree and an Instructional I certificate. All candidates for teaching degrees must also take the NTE. The certificate is your license to teach in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and is valid for up to six years of teaching in Pennsylvania whenever they might occur. In order to convert the Instructional I certificate into a lifetime valid Instructional II certificate you must have three years of successful teaching experience and a Master's Degree or you must complete six credits every five years. These credits may be undergraduate, graduate, or in-service credits or any combination. The only restriction is that these credits must be taken at a four-year institution. GENERAL EDUCATION Each program offered by the College of Education and Human Services is divided into at least two parts: general education, and area of specializ.ation. In addition, Teacher Education programs have requirements in Professional Studies. The exact requirements for each program will be found in the following portion of the catalog. The College of Education Council has adopted the following objectives for the general education portion of education programs: To develop in the prospective teacher: 1. The ability to communicate with adequate skill in the areas of speaking, writing, reading and listening; 2. Knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding in the natural sciences, the social sciences, technology, and the humanities; 3. The ability to promote better understanding and relationships among individuals and groups; and to provide the prospective teacher: 4. opportunities for development of leisure time and healthful living activities. 110 COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES General Requirements All students must achieve competency in English language skills at the level of Composition 1-11. Teacher Education students must take Oral Communication (COM 100) and General Psychology (PSY 100). Developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099 and EDE 100) are used to calculate grade point average and class standing but do not count toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog.) All students must take courses in the Humanities, the Natural Sciences, and the Social Sciences. Teacher Education students take courses in Health or Physical Activities. AREA OF CONCENTRATION Each of the areas of concentration has a sequence of courses and experiences which provide the knowledge necessary for professional competence in that particular area, or in the case of ~her education programs, for certification. In addition the methodology necessary to deliver that knowledge to children is provided in a variety of ways dependent upon the specialty area. Each one of the specialty areas in Teacher Education provides students with a variety of clinical experiences culminating in a full semester of student teaching experience. See the curricular requirements for each certification program, under the appropriate department in this catalog. PROFESSIONAL STUDIES A carefully planned sequence of six courses required of all education majors provides them with depth and breadth in the essentials of professional studies. These courses are Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Educational Psychology (PSY 208), Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210), Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (ESP 340), Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304), and Computers for Teachers (EDF 301). Three additional courses give further knowledge and experience to those in secondary education curricula: Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300), Introduction to Educational Requirements (EDS 430), and Developmental Reading in the Secondary School (EDS 465). Equivalent requirements are made in the Elementary/Early Childhood, Special Education, and Technology Education curricula. Requirements in oral and written communication and these courses assist in development of critical skills in communication and problem-solving. The models are soundly supported by comprehensive knowledge bases. All of these culminate in the semester-long student teaching experience where the various knowledge of social, historical, technological, legal, educational, and cultural topics is brought together in a manner that is both knowledge-based and experientially grounded, tested, and applied. Students are thus prepared not only for imparting the necessary knowledge but also for dealing with important matters of educational policy, school law, diverse cultural populations, and students with special needs. COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES 111 ADMISSION TO TEACHEREDUCATION Admission to the university is not a guarantee that a student majoring in education will be permitted to be admitted to Teacher Education, complete the program (which includes student teaching), and receive a teaching certificate. The College of Education and Human Services has established standards that all education majors must meet in order to complete the Teacher Education Program. Some of these standards are embodied in the Admission to Teacher Education Program, which must be initiated by the candidate during the semester following the completion of 64 credits. In order to be admitted, a candidate must meet the following requirements: 1. Pass the General Knowledge and Communication Skills subtests of the NTE. The test must be taken when the student has completed 48 credits. 2. Obtain a minimum grade point average of 2.50 in both the major area/area of specialization as well as in the overall grade point average. Transfer credits should be used in calculating the 2.50 in the major only. 3. Successfully complete pre-student teaching field experiences in: (a) Major area of speciali:zation; (b) Foundations of Education (EDF 100); (c) Educational Psychology (PSY 208). 4. Pass the College of Education and Human Service's speech and hearing test. 5. Obtain approval from the departmental advisor and major department chairperson (or designee). Dual majors and secondary education majors must have completed approval forms from advisors in both departments. 6. Complete at least 64 credits (including transfer credits) with a minimum of 12 credits completed in the major field at California University. 7. Obtain a personal interview and a positive recommendation from a member of the Committee for Admission to Teacher Education. 8. Obtain final approval from the Committee for Admission to Teacher Education. Admission to Teacher Education is a prerequisite to application for Student Teaching. It should be emphasized that the admission to Teacher Education Program, in total, is also designed for the student's growth in educational, experiential, and self-evaluative ways. PROFESSIONAL FIELD EXPERIE~CES Educators have observed that those who enter the teaching profession with a wide variety of contacts with young children, adolescents, and adults usually become superior teachers. Many of those who fail as teachers or remain mediocre throughout their careers lack such experiences. A program of Professional Field Experiences has been devised by each curriculum department. In some cases, these experiences include not only school activities but also activities in community agencies. Professional Field Experiences include all those contacts with children, youth, and adults (through observation, participation and teaching) that make a direct contribution to the understanding of individuals and their guidance in the teaching-learning process. 112 COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES California University students are placed in exemplary clinical and field experiences, devised and supervised by faculty in their appropriate curricula, in a diversity of educational sites and experiences. Placement is first effected in the freshman courses Foundations of Education and Educational Psychology. The second tier of clinical experiences is embedded in subject-related courses. These vary depending on the curriculum; for example, in the Elementary curriculum students enroll in Field Experience in Early Childhood, and Observation and Conference, both three-credit courses. In Technology Education students enroll in Technology/Society Education, which contains a field experience. All Secondary Education majors enroll in Problems of Secondary Education, which requires a Thursdayfree schedule devoted to field experience. Special Education courses are four-credit courses with a field experience attached to each course. The third tier is student teaching. University students are supervised closely by a professor from California and a cooperating teacher in the schools, all of whose duties are specified and contractually mandated; and the student teacher's work is regularly assessed as to the soundness and topicality of teaching procedures, professional conduct, and subject matter content. Gradually, student teachers are given increased responsibility for professional assignments, so that by the time of successful completion of the experience they are prepared to assume independent classroom authority. Field-based and clinical experiences are systematically selected to provide opportunities for education students to observe, plan, and practice in a variety of settings appropriate to the professional roles for which they are being prepared. Students participate in field-based and/or clinical experiences with culturally diverse and exceptional populations. These fieldbased and clinical experiences are sequenced to enable education students to develop the skills that will enable them to assume full responsibility for classroom instruction or other professional roles in schools. GRADUATION IN GENERAL STUDIES Candidates who do not meet the standards for admission to Teacher Education on initial application have two semesters in which to correct deficiencies and obtain admission. If still not approved, they may elect to transfer to another curriculum or, with special permission of the Dean, take 12 credits in lieu of student teaching and graduate without teacher certification. The latter option (waiver of student teaching and teaching certification) is also available to students who, for exceptional reasons, change their plans about career teaching but wish to complete their baccalaureate programs. The student must initiate, in writing and in person, a reasoned request to do so to the Director of Student Teaching. Such requests must be reviewed and approved by the Director of Student Teaching. If the waiver request and course credits in lieu of student teaching credits are approved, the student may earn a degree without teaching certification. (A notation to this effect is entered on the student's transcript.) COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES 113 STUDENT TEACHING Student te.aching, a major professional laboratory experience, is conducted under the supervision of the Director of Student Teaching. California University has four undergraduate te.aching programs: Elementary Education, Secondary Education, Technology Education, and Special Education. Students who are candidates for certification are required to earn twelve semester hours of credit in student teaching. However, student te.aching is a competency based program and may continue beyond one semester. Candidates are certified to te.ach only if they demonstrate ability to teach effectively. Teaching competency is determined by the Director of Student Teaching, the university supervisor, and the cooperating teacher or teachers. The student teacher is also required to take a practicum while student teaching. Student teachers are not generally permitted to enroll in other courses during the student teaching experience. Student te.aching is normally conducted in selected public schools located in the service area of the university. Alternative programs on an Indian reservation or Latino schools in the American Southwest and overseas experiences are also available. Interested students should discuss this possibility with the Director of Student Teaching in the February preceding student teaching. The institutional philosophy regarding student te.aching is to prepare students adequately to assume their professional responsibilities in the teaching profession in a democratic society and to develop their appreciation of their need for a mastery of the professional knowledge and skill essential to all teaching and special proficiencies in their area of speciali:zation. Student teaching is designed to provide a climate wherein the student may exhibit creativity and the ability to make critical judgments based upon knowledge and reason. Applications for student teaching may be secured at the Dean's Office and must be submitted in February for the next academic year. Before students may be assigned to this vital part of the Teacher Education Curriculum, they must: a. be admitted to Teacher Education; b. obtain departmental approval as having satisfactorily completed the required preparatory work; c. maintain a quality point average of 2.50 in the speciali:zation and overall; d. be admitted to Student Teaching. Transfer students are not assigned to student teaching until they have completed at least 24 credits of work in this university. Graduates of other colleges and universities must meet the requirements of admission to Teacher Education before being assigned to student teaching. STUDENT TEACHING FOR EXPERIENCED TEACHERS Teachers who have had one or more years of teaching experience may be permitted to complete the student teaching requirement by special arrangement after consultation with the 114 COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES Director of Student Teaching. The Director may allow the student to fulfill the student teaching requirement for the Bachelor of Science degree in Education by making a substitute requirement in keeping with the needs of the individual student. APPEAL PROCEDURE FOR CERTIDCATION STUDENTS Students appealing decisions regarding teaching certification should contact the Dean of Education and Human Services to discuss their concern. If accord is not reached at this level, the student may appeal to the Vice President for Academic Affairs. The final source of appeal is with the Certification Appeals Committee, Department of Education, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania. This step should be taken only if there is no possibility for a resolution at an earlier stage, and only if the student is convinced that arbitrary and/or capricious standards are applied. U.S. CITIZENSIDP - A REQUIREMENT FOR TEACHER CERTIDCATION IN PENNSYLVANIA No permanent certificate may be granted to any person who is not a citizen of the United States and no provisional certificate may be granted to any person who is not a citizen or who has not declared in writing to the Department of Education the intention of becoming a citizen. COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 115 COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS What is the College of Liberal Arts? What does Liberal Arts mean? What is a Liberal Arts student? Distinctive to the College and those who participate in it is the educational orientation. Common to definitions of the Liberal Arts are a number of characteristics which do establish a universal understanding: a broad and interdisciplinary course of study, a concern with human values and social issues, the ability to think analytically and to communicate effectively, and a global awareness and appreciation of people, places and their history. The goal of a liberal education, therefore, is to provide the student with opportunities to learn not only information about the world but to acquire basic analytic and communicative skills. Information and skills have no value in themselves; they are valuable insofar as they enrich life, by giving it greater meaning and by making it possible for individuals to adapt to changing employment, personal, and social demands. In essence a liberal arts education stresses the transferability of knowledge and skills from one circumstance or situation to another. The emphasis is not on fitting the individual to a job, but ensuring that the individual can meaningfully adapt to new personal and professional situations. In this statement the College closely aligns itself with the position found in Priorities for Pennsylvania's State System of Higher Education During the 1990's. The College of Liberal Arts incorporates the departments of Art, Communication Studies, Earth Science, English, Foreign Languages and Cultures, History and Urban Studies, Music, Philosophy, Psychology, Social Science, and Theatre. Those departments, and the Department of Business and Economics, collectively offer forty-two programs of study. (See the list on page 10 above). Course distribution sheets are available in the College Office; requirements are listed in the description of each program below for each program. These sheets specify what courses are required and how courses apply toward graduation. Just as there is no Liberal Arts Department, there is no Liberal Arts major. The Liberal Arts philosophy informs all programs of study within the College. Of these, some are highly structured while others are flexible. Within the General Education course of study, students are encouraged to explore a wide variety of course offerings as one approach in determining an appropriate major. A major, for those who have not done so previously, is to be selected by the end of the third regular semester or upon the completion of 45 credit hours. This does not prohibit students from changing their major, provided they complete the necessary form in the College Office. It does prevent students from taking courses that could result in the failure to graduate within eight regular semesters of study. Students who do not want a major limited to a single discipline have two degree program options: the Humanities and Fine Arts Major, and the Social Sciences Major. These reflect two thematic area studies. The curriculum in each is flexible and permits interdisciplinary study. The Humanities and Fine Arts majors are advised by faculty members in the Music Department. The Social Science majors are advised by faculty members in the Social Science Department. In keeping with this educational position, all students participate in the General Education course of study. This program, while permitting students a broad selection of 116 COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS specific courses, mandates that courses be taken in three categories: Humanities (one of which must be in the Fine or Performing Arts-Art, Music, or Theatre), Natural Sciences (one of which must be a laboratory course), and Social Sciences. A list of courses that will satisfy these requirements can be obtained in the College Office. The General Education core consists of 60 credits including Composition I (ENG 101) and Composition II (ENG 102). The area of concentration contains 68 credits. In neither section do developmental courses (ENG 100, MAT 098, MAT 099, and EDE 100) count toward graduation (see page 78 of this catalog). English language competency is essential to the exchange of ideas, the successful completion of course work and entrance into all areas of future employment. To insure that students will develop their language skills and will have the means to meet these expectations, the university requires that all entering students take the university's English placement examination. Initial course placement is based on the results of that examination. Students who do not pass the examination are required to take English Language Skills (ENG 100). Since a great deal of college performance incorporates the ability to express ideas clearly, all students are encouraged to take the two required composition courses during their first semesters at California University. Furthermore, all students majoring in any of the Liberal Arts are required to take three writing component courses. Not all courses designated as writing component courses are English courses. A list of approved courses can be secured from the College Office. The College supports, implements, and coordinates a number of activities that enhance its curricular program. It supports a Writing Center in Dixon 120. The Center, although committed to assisting students who have English language deficiencies, provides assistance to any faculty and student who wants to write better and more creatively. Working in both close proximity and intention, the Word Processing Laboratory provides assistance to persons wanting to create and edit papers on microcomputers. The Lab in room 110 of Dixon Hall and a computer classroom also are used to advance experimental teaching strategies in English. The School Psychology Clinic, Room 311 of the Morgan Learning Research Center, also is supported by the College. The Clinic in tum serves the campus community by permitting any student to receive free testing. Information about what tests are offered and when they are given can be obtained at the Psychology Department Office, Room 319, LRC. The College Office in Noss 103 coordinates activities of common interest across the College. One important concern shared by the College is the need to relate classroom instruction with experiences outside the classroom, experiences which can assist the student in determining career directions, including graduate education. Accordingly, the College supports and implements field experiences in such areas as Archaeology and the Earth Sciences. Equally important are the internship opportunities it works with departments to implement. What is an internship? For the greatest clarity of understanding, perhaps it would be helpful to ask what an internship is not. It is not cooperative education, individualiud instruction, nor a practicum. Cooperative education is paid ~mployment and receives no academic credit. It, however, does give students the opportunity to relate their education to career planning and preparation. Cooperative Education is handled through the Career COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 117 Planning and Placement Office on campus. A practicum, a course in which skills are developed by performing prescribed tasks, receives academic credit and is under the direction of a faculty member. No outside agency or supervisor is involved. Finally, individualized instruction designates a special arrangement by a student with a faculty member and the Dean to take a course not offered. For permission to be considered the following conditions must be present: The course is a regular University catalog course and the course is not scheduled to be taught in the semester in which it is desired or needed. Applications are available in the College Office. In contrast to all of these, an internship is a regularly offered course, is usually taken at an off-campus location and is under the dual supervision of an agency as well as a faculty supervisor. Internships are not job training programs, and students are not paid accordingly, although some internships provide compensation for expenses incurred by the student. Guidelines and applications for internships are to be secured from the office of the sponsoring department. Internships are an integral part of the educational program of the College wherever and whenever possible. Experience of students in settings where their academic knowledge and skills can be integrated is essential if education is to be perceived as relevant to daily living and to promote the idea that education is a continuous process, developed but not limited to the classroom. The College Office provides a number of student services. Among them are the review of a student's progress toward graduation and graduation clearance; transfer credit evaluation; consideration of requests for required course substitution approval; permission to take courses at other institutions for transfer to California University, including courses at schools outside the United States; the review of applications for readmission, and the processing for changes of academic major requests. Students who have questions with regard to College policies and procedures should contact the College Office, Noss 103. 118 COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY The College of Science and Technology includes the academic departments of Biological and Environmental Sciences, Business and Economics, Industry and Technology, Mathematics and Computer Science, Military Science, Nursing, and Physical Science. The College offers Associate and Bachelor's degree programs designed to prepare students to meet present and future requirements of specific professions. The objective of the Baccalaureate Degree programs of the College of Science and Technology is to prepare men and women for responsible positions in business, government, industry, and other complex organizations. As well, several of the college programs prepare students to undertake further study in graduate and professional school. Each curriculum includes both a general education component and a technical education component. The curricula are divided this way so that students will receive a well-rounded education and so that breadth of knowledge will increase their usefulness as professional employees and as citizens in the community. The General Education program for all four-year curricula of the College of Science and Technology provides the foundation for the students' liberal education. All students, regardless of major, are required to complete this portion of their program. The number of credits in General Education varies from program to program. Depending upon the specific curriculum, a student will be required to pursue one of two General Education course sequences. The first general education course sequence has a required component of 6-18 credits in skill areas, i.e., mathematics, writing, and speaking, and a common core of thirty credits divided in the following manner: Humanities Electives 6 credits Social Science Electives 6 credits Natural Science Electives 6 credits Free Electives 12 credits The only restrictions on courses students may select to fulfill these requirements are as follows: Basic Mathematics (MAT 098), Introduction to Algebra (MAT 099), English Language Skills (ENG 100), and Reading, Studying, and Listening Skills (EDE 100) are developmental courses and are not counted as satisfying any of the General Education requirements or towards graduation, although the grades earned in those courses are computed into the grade point average and the credits are used to determine class standing (see page 78). Students are not permitted to select courses in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and Natural Science areas from a discipline in which their program requires two or more courses from that discipline. Exceptions to this policy are: English and Literature: Only general survey and literature courses are permitted in the Humanities area. Communication Studies: Only non-performance based courses are permitted in the Humanities area. COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY 119 Students must fulfill their requirements in the Humanities, Social Sciences, and Natural Sciences by taking courses in two different disciplines within each area. The only exception to this policy is: A student can take two sequential foreign language classes to satisfy the Humanities electives requirement. The second General Education course sequence is the same as prescribed by the College of Liberal Arts. It consists of 6 credits of English Composition, 12 credits each in Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences and 18 credits in free electives. In the areas of Humanities, Natural Sciences and Social Sciences, electives must be selected from at least three different disciplines. One of the electives in Humanities must be in Fine Arts. The required General Education sequence for each curriculum is outlined in the appropriate program section. In the major area of concentration each Science and Technology curriculum includes the necessary technical, scientific, and support courses to provide the basis for advanced study in a professional area. Classroom theory is frequently supplemented by laboratory and workshop experiences where the interrelationship between general principles and application is emphasized. Advanced study in each discipline is emphasized during the junior and senior years. Additionally, several programs provide students with opportunities to participate in either an internship in business or industry or a clinical year of study in a hospital setting where the students' educational experiences are utilized in the workplace. 120 COLLEGE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY SCHOOL OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH The School of Graduate Studies and Research at California University of Pennsylvania was initiated in 1961. Presently, there are twenty-eight academic majors within the school leading to either the Master of Education, Master of Arts, or Master of Science degrees. In addition, there are state-accredited supervision certificates offered beyond the master's degree, in such areas as Industrial Artsfl'echnology Education and Reading. Over the past twenty-five years, students completing master's degrees at this institution have enjoyed success in pursuing doctoral degrees in various professions at reputable graduate schools throughout the United States. Many academic departments offer courses within their upper-division classes that can be taken by academically qualified undergraduates as well as graduate students. Courses offerings of the School of Graduate Studies and Research are not listed in this catalog. Information and schedules may be obtained by writing or calling the Graduate School at (412) 938-4187. DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 121 DEPARTMENT OF ACADEMIC DEVEWPMENT SERVICES Assistant Professor Geraldine M. Jones, chair. Professors Alton N. Powe, Melvin J. Sally; Associate Professors Joanne Raleigh, and Dean L. Wahl; Assistant Professors Carolyn Jones, JoAnn Rodriguez-Naeser. The Department of Academic Development Services helps students adjust to and cope effectively with academic and related non-academic challenges. Personal assistance is provided to promote success. Academic advisement and instruction, tutoring, and guidance give students opportunities to develop the motivation and skills needed for achievement of their educational goals. Services are provided to the entire student population; however, efforts are primarily intended for students whose educational or economic background makes. it difficult for them to complete a college degree program. Help is provided by both professional staff and student assistants in the following two areas. Tutorial and Instructional Services: Tutors provide assistance with courses in most academic areas. They review lecture notes, check and review textbook and other course materials, and teach course related vocabulary words. A three-credit course entitled Reading, Study and Listening Skills (EDE 100) is offered to incoming freshmen. Guidance Services: Counselors conduct initial interviews with each student; provide an orientation for all new students; help students to schedule and register; monitor each student's academic progress; and provide students with information concerning academic policy, procedures, and practices. Academic advisement and vocational guidance are also provided. Students are encouraged to discuss personal problems with counselors. All discussions are treated confidentially. In many cases, students are referred to one of the several other student services offices for additional assistance. The Department of Academic Development Services is located in Noss Annex. Office hours are from 8:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday. Anyone desiring services or information is encouraged to stop at the office or call 938-4230. The Department of Academic Development Services offers one course, Career Planning: XCP 194: CAREER PLANNING. A course designed to help individuals integrate educational and personal resources needed for employment and career success. Topics include self-evaluation, decision-making, resume development, interview techniques, and overall career strategies. (1 er.) DEPARTMENT OF ART 122 DEPARTMENT OF ART Assistant Professor Richard H. Grinstead, Chair. Associate Professor Raymond E. Dunlevy; Assistant Professors Leslie A. Parkinson, Richard Miecmikowski, Philip E. Schaltenbrand; Instructor David Olson PURPOSE The study of artistic expression is a study of the development of art forms such as sculpture and painting; the study of technique, that is, the use of color, design, and perspective to achieve the artist's objectives; and a retrospective on what a culture and society has seen, valued, and understood about its place in the world order. Art is a product of human creativity, a manifestation of the human spirit and meaning. The study of art is included in a liberal education because it informs students about the universal search for meaning and meaningful expression, about their past, and about how each person learns to move from a literal and concrete level of understanding to a more symbolic one. PROGRAMS The Art major can take (1) a general Art major or (2) an Art Certification program for teaching in either a primary or a secondary school. The Art program is very flexible. It directs students into various areas of art, namely art history, introductory art classes, and a series of studio courses in one of the following areas: drawing, painting, sculpture, weaving, ceramics, and printmaking. An art internship can assist students in developing professional relationships and in applying their classroom learning in professional settings. The program of study prepares students to enter graduate school as well as to pursue careers in professions utilizing art. Programs with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh The university also has an agreement with the Art Institute of Pittsburgh which permits a graduate of the Institute's two-year program to receive sixty credit hours toward a Bachelor of Arts degree from California University. A second agreement between the schools permits California University students to take courses during their junior year in visual communication at the Institute and receive up to thirty credits in transfer if they complete one year of full-time course work there. The junior year program with the Art Institute permits students to take courses not available at California University, specifically in the area of visual communication. This course of study prepares students for positions in commercial art - for example, advertising, publishing and corporate communication. Students acquire knowledge and experience in preparing art and layouts for reproduction. DEPARTMENT OF ART 123 Teacher Certification Program The certification program, which prepares art teachers for both primary and secondary schools, is undertaken in conjunction with area colleges since California University of Pennsylvania does not confer certification in art. Art courses are taken at California University. Art Education and student teaching courses (and, in one case an Art history course) are taken through Carlow College or Washington and Jefferson College; but the student receives the degree of B.A. in Art from California University of Pennsylvania. At Carlow College the student must complete Secondary Art Methods and Materials (AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE 409), Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE 410). AE 327 will be billed at current California University credit cost plus the usual studio fees. The student teaching courses will be billed at current Carlow tuition and fees for fulltime Carlow students. At Washington and Jefferson College the student must complete Art of the Americas (Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400), and Student Teaching (Ed 407). Students will be billed though Washington and Jefferson for these courses at evening/summer school rates. CAREERS Students can become professional artists in their area of specialization, although most will need to undertake graduate education if they are to be successful professionals. Commercial art, in advertising and in broadcast media, continues to be a major employer of Art students. Schools offer teaching positions for art educators who are certified and who have passed the NTE. Graduates with studio art training have opportunities to work in various museum settings, in art galleries and in interior decorating establishments. They also can seek positions in design departments and as art directors in large corporations. Artists can use their talents in conjunction with other areas of specialty, such as Biology, History, and Archaeology. Artists can be illustrators in these areas. Finally artists work in collaboration with persons in other disciplines or they personally undertake to link their study of art with another discipline. There are many, for example, scientific drawing, medical art being one interdisciplinary field; the utilization of art in therapy, for persons interested in the area of Psychology and Art; and the linkage of art, archaeology, and history, namely in the recording of artifacts and in reconstructive work. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ART Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credit, of Humanities; 12 credit, of Natural Sciences; 12 credit, of Social Sciences; 18 credit, of electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Art History I (ART 102); Art History II (ART 103); Art History m (ART (104); Drawing I (ART 110); Fiber Arts (ART 112); Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Printmaking I (ART 117); Sculpture I (ART 118); Design 2-D (ART 119); Drawing D (ART 210); required 45 credit, and 124 DEPARTMENT OF ART Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a studio (non-concentration). Studio Concentration:12 credita. Related Courses: 11 credits. or Options with the Art lmtitute Pittsburah: (A) Aa many as 60 credit& may be transferred by graduate, of the Art Institute to the Bachelor' s degree at California . (B) California University junior-year atudenta may take courses at the Art Institute totalling as many as 30 credits. BACHELOR OF ARTS WITH TEACHER CERTIFICATION IN ART (K-12) Curriculum: {A) General Education: CompositionI-D (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credit& of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences. (B) Professional Specialization: At California : Foundations of Education (EDF 100), Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304), Educational Testing and Measurement (EDS 430) . At Carlow College: Secondary Art Methods and Materials (AE 327), Elementary Art Student Teaching (AE 409) , Secondary Art Student Teaching (AE 410) . At Washington and Jefferson College: Art of the Americas (Art 205), Principles of Art Education (Art 400), and Student Teaching (Ed 407). {C) Area Concentration: Major courses 27 credits. Design I (ART 105); Art Appreciation (ART 106); Drawing I (ART 110); Design 2-D (ART 119); and Design 3-D (ART 120); 12 credits in a atudio concentration, beyond the introductory course and chosen in consultation with a faculty advisor; 12 additional credits in Art: Ceramics I (ART 113); Painting I (ART 116); Sculpture I (ART 118); Printmaking (ART 117); 15 credit& of Humanities electives, including Weaving (ART 114) or Jewelry (ART 255) or Stained Glau (ART 115); Art History I (ART 102); Art History D (ART 103); and 14 credits of electives including course ■ required by college selected for accreditation. or Pt111rsyl~a1"a CtrtifkaJio,r requires a sallefactory score o,r tht NTE. ART COURSES Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. +ART 102 . ART HISTORY I: PREHISTORIC TO GOTHIC . A study of art from prehistoric man to and including the art of the Middle Ages . This course will relate artistic achievements with religious , social, political, and philosophical attitudes of the times. (3 crs .) S +ART 103. ART HISTORY D: RENAISSANCE TO BAROQUE. A study of Western Art specifically dealing with the Renaissance and the Baroque art of Europe. This course will relate how the social, religious, political, and philosophical attitudes influenced artistic productions. (3 crs.) F +ART 104 . ART HISTORY ID: ROMANTICISM, CONTEMPORARY. A study of the art of the modem world beginning with Neoclauicism and Romanticiam and continuing through the Twentieth Century. Social force, that affect artistic expreuion are considered. (3 crs.)F + ART 105 . DESIGN I: An examination of elements and principles used in visual composition. The atudent use, a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and practice of art fundamentals. (3 crs .) DEPARTMENT OF ART 125 + ART 106. ART APPRECIATION. An introduction to the major movements in art which helped ahape welllcm civilization. Thia course is a survey of hiatorical and contemponry approaches to painting, aculpture and architecture. (3 era.) F S +ART 110. DRAWING I. A beginning course in the development of dnwing akilla and technique1atre11ing line, contour and value studies, and the study of linear and areal perspective. The course atresses rendering techniques and the visual 1kil11 necessary for students to dnw what they see. F S ART 112. FIBER ARTS. The course ia an introduction to the world of fiber art. Emphaaia ia on explontion of both tnditional and contemponry fiber cnft, from tnditional tapeatry and aculptunl basketry to functional clothing and whimsical toys. The student will work with basketry, weaving, batiks, stitchery, quilting, and applique to create exciting, imaginative art. (3 era.) F S + ART 113. CERAMICS I. An introductory explontion of clay through hand building techniques and the potter'• wheel. Students will examine the various forms and functions of the cenrnic vessel. The course will focua on forming processes and the glazing and firing of pieces made in the atudio. (3 era.) F S + ART 114. WEAVING . Thia ia a basic, introductory course in four-hameaa weaving . The atudent ia instructed in the method of determining warp length and width, the threading of both table and floor looms and varioua loomcontrolled and hand-manipulated weaves. Both tnditional and contemponry pieces can be designed and both functional and non-functional work can be executed. (3 era.) S +ART 115. STAINED GLASS I. An introduction to the very basic ■ of glasa cutting, finiahing, and aoldering technique,. Emphasis ia on the copper foil method of Louis Tiffany; however, the atudent may alao choose to work with earning, etching, sand blaating on glass, and beveling in the construction of their projects. (3 era.) F + ART 116. PAINTING I. An introduction to the fundamentals of painting. Emphasis ia placed on fundamental techniques including the study of light and shadow, color intensity control and projection and recession of objects in space. Work and exercises are done primarily in oil paints. Work in watercolor or acrylic may be done with prior approval of the instructor. (3 era.) F S +ART 117. PRINTMAKING I. The course is designed to develop intereat and techniques in the making of woodcuts, lithognphs, etchings, engnvings, serignphs, monoprints, and photo print processes. (3 era.) F S + ART 118. SCULPTURE I. Introduction to the basic language, elements, media, tools, techniques and principles of organization used in sculpture. The basic techniques of manipulation, subtnction, subatitution and addition will be covered, involving different media and tools. (3 era.) F S +ART 119. DESIGN 2-D. An examination of elements and principles used in two-dimensional visual composition. The student uses a variety of media to solve problems in the theory and pnctice of art fundamentals. (3 era.) F +ART 120. DESIGN 3-D. An examination of the elements and principles used in three-dimensional visual composition. These include all the elements and principles used in two-dimensional design, as well as the concepts of mass and volume . (3 crs.) S ART 210. ORAWING ll. Continued development of dnwing skills and techniques ■tressing line, contour and value studies. The course stresses interpretative dnwing in both tnditional media and in computer aided dnwing and design. (3 era.) S + ART 211. COMMUNICATION DESIGN. This atudio course provides hands-on experience using design tools and techniques to create pictorial symbols which communicate ideas in a universal language. The course also explores the hiatory of pictures and symbols used as language . (3 era.) F 126 DEPARTMENT OF ART ART 216. STAINED GLASS Il. This course provides further historical facts concerning stained glass and the influence of contemporary design and construction on stained glass compositions. The course includes an introduction to kiln firing, sandblasting, acid etching, beveling, and the application of these methods in glass construction. (3 en.) ART 232 . MICROCOMPUTER AS A TOOL FOR THE ARTIST. This course introduces the art major to microcomputen and appropriate hardware/software for art production in various media. It is a studio course in which worb of art are developed with the aid of the computer. Art majon must have completed at least two studio requirements prior to taking this course. (3 en.) S ART 234. BASIC PHOTOGRAPHIC METHODS FOR ARTISTS. A course that teaches basic information and skills necessary to produce graphics presentations on • computer as well as the transfer of those presentations onto video tape, so as to produce video slide showa, video titling, simple character generation and animation.(3 en.) + ART 245. TAPESTRY WEAYING. An introduction to both traditional and contemporary tapestry techniques. Emphasis is on imaginative use of traditional techniques with each student expected to design and execute creative, well-crafted woven pieces in a variety of unusual material. (3 en.) + ART 255 . JEWELRY I. An introduction to basic metal shaping and stone setting, using techniques in cutting, shaping, piercing, fusing, and appliqueing wire and lheet silver, bra11 and copper into contemporary jewelry forms. (3 en.) F + ART 260. WATERCOLOR I. Basic watercolor techniques. Emphasis is placed on both transparent and opaque water colon. (3 en.) S +ART 275. FABRICS. An introduction to the various 111rfacc treatments of common and unusual materials. Emphasis is on contemporary applications of traditional techniques, 111ch as stitchery, fabric painting, silk screen, stenciling, tic dye and batik, with the student expected to design both imaginative and innovative fabric art forms. (3 en.) F S ART 193, 293, 393, 493 . CERAMIC STUDIOS. Advanced courses in ceramic skills and techniques on the potter' , wheel and in-hand forming methods. Considerable emphasis will be placed on glazing and firing . Prerequisite: Ceramics I. (3 en.) F S ART 299, 399, 425, 499 . FIBER ARTS STUDIOS . The fiber studio concentration explores a large spectrum of contemporary textile techniques. Areas for investigation include, for example, 111rface and textile painting, and the design of stuffed sculpture and fabric toys . Emphasis is, at all times, on innovative design, imagination in the utilization of technique and material, as well as general craftsmanship . (3 en.) F S ART 196,296,396,496 . PAINTING STUDIOS. A series of painting studios develop proficiencies in pamtmg techniques, rendering skills, and the visual analysis of forms. Students explore a variety of painting methods, 111bjccts and themes. The goal is for each student to achieve a unique approach to form and content. (3 en.) F s ART 197, 297, 397, 497. PRINTMAKING STUDIOS. The studio sequence enables students to punue printmaking technique, in depth. Students will also be expected to demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of materials and the use of 111ch in the various media. (3 en.) F S ART 198, 298,398,498 . SCULPTURE STUDIOS. The studio courses enable students to experiment with many types of materials which can be used as sculpture. They will be expected to impose on themselves problems which demonstrate critical thinking and analysis of materials. Prerequisite: Sculpture I. (3 en.) F S ART 303. SECONDARY ART METHODS . A study of the development of secondary art students, as well as the study of materials and their utilization in the development of a secondary art program. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF ART 127 ART 329. ART INTERNSHIP. Supervised experience providing the specific technical skills used in the art world outside the classroom and studio - e.g., mounting exhibits, techniques of art restoration, graphic arts production techniques, and promoting arts and cultural events. 0/ A credit) ART 337. FOLK POTTERY OF SOUTHWESTERN PENNSYLVANIA. An introduction to the history and process of salt glazed stoneware, as it developed and functioned in Southwestern Pennsylvania during the second half of the nineteenth century. (3 crs.) ART 355. JEWELRY Il. An advanced course in fabrication with additional work in enameling and casting . Emphasis is on imaginative design, craftsmanship and evident skill in each technique. (3 crs.) ART 360. WATERCOLOR Il. A course designed to further the study of transparency and opaque watercolor. Includes techniques in gouache, egg tempera, and fresco painting. (3 crs.) ART 361. VIDEO ART/DESIGN. Provides advanced information and skills necessary to produce graphics presentations on a computer and transfer those presentations onto video tape . Production of such products as video slide shows, video titling, simple character generation and animation of video screens. (3 crs.) ART 460. SELECTED TOPICS . This course provides material not covered in regular art studios or art history classes. It affords faculty and students the opportunity to explore new ideas and techniques on selected topics . (3 crs.) EDE 205 . ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES . A course required for Elementary Education majors. Emphasis is placed on the nature of creativity and its value in the development of the whole child. Creativity is given personal meaning through the exploration of art materials and techniques. The role of the classroom teacher teachiui art is established. (3 crs.) F S 128 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES DEPARTMENT OF BIOWGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES BIOLOGY (BIO) ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES (ENS) MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY MORTUARY SCIENCE PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY WASIIlNGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING Professor William G. Kimmel, chair; Associate Professor Edwin M. Zuchelkowski, assistant chair. Professors Jan W. Balling, Foster E. Billheimer, Thomas P. Buckelew, Raymond A. Catalano, William E. Gabor, Barry B. Hunter, Ewald C. Krueger, C. Allan Miller, Thomas C. Moon, Jeanette Mullins, Marc A. Sylvester; Associate Professor Mitchell M. Bailey; Assistant Professors David F. Boehm, John P. Carroll, Brian K. Paulson. The Department of Biological and Environmental Sciences is housed in a modem, multi-million dollar four-story building, equipped with the latest in biological and environmental science instruments. Specialized areas include both scanning and transmission electron microscope facilities, an animal room, greenhouse, herbarium, plant growth facilities, radiation laboratory, museum and extensive photographic facilities. Teaching laboratories are equipped for the study of anatomy, botany, cytology, ecology, embryology, entomology, genetics, microbiology, parasitology, physiology, radiation biology, zoology, mammalogy, water pollution biology, ichthyology, animal behavior, biometry, ethology, environmental toxicology, environmental physiology, solid waste management, air quality monitoring, dendrology, ornithology and wildlife biology. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BIOLOGY This is an intensive scientific curriculum which prepares students for graduate work in the biological sciences and career work in many biologically related areas. The major emphasis of this program is to provide the student with a broad scientific core of courses, including studies in chemistry, physics, mathematics, and biology. Students have the opportunity to select a wide range of biological elective courses that best fulfill their need for future work or graduate study ranging from the molecular to the population level. Practical laboratory experience emphasizes critical thinking and the use of instrumentation to study living systems. Career opportunities include preparation for graduate work in biology and related fields, for industrial research, for government research, for careers as a medical illustrator, in public health, and in the many health-related fields. DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 129 Curriculum: (A) General Education: Engliah Compo■itionl & II (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credita ofHumanitie■; 12 credita of Natural Sciences; 12 credita of Social Science■; 18 credita of free electives. (B) Area Coacentration: Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology (BIO 120); Genetic ■ (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); 22 credita of elective counca in Biology (cho■cn to include certain counc■ in botany, zoology, phy■iology, cell and molecular and ecology); General Cbemiltry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Cbemiltry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); General Phy1ic1 I & II (PHY 121 & 122); Calculu■ I (MAT 281) or Buie Calculus (MAT 273). or BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN BIOLOGY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) General Education: 15 crcdita in Humanities, including Composition I (ENG 101) and Composition II (ENG 102); 11 credita in Natural Sciences including Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331), General Phy1ic1 I (PHY 121), and College Algebra (MAT 181) or Pre-Calculus (MAT 199), or Calculua I (MAT 281); 9 credita in Social Science; 3 credita in Health or Physical Activitiea; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Paychology (PSY 101); 3 credita of Free Electives. (B) Profewonal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology: (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa and Meaaurcmcnta in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatrcaming Exceptional Lcarncn (EDU 340); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301). (C) Professional Specialization: Required: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology (BIO 120); Genetics (BIO 318). 16 credita ■elected from four Biology Core areaa . Pennsylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. See also the section on General Science Certification, on page 298 in this catalog. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES The Environmental Studies Program prepares students for career work in environmental science and ecology-related areas and for graduate work. The major emphasis of the program is to provide the student with a broad core of courses in biology, supplemented with courses in chemistry, physics, and mathematics. All students have the opportunity to select from a wide range of science elective courses in order to fulfill their need for future work or graduate school. Almost all courses include a laboratory or field component in which students bring theory, methodology, and instrumentation to bear on specific problems. A senior independent research problems class (which limits enrollment to fewer than 10 students for more effective learning) gives the student practical experience with all phases of a research problem-literature review, experimental design, data collection., analysis, interpretation and scientific writing. Some of the topics that have been covered include water pollution biology, small mammal population dynamics, plant and animal species 130 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES diversity, comparisons between different types of habitats, shorebird food selection, the effects of acid mine drainage on the distribution of streamside terrestrial vegetation, and the effects of strip mining on ecological succession. A steady demand exists for such environmental scientists as wildlife biologists, fishery biologists, water analysis technicians, air pollution control monitors, environmental health technicians, and interpretative naturalists. Many graduates are employed in these areas by private industry and by state and federal organizations. Some graduates further their education through work leading to the Master of Science or Doctor of Philosophy degrees and teach and do research at a college or university. Options: Environmental Conservation Environmental Resources Environmental Science Environmental Pollution Control Wildlife Biology Curriculum: (A) General Education (Environmental Conservation and Environmental Resources Tracks): English Composition I & II (ENG IOI & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Pre-Calculus (MAT 199); Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of free electives. (B) Environmental Consenation Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); General Chemistry I & II (CHE IOI & 102); Analytical Chemistry (CHE 261); Field Biology (ENS 205); Conservation ofBiological Resources (BIO 206); Game and Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); Dendrology (BIO 442); Environmental Research Problems (ENS 459) ; Biotic Communities (BIO 308); Biometry (BIO 466); Design & Analysis (ENS 495). 21 credits of the following recommended Electives: Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445); Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Plant Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336) : Soil Science (BIO 334) : Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316) . (C) Environmental Resources Track: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Man and His Environment (ENS 100); Environmental Geology (EAS 231); General Chemistry I (CHE 101) and II (CHE 102); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Contemporary Issues in Biology (BIO 103); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Map and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 272); Soil Science (BIO 334); Earth Resources (EAS 232): Mineralogy (EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Coastal Geomorphology and Marine Resources (EAS 363); Historical Geology (EAS 200); Field course in Geology, Biology, or Hydrology. 22 credits of the following electives (at least one course from each group) : GROUP A - Meteorology (EAS 241); Climatology (EAS 242); Hydrology (EAS 202); Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430) . GROUP B - Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Solid Waste Management (ENS 431). GROUP C - Geochemistry (CHE 255); Geophysics (PHY 235); Reservoir Evaluation (PET 455); Micropaleontology (EAS 350). GROUP D - Computer Science II (CSC 222); Environmental Chemistry (PHS 136); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373). (D) General Education (Environmental Science and Environmental Pollution Control Tracks) : English Composition I & II (ENG 101 & 102) ; Formal Logic (PHI 312); Basic Calculus (MAT 237) or Calculus I (MAT 281); Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Computer Science I (CSC 121) or Pascal (CSC 128) . 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits Free Electives . (E) Environmental Science Track: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); Ecosystems Ecology (BIO 316); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Biometry (BIO 466); Environmental Research Problems (ENS 459); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); General Physics I & II (PHY 121 & 122); Genetics (BIO 318); Evolution (BIO 478); Design and Analysis (ENS 495) . 18 credits from the following Animal Ecology and/or Plant Ecology Cores: ANIMAL ECOLOGY CORE: Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (BIO 305); Ornithology (BIO 337); Entomology (BIO 445); Ichthyology (BIO 435); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488); Ethology (BIO 441); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Parasitology (BIO 327); Herpetology (BIO 433). PLANT ECOLOGY CORE: Plant Ecology (BIO 314); Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Soil Science (BIO 334); Dendrology (BIO 442); Biotic Communities (BIO 308). DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 131 (F) Eanronmental Pollution Control Track: Principles of Biology (BIO I IS); General Zoology(BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemillry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemillry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); Analytical Chemillry I (CHE 261); Ecosyatema Ecology (BIO 316); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488); Microbiology (BIO 326); Biometry (BIO 466); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Laboratory Instrumentation (BIO 430); Techniques in Water and Waatewater Analy■is (ENS 341); Air Quality Monitoring (ENS 430); Solid Waste Management (ENS 431); Environmental Regulations (ENS 432); Environmental Research Problema (ENS 459); Deaign and Analyais (ENS 495). S credits of related elective, aelected with advi10r'1 approval from counea in ornithology, entomology, dendrology, mammalogy, 10il acience, and plant taxonomy . (G) Wildlife Biology Track: Principle• of Biology (BIO 115); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemistry I & II (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & II (CHE 331 & 332); Genetics (BIO 319); Principles of Wildlife Management (ENS 420); Wildlife Management Techniques (ENS 423); Dendrology (BIO 442) or Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Ornithology (BIO 337); Mammalogy (BIO 400); Biometry (BIO 466) or De■ign and Analyaia (BIO 495); 6 credits of the following recommended elective,: Oral Communication (COM 101); Principle, of Management (MGT 201); Land Uae Planning (GEO 317); Urban Planning (HIS 234); 12 credita of the following recommended electives: Microbiology (BIO 326); Parasitology (BIO 327); Soil Science (BIO 334); Herpetology (BIO 433); Ichthyology (BIO 435); Ethology (BIO 441); Entomology (BIO 445); Environmental Research Problema (ENS 459); Evolution (BIO 478); Environmental Physiology (BIO 486); Water Pollution Biology (BIO 488). ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION ENDORSEMENT PROGRAM Environmental education should be a life-long process. It is a way of looking at life, fostering awareness of other life and of interrelationships, and learning to recognize the effects (both good and bad) man has on his physical and biological surroundings. The need for teachers to direct environmental programs and provide environmental teaching is pressing. The courses listed below are designed to develop an individual's ability to teach and/or direct the development of a school's environmental education program. Cumculum: Man and His Environment (ENS 100). Two of the following: Environmental Chemillry (PHS 136); Environmental Biology (BIO 105); Environmental Geology (EAS 235). At lea&t one in each of the following areas: 1. Laboratory Science: Ecosyllema Ecology (BIO 316); Principle■ of Biology (BIO 115); Physical Geography (EAS ISi); Meteorology (EAS 241); Man and His Physical World (PHS 111); 2 . Techniques and Procedurea: Plant Taxonomy (BIO 336); Planning and Development of Areas and Facilities (XUA 416); Recreation and Park Adminiatration (XUA 400); 3. Outdoor Activities: Conaervation and Biological Re10urce1 (BIO 206); Game and Habitat Management (ENS 421); Wildlife Techniques (ENS 422); 4. Human Involvement: Continuing Problems in Human Ecology (BIO 106); Human Ecology (GEO 240). BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY Advances in medical science have occurred at an accelerating pace in recent years, and great progress has been made in the diagnosis and treatment of disease. Research findings in biochemistry and advances in instrumentation technology have increased the quality of American health care and have generated a growing demand for people trained in the field of medical technology. The Medical Technology program prepares students to hold key positions in the medical laboratory. 132 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES The Medical Technology program of this university is approved by the American Society of Clinical Pathologists, a member of the American Medical Association (AMA). California University of Pennsylvania is formally affiliated with eight hospital schools of medical technology. The program involves a three-year program on campus and one year (12 months) at one of the approved affiliated schools or one acceptable to California University of Pennsylvania. Upon the completion of the clinical or internship year the student is granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California University of Pennsylvania as well as a certificate in medical technology from the hospital school. In addition, graduates take the national test given by the Registry of Medical Technologists of the American Society of Clinical Pathologists. The students who successfully pass this examination become registered medical technologists M.T. (A.S.C.P.) The University's hospital affiliations include: Allegheny General Hospital Pittsburgh, PA Altoona Hospital Altoona, PA Conemaugh Valley Memorial Hospital Johnstown, PA Latrobe Area Hospital Latrobe, PA St. Vincent Hospital Erie, PA Washington Hospital Washington, PA West Penn Hospital Pittsburgh, PA To enhance the student's opportunity of being accepted by one of the affiliated hospital schools of medical technology for the fourth or clinical year, it is strongly recommended that the student maintain a minimum of a 3.0 quality point average in the natural sciences (Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics) and a minimum of a 3.0 overall quality point average. Qualified men and women are in demand as medical technologists to hold responsible positions in blood banking, microbiology, parasitology, chemistry, serology, hematology, and nuclear medicine, as well as in supervisory positions in laboratories. Curriculum: (A) Geaeral Education: English Composition I (ENG IOI); Principle ■ of Management (BUS 201); 6 credita in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credita in Natural Science ■; 12 credita in free electives. (B) Ana oCCooceotratioo: Principle■ ofBiology (BIO I IS); General Zoology (BIO 120); Human Anatomy (BIO 306); Microbiology (BIO 326); Human Phy■iology (BIO 328); Parasitology (BIO 327); Genetics (BIO 318); Clinical Microbiology (BIO 426); Laboratory Inatrumentation (BIO 430); General Chemistry I & D (CHE 101 & 102); Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 361); General Physics I & D (PHY 121 & 122); Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331); College Algebra (MAT 181). The following courses are llrongly recommended by the Hoapital Schools of Medical Technology: English Composition D (ENG 102); Organic Chemistry D (CHE 302); Mycology (BIO 407); Radiation Biology (BIO 408); Biochemistry I (CHE 441); Statistic■ (MAT 215). Approved Medical Technology (29 credits). PREPROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY Students in the health professions commit themselves to a lifelong process of selfeducation; therefore, the development of scholarly motivation, independence, and creativity are vital to professional medical competence. Acquiring an understanding of people, their societies, and their history is a valuable asset in the practice of the health professions. Consequently, a liberal education in the humanities and the arts, as well as in the social and DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 133 natural sciences, provides the best professional preparation. In addition, the student should demonstrate competence and concentrated study in a curriculum or field of special interest. Although students interested in the health professions do not necessarily major in Biology, they should plan to take a significant number of biology courses. Varied program offerings make it possible to satisfy requirements for pre-medical, predental, pre-veterinary, pre-podiatry, pre-pharmacy, pre-chiropractic, and other pre-health fields. Those interested should contact the Biology Department to discuss their career plans. Curriculum: (A) General Education: English Composition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Principles of Biology (BIO I 15); General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); General Physics I & Il (PHY 121 & 122); Basic Calculus (MAT 273) or Calculus I (MAT 281); Genetics (BIO 318); Human Anatomy (BIO 306) or Comparative Vertebrate Anatomy (BIO 305); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Cell Biology (BIO 480); Microbiology (BIO 326); 9 credits of related electives in Biology (chosen from amon, courses in parasitology, histology, embryology, clinical microbiology, and biochemistry). BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN MORTUARY SCIENCE In today's world the expansion of knowledge occurs at such a rapid rate that the average person cannot keep pace with information that affects his life. In professional careers a broad understanding of the changing world is closely related to success. In the health related professions, we find phenomenal growth in knowledge, technology and improved delivery systems of service to the public. This expansion of preparation for the mortuary sciences is one way that can serve the practitioner to better serve society. Career Outlook Highly qualified individuals can be successful as members of a well-established mortuary firm or in an individuali:red firm. Careers in teaching and research are also available. Objectives The program objectives are: • to prepare the student with an academic background that can challenge the changing technology and demands of society; • to expand the opportunities for entry into a technological world. Curriculmn OtTered The California University program is accredited through the Middle States Association of College and Secondary Schools. The mortuary science year, through affiliation with the Pittsburgh School of Mortuary Science, is accredited through the American Board of Funeral Service Education, National Association of Colleges of Mortuary Science, National Conference of Funeral Service Examining Boards of the United States, Inc. This program 134 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES is designed for three years of approved study on campus and one year of study at the Pittsburgh Institute of Mortuary Science. Upon completion of the program, the student is granted a Bachelor of Science degree from California and a diploma from the Pittsburgh Institute. Upon completion of a one-year resident intern period, the candidate applies for the State Board Examinations and licensure as a funeral director and embalmer. The curriculum requires 128 credits: 100 credits in required and elective California University courses and 28 credits for the institute year at an approved mortuary science institute. Curriculum: (A) Geaenil Education: English Compo1ition I & Il (ENG 101 & 102); General Paychology (PSY 100); Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100); 6 credita in Humanities; 6 crcdita in Social Science,; 6 credita in Natural 12 credita of free elective,. (B) Area of Coacmtration: Principles of Biology (BIO 115); General Botany (BIO 125); General Zoology (BIO 120); Human Anatomy (BIO 306); Human Physiology (BIO 328); Microbiology (BIO 326); General Chemistry I & Il (CHE 101 & 102); Organic Chemistry I & Il (CHE 331 & 332); College Algebra (MAT 101); Accounting I (BUS 111); Ethics (PHI 220); Psychology of Adjustment (PSY 315); Social Psychology (PSY 211); Principle• of Sociology (SOC 100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Sculpture I (ART 118); Mathematica of Finance (MAT 171); Bu1inc11 Writing I (ENG 211); Principles of Management (BUS 201); The Family (SOC 220); Introduction to Social work: (SOW 105); Death and Dying (EDF 318); Oral Communication (COM 101); Animal Hiatology (BIO 325); Parasitology (BIO 327); 8 credita of advanced Biology courses selected with adviaor'• approval. Science■; THE WASHINGTON HOSPITAL SCHOOL OF NURSING REGISTERED NURSE PROGRAM The Washington Hospital School of Nursing (WHSN) Registered Nurse Program is a cooperative venture between California University and the WHSN. Entrance into the program requires successful performance by the prospective student on the qualifying examination given by the WHSN and subsequent acceptance for admission to both the WHSN and California University of Pennsylvania. The program of study leading to the certificate of completion given by WHSN and licensure as a registered nurse, following successful completion of the prescribed curriculum and examinations as required by law, is 27 months in duration. The cooperative nature of this program is based upon the university providing a minimum of 40 credits in traditional science and general education courses and the WHSN providing the traditional nursing courses and clinical experiences required for certification as a registered nurse. Because of the necessity by WHSN to limit enrollment, the availability of university classes may be limited. This is particularly critical with regard to the science classes, Anatomy and Physiology I and II, Chemistry for the Health Sci~glS, Basic Microbiology, and Basic Principles of Nutrition where, depending upon circumstances, enrollment may be restricted to students who have been formally accepted into the WHSN Program. Individuals who wish to earn a degree from the university may continue in the Bachelor of Science Nursing Program offered by the university following completion of the WHSN Program. However, other qualifications and/or examinations may be required prior to entry into the university BSN Program. (See the description of the Nursing Program, pages 288-289 in this catalog.) DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 135 BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES COURSES (BIO) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). +BIO 103. CONTEMPORARY- ISSUES IN BIOLOGY. Basic biological principle, are applied to the undentanding of current social-biological proble1111 and how these relate to an individual'• penonal life. Topics included are human sexuality, nutrition, health and disease, evolution, behavior, and the divenity of life. For atudenu not majoring in Biology . Three ~ecture houn weekly. (3 en.) + BIO 104. BASIC CARE OF PLANTS. A genenl introduction to the baaic care of planu. Studenu are introduced to technique, that will make the growing and caring of planu, indoon and out, le11 complicated and more fun. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) BIO 106. CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN HUMAN ECOLOGY. An extensive examination of man's impact on the bioaphere, hydrosphere, lithosphere, and atmosphere, with emphaais on: (1) pollution of aquatic and tripospheric 1yatc1111; (2) other pollutanu in human ecosyatc1111; (3) human population dynamics in relation to disease, malnutrition, genetics, and food. Lectures, possibly supplemented with various field trips. Prerequisite: BIO 103. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) + BIO 108. BIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS. A one-semeatcr preparation course in biology for studenu who mull take BIO 115 a■ part of their curriculum and who require additional training in the biological sciences. Topics are selected to deal with the fundamental concepts that are requisite to entrance into BIO 115. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) BIO 112. BIOLOGY OF SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES. A non-major Biology course pertaining to the causes and consequences of human sexually transmitted diseases. Descriptions of the microorganis1111 which cause STD■ and the facton which are involved in their dissemination will be studied. Special emphaais will be directed toward■ human behavior pattema and mores which are conducive to contracting these venereal diseases. Viral STD1 (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome, Human Papilloma Disease, Herpes Simplex II and Hepatitis B) will be emphaaized because they can cause severe diseases or even death in humans; however, the more common venereal diseases (syphilis, gonorrhea, lymphogranuloma, venereum, chancroid and candidiasis) will also be studied . Prerequisite: None. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) BIO 115. PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY. Structures and functions common to all organisms; cell atructure and function, the chemical aspecu of biological syatema, eneriy and materials balance in nature, developmental biology, principle• of genetic ■, evolution, and ecology. Prerequisite: Science majon. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) BIO 120. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. A comprehensive phylogenetic survey of the animal kingdom, with emphaais on evolutionary change, and the interrelationships of animals with their environment. Laboratory studies of represenutive memben of the major phyla. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en) BIO 125. GENERAL BOTANY. A survey of form and function of the major plant groups as well II the bacteria, algae, water mold ■, ■lime molds, and fungi within the overall framework of a modem phylogenetic syatcm of clauification. Prerequisite: BIO 115. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 crs.) BIO 206. CONSERVATION OF BIOLOGICAL RESOURCES. A study of biological aspects relating to plants and animals directly auociated with water, soil, and environmental changea. Numerous field trips are taken into areas 136 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES of Western Pennsylvania to obser,,e land reclamation, conscr,,ation pncticea, and basic problems confronting human populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125 . Three lecture houn and a three-hour field trip . (4 en.) S BIO 305 . COMPARATIVE VERTEBRATE AN ATOMY. A compantive study of the vertcbnte organs and organ systems, primarily concentnting on comparing the nbbit with man. Other chordate■ arc used aa ancillary material. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory houra weekly . (4 era.) BIO 306. HUMAN ANATOMY . A basic study of the structure of the human body. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 & 120 or penniuion of the instructor. Three lecture houra and three labontory houn weekly. (4 era.) F BIO 307. PLANT ANATOMY. A detailed study of atructunl differentiations, especially in the hiaher planta: the structure of mcriBtcms and developmental changes in their derivatives. Prerequisites: BIO 115 & 125. Three lecture houra and three labontory hours weekly. (4 crs.) F BIO 308 . BIOTIC COMMUNITIES. The principles of the structure and nature of various biotic communities arc considered from the concrete stand to the biome level. Factors which limit, maintain, and modify biotic assemblages arc presented qualitatively and quantitatively from the local to the regional portions of the communities. Interrelationships between organisms and environment in reference to the organism's morphological, physiological, and behavionl adaptations. The dynamics of ecological succession arc stressed, illustnting the permanence of climax communities over geological time. Ecological techniques and methods to quantify and qualify the community arc pursued in the field and laboratory. Extended field trips may be required. Prerequisite,: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . Three lecture hours and three houra of laboratory/field experience weekly. (4 era.) S BIO 314. PLANT ECOLOGY. >-t,consideration of the plant communities which arc influenced by both biotic and physical factors . The emphasis is on the vegetation of Pennsylvania, especially in the area of the Appalachian Mountains. Laboratory work provides the student with the opportunity to become familiar with modem methods of vegetational analysis and community sampling . Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours w~kly. (4 crs.) S BIO 316 . ECOSYSTEMS ECOLOGY . An introductory study of the dynamics of the biological, physical, and mathematical relationships and interrelationships that proceed within various ecosystems on the earth . Emphasis is placed on biogcochemical cycling, energy cycling, population dynamics, productivity, and pertinent problems concerning ecoayBtcm deterioration. Field and labontory studies concerning various processes openting within an ecosystem. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . General Chemistry I and II and College Algebn recommended. Three lecture hours and three hours of laboratory/field experience weekly . (4 crs.) F BIO 317. EMBRYOLOGY. A study of oogenesis and spermatogenesis and resultant developments following fertilization: factors involved in morphogenetic determination; organology; sequences of changes in development. Special emphasis on the chick and comparative examples of development in other animals. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly . (4 crs.) S BIO 318. GENETICS. An introduction to molecular genetics and to the basic principles of inheritance. Gene interactions, multiple-factor inheritance, chromosome mapping, chromosomal and extnchromosomal inheritance . The roles of mutation, selection, migration, and genetic drift arc investigated to determine the genetic composition of different populations. Prerequisites: BIO 115, 120, and 125 . Three lecture houra and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 crs .) F S BIO 325 . ANIMAL HISTOLOGY. The study of cellular differentiations in tiuue , tissue identification, and special functions, especially in the mammals. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houra and three labontory hours weekly. (4 crs .) S BIO 326. MICROBIOLOGY. A detailed study of bacteria and viruses, with less emphasis on fungi, algae, and protozoans. Special emphasis on medical aspects of bacteriology, immunology, and virology. The cytology, physiology, microbiology, and culture of microbes arc pursued in the laboratory. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 125, DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 137 CHE 101 and 102, or penniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boun weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 327. PARASITOLOGY. A lltUdy of the etioloJY, cpidemioloJY, and bioloJY of aomc common human and animal para1ite1. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boura weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 328. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY. The functiona of the human body . Basic physiological phenomena arc studied with conaiderable emphasis upon clinical and practical application. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 120 or penniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 330. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY I. A general survey of the basic anatomical tenna of poaition and direction, the relevant acientific unita, the chemical componenta of living organisms, animal cytology, billology, embryology, the intc,umcntary ayatem, the rudimcnta of neurology, the skeletal syatem, and the cardiovaacular syatem. Prcrequi ■itea : Thia counc is for lltUdenta who arc enrolled in a nuning prognm, have completed at least one counc in biology, or have obtained pcnniuion of the inatructor. Three lecture boun and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 334. SOIL SCIENCE. An cdaphological approach ia taken in the lltUdy of the aoil, i.e., the aoil aa a natural habitat for planta. The various properties of the aoil arc conaidercd a, they relate to plant production. Since the clay and humua fractiona arc of trcmcndoua importance, the counc will incorporate a colloidal-biological baaia. Prerequisite,: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture boun and three laboratory boon weekly. (4 en.) (F) BIO 335. PLANT PHYSIOLOGY. The physio-chemical foundationa of plant functiona arc investigated, including such topics aa water and salt abaorption, photosynthesis, respiration, plant growth substances, photoperiodic rcsponaca, mineral metabolism, germination, and the effecta of air pollution on planta. Recent advances in the field of plant physiology arc included. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 125, CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 336. PLANT TAXONOMY. A lltUdy of rclationahipa among the vaacular planta, ferna, their clauification, and method, of identification. Plant familiea native to Weatem Pennaylvania arc atrcucd. Prerequisites: BIO l lS and 125. Three lecture houn and tbrcc laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 337. ORNITHOLOGY. The lltUdy of bird life. Clauification, anatomy, behavior, and recognition of birds, with emphaaia on local species and their rclationahips to people and the ecological balance with other organisms. Prcrequiaitea: BIO l lS and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours or field activity weekly. (4 en.) s BIO 342. SCIENTIFIC PHOTOGRAPHY. A baaic counc in the life and environmental aciences which stresses the myriad ways in which photography can be applied to enhance the effectivene11 of teaching and research endeavors ofbiologiata and environmentaliata. Special attention is given to photomicroacopy, macrophotography, and field photography. Various other illustrative material ■ arc alao prepared utilizing selective photographic equipment and/or procedures. Studenta can take this counc twice for a maximum of 4 crcdita. Prerequisites: Three Biology or Environmental councs with a minimum of one field-oriented counc. (2-4 en.) S BIO 360. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Il. A general survey of the basic structure of the lymphatic syatem, immunology, the brain, the spinal cord, the peripheral nervous ayatem, senaory rcccpton and special senac organa, the endocrine ayatem, the respiratory ayatem, the digeative ayatem, the urinary syatem, homcoatasia, the reproductive 1y1tcm, and human embryonic development. Prerequisite ■ : BIO 330 or penniuion of inatructor. Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 370. METABOLISM. A study of the chemical compound, of biological importance, how these arc utilized in human metabolic proceuca, and the rc,ulatory mcchaniams auociated with the maintenance of homeostasis. Three lecture hours weekly. (3 en.) 138 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES BIO 400. MAMMALOGY. A study of the clauification, distribution, and natural history of mamrnala, with emphasis on eaatem North American speciea. Field studiea and preparation of study specimena. Prerequiaitea: BIO 115, 120, 308 or 316 or ENS 300. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 405. HUMAN GENETICS. Chromoaomal abnormalities. Mendel' ■ Lawa, and the effect of change of gene action on Mendelian ratios. Other topica: aex-related inheritance, random mating, conaa1111Jinity, alleliam, mutationa, and maintenance of polymorphism. Prerequisitea: BIO 115, 120, and 318. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) BIO 407. MYCOLOGY. An extenaive examination of the fungi, with emphaaia on the filamentoua forma . The cytology, phyaiology, and morphology of the fungi are studied to determine their role in the acheme of nature. Laboratory technique, in isolating, culturing, enumerating, and identifying fungi. Prerequiaitea: BIO 115, 125, and 326. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) BIO 418 . BIOLOGICAL RESEARCH INVESTIGATIONS. A reaearch study program for advanced underaraduate studenta who wish to punue careen in biological or medical area■ . Emphaaia ia placed upon the student learning to uae varioua acientific instrumenta and biolo1ical procedure• neceaaary for reaearch inveati1ationa. The student worka cloaely with one or more faculty memben on a reaearch project which ia departmentally approved. Each reaearch project ia unique, and the data should ultimately be published in a prominent biolojical journal. The student normally participates in one aspect of an oqoing reaearch study and may punue work for one or more aemeaten. Studenta can take a maximum of 12 credita, 6 of which may be counted in the area of concentration. Prerequisite ■: BIO 115 and 125 (or 120), one BioloJy elective courae,junior or aenior llandilli, and a 3.0 QPA. (1-4 en.) BIO 426 . CLINICAL MICROBIOLOGY. A survey of the indigenoua and pathogenic microorganism■ of man, general principles deduced from complexities involving biochemistry and physiology, host-parasite relationlhipa, and laboratory procedures. Organisms studied include: bacteria, fungi, viruaes, and rickettaia . Prerequisites: BIO I 15 and 326, Che 101 and 102. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 427. CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY. The physiology of the cell with empha1i1 on the relationlhip of cell structure and function . Includes physical and chemical aspecta of cell■, the relation of cells to their environment, energy conveniona in cells, membrane permeability, photoayntheaia, and enzyme action. Prerequiaitea: BIO I 15, 120, and 125; CHE 101 and 102; CHE 331 and 332 recommended. (4 en.) S BIO 430. LABORATORY INSTRUMENTATION FOR BIOLOGY. The theory of, and practice with, major types of laboratory inatrumentation uaed in modem biological practice. Content is adjusted to methods practiced at this inatitution and may include any additional procedures of special interest to the class memben. Practice in writing laboratory reports and designing experimenta. Prerequisite ■: BIO 115, 120, and 125, PHY 102, CHE 261, or permission of inatructor. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 431 . TECHNIQUES IN ELECTRON MICROSCOPY. Detailed training in the operation and care of the electron microacope: techniques of specimen preparation for electron microacope visualization, including fixation, embedding, and ultrathin sectioning; special techniques such as replication and shadow casting. Prerequisite or concurrent counes: BIO 432, CHE 331,332, or consent of the inatructor. (4 en.) BIO 432. CELLULAR ULTRASTRUCTURE. A study of the generalized cell, the highly specialized cell, and tissues as seen by the electron microacope, with special emphasis on correlation of structure with function. An additional aim ia to enhance the student's ability to interpret electron micrograph,. Prerequisites: BIO I 15, 120 and 125, CHE 331 and 332, a molecular biology courae and/or consent of inatructor. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) BIO 433 . HERPETOLOGY. A consideration of the Amphibia and Reptilia from taxonomical, morphological, evolutionary, behavioral, and physiological viewpoints, with special emphasis on the Testudinata. Prerequisites: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 139 BIO 435 . ICIITHYOLOGY. An introduction to the morphology, taxonomy, ecology, and distribution of the major offrelhwater fishes, with emphaai1 on the northcaatem U.S. fauna . Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 115 and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.) group ■ BIO 440. DENDROLOGY. A atudy only of the tree specie■ of the Kingdom Metaphyta: the importance of theac organisms to other biota, especially man, and their prospect■ of continued aurvival in a rapidly changing biosphere. Emphaaia on the forest communitiea and tree species of the mixed meaophytic forest region■ of 10Uthwellem Pennaylvania. Prerequisite■ : BIO 115 and 125 . Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) F BIO 441. ETHOLOGY. Four principal approaches to ethology-ecology, phy1iology, genetic,, and development are interpreted within the framework of evolutionary biology with emphaai1 on the pattern■ of behavioral 1imilaritie1 and differences among different kinda of animals. Prcrequiaites: BIO 115 and 120; BIO 308 or 316 or ENS 300. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) S BIO 445 . ENTOMOLOGY. A specialized atudy of insect■ : identification and clauification development phases; economic importance, disease vectors. Prcrequi1ite1: BIO 1 IS and 120. Three lecture houn and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F phy■ioloiical characteriatica, BIO 449. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM I. Upon acceptance to a hospital achoo! of Medical Technology, the student undertake, the clinical training experience required by the National Accrediting Agency for Clinical Laboratory Sciences (NAACLS). Programs of instruction will vary from one hospital to another but uaually include hematology, microbiology, parasitology, immunology, urinalyaia, and biochemistry . Thia course i1 the first of two required term,. (15 en.) BIO 459. BIOLOGY FOR MEDICAL TECHNOLOGY CLINICAL PRACTICUM Il. A continuation of BIO 449. The second of two terms. (14 en.) BIO 466 . BIOMETRY . The fundamental concepta underlying the application of statistical method■ and experimental design■ to environmental problems. Practical experience in the development and analysis of laboratory and field projecta. Prerequisites: MAT 215, a field biology course, and consent of instructor. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 478. EVOLUTION. An advanced course pertaining to the mechanisms that are operative in the procesa of biological evolution. Life origins and development are investigated, with special emphaais placed upon the importance of genetic and metabolic systems diversity. The recurring and univerul themes of mutation and natural ■election are thoroughly discusacd as the concept of evolution at the population level is developed . A detailed account of human origin■ and specie ■ diversity is also studied. Prerequisites: BIO 318 and CHE 101 . Three lecture hours weekly. (3 en.) F BIO 480. CELL BIOLOGY. The biology of the cell with emphasis on the relationlhip of structure and function within the cell. It is a atudy of cell organelles, growth, division, macromolecules, membranes, synthesia, and regulation. Prcrequiaites: BIO 120, 125 and CHE 331. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) BIO 486 . ENVIRONMENTAL PHYSIOLOGY. A comparative approach to the atudy of physiological ayatems in animals relative to environmental pressure ■ and phylogenetic standing. Prcrequiaite: BIO 422. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours weekly. (4 en.) F BIO 488 . WATER POLLUTION BIOLOGY. A aurvey of the impact■ of various type■ of environmental pollutant■ on aquatic biological communitiea. Community responses are analyzed in a lecture/laboratory format with emphasia on collection in the field . Three lecture hours and three laboratory houn weekly. (4 en.) 140 DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES COURSES (ENS) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). + ENS 100. MAN AND HIS ENVIRONMENT. The broad field of environmental management. Man'• biological baaia, aoila, land use, water pollution, air pollution, noise pollution, and agencies and lawa auociated with the above topic, . No one area ia covered in depth. Rather, the student ia introduced to each problem, ill aource, current corrective mcaaurea, and pouible future technology. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) ENS 20S. FIELD BIOLOGY. An introductory counc dealing with the conservation of renewable reaourcea, with emphaaia on aoila, foreata, and wildlife. Basic ecological principle, are demonstrated aa they apply to native flon and fauna of aouthweatem Pennsylvania . Extensive field experience■. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) ENS 341. TECHNIQUES IN WATF.R. AND WASTEWATF.R. ANALYSIS. A thorough atudy of the chemical testing of water in waatewater plants, llrcama, and drinking water aources. Emphasi1 ia placed on learning acceptable level ■ of chemical■ in the different type• of water. Sampica of water from aources of concern are analyzed in the laboratory portion of the counc. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.) ENS 3Sl. WATF.R. TREATMENT FACILrrIES. An examination of the opention of modem water work■ and waatc water treatment 1yatema utilizing an integrated lecture-labontory approach . Empha■i1 ia on a pnctical undentanding of concepts related to water proceuing and familiarity with the various techniques currently employed. Lecture material ia correlated with the inapcction toun of local water and waatewater treatment facilities and laboratory demonstrations of proce■ae1 and auociated analyse, of water quality. Three lecture houn weekly . (3 en.) ENS 420. PRINCIPLES OF WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT. Thia course is designed to provide atudenta with an undentanding of the philoaophiea and concepts of ■cientific wildlife management. Major emphasi ■ will be placed on wildlife management in North America, but differilli pcnpectives from other regions of the world will be incorporated into the course. Topic, to be covered will include monitoring habitats and habitat management, population exploitation, and administration, economic,, and aocio-political topic ■ a■ they relate to wildlife management. Prerequi1ite1: BIO 111 and 121. Three lecture houn and three labontory houn weekly. (4 en.) ENS 423. WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES. Thia course will cover techniques commonly used by wildlife biologiata with empha1i1 on those applicable to birds and mammals. Important technique, covered in the counc include ageing and sexing of important game ■peciea, habitat measurement and evaluation, population analy1i1, and analy1i1 of food habits. The lecture portion of the course provides an introduction to common techniques and the lab empha■izcd pnctical use and application of those techniques. Prerequisites: BIO 120 and 12S. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn weekly . (4 en.) ENS 430. AIR QUAUTY MONITORING. The technologies involved in the abatement of emiuions from mobile and stationary aourcea, monitorilli technique■, and air quality standard■ . Prerequisite ■ : CHE 331, CHE 361, PHY 121 and 122, MAT 21S. Three lecture houn weekly. (3 en.) ENS 431. SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT. The fundamental technique■ involved in the collection, proceuilli, and dispoaal of urban, indu■trial, and agricultunl waates. Prerequisite■: CHE 331. Three lecture houn weekly . (3 en.) ENS 4S9. ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH PROBLEMS. An independent atudy with a coopenting faculty member. Emphaai1 on ■cientific research on contemporary environmental problema. These independent atudies are 11 field-oriented II pouible, with a final research paper written in proper ■cientific notation. (This course ia 3 credits and ia not repeatable.) DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES 141 ENS 494. SEMINAR-NATURE CONSERVATION. Lectures, individual reports, panel discussions, and individual project assignments concerning the environment and man's future roles in improving the quality of life. (3 crs.) ENS 495 . DESIGN AND ANALYSIS . The purpose is to provide environmental scientists with the theoretical and applied basis of experimental design, sampling theory and sampling designs, data input and output, statistical analysis and interpretation for studies involving ecological research, environmental pollution monitoring, and environmental impact assessment. The emphasis will be on experimental design, sampling procedures, and the application of computer methods for data base, spreadsheet, word processing, and statistical packages. Three lecture hours weelcly. (3 crs.) S ENS 497. ENVIRONMENTAL EDUCATION WORKSHOP. An interdisciplinary summer program designed to prepare the public school teacher for teaching environmental education. This workshop considers all aspects of the relationship of human beings and their institutions to the environment. It also has a large how-to-Ental Hygiene license, earned at an approved institution of higher education. Il. Profewonal F.ducation (18-21): Required: Foundationa of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Mainstreaming Exceptional Child Learners (EDU 340); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210). Elective: EDE 301 (Computers for Teachen) . Ill. General F.ducation (minimum of 27 credits): 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credits of Social Sciences; 9 credits of Natural Science, iacludina MAT 215 (Stawtics). 8-11 credits of free elective,. DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES 167 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES EARm SCIENCES (EAS) GEOGRAPHY (GEO) GEOLOGY (EAS) INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT Professor Lawrence L. Moses, chair, Professors William]. Procasky, DonaldJ. Thompson, Robert A. Vargo; Associate Professors Donald J. Conte, Harry J. Orsag; Instructors, William A. Gustin, Betty I. Joynt PURPOSE Understanding our habitat is essential for survival. Still, understanding is more than pragmatic. It satisfies a native curiosity about the world around each person. The Department of Earth Sciences is composed of two distinct but integral components. The first is the traditional earth sciences, namely, geology, oceanography, meteorology, and hydrology, all of which are physical sciences. These disciplines describe and analyze various techniques and knowledge associated with mathematics, chemistry and physics. The objective of these activities is to apply research findings to the solution of environmental and commercial needs. A second component of the earth science curriculum is geography. This social science studies the interrelationship between people and their natural environment. It is characterized by three subfields: human, physical or environmental, and technical geography, including such topics as cartography and remote sensing. Allied to geography are two other areas of study: travel and tourism and parks and recreation management. Finally, students in the department have the opportunity of integrating the study of geography with the humanities. Within the International Studies major is a Geography option. Believing that future social and business arenas will be international, this major stresses the importance of both learning about people and their environments as well as learning another language. How people see and understand their environments is affected greatly by language. Not only must Americans break their ethnocentric conception of life, they must understand how people in general conceptualize the world in which they live. PROGRAMS The department has five programs and, within those programs, nine study options. The Earth Sciences major has three study options: General, Meteorology, and Oceanography. There is a Geography major with three options: General, Applied, and Travel and Tourism. The Earth Science and Geography majors and options each have a common core of required 168 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES courses. Finally, there are three single option majors: Geology, International Studies: Geography, and Parks and Recreation Management. The department, in conjunction with the College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for those interested in teaching Earth Science in secondary schools. In order to be certified to teach in Pennsylvania, students must pass the NTE. Students interested in the latter should secure further information through the College of Education and Human Services. See also the section on General Science Certification, page 298 in this catalog. All majors stress the equal importance of general education and professional development. Field experiences and internships help the student to integrate classroom activities with "real world" experiences. This planned and progressive problem-solving approach is central to the educational program. Honor Societies The national Earth Sciences honor society, Sigma Gamma Epsilon (ErE ), has a chapter (AZ) on campus. Students recognized for their academic and professional achievements are elected to it. Honor students in Geography are eligible for induction into Gamma Theta Upsilon (r0Y). Membership is also available to students of high scholastic attainment in the California University Chapter of Rho Phi Lambda (P4'A) Fraternity. Rho Phi Lambda is the professional honor society for parks and recreation majors. Careers A student who desires a professional career in the earth sciences or in geography in most instances will need to have an advanced degree. This is the case for such professions as geologist, hydrologist, climatologist, oceanographic technician, stratigrapher, regional planner, and cartographer. Undergraduates seeking employment, however, will find opportunities in businesses undertaking environmental impact studies. Students with undergraduate majors in Parks and Recreation Management or Travel and Tourism can enter directly the job market, namely in such positions as directors or staff persons in schools, governmental agencies (municipal and military, for example), industries or resorts with recreational programs or as travel agents. More information on specific employment opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office and from faculty members responsible for specific majors. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EARm SCIENCES Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives. DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES 169 or (B) Area Cooceatratioa: Common Core course■ include Aatronomy (PHS 145); Introduction to Geoloay (EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Hiatorical Geology (EAS 200); Meteorology (EAS 241); General Chemiatry I (CHE 101); General Phyaica I (PHY 121); Hydrology (EAS 202); Map Principle, (GEO 110); College Algebra (MAT 181); or Technical Math I (MAT 182); and a Field Experience course (EAS). In addition to the core course ■ each track has special requirements. General Earth Science: 37 credits of required courses; 31 credits of required elective■ from four group of earth science courses, 15 credits of which muat be at the 300 level or above. Oceanoarapby: 37 credits of required course ■ ; 12 credits of required oceanographic course,: Micropaleontology (EAS 350); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Seminar in Oceanography (EAS 463); and Coaatal Geomorphology (EAS 563); and 19 credits of related electives. Meteorolc)IY : 37 credits of required course,; 25 credits of required meteorological course,: Climatology (EAS 242); Synoptic Meteorology (EAS 250); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Field Work in Meteorology (EAS 341); Dynamic Meteorology (EAS 342); Reaional Climatology (EAS 550); Seminar in Meteorology (EAS 464); General Physic ■ ll (PHY 122); plus an additional six credits of mathematic,. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIDCATION IN EARm SCIENCE FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) General Educatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-ll (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in Natural Sciences, including a Biology, a Mathematic ■, and a Physical Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credits of free electives. (B) Profeuional Educatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problema of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teata and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) . (C) Pro(euional Specialization: Required: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Meteorology (EAS 241); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163); Aatronomy (PHS 145); General Chemistry I (CHE 101); Pre-Calculus (MAT 199); General Physics I (PHY 121). Restricted Dectives (12 credits of the following) : Physical Geography (EAS 160); Hiatorical Geology (EAS 200); Hydrology (EAS 202); Climatology (EAS 242); Cartography (EAS 271); Map and Air Photo Interpretation (EAS 375); Field Methods (EAS 320); Field Work in Hydrology (EAS 302); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Field Work in Meteorology (EAS 341); Geomorphology (EAS 343); Invertebrate Paleontology (EAS 551); Human Ecology (GEO 240); Observational Astronomy (PHS 125); Seminar in Earth Science (EAS 495); Seminar in Astronomy (EAS 790). Pennsylvania certification requires a passing grade on the NTE. 170 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GEOGRAPHY Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 Natural Science■; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free elective■ . (B) Area of Concentration: Courses common to all tracks: Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principle■ (GEO 110); Physical Geography (EAS 160); F.conomic Geography (GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210) . (C) Travel and Tourism Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Survey of Travel and Touri■m (GEO 150); World Cities/Geography of Tourism (GEO 205); Comprehenaive Travel Planning (GEO 358); Seminar in Geography (GEO 493); Climatology (EAS 242); Scenic Areas of the U .S. (EAS 264); Introduction to Bu1inen (BUS 100); BusineBI Writing I (ENG 211); Oral Communication: Management (COM 205). Nine credits of restricted electives; 17 credits of related electives which could include an internship. (D) Applied Option Speciati:«!d Courses: (GEO 210); Remote Senaing (GEO 255); Cartography (EAS 271); Computer Cartography (EAS 273); Geography Information Systems (GEO 311); Statistical Cartography (EAS 373); Map and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 375) . Eighteen credits in restricted electives including Introduction to Microcomputer and Application Software (CSC 101); Statistics (MAT 215) and Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217) . Seventeen credits (200 and above) in related courses. (E) GEDeral Option Speciati:«!d Courses: Cartography (EAS 271) or Map and Aerial Photography Interpretation (EAS 375); Seminar in Geography (GEO 493) . Twenty-four credits in restricted elective ■ and 23 in relaced electives, five of which can be an internship . BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GEOLOGY Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities, 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Required Course, are: Introduction to Geology (EAS 150); Hiatorical Geology (EAS 200); Mineralogy (EAS 331); Petrology (EAS 332); Structural Geology (EAS 425); Hydrology (EAS 202); Geomorphology (EAS 343); Sedimentology (EAS 421); Stratigraphy (EAS 422); Tectonics (EAS 527); any earth science field experience; General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); General Physic ■ 1-Il (PHY 121, 122); 9 credit■ of Math/Computer Science; and , 8 credits of related electives. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: GEOGRAPHY The International Studies Program is administered by the Department of Foreign Languages and Cultures. The Department of Earth Sciences supervises students who pursue the geography option in that major. Curriculum: (A) General Education: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credit■ of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Studies; 18 credit■ of free electives. (B) Areas of Concentration: (1) Area of Concentration: International Studies: Geography. Geography 21 credit hours: Economic Geography (GEO 200); Urban Geography (GEO 210); Demographic Analysis (GEO 217); Political Geography (GEO 345); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328). Languages; 21 credit hours: Intermediate 1-Il (203, 204); Converaation, Composition and Phonetic ■ 1-Il (311, 312); Culture courses (9 era.) DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES 171 Related Electives: a minimum of three credits in each of Economics/Management, History, Englilh, Political Science, Mathematica, Psychology and Philoaophy. Five additional credits of related elective, (can include an intemlhip). BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PARKS AND RECREATION MANAGEMENT Curriculum: (A) General Education_ : Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 , 102); 12 credits of Humanitie■; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Human Geography (GEO 105); Map Principles (GEO 110); Physical Geography (EAS 160); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Municipal Government (POS 205); Urban Geography (GEO 210); Site Planning and De1ign (GEO 362); Recreation lndu■tryManagement (GEO 378); Propm Planning and Administration (GEO 412); Developing the Master Plan (GEO 474); Introduction to Business (BUS 100) or Principles of Management (MGT 210). Restricted electives: 12 credits. Related electives: 11 to 17 credits. Intemlhip: 6 to 12 credits. EARm SCIENCE COURSES (EAS) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. EAS 100. INTRODUCTION TO EARTH SCIENCE. Thia introductory course is designed to acquaint the student with the four general areas of earth science: astronomy, geology, meteorology, and oceanography. The course consists of two houn of lecture and one hour of lab work. (3 en.) F S EAS 131. INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia course deals with the interaction between man and his geologic environment. Emphasis is placed on the understanding of basic geologic principles and case studies of some of the classic examples of environmcnt■ I problems. Laboratory exercises and problems are an integral part of the course. Thia i■ intended 11 a 111rvey course and a ■tudent needs only a limited background in geology. (3 en.) F EAS 150. INTRODUCTION TO GEOLOGY . A 111rvey course intended primarily for the non-science major. Topics considered include the make-up of the earth, internal and external processes that occur within or on the earth, rocka and minerals, fossils, the earth's origin and evaluation, and the origin and evolution of life on this planet. Laboratory work is an integral part of the course. (4 crs.) F S EAS 160. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. The ■tudy of the physical aspects of human environment including climate, soils, water, vegetltion, and topography. Map and map-making also are treated . (3 crs.) EAS 163. INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOGRAPHY. An introductory course in the study of the four main branches of oceanography: (1) Geology of the oceanic basins (origins of the oceans, structure and geomorphology of the ocean'• floor, methods of investigation); (2) Chemiltry of the ocean waters; (3) Physics of the oceans (currents, waves, tides, etc .); (4) Biology of the oceans (marine plants and animals) . No preliminary studies required but previous course work in Physical Geology or Introduction to Geology recommended . (3 en.) S EAS 166 . GEOLOGY OF PENNSYLVANIA. A 111rvey of the Commonwealth's geologic setting, geologic history, and mineral resources. There are no prerequisites. Students will be introduced to the necessary geologic 172 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES conccpll and terminology. Studenll arc expected to participate in at least three of the four planned field trip,. (3 en.) EAS 170. AREAL GEOLOGY. Thia counc involve, travel to aclected poinll of geologic intcrcll in the Rocky Mountaina and Great Plaina of the wellcm part of the United State,. Moll activitica will be in field aituationa. Activitie1 will focu1 on rock, mineral, and fouil identification, topographic map interpretation, and the role of geologic proce11e1 in landform development. (3 en.) EAS 200. HISTORICAL GEOLOGY. A lludy of the geologic hiatory of the earth and the aucceuion of the major group of plani. and animal■ 11 baaed on the geologic interpretation of rock formatiom and fouil1 . Field trip, arc an integral part of the counc. (4 en.) S EAS 202. HYDROLOGY. A aurvey counc about the exi■tcnce of water on Earth. Topic, include the occurrence and movement of water, physical and chemical characteriatica of water, and climatologic and geologic conaideration of aurface and aub-aurface water. (3 en.) F EAS 232. EARTH RESOURCES . An introductory counc in metallic and non-metallic rc1011rce1 with emph11i1 on the nature of mineral,, the lithosphere, and economic uaca of earth rc10urce1. (3 en.) F EAS 241. METEOROLOGY. The physic, of the atmosphere a■ influenced by the earth-atmosphere interaction. The effecll of the phyaical control, a, they alter the elemenll arc emphasized . The construction and 1naly1i1 of weather map, i1 an integral part of the counc. (3 en.) F S EAS 242. CLIMATOLOGY. In this counc the elemenll and controls of climate arc analyzed in 1 1yatcmatic fashion. Various methods and techniques of cl111ifying climates arc prcacnted. The climate of each continent is rcgionalized and the factors which produce the climatic patterm arc inveatigated . (3 en.) F S EAS 250. SYNOPl'IC METEOROLOGY. An examination of the development and atructurc of large-scale weather syatcma and fronts . Emphasis on the technique of analyzing and forecaating 1ynoptic scale weather situationa. (3 en.) F EAS 255. REMOTE SENSING . Thia counc emphasize■ the characteriatic1 and scientific role of aerial photo, radar, and 11tellite image interpretation, as well as computer aui■tcd proceuing of spectral data acquired from aircraft and 11tellites, 11 they relate to earth and atmospheric rc1011rce analysis. (3 en.) S EAS 264. SCENIC AREAS OF THE UNITED ST ATES . Thia counc provide, an 1naly1i1 of the physical telling of aome scenic area, in the United States. The focua is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climate, and landforma in scenic areas with special empha■ is given to natural hiatory. (3 en.) F S EAS 270. SCENIC AREAS OF THE WORLD. Thia course provides an analysis of the physical telling of scenic areas of the world. The focus is on differences in aoila, vegetation, climates, and landforma with special emph11i1 given to natural hiatory. (3 en.) EAS 271. CARTOGRAPHY. A laboratory counc designed to acquaint the student with the nature and function of map,, including concepts of scales and cartographic symbols, graphic layout and design, and the uac of cartographic tools and equipment in map construction. (3 en.) F EAS 273 . COMPUTER CARTOGRAPHY. This counc provides an analysis of different methods and technique, of rcprcacntina spatial data through the uac of various computer-based technologies. The focus is centered upon the cartographic representation of aurface data through the uac of a personal-computer baaed program. (3 en.) S EAS 302. FIELD WORK IN HYDROLOGY. This counc is designed as a follow-up course to hydrology. It give, lludenll the opportunity to apply hydrologic principles and techniques in field tellings. Topic, arc aclected in conaultation with the instructor. (3 en.) S DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIBNCES 173 EAS 304. CARBONATE GEOLOGY. A study of carbonate deposition, lithification, and digene1i1. Include■ chemical ■edimentology, textural classification, cyclicity of shelf llrata, facies interpretation for oil exploration, and correlation. Lab component. Prerequisite ■: Hi■torical Geology and Sedimentology. (3 en.) EAS 331 . MINERALOGY. An introduction to the morphology and internal llructure of cry1tal1 and the chemical and phyaical ch1racteri■tic1 of mineral,. Laboratory time is devoted to the study of cry■tal model■ and the identification of aelected mineral apecimena. (3 en.) F EAS 332. PETROLOGY. A complete ■urvey of the major rock type, (igneou ■, ■edimentary, and metamorphic) forma the b11i1 of thi1 coune. Con■ideration i1 given to their origin, deacription, and clauification. Of particular importance i1 the relationship of the v1riou1 rock type■ to the compoaition and hi ■torical development of the 10lid earth. Laboratory component emph11ize1 hand apecimen identification, but aome microacopic thin ■ection work i1 1110 done. (3 en.) S EAS 341. FIELD WORK IN METEOROLOGY . A field oriented course designed as a follow-up to basic meteorology. The course is concerned with the use of meteorological in■truments to measure local weather condition■, plotting and analyzing these conditions. Other weather problems and library research are part of the course. (3 en.) EAS 342. DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY. An in-depth examination of the forces and laws that govern atmoapheric flow. Topics investigated and analyzed include scale analyaes, geotropic and gradient wind models, vorticity, vertical motion and boundary layer dynamic,. (3 en.) S EAS 343. GEOMORPHOLOGY. This course involves the study of the origin, history, and ch1racteri1tic1 of landforma and landscapes aa they are produced by the processes of weathering, man-walling, fluvial, glacial, wind, and wave ero1ion (or a combination of theae) acting upon the geological material■ and 1tructure1 of the earth'• crull. (3 en.) EAS 3SO. MICROPALEONTOLOGY. Micropaleontology deals with the essential biological and geological principles which are basic to all paleontological studies. In addition, considerable time is devoted to the atudy and identification of various microfossil groups. Con■ideration is alao given to the origin of life and to its preservation in ancient Precambrian rocks . Laboratory work emphasized. Problems to be aolved are similar to those that would be encountered by the student in the petroleum indullry . (3 en.) EAS 372. FIELD MAPPING. Thi■ i■ a field-oriented course in which the atudent will learn proper use of measuring and mapping instruments and the techniques in the construction of simple maps . Interpretation of air photo• and topographic maps is alao ■tressed. (3 en.) F EAS 373 . STATISTICAL CARTOGRAPHY. The ■tati ■tical approach to cartographic repreaentation. Method ■ of data manipulation, problems of symbolization and techniques of presentation are emphasized. (3 en.) EAS 37S. MAP AND AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY INTF.RPRETATION. This course coven the composition and interpretation of aerial photographs and variou■ type• of maps. Students will learn how to interpret photos and map, for quantitative and qualitative information on natural and man-made features . Some of the work requires independent and group interpretation of maps, photographic slide, of aatellite imagery, computer proces■ed and enhanced image■, and SLAR imagery. (3 en.) F EAS 421. SEDIMENTOLOGY. An advanced course that deal■ with the detailed analysis of ■ediments and aedimentary rocks. Both qualitative and quantitative techniques are utilized to derive the maximum information from rock 11mple1. This information relate, to the erosional, transportational and depositional history of rocks. To the greatest extent possible, the student works independently through a complete set of problems. (3 en.) F 174 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES EAS 422. STRATIGRAPHY. In this coune a study i• made of the basic principles governing the origin, interpretation, correlation, claasification, and naming of atratified rock unita. The grou atratigraphy of the United State, ia considered, with particular emphaaia placed on the rocks of the Pennsylvania Sylllem. (3 en.) S EAS 425. STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY. The primary and secondary structure, of rock mauea and their formation are covered in thia coune. Actual structure, are examined in the field . Geologic maps are utilized . (3 en.) F EAS 430. OPTICAL MINERALOGY. An in-depth examination of the optical behavior of mineral cryatala in polarized light with empha■ia on identification. (3 en.) S EAS 436 . FIELD METHODS IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia a coune designed to provide majon with the knowledJe of problema encountered in field work and the techniques utilized to solve these problema. Thia coune conaiata of planned trip,. Lecture, and di■cuaaiona are used to 111pplement the trip ■ . (3 en.) EAS 437. FIELD METHODS IN GEOLOGY . Thia ia a coune designed to provide students with a knowledge of geologic problema encountered in field work and the technique■ utilized to solve those problema. The student i■ exposed to geologic and topographic map, 11 well II variou■ geologic inatrumenta. The coune conaiata of plaMCd trip• to area, of geologic intereat. Summary reports, field exercises, and laboratory problema conatitute the atudenta' work responsibility. (3 en.) EAS 463 . SEMINAR IN OCEANOGRAPHY. Thia seminar ia designed for those who wiah to improve their ■cientific writing abilities and to learn more about the occana. The coune is built around an excunion to 1ite1 of oceanographic intereat, library information and data collection, the writing of both abort and long papen and the presentation of research. (3 en.) EAS 464. SEMINAR IN METEOROLOGY. A ■cientific writing coune in which the student punues a meteorologic topic through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a problem, to obtain relevant literature, to gather data and to write and defend a research paper. (3 en.) EAS 491 . FIELD COURSE IN EARTH SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for serioua Earth Science students who desire to apply their clauroom knowledge to specific aite■ and earth ■cience field problema. Each semelller will include trips to various sites at which ieologic, meteorological, or oceanographic proceaae ■, principles and phenomena can be studied. (Variable) EAS 492. FIELD COURSE IN GEOLOGY . Thi■ coune provides advanced geology studenta with opportunities to study geology in siru . Field trips to clauic and leu well known 1ite1 will be incorporated into lecture,, data collection, and ■cientific reporting . Laboratory exercise, will reflect field experience■ . (Variable) EAS 494. GEOLOGY WORKSHOP. Provides the student with a variety of geologic experience■. Included are lecture■ , laboratory exercise ■ , field work and problema. To the greateat extent pouible, the coune also i ■ tailored to meet the need■ of individual atudenta. Permiuion of the ataff ia required. (Variable) EAS 496. SEMINAR IN GEOLOGY. A ■cientific writing course in which the student punues a g~iogic topic through library or field research. Studenta learn to define a geologic problem, to obtain relevant literature, to gather raw data and to write and present a research paper. (3 en.) EAS 498 . INTFJlNSHIP IN GEOLOGY. The student combines academic theory with practical on-the-job experience by spending up to a full semester in one of several state or local governmental agencies. The practicum can be taken for from 3 to 17 credits and includes 111pcrvision by the participating agency I I well I I performance evaluation by the academic advisor. Limited to Geology majon. (Variable) EAS 527. TECTONICS. To evaluate tectonic theories within a framework of worldwide historical geology but special attention i■ given to the Appalachian and the North American Cordilleran orogenic eventa. (3 en.) F DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES 175 EAS 528 . QUANTrrATIVE APPLICATIONS IN EARTH SCIENCE. An upper-level coune de1igncd to provide studenta opportunity to apply variou1 procedures to the ■olution of acologic problems. (3 en.) F EAS 541. ADVANCED ENVIRONMENTAL GEOLOGY. Thia coune deals with the human natural environment, particularly acologic facton that can impact upon life or way of life. Empha1i1 i1 placed on an in-depth atudy of environmental problems and poaaible alternative ■olutiona to 111ch problems. Buie engineering - principles I I applied to acological problems arc conaidercd. Laboratory exercises, problems, and written rcporta arc an intcpl part of the coune. (3 en.) EAS 546 . PETROLEUM GEOLOGY. This coune deals with the fundamental propertie1 of petroleum and petroleum rcservoin, including the origin, miption, and accumulation of oil and natural ga■ . Other topic, include exploration techniques, computer application■, well drilling and completion, and major oil field■ of the United State,. Empha■is ia on problem ■olving and laboratory work. (3 en.) EAS 547. RESERVOIR EVALUATION. The purpose of thi1 coune i■ to analyze in detail rock■ which serve for the storage and ultimately for the production of petroleum. The characteristics of these rock■ will be atudied in hand specimen, in section, in core,, and on well log■. Laboratory work and problem ■olving arc emphaaizcd. (3 en.) EAS SSO. REGIONAL CLIMATOLOGY. An advanced coune that deals with the application of various analytical method■ and claaaification systems in climatology. The Koppen claaaification of climates is strcaacd. The climate pattern■ of each continent and the facton which produce them arc investigated . (3 en.) S EAS SSL INVERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY. Thia coune involveaa detailed study offoaail representatives of the variou ■ invertebrate phyla II well 11 1 conaideration of the more important of these as index foaail ■. Empha1i1 i■ on laboratory exerci■es and problem ■olving. It i■ hoped that this coune will prove to be of interest to atudenta in biology I I well I I those in aeology . (3 en.) EAS 563. COASTAL GEOMORPHOLOGY AND MARINE RESOURCES . A atudy of the phyaical proce1■e1 that ■hape coastal landforms and the pelagic and neuritic rc■ource1 of the ocean■ . Topics include long■horc transport, wave action, awaah zone dynamic■, estaurine and deltaic geomorphology, ferromangane ■e and petroleum rc■ources, and beach structure. Prerequisite: Introduction to Oceanography or permission of the instructor. (3 en.) GEOGRAPHY COURSES (GEO) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. GEO 100. INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY. Introduces atudenta to regional differences throughout the world in terms of landforms, climates, ■oil■ and vegetation as well I I population characteristic ■ and economic activities. Rcprc ■entative 1rca1 like Western Europe, Soviet Union, Japan and Latin America arc developed. (3 en.) F S GEO 1OS. HUMAN GEOGRAPHY. The coune provides inaighll into the existing pattern■ and distribution■ of variou1 social groups which occupy the earth. Broad outline■ of human evolution, development and demographic pattern■ arc emphasized. (3 en.) F S GEO 110. MAP PRINCIPLES . A non-technical coune to develop competence in the development, recognition, undentanding and evaluation of map information. Interpretation of thematic map■, both regional and world, ia emphaaizcd. (3 en.) F 176 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES GEO 150. SURVEY OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM. An overview of the travel and touriam industry empha■izing aapecta of field geographic, economic and cultural importance. Topics include introductory principle•, meaauring and forecaatmademand, touriam planning, touriam marketing, tourism development, and the role of the geographer. (3 en.) F S GEO 200. ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY. The lludy of areal variation on the related to producing, exchanging, and conauming reaourcea. (3 en.) S earth' ■ aurface in man'• activitiea GEO 205. WORLD CITIES/GEOGRAPHY OF TOURISM. The geography of touriam in selected citiea of the world with an empha■ia on form and function. Topic• include an analyaia of reaourcea for touriam, the organization of related land use pattcfflll, and developmental proceaaea. (3 en.) S GEO 210. URBAN GEOGRAPHY. An inveatigation of city environmenta. Topic ■ inveatigated and analyzed about citiea include their cla■aification, location, diatribution, function, growth, type, and pattern of land use. Emphasia toward urban planning ia incorporated. (3 en.) F GEO 217. DEMOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS. A baaic course that deals with demographic proceaaea and trends. Emphaaia ia placed on diatribution pattefflll and environmental ramificatiollll. (3 en.) GEO 220. GEOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES AND PENNSYLVANIA. A atudy of the phyaical and cultural environment throughout the United States and Pennsylvania particularly aa it relate ■ to apatial paltefflll of population, agriculture, industry, aervice and tranaportation pattefflll. (3 en.) GEO 240. HUMAN ECOLOGY. A social acience approach to dealing with relationship between humanity and the organic and inorganic environment. Emphasia is placed on the physical, biological and cultural baais of human adaptation to the environment. (3 en.) GEO 285. RETAIL TRAVEL. The skills uaed in the worldwide travel industry that are eaaential for a career aa a travel agency owner, manager, or agent, as a tour operator, or as a corporate, convention travel planner or manager. (3 en.) GEO 306 . MARKETING GEOGRAPHY. Spatial pattefflll associated with the collllUmption of good■ and aervices are atreaaed, emphasia is placed on the collection and aubaequent diatribution of goods and service■ as related to aapecta of the cultural environment. (3 en.) GEO 311. GEOGRAPHIC INFORMATION SYSTEMS . Thia course providea an analyaia of different methods and technique■ of repreaenting geographic data through the uae of various manual and computer-baaed technologies . The focus ia upon the procesaea involved in the collection, compilation, and diaplay of geographic data within a data baae. (3 en.) GEO 315 . URBAN TRANSPORTATION. Tranaportation pattefflll within cities and current tranaportation problem.a aa they relate to travel demand ■ and tranaportation policy. Urban apatial variation and ita relationship to travel are atreaaed. (3 en.) GEO 316 . CONTEMPORARY GEOGRAPHIC PROBLEMS . Topical analysia of local, regional and world areal association problem.a from a geographic perapective. (3 en.) GEO 317. LAND USE ANALYSIS. An analysis of the structure of urban and rural land uae which emphaaizea of paltefflll and trends in land use . Methods of analyais are developed so that land uae ~an be effectively understood . (3 en.) GEO 318 . GEOGRAPHY OF CHINA. A geographic atudy of the historical , cultural, political and economic facton a ■ they combine to make twentieth-century China an important factor in world affairs. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES 177 GEO 325 . GEOGRAPHY OF EUROPE. A systematic of the forces which have shaped the human landscape of Western Europe. National and regional disparities ranging from land relief and climate to BOCial and economic phenomena are studied. (3 crs.) GEO 328. GEOGRAPHY OF LATIN AMERICA. Concentrates upon the effects of the physical environment upon human activities and upon the effects of the historical background, types of governments, and ethnic background• of the people upon the development of the natural resources of. The study is regional by nations. (3 crs.) GEO 330. GEOGRAPHY OF THE SOVIET UNION. A regional study of the physical and cultural features of the Soviet Union. The emphasis is placed upon those factors responsible for the current position of the Soviet Union aa a major world power and on potential future development. (3 crs.) GEO 338 . GEOGRAPHY OF THE PACIFIC BASIN . Lands and people of the great ocean. Particular attention given to Australia, Indonesia, New Zealand, and the Philippines. (3 crs.) GEO 340. HISTORICAL GEOGRAPHY . A study of the interrelationships between the natural and cultural environments and the historical development of the cultural landscape. The historical development of the United States i• emphasized. (3 crs.) GEO 345 . POLmCAL GEOGRAPHY. The state is the focus of the course, particularly in term■ of the role played by the physical and cultural environment in term■ of its form and function. Particular emphasis placed 9n frontiers, boundariea, law of the sea■, transportation and ecology. (3 en.) GEO 358. COMPREHENSIVE TRAVEL PLANNING. A basic understandingofthe procedures and components of travel planning and promotion. It presents major principles and techniques in developing travel programs, trip packages, and group tours . The course studies transportation and infonnation systems, community services supporting tourism, trends in accommodations and services, tours and junkets, travel sales and agency operations. (3 crs.) GEO 362. SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN. The components of the site design process. Instruction centers on the specific tools and procedures necessary to enable the student to be an effective planner of recreation and park facilities . The student gains an understanding of the complete planning process from conceptualization through implementation and construction. (3 crs.) GEO 374. DEVELOPING AND MANAGING LEISURE ENTERPRISES . An overview of the commercial leisure induatry, specifically focusing on the procedures involved in the developing, marketing, and managing of the enterprise. The student will acquire a knowledge of the step by step procedure involved in starting a leisure busineu either through purchasing a going concern or through establishing an enterprise from its beginning. The student then will be instructed on the management skills necessary for the effective and profitable management of the enterprise. (3 crs.) GEO 378. RECREATION INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT. Analysis of managerial and administrative practices and proce1&es in recreation, park and agency departments, including departmental organization, policy making, liability and negligenc~, personnel management and staffing, fiscal management, budgeting, finance, records and reports, office management, and public relations. (3 crs.) GEO 412. PROGRAM PLANNING AND ADMINISTRATION. The course emphasizes the analysis of a community, a1&essment of its residential leisure needs, and implementation of recreational programs into the community. Students will acquire an understanding of the program fields in relation to principles, planning, objectives, goal setting, structural organization, advertising, and evaluation. (3 crs.) GEO 445. FIELD METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY . An intensive micro-geographic study through field work. An advanced course using geographic field tools and techniques . (3 crs.) 178 DEPARTMENT OF EARTH SCIENCES GEO 474. DEVELOPING THE MASTER PLAN. This course examines planning as a process with attention focused on those particular activities and component& that must be related and completed in order to initiate preparation and succe11ful implementation of a comprehensive master plan. The course provides experience in applying acquired skills to specific uri>an and regional problems. Class participanu analyze a real or a hypothetical problem, develop and evaluate alternative approaches, and recommend courses of action. (3 en.) GEO 479. INTERNSHIP. The internship provides the student with the opportunity to apply classroom theory to realistic, professional-level situations. It is intended to give the student a concentrated practical experience in a professional organization. The concept& and experiences acquired in the classroom are honed and fine-tuned at this level to prepare studenu for their career undertaking. (Variable) GEO 491. FJELD COURSE IN GEOGRAPHY. Field investigation utilizing geographic tools and techniques concentrating on primary data . (Variable) GEO 493. SEMINAR IN GEOGRAPHY. Consideration of evolving geographic thought, evaluation of selected geographic literature, and the development of individual or group research project&. Recommended as a culminating course for majors in geography. (3 crs .) GEO 498. INTERNSHIP IN GEOGRAPHY. This course involves the geography intern during the sophomore, junior or senior year in a semester of practical experience with a planning, governmental, business, industrial, or social agency. Credit for the course varies, depending upon the nature of the internship assignment and the number of hours of on-the-job training. (Variable) GEO 520. PHYSIOGRAPHY OF THE UNITED STATES . This course is for students with a background that includes Principles of Geomorphology. It involves a systematic survey of the major physiographic provinces in the United States. Emphasis is placed on the relationship of the underlying geology, geologic history, and climate to the development of today's landscapes. Laboratory work principally involves interpretations from air photos and topographic maps. (3 crs.) EDU COURSES 179 EDU (EDUCATION) COURS~ EDU 210. TEACHING IN A MULTICULTURAL SOCIETY. The development of intergroup-interpersonal awareness to promote a better understanding of different races, sexes, religious beliefs, national origins, and socioeconomic backgrounds found in our multicultural society. Emphasis on developing the awareness, knowledge skill and competency needed for positive human relationships. (3 crs.) F-S EDU 340. MAINSTREAMING EXCEPTIONAL LEARNERS. This course is designed to prepare educational personnel with the information and skills necessary for accommodating exceptional learners in a variety of school arrangements. Focus is on assessment and remediation of learning problems, classroom organization and management, teaching resources, legal issues, curriculum considerations, parent involvement, condition of professional services, and many other issues pertinent to the education of exceptional learners in the "mainstream" of education. (3 crs.) EDU 449 . STUDENT TEACHING- SPECIAL EDUCATION . (Variable) F-S EDU 459 . STUDENT TEACHING - ELEMENTARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S EDU 469. STUDENT TEACHING - SECONDARY EDUCATION. (Variable) F-S DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES 180 DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES EDUCATIONAL STUDIES (EDF) SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS) Professor Marilynn Stanard, chair. Professors Dilawar Mumby Edwards, George J. Frangos, John P. Moreschi, Jr., JoAnn Nelson, Angelo J. Orlandi, George A.Reid; Associate Professors John C. Black, David N. Campbell, Lizbeth A. Gillette, Robert A. Levin, Caryl Sheffield, John R. Young. The department is responsible for the Secondary Education programs, the Principals Program, the Professional Education components of programs in the College of Education and Human Services and in the Graduate School, and a diversity of services to the University. The Secondary Education curriculum is organized around the concept of "teacher as decision maker." Teacher candidates ~earn to make important decisions concerning how to organize and manage classrooms utilizing a wide range of technologies and methodologies. The Secondary Education program provides students with opportunities to work in a variety of school settings. These include the School of the Future (an urban experience involving innovative techniques and opportunities), Rural and Urban Schools, Schools on Native American Reservations as well as overseas schools. For the Secondary Education Curriculum the department offers a Bachelor of Science in Education degree in the following Certification areas: Athletic Training, Biology, Chemistry, Communication, Earth Science, General Science, English, Mathematics, Modem Foreign Languages, Physics, and Comprehensive Social Sciences. Accordingly, this curricular function is the responsibility of the Educational Studies Department in cooperation with the appropriate academic departments. Curricula and requirements will be found in this catalog in the listings of the individual departments. Therefore, each student who is a Secondary Education major functions under a system of dual advising whereby the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department assists the student in satisfying Certification requirements, while an advisor from the student's chosen discipline guides the student in the area of specialization. Final advising is with the student's advisor from the Educational Studies Department. Students in the Secondary Education curricula must pass the NTE in order to achieve Pennsylvania Teaching Certification. Students must achieve a 2.50 grade-point average in both their major area and a 2.50 overall grade-point average for graduation. Students who satisfactorily complete the program in Secondary Education may, at graduation, qualify for the Pennsylvania Instructional I Certificate for teaching in their certification area at the middle school and secondary school levels. Requirements are such that the student may pursue certification in one or more teaching areas as mentioned above. DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES 181 SECONDARY EDUCATION (EDS) AND EDUCATIONAL FOUNDATIONS COURSES (EDF) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. EDF 100. FOUNDATIONS OF EDUCATION. A survey designed to contribute directly to the profeuional growth and development of the prospective teacher and to serve as an introductory course for the atudent in Liberal ArU or Science and Technology. It slrc88Cs the history, philosophy, and legal and social foundationa of the American educational enterprise. Emphasi1 is also given to teaching as a profeuion, as well aa to the llnlcturc, administration, and support of the system of public education at the local, state, and federal levels. The atudent is encouraged to think constructively and creatively about education and self. (3 en.) S-F EDS 300. PROBLEMS OF SECONDARY EDUCATION. The practical problems of teaching and learning in the accondary school with emphasis on principle■ of problem solving arc studied. A aurvey is made of the llnlcturc and nature of American accondary education. Tools and techniques used in problem solving arc introduced. A field experience of two classes per week for nine weeks in the local secondary school■ is a requirement of the course. Prerequisite: EDF 100. S-F EDF 301. COMPUTERS FOR TEACHERS . This course in educational computing provides the learner with fundamental concepts and skills that build a foundation for applying computen and other hardware and software in educational settings. The course focuses on the computer as an object of inatruction, a productivity tool,and an adjunct to inatruction in the classroom. Laboratory assignments requiring use of the univenity computer facilities arc designed to provide generalizable and transferable competencies. (3 en.) EDF 304. INTRODUCTION TO EDUCATIONAL MEDIA. This course, for prospective and practicing teachen from various levels of education, pre-school to ·graduate school, is also relevant for persona in training programs in churches, business, and industry. Emphasis is placed on media as an inherent part of effective instruction 11 well as on effective media utilization practices, the acquisition of skills in selecting media hardware and software, and the operation of equipment and competence in simple local production techniques. The course has been designed to facilitate learning in three inatructional modes: (1) large group, by meana of mediated lectures; (2) ,mall group, by mcana of demonstrations and practice in equipment operation/local production; (3) independent atudy, by meana of film loops, film strips, slide-tape presentations, and computer-assisted inatruction. Three cl111 houn and one laboratory hour each week. (3 en.) EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING . The phenomenon of death and dying in the areas of anthropology, psychology, philosophy, education, literature, etc. (3 era.) S EDF 360. COMPARATIVE EDUCATION. An introduction to the various schools of the world. Selected countries include England, France, Italy, Spain, West Germany, the U.S.S .R., and the United States. The general strategy is to explore the history, social organizations, and economic and political conditiona that have shaped educational institutiona in each country. (3 era.) S EDS 420. INTRODUCTION TO GUIDANCE AND PERSONNEL SERVICES. The principles of guidance with emphasis on the basic concepts of individual and group counseling and the relationship of the counselor, teacher, and school nurse in grades K-12 . (3 era.) EDS 430. EDUCATIONAL TESTS AND MEASUREMENTS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A consideration of the simpler statistical mcaaures, with particular strc11 on the application to clauroom work, and of the principle• underlying the conatruction of valid, reliable objective tests. Prerequisite: Educational Psychology (3 era.) S-F EDS 436 . TEACHING OF WRITING. A course to help the prospective teacher create a curriculum that will enable atudents to write forcefully and clearly. The teacher should become aware of the students' needs and methods by 182 DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES which thoac needs can beat be met. Such needs nnge from developing 1kill1 related to writiq, like correct spelling and punctuation, to developing compositions that may vary from the utilitarian to the form-oriented to the empathic . The effective teacher should also tic writiq ill8truction in with the rest of the English curriculum. Finally, the teacher llhould consider how to evaluate completed papen in a way that will contribute to students' further progrcu and ultimate independence of the teacher. (3 en.) EDS 437. TEACHING OF COMMUNICATION. For Communication teaching candidate,; a specially designed method• courac team taught by ill8tructon from the departmentl of Englillh, Communication Studic1, and Theatre who have had teaching experience in secondary school,. The courac develop ■ proficiency in applying learning theory and hiatorical perspectives to the Communication curriculum, developing and preacntiq lcaaon plans in teaching 1imulations, developing curriculum appropriate to the area■ of specialization, directing young people in extension activities (newspaper, yearbook, dnma, forensics, ndio and television), adapting content to students with varying lcvcl1 of motivation and skill development, and becoming aware of availabilities in the job market. (3 en.) EDS 440. TEACHING OF ENGLISH IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. The application of principle, of educational p1ychology, philosophy, and sociology to the teaching of Englillh in junior and acnior high school. The courac include, bolh pnctical techniques of clauroom pncticc and an invcatigation of the larger problems of the profc11ion. Adequate prior content couracs in English arc necessary to the student undertaking this courac. (3 en.) F EDS 445. TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Method, that may be used in teaching Social Studies. Emphasis is placed on the philosophy, objectives, couracs of study, and organization of subject matter for teaching purpoacs, curriculum materials, procedures and development. (3 en.) F EDS 447. TEACHING OF EARTH SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. A review of conccpta and basic philosophy in Earth Science. The courac includes a survey of available materials and current curricula in the field of earth science which fonn the baacs for analysis of modem technique, in the teaching of this discipline. (3 en.) EDS 455. MODERN METHODS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. A capstone courac in secondary education. Students learn current research on teaching, planning, inatructional stntegica. Classroom management and decision-making skills. (3 en.) S-F EDS 456. THE SECONDARY SCHOOL CURRICULUM. An analysis of the functions of secondary school curriculum including the historical development of the high school curriculum; current and projected trends; patterns of curriculum development; the dynamics of curriculum improvement; curriculum provisions for meeting individual differences; trends in specific ill8tructional fields; the place and purpoac of student activities and the cxtn-clau curriculum. (3 en.) EDS 460. TEACHING MATHEMATICS IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS . The mathematical abilities of the secondary student; methods of mathematical teaching; rcsulta of mathematical education according to recent research; the control and uac of the visual aids pertaining to mathematics, and student, teacher, administntion and community problems with proper methods of instruction. Content material is included at the discretion of the Mathematica department. Evaluation is maintained by teats, reports, textbook evaluations, courac outlines, unit plans, projecta and teaching lessons. (3 en.) S-F EDS 461. STUDENT TEACHING AND SCHOOL LAW. Obacrvation and participation in all teaching and activitic1 related to the performance of a teacher'• work, in the area of the student'• specializations. Prerequisite: A genenl quality point avenge of 2.50 and 2.50 in the area of specialization. The student spends full time in actual cla11room teaching for a semester of 16 weelca. (12 en.) (Variable credit in special circumstances) S-F EDS 465 . DEVELOPMENT AL READING IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL. Intended to help the prospective teachcn of the Secondary Education academic subject areas develop an undentanding and appreciation of the reading skills needed by their studcntl. Methods of establishing awareness of gencnl reading needs as well as the special 1kill1 unique to their subject area arc stressed. (2 en.) S-F DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONAL STUDIES 183 EDS 466 . TEACHING MODERN LANGUAGES (K through 12). Thia course is taught in the Language Labontory. It coven the theory and pnctice of teaching modem languages. Instruction in the use of the labontory i■ jiven. Ernpha1i1 i1 given to the atudent developing an adequate undemanding of the need■, intere■ta, leamina chancteri■tica and motivations of atudenta at various age■ of development K through 12. (3 en.) EDS 467. TEACHING OF SCIENCE IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. Give■ the proapective ■cience major a thorough groundiq in the problema of teaching ■cience. The objective■ of the ■cience prognm in the secondary ■chool, selection of textboolta, 10Urce1 of auitable litenture, how to secure materials for instruction, the prepantion of unit■, and ■pecial techniques are studied. Prerequisite: Twelve houn of work in major field . (3 en.) S-F EDS 469. INDEPENDENT STUDY IN SECONDARY SCHOOLS. (Variable) EDS 491. HONORS SEMINAR IN SECONDARY EDUCATION. A seminar intended to provide an experience of quality that utilizes the human and other re10Urce1 of the univenity. The major emphasis is on inquiry nther than mere acquisition of information. The methodology of the course is designed to feature the Socntic method, case study, action research, or problem-oriented techniques. The examination is in the form of a defense of a paper written by atudenta in their major fields . It is intended to minimize routine aummary and to maximize critical thinking . (Variable) EDE 494. STUDENT TEACHING WORKSHOP. For student■ seeking secondary teaching certification in Pennsylvania who have had prior teaching experience in secondary ■choola. The learning procedures aaaume various undentanding• and competenciea. Regiatntion for this workshop requires the approval of the Dean of Education and the Director of Student Teaching. (8 era.) S EDF 500. CREATING INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS . Thia basic production course encompaaaea the principle ■, techniques, and skills used in the effective prepantion of a variety of inexpensive teacher-made instructional materials, auch as tnn■parencies, opaque projection materials, individual materials to aupport projector inatruction, duplicating di■c recording, on tape, duplicating tape ■, making 10Und effect■, chalkboard techniques, mounting and preserving pictorial materials and ■pecimens, lettering techniques, devices for the di ■play and study of live ■pecimens, apecial-purpose maps, models and mock-ups, (flannel boards, magnetic boards, electric boards, dionma ■tagea, and effective bulletin boards). (3 era.) EDF 510. PHOTOGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION. Beginning with the fundamentals ofphotognphy, this course considers the skills and techniques needed to take and display effective photognphs in black and white or in color, and how to use various camens, common aupplements, attachments, and materials. Because photognphy also depend, on the photognpher's perception and style, students are encounged to seek out aubjecta that interest them. They plan and execute individual projects in communicating thoughts or feelings to others. Applications to problems of inatructional communication and instructional development are encounged, and emphasis is placed on techniquea of presentation. (3 era.) EDF 520. TELEVISION PRODUCTION FOR TEACHERS. A study of the techniquea for producing and directing effective televised inatruction. Student■ develop skills and competencies by doing exercise, in planning, designing, ■cripting, preparing gnphics for, and teaching and directing short television lessons. Effective utilization techniquea and evaluation of televised instruction are also considered. (3 era.) 184 DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION ELEMENTARY EDUCATION (EDE) EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION (ECE) ELEMENTARY EDUCATION/EARLY CHILDHOOD See also: Special Education in this catalog, pages 326 and following, for dual majors in Early Childhood and Special Education, and in Elementary Education and Special Education. Professor Roger J. Orr, chair; Associate Professor Elwin Dickerson, assistant chair. Professors M. Eileen Aiken, Dorothy M. Campbell, Ronald A. Christ, Allan D . Jacobs, Gary W. Kennedy, J. Gregory Martin, Phyllis S. Mcllwain, Anthony J. Saludis; Associate Professors Diane H. Nettles, Jannene Southworth, John R. Vargo; Assistant Professors Beverly J. Melenyz.er, Joseph D. Scarmazzi Student in all curricula must achieve a satisfactory score on the National Teachers ' Examination in order to acquire Pennsylvania Certification. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ELEMENTARY EDUCATION The goal of the Elementary Education program is to have students acquire the knowledge, skills, and attitudes essential to becoming a successful member of the teaching profession. The term Developmental Interaction is used to summariz.e the department's belief that: (1) learning is the result of interaction between heredity and environmental factors; (2) learning is the result of interaction between cognitive, affective, and psycho-motor areas of development; and (3) learning occurs in predictable stages of development which are age-related. The Elementary/Early Childhood Professional Education Program seeks to prepare teachers who facilitate learning by emphasizing the following: (1) process-oriented teaching strategies, (2) diagnostic teaching, (3) holistic learning experiences, (4) reliance upon intrinsic motivation, (5) responsive environments, (6) integration of cognitive and affective objectives, and (7) home/school collaboration. Elementary Education majors must successfully complete one semester of student teaching, which includes field work at two grade levels. Certification to teach kindergarten through sixth grade is awarded upon graduation and upon successful completion of the NTE. The College of Education is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education. The Placement and Career Services Office aids students seeking teaching positions locally and out-of-state. DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD 185 Curriculum: (A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities (including English Composition 1-11 and Oral Communication); 15 credita in Natunl Sciences (including mathematic ■, biological science, physical science and environmental science); 15 credit, in Social Science, (including Gcognphy, American History, Economic• and Genenl Psychology), 3 credit, in Health and Phy■ical Activities (B) Professional F.ducatioo: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching (EDE 461) (C) Professional Specialization: Art for Elementary Teachera (EDE 205); Teachin, Music in Elementary Gnde1 (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary Gndea (EDE 208); Inatnictional StrateJiea in Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children'• Litenture I (EDE 311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409); Mathematica Content and Method in the Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studie1 (EDE 306); Science in the Elementary School (EDE 307); Teaching of Language Arla (EDE 308); Assessing Children's Performance (EDE 450) Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD The Early Childhood Education program provides the academic background and field work needed for teaching certification from infancy through third grade. Upon completion of the program and upon successful completion of the National Teachers' Examination, the prospective teacher will receive a Bachelor of Science degree and a Pennsylvania Instructional Certificate. The College of Education is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education, and certification in Pennsylvania can apply to all fifty states. Our Placement Office is active in aiding students seeking teaching positions locally and out of state. California University of Pennsylvania has had exceptionally high placement of its Early Childhood graduates, and given the number of students graduating in the field, future employment looks promising. The objectives of the Early Childhood program are to help students: -Understand the growth and development of children; -Plan educational experiences using knowledge of different cultures and societies; -Select and use instructional resources wisely. Curriculum: (A) Geaeral F.ducation: 18 credit, in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGl0l-102), Oral Communication (COM 101), and counes in litenture, music, and art history; 15 credit, in Natural Sciences, including Mathematics, Biology, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credit, in Social Sciences, including Geognphy, American History (Before or Since 1877), American Government, Element, of Economics Geognphy, and Genenl Psychology), 3 credita in Health, including Health Coed. (B) Professional F.ducatioa: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computera for Teachera (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Educational Psychology (PSY 208): Child Psychology (PSY 205); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainatreaming Exceptional Leamera (EDU 340); Student Teaching (EDE 461) 186 DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD (C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Field Experience with Infants, Toddlers, and Preschoolen (ECE 203); Field in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Inatructional Strategies in Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217); Health and Physical Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Children' ■ Literature I (EDE 311); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in a Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 307); Communicative Art■ in Early Childhood (ECE 318); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405) Experience ■ Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ELEMENTARY/EARLY CHILDHOOD (DUAL MAJOR) Curriculum: (A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including English Composition 1-11 (ENGI0l-102), Oral Communication (COM 101), and courses in literature, music, and art history; 15 credits in Natural Science■, including Mathematics, Biological Science, Physical Science, and Environmental Science); 15 credits in Social Science,, including Geography, American History (Before or Since 1877), Elements of Economic ■ and General Psychology), 3 credits in Health, Finl Aid and Personal Safety. (B) ProfeMiooal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Computers for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) ; Educational Psychology (PSY 208) : Child Psychology (PSY 205); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 305); Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Student Teaching (EDE 461) (C) ProfeMiooal Specialization: Art for Elementary Teacher (EDE 205); Teaching Music in Elementary Grades (EDE 207); Health and Physical Education in Elementary/Early Childhood (EDE 218); Inatructional Strategies in Elementary and Early Childhood Education (EDE 210); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's Literature I (EDE 311); Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Observation and Conference (EDE 409); Mathematic ■ Content and Methods (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary Teachers (EDE 307); Teaching Language Art■ (EDE 308); Field Experiences with Infant, Toddlers, Preschoolers (EDE 203); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Communicative Art■ in Early Childhood (ECE 318); Early Childhood Ed Seminar (ECE 405); Assessing Children's Performance (EDE 450) Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD 187 ELEMENTARY EDUCATION COURSES (EDE) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. EDE 100: READING, STUDY AND LISTENING SKILLS . The purpose of this counc i■ to develop lillening, reading and ■tudy 1k.ill1 ncceaaary for academic ■ucce11 in Univenity ■tudies and future vocational and profe11ional work. 11ris course does 1fOt cany credit towards gradualion. (3 en.) EDE 205 : ART FOR THE ELEMENTARY GRADES. Development of art activities suitable for the elementary gndea. Emphaais is placed upon the integntion of art education with other ■chool subjects. (3 en.) EDE 207 : TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES . For cla11room teachen of elementary, early childhood and middle ■chool gndes, thi■ counc demonstrate■ proper technique■ of teaching mu ■ic to children. Basic performance skills and their application in the classroom, such as the use of rhythm instruments, ■inging game ■, records, dance ■, creative activitie1 and part- ■inging are taught. Information on resource material is included. Students pnctice teaching selected mu ■ic topics to the other ■tudents in the cla11. (3 en.) EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION. The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher i■ explored in this counc. Preservice teachen are taught specific pedagogical skills and stntegies that develop a teacher who does the following effectively: observe ■ and 11se1se1 children, facilitates active learning, provides a rich learning environment, attends to both affective and cognitive demands of learning, and views learning a ■ an interaction of environmental and developmental facton . (3 en.) EDE 218 : TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY AGE CHILDREN. An introductory counc with special emphasi1 on planning, asseHing, pre■cribing, teaching and evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher directed practicum experience■ are provided during cla11 time. Prerequisite 32 credits. (3 en.) EDE 301 : TEACHING OF READING. Theoretical background and the research base behind suggestion■ to put theory into pnctice are included to give the prospective teacher a balanced perspective. Students are presented pnctical information, activities and strategies for teaching reading, and given the opportunity to participate through observation■, demonstration■, and actual le110n planning and teaching situations. Prerequi ■ite: 32 credits; 9 Humanities credits. (3 crs.) EDE 302: DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL READING. Major emphasis is placed on acquainting the ■tudent with the technique■ of diagnosing reading difficultiea and of detennining appropriate remedial treatment. Prerequisite : EDE 301. (3 crs.) EDE 305: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT AND METHOD IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Emphaais is on understanding the cognitive development and the perception of children and their work with mathematic ■. To accomplish this it i■ suggested that students work with children. The professor demon■tntes learning activities appropriate to the developmental and academic levels of the children. Al time pennits, and on the ba1i1 of the experiences gained through observing and working with children, critical analyses of commercial arithmetic materials and texts, 11 well as recent trends and current projects in arithmetic, are considered. Prerequisite■ 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 crs.) EDE 306 : TEACHING OF SOCIAL STUDIES FOR ELEMENTARY GRADES . The foundation■ of the social studies are examined, and teaching strategic, are emphaaized . Attention will be given to current trend ■ and the present statu■ of social studies. Child growth and development are related to knowledge base• throughout the COUl'IIC . Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Social Science credits. (3 crs.) 188 DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION- EARLY CHILDHOOD EDE 307 : SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. Thia course is required of all lltudenu in the Elementary curriculum. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula, the content of science, and the proce11 of science teaching. Additionally, the instructor generate, behavioral outcome, by encouraging acientific alcilla, deacribing positive attitudes, and enhancing appreciationa and acience interelt. Prerequi ■ite : 32 credits; 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.) EDE 308 : TEACHING OF LANGUAGE ARTS . Presents a broad foundation of the variou1 aspects of the language arta in elementary education. Emphasis given to the knowledge of the facets of the language arta, basic principle, technique,, materials of instruction, recent trends and research, and practice planning language arta experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.) EDE 311: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE. Acquaints the student with literature available for children and various techniques that may be employed in elementary classrooms to stimulate interelt in reading and telling stories and poems. Prerequi■ites : 32 credits; 9 Humanities credits. (3 en.) EDE 312: CHILDREN'S LITERATURE D. An extenaion of Children' s Literature I. Emphasis on selection and use of literature compatible with children's needs, intereata, and abilities. Focuse ■ on heightening appreciation of literature in children. Prerequisite: EDE 311 (3 en.) EDE 335: READING IN URBAN SOCIETY . Presents an undentandingof the reading proceu and its relationahip to lltudents in the urban school. Emphasis ia given to characteristics of the di ■advantaged child, phases of the reading proceu, stages of readiness, needs of the di ■advantaged child, providing for individual difference,, variou■ multi-ethnic ba■al reading programs, and materials and equipment. Prerequisite: EDE 301 . (2 en.) EDE 337: POETRY FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL CHILD . The study of poetry and verse, the heart of all literary experiences, mainly in terms of the pleaaure they give children through their meaning, music and mythm. Emphaaia is given to the special pleaaure inherent in poetry for children by extending their imaginationa, contributing new sen■ationa, and enhancing their past experiences. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Hurnanitiea credits. (2 en.) EDE 409 : OBSERVATION AND CONFERENCE. The 11tudent receives background and experience in working with intermediate grade children in the classroom. Lectures and classroom teaching experience, are combined to give the student an opportunity to discover an aptitude and interest in working with children. (3 en.) EDE 450: ASSESSING CHILDREN'S PERFORMANCE. This course reflects the developmental interaction model of teaching with a focus on the consideration of developmental factors in planning evaluation procedure,. This course's content includes the development and adaptation of instruments and procedures for evaluation of activities associated with a variety of teaching approaches including inquiry and diacovery learning. EDE 461 : STUDENT TEACHING . During this course the student is assigned to work in two claurooms in the public schools. Under supervision, the student observes and participates in all teaching activities related to the performance of a teacher's work in the elementary grades. Beside field work, students attend practicum clau once a week. Discussions are centered around the current materials utilized in all aubject areas. Pennsylvania achool law, relevant to the work of the claBBroom teacher are analyzed and discussed thoroughly. Opportunities are provided to discuu problems encountered by students in their student teaching experiences. Teaching opportunitie■ are identified and discussed on a weekly basis. (12 crs.) EDE 498 : INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES IN ELEMENT ARY SCHOOL. The techniques and the experience ■ of educational innovation are nearly boundleu; therefore, we focus on educational innovation a, reaction to national crisis, as reaction to technical innovation, and aa reaction to political fad. From this perspective, we asae11 the present social and political forces that engender change in our national experience and that foster innovation in our educational practices. We will examine the role of the NTE as an agent of change. Prerequisite: 32 credits. (3 crs.) DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD 189 EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION COURSES (ECE) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. BCE 202: FIELD EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The studenta m:eive background and experience in worki111 with primary grade children in the clauroom. Lectures and clauroom teachi111 experience■ arc combined to Jive studenta an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with young children. Prcrequi1ite1: 32 credita, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.) BCE 203:FIELD EXPERIENCES wrrH INFANTS, TODDLERS, AND PRESCHOOLERS. Introduce■ the student to working with young children, from infancy through five by providing field experience■ in infant/toddler day care centen and prcachool centen (Day Care, Head Start, or Nunery School). The student obacrvea, plans activities, and prepares learning materials for children in group acttings. Lectures and clauroom teaching arc combined to give students an opportunity to diacover their aptitude for and interest in working with very young children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 crs.) EDE 210. INSTRUCTIONAL STRATEGIES IN ELEMENTARY AND EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION. The role of a developmental intenctionist teacher ia explored in this course. Prcacrvice teachen arc taught specific pcdaJoJical ■kill■ and atratejiea that develop a teacher who doc■ the following effectively: obacrvea and a■ICIICI children, facilitates active learning, provide ■ a rich learning environment, attend■ to both affective and cognitive demand■ of learning and view ■ learning a■ an interaction of environment and developmental factor■. (3 crs.) BCE 217: MUSIC FOR EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the music intercata and need■ of the very young child deaigncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice■ in prcachool and the primary ,rades. Experience■ arc provided in singing, listening, playing inatrumenta, mythmic movement, and creative mu■ic activities. Prerequisite: 32 crcdita; 9 Humanitie■ crcdita. (3 en.) EDE 218: TEACHING HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/ELEMENTARY AGE CHILDREN. An introductory course with special emphasia on planning, aaacssing, prcacribing, teaching and evaluating activities which enhance the development of growth of children beginning at infancy. Teacher directed practicum experience, arc provided during claaa time. Prerequisite: 32 credita. (3 crs.) BCE 301: READING EXPERIENCES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. This course prepares Early Childhood studenta to become facilitators of early literacy learnings. Content deals with concepts of emerging literacy and the introduction of reading skills from infancy throughout the primary gradea. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Humanitiea credita. (3 en.) EDE 307: SCIENCE FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. This course is required of all student in the Elementary and Early Childhood curricula. It is designed to acquaint students with the history of acience curricula, the content of acience, and the proceas of acience teaching. Additionally, the instructor, generates behavioral outcome■ by encourajing acientific skills, deacribing positive attitudes, enhance appreciation■, and acience interest. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.) BCE 315: MATHEMATICAL CONTENT IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. The student is introduced to how mathematic, develops in the very young child and how to aaacas this development. The student is introduced to the teaching of arithmetic, mea111rcment, and geometry to the young child. Skill■ and understanding■ that children acquire from infancy to age 8 arc covered. Prerequisites: 32 credits, 9 Natural Science credits. (3 en.) BCE 316: THE CHILD IN A SOCIAL AND PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT. Providea student with skills nccesaary to develop children' ■ awareness of their social and physical world. Teaching atrategiea arc developed and evaluated 190 DEPARTMENT OF ELEMENTARY EDUCATION - EARLY CHILDHOOD as they pertain to children at the early childhood level of birth through eight yean. Prerequisite: 32 credits, 9 Social Science credits. (3 en.) ECE 318 : COMMUNICATIVE ARTS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. Familiarize students with methods of teaching communication skills to young children. The integration of the cognitive and affective domaina, so important in helping children communicate, receives special empha ■ia . Strategiea and techniques for teaching the language arts are included . Prerequisite: 32 credits; 9 Humanitie, credits. (3 en.) ECE 405 : EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION SEMINAR. How young children have been viewed and educated by society throughout history. The present-day circumstances of children and families are studied. Students receive background in how to work with parents, communities, other profeBBionals, and policy-maken to ensure a quality , developmentally appropriate education for young children. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208. (3 en.) ECE 491 : FUNDAMENTALS OF DAY CARE EDUCATION. Background in the origin and current trends of day care and the fundamentals of setting up a day care center. The course teaches students how to administer a program focusing on aspects such as budgeting, personnel management, and developing program components. Prerequisite: 32 credits; EDF 100, PSY 208 . (3 era.) ECE 493 : DEVELOPMENT OF THE PRESCHOOL CHILD. The development of the child from conception to six yean of age . The areas of development to be explored are sensory-motor, social-emotional, language, and intellectual. Strategiea for enhancing growth through the various stages are emphasized. Prerequisite: 32 credits, EDF 100, PSY 208: (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 191 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH ENGLISH (ENG) LITERATURE (LIT) PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM, Optiom in -BUSINESS AND COMMERCIAL WRITING -CREATIVE WRITING -JOURNALISM -RADIO-TELEVISION MEDIA -SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165 in this catalog). Professor Jack D. Goodstein, chair. Assistant Professor Ronald L. Forsythe, assistant chair. Professors Philip Y. Coleman, Robert W. Dillon, Sr., John M. Hanchin, Robert A. Korcheck, Horace S. Rockwood, ill, Charles R. Thomas; Associate Professors Glenn H. Blayney, Edward J. Chute, Sumner Ferris, Gene Patrick Halboth, Madelon Jacoba, Frederick S. Lapisardi, William M. Murdick, J. Alan Natali, Connie Mack Rea; Assistant Professors William J. Beardsley, William K. Bennett, Bernard J. DeFilippo, Judith A. Good, Robert H. Grimes, Patricia L. Hartman, William Hendricks, Arthur W. Knight, Pratul C. Pathak, Lisa M. Schwerdt, G. Ralph Smith, II, Madeline C. Smith, Carole A. Waterhouse; Instructor William A. Yahner PURPOSE English is a comprehensive discipline. Its scope encompasses a study of the evolution of the language itself, the various types of writing, the literature in English (poetry, drama, fiction, and essay regardless of national origin), and the study of literature in languages other than English. Enabling people to express their ideas clearly and to read their ideas and the ideas of others in an appreciative and critical manner sets English off as a "liberalizing" course of study. The ideas expressed are boundless. The content expressed is emotive as well as rational. What is written is a personal and social record of the struggle to create meaning for human existence. The reader is made more self-aware. Insight into the past and into the present creates an interdisciplinary and common core of ideas to be discussed and analymd by scholars in many disciplines. PROGRAMS The English major has seven options or areas of specialization. One is the general English program. Five options form the Professional Writing Program: Business and DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 192 Commercial Writing, Creative Writing, Radio-Television Media, Scientific and Technical Writing, and Journalism. The seventh option is for persons who want to teach English or an allied area: the English Department in cooperation with the College of Education and Human Services provides course work necessary for secondary school certification in English and in Communication (which certifies students to teach English, Speech, or Theatre). A well developed internship program supports classroom studies in the Professional Writing Program. Depending upon the Professional Writing option undertaken, a student may take as many as sixteen credits of internship experience. Policies and procedures regarding internships can be secured from the departmental office or faculty internship supervisor. HONOR SOCIETY Sigma Tau Delta (ET~) is the National English Honor Society. The California University Chapter, Delta Theta (~0), was chartered in 1959 and is the oldest chapter in the Pennsylvania State System of Higher Education. Membership is Sigma Tau Delta is open not only to English majors but also to all those who have English as an interest, provided they have at least a 3.0 average in their English courses, rank in the highest 35% of their class in general scholarship, have completed at least three semester of college, and have completed at least two courses in literature in addition to freshman English. AWARDS The English Department offers the following awards, in order to encourage and reward academic achievement: The Eleanore C. Hibbs Writing Award is given annually to a student in Composition I and Composition II. An applicant for the award must submit an essay that was written for one of these classes and that carries the recommendation of the student's instructor. All entries are judged by a special committee of the English Department. The winner receives a certificate of merit and $100, both awarded at a luncheon in May. The Minor W. Major Award is given annually to a student who has achieved distinction in the study of English. The award is given for merit alone, usually to a student of junior standing. A departmental committee reviews the academic records of prospective recipients, usually English majors, and singles out the student who best meets its standards. The award is named for Dr. Minor W. Major, late professor of English, 1957-1975. The recipient receives a certificate of merit and a cash award, both presented at a luncheon usually in April. The English Faculty Award is given annually to the student in English whose development has been most noteworthy over four years. The recipient receives a certificate of merit and an inscribed book, awarded at the senior dinner in May. DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 193 CAREERS Besides preparing the graduate for graduate work in English and American literature, linguistics, library work, law, and a number of other fields, the English program offers career opportunities in such positions as a newspaper reporter, magazine editor, writer, public information assistant, advertising researcher, communications specialist, proof reader, radio and television editor, and employment interviewer. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH Curriculum: (A) Geoeral Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area or Concentration: English Literature 1-11 (ENG 301 and 302); American Literature to 1865 (ENG 365); American Literature from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG 367); Chaucer (ENG 415) or Milton (ENG 427) or Survey of Old and Middle English Literature (ENG 310); ShakeBpeare (ENG 425); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348) or Practical Criticism (ENG 448); Introduction to Linguistic, (ENG 247) or History of the English Language (ENG 346) and 12 credits of 300-400 level English counes. Related Counes: 30 credits, at least 16 of which must be in a Related Discipline approved by the advisor and at least 16 of which must be at the 200 level or above. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ENGLISH: PROFESSIONAL WRITING PROGRAM Curriculum: Geoera1 Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. Busin~ and Commercial Writing Option Area or Concentration: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Advertising (ENG 437); Great Books (ENG 203); Bu1ine11 Writing I (ENG 211); and II (ENG 212); Journalism I (ENG 307); Research for Writen (ENG 308); Publiahing the Magazine (ENG 351); Writing for Publication (ENG 496) . 9 credits of restricted elective,: Studie1 in Writing (ENG 352); Article Writing (ENG 435); Journalism II (ENG 311) and ill (ENG 312); Copywriting (ENG 401); Directed projects in English (ENG 478); English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); 21 credits of related counes: Introduction to Business (BUS 100); Accounting I (BUS 111); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 301); Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 302); Principles of Marketing (BUS 321 ); Salcsmanahip (BUS 221 ); Principle, of Management (BUS 201); 11 credits of elective,. DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 194 Creative Writing Option Area or Coacmtration: Poetics (ENG 318); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377); Creative Writing Seminar (ENG 495); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351); Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Article Writing (ENG 435); Studie1 in Writing (ENG 352); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Three of the following restricted elective courses: Great Boob (ENG 203); Adaptation of Literary Material, (ENG 430) ; Playwriting (THE 250); Businen Writing I (BUS 211); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Advertising (ENG 437); Journalism I (ENG 307); Creative Writing: Fiction (ENG 376) or Poetry (ENG 377); Copywriting (ENG 401) . 32 credits of elective, drawn from literature (300 level and beyond), linguilllica, apccch, foreign language,, and theatre, including 12 hours of electives from any one area . Journalism Option Area or Concentration: Word Procening (ENG 151); Journalism I (ENG 307) and Journalism D (ENG 311) and Journalism m (ENG 312); Press Law and Ethics (ENG 253); American Journalism (ENG 254); Newapaper Reporting I (ENG 334); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Six of the following: Research for Writers (ENG 308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Newspaper Reporting D (ENG 335); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351); Sportawriting I (ENG 313); Sportawriting D (ENG 314); Advertising (ENG 437). Twelve credits in a related discipline; 16 credits in internship or related electives. Radio-Television Media Option Area or Concentration: Writing core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journali•m I (ENG 307); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Article Writing (ENG 435); Directed Projects in English (ENG 478); Adaptation of Literary Materials (ENG 430); Writing for Publication (ENG 496). Media Core : Introduction to Televi1ion Production (COM 240); Introduction to Radio Production (COM 245); Radio and Television Writing : News and Commercials (COM 330) ; Radio and Television Writing: Drama (COM 335); Radio Workshop I (COM 196) and D (COM 296) and ill (COM 396) or Television Workshop I (COM 195) and D (COM 295) and ill (COM 395). Six to 15 credits of writing electives from among: Playwriting (THE 250); Journalism D (ENG 311) and m (ENG 312); Creative Writing : Drama (ENG 378); Advertising (ENG 437); and Businesa Writing I (ENG 211) . Six to 12 credits of media electives from among: Radio and Television Announcing-(COM 246); Appreciation of Television (COM 270); Advanced Televi1ion Production (COM 340); and Special Problems in Speech Communication (COM 420). Three to 15 credits of literature electives from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); Shakespeare (ENG 425); Studies in Drama (ENG 488); Shakespeare in the Theatre (THE 305); World Drama (THE 315); Dramatic Theory and Criticism (THE 400); or other advanced literature courses. Scientific and Technical Writing Option Area or Concentration: Writing Core: Advanced Writing (ENG 375); Journalism I (ENG 307); Scientific and Technical Writing I (ENG 217) and Technical Writing D (ENG 218); Publishing the Magazine (ENG 351); Article Writing (ENG 435); Research for Writers (ENG 308); Studies in Writing (ENG 352); Writing for Publication (ENG 496); Literature Core : Six credits from among: Great Boob (ENG 203); English Literature I (ENG 207) and English Literature D (ENG 208); American Literature to 1865 (ENG 365); American Literature from 1865 to World War I (ENG 366) ; American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) . Related Electives: 14 credits from among: English Grammar and Usage (ENG 345); Journalism D (ENG 311); Advertising (ENG 437); Copywriting (ENG 401); Business Writing I (ENG 211); Directed Project in English (ENG 478) . 3-8 credits of literature electives; and a 3-11 credit internship . 21 credits of Scientific or Technical courses, 15 credits in one discipline code . DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 195 BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN ENGLISH FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculma: (A) Gmenl Educatioa: Humanitie ■ (IS credit, minimum): including Compo■ition I (ENG 101); (ENG 102), Theatre Coune, World Literature to 1600 (ENG 20S) or World Literature ■ince 1600 (ENG 206); Natural Science (9 credit, minimum); Social Science (9 credit minimum); Health or Phy■ical Activitie■ (3 credit minimum); Oral Communication (COM 101); General P■ychology (PSY 101). (B) Profeuioaal Educatioa: (41 credita): Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational P■ychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Tellla and Mea■urementa in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School ■ (EDS 46S); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Lcamcra (EDU 340); Computera for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching of English in Secondary Schools (EDS 440); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461). (C) Profeuioaal Specialization: (4S credita) : Advanced Writing (ENG 37S) or Scientific & Technical Writing (ENG 217) or Creative Writing (ENG 376); History of the English Language (ENG 346); English Grammar and U■age (ENG 34S); History of Literary Criticism (ENG 348); Introduction to Lingui ■tics (ENG 347); Argumentation & Debate (COM 230) . (D) AdHDCed Requirements: (27 credita) : American Literature to 186S (ENG 36S); American Literature from 186S to World War I (ENG 366); American Literature from World War I (ENG 367) or American Literature Elective; English Literature I (ENG 301); English Literature II (ENG 302); Shakespeare (ENG 42S); Communication Theory (COM 490); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 130) or Stagecraft (THE ISi) or Fundamentals of Directing (THE 200); ~00-400 ENG literature elective. Compo■ition II Students must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to achieve Pennsylvania Certification. ENGLISH COURSES (ENG) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. + ENG 100. ENGLISH LANGUAGE SKILLS . A beginning coune which provides guided practice in writing and reading, with emphasis on the interrelationship of reading, thinking, and writing to evaluate the effective use of the written language and, after evaluation, to help develop these ■kills to the level of competency expected of college lludenta. ENG 100 stresses learning fundamental principles and attitudes concerning the writing process as well as how to put into practice these principles and attitudes. It explores the importance of eaaential compo■itional ■lcill■: the ability to read correctly and to organize material effectively and, by adherence to the innate logic of language (revealed in ita rules of grammar, ■yntax, punctuation and vocabulary choice) to expreu idea■ clearly and precisely. This course does 1UJI cany credit towards graduation. (3 era.) +ENG 101. ENGLISH COMPOSmON I. Composition I is a natural sequel to English Language Sicilia. It guided practice in writing, with emphaaia on thoughtful analyai■ of subject matter, clear understanding of the writing ■ituation, flexible use of rhetorical strategies, and development of stylistic options, particularly those related to an understanding of a variety of purpose■ and voice■ . ENG 101 continues the development of the eaaential writing, reading and thinking slcill■ atre■sed in ENG I 00. (3 era.) provide■ 196 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH +ENG 102. ENGLISH COMPOSITION D. The 1equence of Composition I - Composition D provides guided practice in writing, with an empha■ia on more demanding writing aituatione. It continue ■ the work begun in Compo■ition I with more complicated rhetorical ■trate,ie■ and styli■tic options, especially audience-centered considerations. ENG 102 introduce■ reaearch and reaearch writing at the undergraduate level. (3 en.) + ENG 106. INTRODUCTION TO POETRY. An introduction to the elements of poetry throuah the clo■e and explication of ■elected poetry from a variety of poets. (3 en.) analy■ia + ENG 107. INTRODUCTION TO FICTION. An introduction to the elements of fiction throuJh the clo■e reading of ■elected ■hort ■torie■, novella■, and novel■ by a variety of authon. (3 en.) + ENG 108. INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA. An introduction to the ba■ic elements of drama. aelected from worka from the Greek Clauical Period to the Modem Age. (3 en .) Reading■ will be +ENG 151. WORD PROCESSING . Familiarize, the IIUdent with the ba■ic concepts of word proceuing. The atudent learns ■uch operations a■ di■k fonnatting, editing and printing ■tandard document file■ , copying file■ from other eource■, creating simple databaae file,, and melJUli file■ to do maaa-mailings. The coune aa■ume■ no prior knowledge of computen. Thi■ coune may not be uaed to aatiafy Humanitie■ requirements in the General Education program. (1 er.) + ENG 155 . BLACK LITF.RATURE. An introduction to the writing■ of African Americana in poetry, fiction, and drama, ran,ing from the Harlem Renai■aance of the 1920. to the contemporary productions of Leroi Ione■ and l■hmael Reed . (3 en.) +ENG 191. STUDENT PUBLICATIONS WORKSHOP. The univenity newspaper and other publications aerve as laboratories. The IIUdent practices writing, editing, photography, layout, and production. Above all, the IIUdent learns to work against the clock, a journali■tic neceuity. (1 er.)+ENG 203 . GREAT BOOKS. The texta and hi■torical background ■ of aelectione from among the mo■t highly regarded literature of the world . The range i■ from the clauical Greek era to the twentieth century. (3 en.) + ENG 205. WORLD LITERATURE TO 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of periods and culture■ through 1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Worlte are read in translation. (3 en.) +ENG 206 . WORLD LITERATURE FROM 1600. Example, of worka from a variety of culture■ and periods after 1600 are examined for their literary merit and national characten. Works are read in translation. (3 en.) ENG 211. BUSINESS WRITING I. An introduction to the analysis, writing, and oral preaentation of fonnal and aemi-formal documents eaaential to busineu groups. Prerequisite: ENG 101. (3 en.) ENG 212. BUSINESS WRITING D. A continuation in the practice of thoae skills developed in Busineu Writing I. Prerequisite : Busineu Writing I or equivalent writing ability. (3 en.) ENG 215. LITERATURE AND AGING. The 1111dy of literature that include ■ aging as a thematic device. (3 en.) ENG 217. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING I. An introduction to the specific technique, uaed in the preparation of reporta and other acientific documents. Recommended for Science and Technology majon. (3 en.) ENG 218. SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL WRITING D. For IIUdents who wish to improve writing skills acquired in ENG 217: a problem-aolving approach to adapting technical documents to variou■ audiences; ■trategie ■ of organization for complex technical documents ■uch aa formal propoaals, professional articles, and computer documentation; the uae of computen to mailer different formats in acientific and technical communication. Prerequi■ite : ENG 217. (3 er.) DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 197 ENG 253. PRESS LAW AND ETHICS : Thi ■ counc help ■ atudent joumali1ta understand not only what they can or can't do by law, but what they ■hould or ■hould not do within commonly accepted standard■ of good taste and morality. ENG 254. AMERICAN JOURNALISM: A atudy of the rccenthiltOry ofjoumaliam and of the prcacnt ■tatc of the profeuion. The empha1i1 i■ on print journalism; however, the news gathering and reporting aapccta of radio and tclevi■ion arc covered briefly. Prcrcqui1itc1: Joumali■m I and II for Writing Majon. ENG 265. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: NINETEENTH CENTURY. A aurvey of aclcctcd worb which (1) were very popular; (2) were influential in the counc of American history; and (3) reveal faceta of American life in the 19th century. (3 en.) ENG 266. THE AMERICAN EXPERIENCE IN LITERATURE: TWENTIETH CENTURY. A study of aclectcd literature of twentieth century America in the context of major social, hiltOrical, economic, and intellectual trend■ • In addition to the treatment of ■tandard twentieth century •clauic■, • book■ which have had a wide popular appeal or which have influenced or interpreted the cultural life of modem America arc atudied . All genres arc included, with apccial empha■i■ on fiction and non-fiction. A lower divi ■ion counc de■igncd for the general educational atudent. (3 en.) ENG 301 . ENGLISH LITERATURE I. A aurvey of English literature from ita beginnings in the sixth century to the late eighteenth century. (3 en.) ENG 302. ENGLISH LITERATURE II. A aurvey of Engli■h literature from the Romantic pocta to the prcacnt day. (3 en.) ENG 307. JOURNALISM I (NEWSWRITING). An introduction to basic newsgathering and newswriting taught by in-clau exerciaca early in the acmcstcr, followed by weekly auignmenta that require submissions to the California 1lmes. (3 en.) ENG 308. RESEARCH FOR WRITERS. For students in each of the ProfeSBional Writing tracks . Basic library materials and technique■, on-campu■ rcaource■, govemmcntdocumenta, research libraries, and advanced techniques of interviewing, document analysis, etc. Concludes with a pre-publication draft of a rcacarched paper in the student's area of apecialization. (3 en.) ENG 310. SURVEY OF OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. A study of English literature from ita beginning■ to approximately 1500. Some of the topic■, authon, and work■ arc Beowulf, elegiac and Christian poetry, the riac of the drama, the romance (Sir Gawain and lhe Green Knight and Thomas Malory' ■ Morre Danhur), and aclcctiona from Geoffrey Chaucer' s Canterbury Tales. Moat of the writing is read in Modem Engli■h veniona. (3 en.) ENG 3 ll . JOURNALISM II (FEATURE WRITING) . Feature writing and in-depth news reporting. Studenta write four feature article■ ■uitable for publication in the California 1lmes. (3 en.) ENG 312. JOURNALISM m. Working on college publications, editing, proofreading, and rewriting materials for print arc learned in the clauroom and in the production of actual publicationa. (3 en.) ENG 313 . SPORTSWRITING I . A study of the history of aportswriting in America and the technique• of writing daily coverage of aports and athlete■ . Student.I will atudy interviewing, finding and using statistics, the standards and practice ■ of the profeuion and the make-up, layout and de■ign of the daily aports page. Student.I will_ be auigncd •beats• and will be asked to write at least one ltOry per week. (3 en.) ENG 314. SPORTSWRITING II: A atudy of the techniques of writing lengthy, in-depth stories about aporta and athletes. Student■ will be a■ked to write columns, feature 1t0rie1 and profile■ and to do investigative reporting . Student■ ■hould have taken Joumali■m I and Sportswriting I. (3 en.) 198 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH ENG 31.S. SURVEY OF AMERICAN WOMEN WRrrERS: METHOD AND TEXT. The importance of both text and method in the study of American women writen ia emph■aized in thia coune. Aaaiped reading• and research worbhopa introduce studenta to ■ variety of texta and aourcea ■a well ■a to methods for reading, discovering, and interpreting writings. Integration of text and method ia achieved through • aerie• of writing and research projecta that ■re tied to the ■aaigned readings. (3 en.) ENG 316. MYTHOLOGY I. An exploration of the origins of mythology and various mytha through• study of aelected Greek, Roman, Nordic, Oriental, African, and American Indian mythologies, with attention to the roles of aoda and heroes. (3 en.) ENG 317. MYTHOLOGY Il. A further examination of mythology, with emphasis on legend• and folkt■ lea, through study of En,liah, lriah, German, Italian, French, and American mythologies. (3 en.) ENG 318. POETICS. Through reading• from a text on poetic theory, eu■ya on poetry by poeta, and ■n anthology of poetry, studenta learn to analyze poema in great detail, atreaaing poetry ■a ■n ■ct of language and something which ia made •• much II it ia inspired. Studenta become acquainted with the variety of me■n1 by which the literary craft.man creates feeling and meaning. (3 en.) ENG 321 . THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: SKELTON THROUGH DONNE. A study of nondramatic prose and poetry choaen from such writen as Thomas Wyatt, the Earl of Surrey, Thomas S■ckville, John Skelton, Sir Philip Sidney, Edmund Spenser, William Shakespeare, and John Donne, with emph■aia on such literary genre••• the lyric and sonnet, and ■n examination of various philosophical, historical, and social documenta. (3 en.) ENG 322. THE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE: BACON THROUGH MARVELL. A study of the non-dramatic prose and poetry of En,l■nd in the seventeenth century from the worb of Francia Bacon, Richard Burton, John Donne, Michael Drayton, George Herbert, Robert Herrick, Ben Jonaon, the King James Bible, Andrew Marvell, John Milton, Henry Vaughan, and Izaak Walton. Emph■1i1 on the three achoola of poetry of the century. (3 en.) ENG 334. NEWSPAPER REPORTING I. A profeaaion■ l-level coune that acquainta studenta with basic newsroom procedures and ■aaignmenta. Prerequisites: Journ■ liam 1-Il. ENG 335. NEWSPAPER REPORTING Il. The coune builds on material learned in Newspaper Reporting I, but the emphaaia ahifta to extended coverage of more complex inatitutions and i1111e1, culminating in a multi-part story which demonatratea ■ knowledge of both the i1111e and the governing, deliberative or enforcement agency involved. Prerequiaitea: Journalism 1-Il, Newspaper Reporting I. ENG 341. ROMANTIC LITERATURE. An intensive study of selected worb by such Romantic poeta •• William Blake, William Wordsworth, Samuel Taylor Coleridge, Percy Bysahe Shelley, John Keata, and Lord Byron. (3 en.) ENG 342. VICTORIAN LITERATURE. An historical and critical survey of the poetry and non-fictional prose of the Victorian period through such writen as Alfred TeMyson, Robert and Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Thomas Carlyle, Matthew Arnold, Dante Gabriel and Christin■ Rossetti, Gerard Manley Hopkins, John Stuart Mill , John Ruskin, John Henry Newman, T . H. Huxley, and Walter Pater. (3 en.) ENG 345. ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND USAGE. Provides future English te■ chen, professional writing majon, and other inlereated atudenta, with a sophisticated background in En,liah grammar. The course coven a variety of grammatical theoriea, issues of mechanical correctneaa in writing, and the sociology of usage. (3 en.) ENG 346. HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A survey of the development of the language from ita Germanic base to the emergence of American Engliah. Explanations of aound ahifta and foreign and social influences. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 199 ENG 347. INTRODUCTIONTO LINGUISTICS. An examination of the ecvenl areas oflan,uage study: history of the lan,uage, phonology and morphology, gnmman (tnditional and modem), and contcmponry American usage, dialccll, lexicognphy, and ecmantic1. (3 en.) ENG 348. HISTORY OF LITERARY CRITICISM. An examination of major critical documcnll from Plato through the modem critics. An intenaive examination of the worb themselves, with some additional concern for their place in litenry hiatory. (3 en.) ENG 351 . PUBLISHING THE MAGAZINE. Studenll in this courec publish a magazine, Flipside. They contribute worb of litenturc and reportage, illuatnte it with original work: or with photognphs, solicit contributon, finance the magazine through advertising, and elllbliah editorial policy. (3 en.) ENG 352. STUDIES IN WR1TING. A study in style: ill definition, ill analysis, and the technique, modern writen of creative non-fiction uec to achieve it. Studenll analyze the work: of such writen as Tom Wolfe, Joan Didion, Hunter Thompson and Truman Capote, and then apply to their own proec the techniques theec writen learned from thoec writen. (3 en.) ENG 355. SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL I: THE BEGINNING THROUGH SCOTT. A study of the development of the novel from ill beginnina• through the Romantic period, with emphasis on Daniel Defoe, Samuel Richardson, Henry Fielding, Tobias Smollett, Sir Walter Scott, and Jane Austen. (3 era.) ENG 356 . SURVEY OF THE ENGLISH NOVEL Il: DICKENS TO THE PRESENT. A study of the novels and novelilll of the Victorian period and the twentieth century, including Charlea Dick:ena, Charlotte, Emily and Ann Bronte, W. M . Thack:cny, George Eliot, Joecph Connd, James Joyce, and Virginia Woolf. (3 en.) ENG 357. TWENTIIITHCENTURY BRil1SH LITERATURE TO WORLD WAR Il. A study of fiction, dnma, and poetry with empha ■is on W. 8. Yeats, D. H. Lawrence, George Bernard Shaw, Jamea Joyce, Joecph Connd, Virginia Woolf, E . M . Fonter, and W. H. Auden. (3 en.) ENG 358. CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE SINCE WORLD WAR Il. An explontion of major genres in American, English and Continental litenturc by such authors a ■ Saul Bellow, Norman Mailer, Kurt VoMegut, John Fowle,, Robert LowelJ, Ken Kcecy, John Updike, Lawrence Durrell, Bernard Malamud, Philip Roth, Sylvia Plath, Thom GuM, Boria Paatcrnak:, Samuel Beckett, Jean Genet, Eug~ne Ionesco, and Bcrtold Brecht. (3 era.) ENG 365. AMERICAN LITERATURE I. The first courec in the survey of American litenturc covers the period from ecttlemcnt to 1865. Readings take into account the discovery and rediscovery of new a ■ well as tnditional texts: writing• of Native Americana, Colonilll, Fedenlista, Romantic,, Tnnscendentalista, and othen arc studied with an empha ■ i1 upon the influence of Puritan and Enlightenment thought and upon the context of the implicit conflicts in American aocial hiatory and culture. (3 crcs.) ENG 366. AMERICAN LITERATURE Il. The accond courec in the survey of American litenturc focueca on the period of the Civil War to the end of World War I in which fiction . and poetry dominate the litenturc. Conaidention ia given to the emergence of Black: (in the Harlem Renaissance) and women writen within the context of a maturing America: growing expanaion, imrnigntion, industrialization, and national definition (3 en.) ENG 367. AMERICAN LITERATURE m. The final courec in the survey of American litenturc deals wi\h writing, from World War I to the prcecnt. A growing divenity of •voices,~ atyles, and genre reflect the increasing complexity and richneaa of the American litenry landscape. Both Modernista and contemponry writen arc studied. (3 en.) ENG 375. ADVANCED WRP'ING. The theoriea and pnctice of expository, persuasive, and specialiud report writing. Prcrcquiaites: English Composition I and English Composition Il or equivalent writina ability. (3 en.) 200 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH ENG 376 . CREATIVE WRITING: FICTION . Techniques of fiction are studied and applied to the writing of short stories, and students are encouraged to use and shape their own experience; transmitting those everyday things around them into fictional realities. (3 en.) ENG 377. CREATIVE WRITING : POETRY . A11pects of poetry, 111ch aa line length, rhythm, aound patterns and imagery, are discussed . Students will apply those techniques to their own experience and vision, developing a poetic voice or style. (3 en.) ENG 378 . CREATIVE WRITING : DRAMA. Writing techniques for the modem stage; e .g., developing character through dialogue and action. (3 crs.) ENG 401. COPYWRITING. Students who have already taken the basic Advertising course are expected to improve preexisting writing skills through individual and group projecta in each of these areas: (1) direct mail advertisements, (2) newspaper and magazine space advertisements, (3) industrial newsletters and brochures, (4) radio and TV advertisements. Each student writes at least two usable advertisements for off-campus and one for a campus program or organization. Noifor beginnen. Prerequisite: ENG 437 (3 crs.) ENG 415. CHAUCER. 1he Canterbury Tales and other works . (3 crs.) ENG 419 . INTERNSHIP IN PROFESSIONAL WRITING . Introduces students to the competitive world of professional writing. Students and cooperating institutions conclude a fonnal agreement whereby they work at a job and simultaneously receive undergraduate credit. (All details of the course are to be worked out with the Director of Professional Writing. Variable credits.) ENG 425. SHAKESPEARE. Explores in considerable depth, and with special reference to the conditions of Shakespeare's times and theater, some of his greatest plays, especially (a) those most often studied in secondary school and (b) his great tragedies. (3 crs .) ENG 427. MILTON. An examination of the major poetry : Paradise Lost, Paradise Regained, Samson Agonisies, and Lycidas . The prose is treated insofar as it is related to the poetry . (3 crs.) ENG 430. ADA.Pr ATION OF LITERARY MATERIALS . Adaptation of literature to the mechanical demands of television, radio, theater, and film. While remaining faithful to an author's intent, the student must adapt one short piece of literature and one major, long piece to each of the following: radio, television, theater, and film. (3 crs.) ENG 435 . ARTICLE WRITING . The styles and techniques of article writing. The student learns the editorial demands of numerous magazines, and demonstrates versatility and writing ability by tailoring the work to the demands . Promotes astuteness by showing how to illustrate, "package,• and market a special kind of writing. (3 en .) ENG 43 7 . ADVERTISING . An introduction to marketing theories, behavior patterns, and techniques of advertising campaigns: copywriting, layout, and production of advertising through working for an actual client. (3 crs.) ENG 445. DESCRIPTIVE LINGUISTICS . An examination of the methods used by linguists to describe languages in terms of their internal structures. Topics explored include world language families, language classification, writing systems, inventories of speech sounds, and other related material. (3 crs.) ENG 448 . PRACTICAL CRITICISM. Provides examples of criticism and the opportunity to criticize poetry, fiction , and drama . (3 crs .) ENG 481. STUDIES IN OLD AND MIDDLE ENGLISH LITERATURE. Arthurian romance, medieval drama , Beowulf, medieval ballads, Old English Poetry. (3 crs.) ENG 482 . STUDIES IN RENAISSANCE LITERATURE I. Eliubethan lyric poetry, pre-Shakespearean drama, Jacobean drama , Renaissance prose, the school of Spenser, Metaphysical poetry, Cavalier poetry. (3 en .) DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 201 ENG 483 . STUDIES IN THE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Reatontion dnma, Au,u1tan aatire, the Scriblerua Club, periodical litenture, nco-i:laaaical criticiam. (3 en.) ENG 484. STUDIES IN NINETEENTH-CENTURY LITERATURE. Nincteenth-centurydnma, Romantic proae, nineteenth-century litenry criticism, the pre-Raphaelite,, the Edwardians, and the Georgiana. (3 en.) ENG 485. STUDIES IN TWENTIETH CENTURY ENGLISH LITERATURE. Contemponry trends in litenture, the war novel, the poets of the Thirties, Irish litenturc, the British novel. (3 en.) ENG 487. STUDIES IN AMERICAN LITERARY GENRES. The American short atory, the nineteenth-century American novel, the twentieth-century American novel, modern American poetry, American dnma, American nonfiction. (3 en.) ENG 488 . STUDIES IN DRAMA. Cla11ical dnma, theater of the absurd, continental dnma , film and television as dnma, realism and natunliam in dnma. (3 en.) ENG 495. CREATIVE WRITING SEMINAR. The fictional principle■ learned in ENG 376 are applied to the writing of major creative work, such as novella, and the atudent i■ given the opportunity to polish and extend writing akilla previously acquired . (3 en.) ENG 496. WRrrING FOR PUBLICATION . Students work individually with an inatructor to refine their work for publication and are expected to publish at least one work during the aemeatcr. Simultaneou1ly, they compile jobrelated portfolios, and work on a auperviaed project, e.g ., a public relation■ scheme for the univenity . (3 en.) LITERATURE COORS~ (Ll'D Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. These are all introductions to literature, with emphasis on the subject indicated in the title. They are primarily intended for the general student and may not be used to fulfill requirements for the English major. + LIT 111. *STAR TREK" AND MODERN MAN. (3 en.) +LIT 115. MAN'S VIEW OF GOD. An introduction to the Bible as a chronicle of Hebrew hiatory in light of recent archeological and philological discoveries, to demonatnte how deeply this oriental book has affected the western mind. (3 en.) +LIT 116. MYTH, MAGIC, MYSTICISM. The four basic paths into the unknown: magic, mysticism, fantasy, and myth . (3 en.) + LIT 118. THE AMERICAN HERO. The development of the American hero in fiction, with specific emphasis on the hero'• nature, chancier, and matuntion. (3 en.) + LIT 125. THE AMERICAN WEST. A genenl_introduction to the litenture of the Great American West through an examination of a variety of litenry types. (3 en.) 202 DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH +LIT 127. WOMAN AS HERO. An exploration of heroic roles assigned to women in literature, the contrast between reality and tlle literature, and the differences between fictional women created by male and female autho111. An analysis of the reasons for these differences forms part of the subject. (3 crs.) +LIT 130. ATHEISM AND EXISTENTIALISM. (3 crs.) + LIT 138 . WAR IN THE NOVEL. A study that limits itself to those wars fought after 1900 and to their treatments in literature. In particular, the course is interested in the effects of war upon individuals, and in the ambivalence toward war ahown by novelists . (3 era.) + LIT 147. SCIENCE FICTION. An introductory survey of the forms of science fiction, with particular emphasis on the author' s ability to detail and predict future developments . (3 era.) + LIT 148 . HORROR IN LITERATURE. An examination of the tradition of horror literature in England and America from a literary, historical, and psychological viewpoint. Some emphasis on the sociological implications of the popularity of the form . (3 crs.) +LIT 150. BASEBALL IN LITERATURE. This course requires the student to read, write, and talk: about a game that Steinbeck: called a "state of mind,• a game that is, in the words of Jacque Baf"Zlln, a way "to know America .• Thus the student that works learns about both himself and his country. (3 crs.) + LIT 160 . AMERICAN NATURE WRITERS. An introduction to the best of America's great naturalists emphasizing the development of informed and educated attitudes towards America ' s natural resources and issues of protection and exploitation. (3 crs .) + LIT 166. SACCO AND V ANZEITI. + LIT 170. ALL ABOUT WORDS. An introduction to the total complexity and fascination of words. The course deals with words as shapes, analogs, formulas , and games. Indirectly, but significantly, it instructs in vocabulary by introducing a sizeable vocabulary for talking about words and by nurturing a student's natural curiosity about worda. (3 m.) DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 203 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURFS FRENCH (FRE) GERMAN (GER) RUSSIAN (RUS) RUSSIAN AND SOVIET STUDIES SPANISH (SPN) Associate Professor Elsbeth E. Santee, chair. Professors Alan H. Krueck, Bruce L. Weston; Associate Professors Raldo 0. Parascenz.o, Carol L. Kaplan; Assistant Professors Manuel G. Demetrakis, Margarita Ribar PURPOSE Rapid political and economic changes in the world require that students not only understand other cultures but that they can communicate with persons in those cultures. In this sense familiarity with speaking and reading a foreign language and being aware of how persons in other countries think about the world is pragmatic. It is good business or smart diplomacy. Instruction in an unfamiliar language also helps students see the world from a different perspective. Inasmuch as that occurs, students increase in self-awareness, lose a blind ethnocentrism, and gain a greater appreciation of all cultures, including their own. This makes life in general more meaningful. PROGRAMS The department administers three programs: a language program in German, French, Spanish, and Russian; an International Studies program with options in Business and Economics, Political Science, Geography and Languages (see the section on Earth Sciences, pages 167 and following, in this catalog); a language certification program for students who plan to teach in one of the language areas; and the Russian and Slavic Interdisciplinary Studies Program. Students in these programs will develop listening, speaking, reading and writing skills, as well as an awareness of cultural diversity and its impact on human behavior. Language and culture are closely aligned. To support both the language programs, International Studies majors and the general education humanities electives, required across the university for graduation, a series of culture courses, taught in English, are available. These indicate how artistic expression, geography, economic and historical development in the principal areas where the four languages are spoken mutually influence each other. 204 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES PLACEMENT Students entering a foreign language course will be evaluated in order to determine the proper course-level placement for them. Students who wish to receive credit for previously acquired language proficiency can talce a CLEP examination or a challenge examination (see pages 51-52 in this catalog). AWARDS The Elsbeth E. Santee Scholarship Fund grants renewable awards annually for students majoring in a foreign language and who maintain a 3.0 QPA in their major. Information about the award and application procedures is available from the departmental office. CAREERS Linguistic ability in languages other than English can promote employment opportunities in organizations working internationally, namely international legal, banking and commercial corporations, national and regional governmental agencies, social service and religious organizations, educational institutions, the communications, import-export and travel businesses and a variety of translation services. More information on specific employment opportunities is available in the Career Planning and Placement Office. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIF1CATION IN FOREIGN LANGUAGE TEACIDNG FOR GRADES K-12 (FRENCH, GERMAN, OR SPANISH) Curriculum: (A) Gmeral F.clucatioo: 15 credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102); 9 credits in Natural Science,; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credits of free electives . (B) Pro(euioaal F.clucation: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300) ; Educational Telltl and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School• (EDS 465); TeachinJ in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming the Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching Modern Languages K through 12 (EDS 460); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461). (C) Proreuioaal Specialization: Intermediate I (203) and II (204); Convenation and Compo■ition 1-11 (311 and 312); Advanced Composition, Grammar & Stylistics (FRE, GER, or SPN 401); 6 credits, Culture and Civiliution; Survey of Literature 1-11 (421 and 422); Foreign Language Colloquium in appropriate languaae (FRE, GER, or SPN 450); 6 credits of elective■ in major field in second foreign language. Students in these curricula also must achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to achieve Pennsylvania Certification. DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 205 BACHELOR OF ARTS IN FRENCH Curricuhma: (A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate French 1-Il (FRE 203 and FRE 204); French Conversation, Compo1ition, and Phonetic, 1-Il (FRE 311 and FRE 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Styli1tic1 (FRE 401); French Colloquium (FRE 450); Studie1 in French Culture (6 credits); Survey of French Literature 1-Il (FRE 421 and FRE 422); Geography of Europe (GEO 325). Six credits in one other foreign language; 3 credits in each of HiltOry, English, Philosophy, Psychology, and Communication Studies. Fourteen credits of related electives with the adviaer'• approval. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN GERMAN Curricuhma: (A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science,; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) Area of Concentration: I!ttermediate German I (GER 203) and Il (GER 204); German Conversation and Compo,ition I (GER 311) and Il (GER 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (GER 401); Studies in German Culture (6 credits); Survey of German Literature I (GER 421) and (GER 422); German Colloquium (GER 450) or HiltOry of the German Language (GER 452); Geography of Europe (GEO 325); six credits in one other foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, History, and English. 14 credits of electives with the adviaer's approval. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SPANISH Curricuhma: (A) Gt11e1'111 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Intermediate Spanish I (SPN 203) and II ( SPN 204); Spanish Conversation and Compo1ition I (SPN 311) and II (SPN 312); Advanced Composition: Grammar and Stylistics (SPN 401); Studies in Hispanic Culture (6 credits); Survey of Spanish Literature (SPN 421); Survey of Spanish-American Literature (SPN 422); Geography of Latin America (GEO 328); Spanish Colloquium (SPN 450); Six credits in one other foreign language; at least three credits in each of Philosophy, Psychology, Communication Studies, HiltOry and English. Fourteen credits of electives taken with the advisor's approval. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INTERDISCIPLINARY STUDIES, WITH A SPECIALIZATION IN RUSSIAN AND SLAVIC STUDIES Curriculum: (A) Gtllel'III Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 1~); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science,; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Elementary Rusaian 1-11 (RUS 101-1Q2); Intermediate Ru11ian 1-11 (RUS 203204); Soviet Rusaian Culture (RUS 296); Geography of the Soviet Union (GEO 330); History of Russia (HIS 245); Philosophy of Marxi,m (PHI 270); Comparative Economic System■ (ECO 351); Politics and Government of the Soviet Union (POS 280); Studies in Ru11ian Literature (RUS 469); 35 credits of restricted electives. 206 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES FRENCH COURSES (FRE) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) Culture Courses (FRE 240 and 296-301) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester. +FRE 101. ELEMENTARY FRENCH I. For the IIUdent without previou■ knowledge of French. The development of the fundamentals of correct idiomatic French. Instruction in basic audio-lingual comprchen■ ion, sentence ltnlcture, reading, writing, and apeaking. Cla■aroom inllnlction ia supplemented by laboratory IIUdy and practice. Three cla■a houn each week and one hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.) + FRE 102. ELEMENT ARY FRENCH Il. A continuation of French 101. Three cla■a houn each week and one hour languaae laboratory per week. Prcrequi■ite : French 101 or one year of high achoo! French. (3 en.) + FRE 203. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH I. French ,rammar and reading. A review of essential French grammar. Development of audio-lingual comprehen■ ion, reading and writing facility . Three class houn each week; one hour languaae laboratory per week. Prerequisites: French 101 and 102 or two yean of high achoo! French. (3 en.) +FRE 204. INTERMEDIATE FRENCH Il. Continuation of French 203 . Oral-aural work continue■ but i■ accompanied by a development of reading ■kill through diacuuion of selected prose and poetry. Three clau houra and one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 203 or equivalent. (3 en.) + FRE 240. THE MIDDLE AGES AND THE RENAISSANCE (800-1600). Thi■ course survey ■ the evolution of French- culture from the Middle Age■ to the end of the sixteenth century, from an age of analogy to one of 1kcptici1m. While it doc■ follow 10eioloaical, political, phil080phical and historical development■ to a certain degree, the course put■ it■ primary empha■i■ on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period. In 10 doing, this course illustrate■ to the student the way ■ in which France has been influenced by it■ rich cultural heritage. (3 en.) + FRE 296 . THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY AND THE CLASSICAL AGE. This course surveys the evolution of French culture from the early seventeenth century or the Baroque (1600-1640) to the clauical period (1640 to the end of the century). The course seek■ to introduce the student to the history of French thought in the Splendid Century. While it doc ■ follow 10eiological, political, philosophical and historical developments to a certain degree, it■ primary emphasis i• on the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period. In 10 doing, thi■ course illustrates to the student the ways in which France ha• been influenced by it■ rich cultural heritage. (3 en.) + FRE 297. THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY AND ENLIGHTENMENT. Thia course surveys the evolution of French culture throughout the Age of Enlightenment, when acientific diacovery and new historical methods acted a• agents of change upon the traditional foundation■ of belief. Con■ ideration ia given to how these change, affected French thoupt, e■pecially in the artillic domain■ of literature, music, architecture, and the visual art■ of the period. The course will introduce the student to thi■ age of criticism and recon■truction, an age viewed a■ the •cri■is of the European mind" and gave birth to the philosophe, or •philosopher," one who was not only involved with the theories but with 10eial reform as well. These reform■ in human inllitution■ and thought will be ahown to terminate in the revolution of 1789 and the end of the Ancien Regime. (3 en.) + FRE 298. THE AGE OF FRENCK ROMANTICISM: FROM THE NAPOLEONIC EMPIRE TO THE REVOLUTION OF 1848. Thi■ course survey■ the evolution of French culture throughout the Romantic Movement which permeated the sen■ibility of the young in France under the reign of Louis XVI and which reached a true DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 207 flowerilli in the nineteenth century, particularly from 1820 to 1845. Boch the early precuraon and the maaten of thia movement are conaidercd through a lludy of the artillic expreuion of the time,. (3 en.) +FRE 299 . THE AGE OF FRENCH REALISM: THE SECOND EMPIRE TO THE AFTERMATH OF THE FRANCO-PRUSSIAN WAR.. Thia coune 111rvey1 the evolution of French culture durilli the A,e of Realiam; including the Franco-Pruuian War, positivism and ita aftermath. Thia period encompaaaca the dictatonhip of Napoleon m, a monarchy marked by material aucceu among the middle clau and by disappointment and peuimiam among thinken, writen, and artiata. Thia coune conaiden the artillic achievement& of the period within the framework of the aociological, political, and hiatorical setting. The new generation of artiata studied reflect& a disguat with the reactionary politics of the Second Empire and the effect& of the height of the lnduatrial Revolution. The coune illu11trate1 to the student how the artiata found comfort and refuae in art as the only enduriDi value and a■ a aubllitute for religion. The closilli decade, of the nineteenth century were to elaborate and divenify two separate achoola of art, naturaliam follcrcd by the aae of po1itivi1m and incorporated in the work of Comte, Renan, and Taine, and 1ymboli1m which expreucd itaclf in the areat pocta, Verlaine, Rimbaud, and Mallann6. Thi• coune accb to illuatrate to the student how these conflictilli achoola of artillic expreuion manifeatcd themaclves in the principal worb of literature, philoaophy, music, and the viaual arta. (3 en.) + FRE 300. THE BIR.TH OF THE MODF.RN: FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS 1900-WORLD WAR. D. Thia coune survey• the evolution of French culture from 1900, the time of the Belle Epoque or Beautiful Period at the tum of the century, to the advent of the Second World War. While the coune docs follow the aociological, political, and hiatorical development& of the period, it puta emphasia on the artillic ramificationa of this period of conflict and rapid chqe. The interwar years are treated in all their artillic output, especially in inter-war theater, fiction, and the presence of the achoo! of Surrealism in poetry, fiction, theater, and art. (3 en.) +FRE 301. CONTEMPORARY FRENCH CULTURE IN THE AR.TS SINCE WORLD WAR. D. Thia coune survey, the evolution of French culture from the Occupation and Vichy Regime in France to the present day. It seelca to introduce the student to the literature, philoaophy, muaic, filma, and viaual arta of the period which reveal the rich cultural heritage of France. As an orientation to the cultural arta, conaideration will be aiven to the impact which important acographical, aocial, and hiatorical elementa had upon them. (3 en.) FRE 311. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Cultural themes are a basis for idiomatic conversation and diacuuiona. Written compositiona are auigncd to teach the student how to write correct French. The coune also provides a 1y1tcmatic atudy of the sounds and 1011nd pattcrna of the French Languaae. Three clau hours and one hour langua1e laboratory each week. Prerequisite: French 204. (3 en.) FRE 312. FRENCH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS D. Continuation of French 311 on a more advanced level a■ reflected in conversation, composition, and exercises in phonetic tranacription. Prerequiaite: French 311 . (3 en.) FRE 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR. AND STYLISTICS. An in-depth grammatical analyais of the French languaae through intenaive practice in exercises, compoaitiona, and tranalationa. It i• required of all majors•• well as those acckilli a teacher certification degree or certification in French. Prerequisite: French 312. (3 en.) FRE 421. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE I. An introduction to French literature from the Middle Ages to 1800 through an examination of representative novel,, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clau hours each week. (3 en.) FRE 422. SURVEY OF FRENCH LITERATURE D. An introduction to French literature from 1800 to the present th~gh an examination of representative novel■, play,, and pocma of the period. Three clalia hours each week. (3 en.) 208 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES FRE 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN FRENCH. An advanced counc in intenaive spoken contemporary French required of all French majon I I well I I those accking teacher certificatfon in French. Prerequisite: French 311. ( 3 en.) FRE 469 . STUDIES IN FRENCH LITERATURE. Subject matter to be arranged. Designed for French majon who wish to take additional credit,. Prerequi1ite: 18 houn of French . (Variable) GERMAN COURSES (GER) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). Culture Courses (GER 240-310 and 313-317) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major. Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester. +GER 101. ELEMENTARY GERMAN I. For ltUdenll who have had no previous instruction in German or who require additional instruction before attempting a more advanced level. Develops the fundamentals of correct idiomatic German through instruction in basic audio-linguiatic patterna and sentence structure. Three cla11 houn and one hour language laboratory each week. (3 en.) + GER 102. ELEMENTARY GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 101. Three cla11 houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 101 or one year of high-school German. (3 en.) +GER 203 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN I. The goals are to undentand, speak, and write German on a more advanced level. A review of the structural principles covered in German 101 and German 102 and additional structural material , idioma, etc. is given. More emph11is is placed on speaking and reading . Three cla11 houn and one hour language laboratory each week. Prerequisite: German 102 or two years of high-school German. (3 en.) +GER 204 . INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Il. Continuation of German 203, with speaking, reading, writing on a more advanced level emph11iz.cd . Three cla11 houn and one language laboratory per week. Prerequiaite: German 203. (3 en.) +GER 240. FROM TACITUS TO LUTHER. Fifteen hundred years of German Cultural History is traced in this counc, including the tribal era, eatablishment of the Holy Roman Empire and medieval society. (3 en.) +GER 296. THE GERMAN BAROQUE. The topic incorporates roughly two hundred years of German cultural history beginning with the spread of Protcatantism in the late Renaissance and concluding at the apogee of Enlightenment thought and influence. (3 era.) +GER 297. THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART I-ENLIGHTENMENT. The first half of the life of JohaM Wolfgang von Goethe ia the b11i1 for the counc chronology: 1749-1796; the period reflect, the acceptance, endoncment and ultimate waning of Enlightenment (Aujklilrung) ideals in the German lands. (3 era.) +GER 298 . THE AGE OF GOETHE: PART Il-ROMANTICISM. The concluding segment of Goethe's life (1796-1832) encompasacs the reaction against Enlightenment ideals and the realities of the Napoleonic Wars. These led to the riae of romanticism and the tint decisive atcpa to German cultural prominence in nineteenth century Europe. (3 en.) +-GER 299. RICHARD WAGNER AND HIS TIMES: TRIUMPH OF THE BOURGEOISIE. The period covered begina in the year of Goethe' s death, 1832, which is also the year which witnesacd the first attempts of writing for the musical atage by Richard Wagner. The rise of the German middle clau and triumph of bourgeois ideals form the background for the endeavon and developments of Wagner and hia contemporaries . (3 era.) DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 209 +GER 300. THE Wll.HELMINIAN ER.A. The aurvey covers the period 1870-1918 when German land, are united into a powerful national state, the Deuzsches Reich. Germany ia viewed at the peak of her cultural leadership in weltem civilization, before the debacle of the First World War. (3 era.) + GER 301 . THE WEIMAR REPUBLIC. The ill-fated German Weimar Republic lasted fourteen years, from 1919 to 1933, but in that period the world witneued an unparalleled concentration of cultural endeavor bom from military defeat, political humiliation and aocial and economic chaos following World War I. (3 era.) +GER 302. GERMAN CULTURE UNDER THE NATIONAL SOCIALISTS . The premise for this course is that German culture did not cease to manifeat itself during the period from 1933 to 1945 when Adolf Hitler and the Nazi Party controlled Germany' a deatiny. What the German public waa permitted in the way of cultural conaumption during the Nazi era is the focal point of the aurvey . Only worka produced in Germany at the time and either explicitly or tacitly endorsed by the Nazi government are dealt with . (3 en.) +GER 303 . GERMAN CULTURE IN EXILE. Many intellectuals uprooted for political or racial reasons by the Nazi uaurpation of political power in Europe fled their homelands, never to return . Documentary evidence from 1933 to 1949 ia uaed to understand their exile and German culture abroad. (3 era.) +GER 309. POSTWAR GERMANY-1945 TO 1990: BUNDESREPUBLIK (FEDERAL REPUBLIC OF GERMANY, WEST GERMANY). The cult!Jral apectrum of the Federal Republic of Germany (West Germany, BundesrepubUk Deuzschland) is the subject of thia survey. (3 era.) +GER310.POSTWARGERMANY-1945TOTHEPRESENT:DEUTSCHEDEMOKRATISCHEREPUBLIK (GERMAN DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC, EAST GERMANY). The cultural apectrum of the German Democratic Republic (East Germany, DeulSche Demokratische Republik) is the subject of this survey which begins with the year "0" and continues to ita demise. GER 311. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Selected readings are used to develop further skills in reading, writing, and speaking German. Three class hours and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 204. (3 crs.) GER 312. GERMAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS II. Continuation of German 311, conducted on a more advanced level. Three cla11 hours and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: German 311 or the completion of German 204 with a grade of A or B. (3 crs.) +GER 313. AUSTRIA: FROM THE BABENBERGS TO THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA 976-1813 . Thia topic presenta an approximately one-thousand-year cultural history of the Austrian empire from ita birth as protector and aucce110r of the Holy Roman Empire, to ita twilight at the end of the Napoleonic Wars. (3 crs.) +GER 314. AUSTRIA: FROM THE CONGRESS OF VIENNA TO THE TREATY OF VERSAILLES-1813-1918 . The last century of Hapsburg rule is the backdrop for this aurvey of the Golden Age of Austrian cultural enterprise. (3 crs.) +GER316 . AUSTRIA: FIRST REPUBLIC-HEIM INS REICH-SECOND REPUBLIC (1919-PRESENT). This course presenta a cultural history of Austria from 1919 to the present with representative works from the first Republic (1919-38), the period of Nazi annexation (Anschluss) (1938-45) and the post-World War II era which gave rise to the Second Republic (1955 to the present). (3 crs.) GER 317. SWITZERLAND. This course presenta a cultural survey of the German-speaking SwiBB primarily though the cultural contributions of the other lan,uage groups are represented. Although it begins in the days of the Roman Empire and proceeda awiftly through the formation of the Swiss Confederation in the 13th century to the beginning of the 18th century, the greater part of the course deals with the last two hundred years of the SwiBB cultural enterprise. (3 era .) 210 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES GER 401. ADVANCED COMPOSfflON: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS. The counc provide, in-depth grammar analysis of Gennan. lntenaive pnctice ia given for tnnalation and composition. Refinement of expository writing ia a major goal, and emphasis is placed on achieving fluent and idiomatic expression to a degree acceptable by a native and educated speaker. (3 en.) GER 421. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE I. Presents a foundation on liierary definition (style, form, period) and illuatntea them through the worka of leading Gennan speaking authors . (3 en.) GER 422. SUR.VEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE II. Continuation of Gennan 421. (3 en.) GER 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN GERMAN. The colloquium in Gennan is designed for students in teacher education who mull demonatnte a fluency in oral presentation in order to meet requirements for employment and tenure in Pennaylvania's achoo! ayatcma; &B such it i1 required for students in teacher education. It ia de ■igned aecondarily for the libenl arts major who wiahea to enhance fluency in speaking, but it is not required for the German major. (3 en.) GER 452. HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. For German language majors but open to any lltUdent meeting the prerequisite ■ . The counc begina with the emergence of a Gennan language group from its lndoEuropean heritage and tnces the development of contemporary German from Gothic through Old High Gennan, Middle High Ge~n and dialectic manifeatationa, &B well &B its encounters with other European languages. The counc ia required for German majors. (3 en.) GER 469 . STUDIES IN GERMAN LITERATURE. Designed to meet special needs of Gennan majors. Prerequisite: 18 hours of German. (Variable) RUSSIAN COURSES (RUS) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) Culture courses (RUS 240-297) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the major. Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester. +RUS 101. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN I. The purpose of RUS 101 is to prepare students to read intermediate level Russian by the middle of Ruaaian 102. To this end, it begina with practicing all skills but soon changes to a focus on structure and tnnalation. Ruaaian is presented without a text during the first week in order to establish awareness of the 1011nds of the language. Then study follows the units of the text. The grade is based on approximately 12 teats of equal weight. (3 en.) + RUS 102. ELEMENTARY RUSSIAN II. Completes the study of the structure of the RuBSian language . Reading of Russian history begina approximately halfway through the acmeatcr, with Stilman 's Graded Readings in Russian History. Prerequisite: Russian 101 or one year of high-school Russian. (3 en.) +RUS 203 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN I. Ruuian 203 prepare, the atudent to read advanced Russian. Upon completion ofStilman's Graded Readings in Russian History, the lltUdents read selected material• from the current Soviet preu. Grammar review is presented &B required. The grade is baaed on approximately six tnnalation teats. Three class hours each week. Perquisite: RuBSian 101 or 102. (3 en.) +RUS 204 . INTERMEDIATE RUSSIAN II. This counc is a continuation ofRUS 203 . Develops a reasonable control of spoken Russian through dialogue and oral practice. Students read selected materials from current Soviet publicationa. Prerequisite: Russian 203. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 211 + RUS 240. RUSSIAN CULTURE. Studenta read fiction by great Ruuian authon, listen to muaic by compoaen auch aa Tchaikovsky and Borodin, and grasp an understanding of Ruuia and ill culture through alidea, filma, and other media. (3 en.) +RUS 296. SOVIET RUSSIAN CULTURE. Literary and non-literary writings, films, slidea and recordings arc used to present a broad picture of the Soviet Union. (3 en.) +RUS 297. EASTERN EUROPEAN CULTURE. Study the folk and high culture of Poland, Czechoslovakia, Hungary, Ukraine and Yugoslavia . Films, slides and recordings play a prominent role in the course. (3 en.) RUS 311. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS I. Intenaive practice of contemporary Ruuian aa it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Russian speaken. While there ia regular work on composition, the course atrcucs proficiency in speaking. (3 en.) RUS 312. RUSSIAN CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS ll. Continued intenaive practice of contemporary Russian as it is used in everyday situationa by Soviet Ruuian speaken. While there is regular work on composition, the course stresses proficiency in speaking. (3 en.) RUS 469. STUDIES IN RUSSIAN LITERATURE. lndependentreadings in Russian literature. The inatructor and the studentarrange a program of study according to the student's needs and desires. (Variable) SPANISH COURSES (SPN) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). Culture Courses (SPN 205-303) are taught in English and are intended to satisfy General Education Humanities Elective Requirements as well as those in the Major. Courses are not taught on a regular FS cycle. One culture course is offered each regular semester. + SPN 10 l . ELEMENTARY SPANISH I. For the student without previous knowledge of Spanish who wishes to achieve a command of language fundamentals . Acquisition of speech skills in the classroom is reinforced in the language laboratory. Progressively greater emphasis is placed on reading and writing. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week. (3 en.) +SPN 102. ELEMENTARY SPANISH ll. A continuation of Spanish IOI. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 101 or one year of high school Spanish . (3 en.) + SPN 203. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH I. A review of the essentials of Spanish grammar through intenaive oral and written practice to facilitate the use of Spanish grammar and to develop the use of words and exprcssiona accepted throughout the Spanish-speaking world. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite■: Spanish 101 and Spanish 102 or their equivalenta. (3 en.) . + SPN 204. INTERMEDIATE SPANISH ll. Develops control of the principal structural patterna of the language through dialogue and oral reading, as well as through written exercise ■ baaed on selected readings. Three class houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisites: Spanish 203. (3 en.) +SPN 205. 14TH CENTURY SPAIN. Thia course will examine the style of art, literature and music of the 14th century Spanish culture. This is a period of conaolidation, of gradual assimilation of many influences and of significant contributions to western culture. One of the outatanding boob in literature, ubro de bum amor, and, 212 DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES in music, Las Huelgas Codex will be studied aa well II Ferrer Baua •• murals and Luis Borraua •• three-dimemional worlta. (3 en.) +SPN 206. GOLDEN AGE AND BAROQUE. The Golden Age of Spain ia a coune de1i,ned to capture the significance of Spain' • reawakening. It deacribea Lope de Vega's revolutionizing the entire concept of dramatic form; it detail, Spain'• contribution■ to Weatem Civilization in the form of great characten like Don Juan and Don Quixote and how they influenced the culture, of the world. (3 en.) + SPN 207. 1700-MID 19TH CENTURY. Thia coune will examine the style of Peninsular art, literature and mu1ic in the 18th and tint half of the 19th centurie1. Memben of the Houaeof Bourbonare on the Spanilh throne and thereby there i, a strong French influence upon artistic expre11ion. Thia i, the Age of Reason and the age of false and dictatorial 10phillication of neoclauic standard, which end, with the flowering of romantici1m. (3 en.) +SPN 208. GENERATION OF 1898-MODERNISM. Thia coune examines the latter part of the 19th century, a time in Spain when a new literary and social awarene11 was being expressed in the arts. Developmenll in the arts aet the atmosphere in which an entire generation of artiata, the generation of 1898, 11 they were referred to, set about the busine11 of representing the heart and soul of Spain. This coune closes by examining the work of the intellectuals who brought the Modemismo of Rubin Dario of Nicaragua to Spain. (3 en.) + SPN 209. 2CYTH CENTURY SPAIN-PART I. In thi1 coune we will comider the concept of a •generation• and two earlier movementa in Spanish poetry (Ultni1m and Creationi1m) before.dealin, with the poetry and the theater of the artiata known aa the generation of '27. Also, the compoaen of the Grupo~ Madrid, an international film-maker, Lui, Bunuel, as well as a very notorious painter, Salvador Dali, will be diacuued. (3 en.) +SPN 210. 20TH CENTURY SPAIN-PART Il. The explosive growth and rebirth of Spanish culture during the present century, especially the period following the repre11ive yean of the Franco regime, i1 studied through the worlta of notable intellectuals and artiata 1Uch aa Salvador Dali, Pablo Picauo and Federico Garcfa Lorca. The student is offered a panoramic orientation to the culture of contemporary Spain. (3 en.) + SPN 213. SPANISH CARIBBEAN . The cultural achievementa of contemporary Spanish Caribbean,. The coune reviews changes in Caribbean societies since the movement~ avance (Vanguardism, 1927). A sampling of the countries' art, unique music, architectural styles and folk dances, will be presented. (3 en.) +SPN 240. ORIGINS OF SPANISH CULTURE. The style of art, literature and mu1ic of the 12th and 13th centuries in Spain, in which the tendency i1 studied to recount wan, weddings and conquelll i1 evident. (3 en.) +SPN 301. ROMANTICISM IN LATIN AMERICA. The style of art, literature and muaic of the 19th century in Latin America. Attention will be given to the 1Ubordination of form to content, the emphaais given to imagination and emotion which often celebrates nature, and the utilization of common man and freedom of spirit themes. (3 en.) +SPN 302. MEXICO 20TH CENTURY. The cultural achievementa of contemporary Mexican,. Changes in Mexican society since the 1910 revolution, and the concern of Mexican writen with social and political theme,. A sampling of the country's art, unique muaic, architectural styles, mural• and folk dances will be presented. (3 en.) +SPN 303. CONTEMPORARY ARGENTINA. A view of Argentina's cultural tendencies in the Twentieth Century such a■ Surrealism, 11 well II the intellectuals' choice of a simpler expre11ion of reality, surrealiam, 11 well as the exiatential and neo-natural style, in literature, music and visual arts. (3 en.) SPN 311 . SPANISH CONVF.RSATION, COMPOSITION, AND PHONETICS I. Intemive practice in convenation, composition and phonetics, baaed on modem prose, provides models of natural, spontaneou1 speech, including colloquialisms. Written composition■ use orthographic rules. Three cla11 houn and one hour language laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Spanish 311. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES 213 SPN 312. SPANISH CONVERSATION, COMPOSmON, AND PHONETICS II. A study of the essential Spanish morphology, syntax, semantics, and linguistics as reflected in some representative authors . Prerequisite: Spanish 312 . (3 en.) SPN 401. ADVANCED COMPOSITION: GRAMMAR AND STYLISTICS . This course is intended to provide an in-depth grammatical analysis of the Spanish language, emphasizing "shades of differences" in the meaning of words and expressions as used in oral and written expression. (3 crs.) SPN 405 . CERV ANTES:DON QUIXOTE: Prerequisite: Spanish 321 or Spanish 322. (3 crs.) SPN 416 . GOLDEN AGE NOVEL. The major prose worlcs of the Renaissance and Baroque styles are studied : the Pastoral, Chivalric, and Picaresque novels . Prerequisite: Spanish 421 or Spanish 422 . (3 era.) SPN 421. SURVEY OF SPANISH LITERATURE. An intrnduction to the masterpieces of Spanish literature, ranging from Poema de Mio Cid to current authors . Represented will be all of the important Spanish literary genres: narrative poetry (epic and ballad), lyric verse , the short story, and selections from novels and dramas . (3 era.) SPN 422. SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN LITERATURE. A study of representative selections from the Colonial period to the present, with emphasis on the salient characteristics and the distinctive contributions of each literary form in the period or movement under study. (3 crs.) SPN 444. HISTORY OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. A history of the development of modem Spanish, beginning with Vulgar Latin as used in the Iberian peninsula . Attention is given to the impact of political and cultural influences on linguistic development as well as to making comparisons with the evolutionary development of other Romance languages. Prerequisite: Twelve hours of Spanish beyond Spanish 102. (3 crs.) SPN 450. FOREIGN LANGUAGE COLLOQUIUM IN SPANISH. An advanced course in intensive spoken contemporary Spanish required of all Spanish majors as well as those seeking teacher certification in Spanish. Prerequisite: Spanish 312. (3 crs.) SPN 469. STUDIES IN SPANISH LITERATURE. Designed to meet the special needs of Spanish majors. (Variable) 214 DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOWGY Associate Professor Marilyn M. Patterson, Chair. Professor Karen L. Hornung; Assistant Professor Mary A. Hart. The following faculty members of other departments teach Gerontology courses: Philip Y. Coleman and Angelo J. Orlandi. As the number of older people in the country increases, the need for trained professionals in the field of aging is also increasing dramatically every year. Employment opportunities for persons trained in gerontology are not only excellent at this time but have prospects of improving still further. The second largest projected growth area in jobs in the United States in the 1990's is in positions working with older adults. California University has the only approved Bachelor of Science in Gerontology program among the 14 universities in the State System of Higher Education. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN GERONTOLOGY This program is dedicated to providing the student with a broad range of academic and practical experiences that will enable the graduate to function in a variety of settings, such as administration, planning, management, and delivery of services to older persons. It is the objective of this program to increase the numbers and competency of persons working with older adults, their families, and their communities. The California Model Senior Center, located several blocks from campus, allows students a chance to receive actual experience under the supervision of a Gerontology department faculty member and a professional staff. It is one of very few Senior Centers in the nation with relations to an academic program in Gerontology. Students are involved in the various educational, recreational, nutritional, informational, referral, transportation, and grant components of the multi-purpose Senior Center. Specifically, students may coordinate the intergenerational visitation program, coordinate Geriatric Assessment, facilitate support groups for caregivers and older adults, develop training and educational videos, assist with program and group development, and plan educational classes. The Senior Center is near campus and it offers accessible, invaluable, and practical experience in a real-life setting. The Gerontology Department operates several grant-and university-funded programs providing a variety of services to the area's older population. Gerontology students are involved in all projects and receive invaluable practical experience. Some of the present ones are: SHARE: Student Housing Alternative with Rural Elders is a unique project pairing University students with rural older adults in a shared living arrangement. This project has brought national recognition to the Gerontology program. Senior Center/Senior Swim Programs: These provide educational, sociali:zation, recreation, exercise, and nutrition services to older adults. DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY 215 SHINE: Student Helpers Involved with Neighborhood Elders coordinates and trains student volunteers from the junior high school, high school, and university level to provide much-needed services to older adults. REACH: Rural Elderly Access to Consumerism and Homemaking provides educational programs and related services to older adults. The Gerontology Department also conducts research related to the projects it sponsors. By assisting in this research, students gain other skills that will be of value to them in employment or post-graduate studies. Curriculwn: (A) General Education: Composition I and II (ENG 101,102); Business Writing I (ENG 211); 12 credits of Humanities, including Oral Communication (SPE 101 ); 12 credits of Natural Sciences, including one computer course; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 15 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Get'?ntology (XGE 101); Aging in American Society (XGE 102); Aging Policies and Services (XGE 201); Biology of Aging (XGE 204); Media and Library Reaources in Aging (XGE 205); Adult Development and Aging (XGE 380); Seminar in Gerontology (XGE 439) . Eighteen credita in major electives selected from the following: Middle Years of Life (XGE 202); Group Work with Older Adulta (XGE 210); Aging and the Family (XGE 249); Minority Aging/Institutionalization (XGE 289); Health and Safety in Aging (XGE 300); Counseling the Older Adult (XGE 320); Activities in Long-Term Care (XGE 340); Selected Topics (XGE 349); Exercise for the Elderly (XGE 350); Rural Aging (XGE 369); Nursing Homes (XGE 370); Professional Practicum (XGE 449); Senior Center Operations (XGE 449); Survey of Aging Programs and Services (XGE 449); Foundations of Death and Dying (EDF 318); Literature and Aging (ENG 223); Historical Perspectives on Aging (HIS 205). Related Courses (16 crs.): Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Word Processing (ENG 151); First Aid and Personal Safety (HPE 314); Delivery of Services (SOW 365); one other 200, 300, or 400 level Social Work course; one 200, 300, or 400 level Management or Marketing course. Required Field Experience: a minimum of 6 credita, including both Community Set;ing (3 credits) and Institutional Setting (3 credits). Related Elective•: 1-7 credits. 216 DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY AGING SPECIALIST CERTIFICATE The Aging Specialist Certificate is becoming recognized as the minimum credential of qualification in the field of aging. The Certificate in Gerontology is designed primarily for either undergraduates interested in working with older adults in relation to their undergraduate major (e.g., Social Work, Psychology, Nursing, Speech Pathology and Audiology) or people who are currently working with or on behalf of older adults who have had practical experience in the field of aging but who have had little formal training. The Aging Specialist Certificate is 18 hours of course work in Gerontology including a three-credit practicum experience. Curriculum: Six credit.a in Gerontology: Introduction to Gerontology (XGE IOI); Aging Policie1 and Service, (XGE 20 I) . A minimum of nine credit.a of ■elected Gerontology course ■ choacn in consultation with the advi10r of the Gerontology Program. Three-credit practicum counc (XGE 449). - GERONTOLOGY COURSES (XGE) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. XGE IOI. INTRODUCTION TO GERONTOLOGY . An introduction to the field of aging for major■ and non-major■ . A general overview of the psycho10eial, biological, cultural , and behavioral aspect.a of late life. (3 en.) F S XGE 102. AGING IN AMERICAN SOCIETY. Examinationofpsycho10eial aspect.a of work, retirement, leiaurc, inatitutionalization, and death II experienced in contemporary America . Examination of roles and adjuatmcnll in late life. (3 en.) F XGE 201 . AGING POLICIES AND SERVICES . An overview of programa and acrvicea available to older adult.a, including the pall, present, and future of aging policies. Covered arc the Older Americana Act and amendment.a. Prerequisite: XGE 101, 205 . (3 en.) S XGE 202. MIDDLE YEARS OF LIFE. Multidisciplinary life cycle approach to middleacence . Relationahip of middle-aged to family , work, and community examined . Adult developmental taslca and stages emph11izcd . (3 era.) XGE 204. BIOLOGY OF AGING. Introduction to biological aspect.a of aging, both normal and pathological. Studied arc age-related changes in the digestive, akin, musculoskeletal, endocrine, and reproductive ay ■tcma. Prerequisite : XGE 205. (3 era .) F XGE 205 . MEDIA AND LIBRARY RESOURCES IN AGING. Introduction to print and non-print aging materials. Student.a learn how to locate and use different types of library and media materials and write a literature review following the APA style. (3 era.) F XGE 210. GROUP WORK WITH OLDER ADULTS . Focuses on basic principles of group dynamics and information about aging as it applies to group work. Student.a arc introduced to skills and specific technique, required to facilitate groups with older adult.a in institutional and community based settings. (3 era.) S DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY 217 XGE 249. AGING AND THE FAMILY. Overview of the theory/reacarch on familie■ in later life including a 1ynthe1i1 and review of existing literature, identification of reacarch i11ue1 and needs, and implication■ of thi■ information for practitioner■, reacarcher■, and family member■. (3 era.) XGE 289. MINORITY AGING/INSTITUTIONALIZATION . An overview of the theory, reacarch, and policy i1111e1 regarding minority aging and institutionalization, and implication■ of thia information for practitioner■, reacarchen, and ■ociety. (3 era.) XGE 300. HEALTH AND SAFETY IN AGING. Information and experience relative to health a1111C11ment, maintenance, promotion ofwellnea■ among older adult■ . Safety i11ues for older adult■ will be presented. (3 en.) XGE 320. COUNSELING THE OLDER ADULT. Combines information about the aaing proceaa with information and skills practice in counseling intervention. (3 era.) F XGE 340. ACTIVITIES IN LONG-TERM CARE. Basic principle■ of therapeutic recreation and activity program planning aa it applies to acrving older adult■ in long-tenn care acttings, primarily nur■ ing homes, per■onal care homes, and adult day care facilities. Student■ will be introduced to the 1kill1 needed to develop and implement a well-balanced activity program. (3 era.) XGE 349. SELECTED TOPICS. Roundtable diacuaaion■ of ■elected gerontological topics. For atudenta wanting to study either a new topic or a topic in more detail. Topics vary according to student■ and in■tructor. Prerequisite: XGE 101. (Variable credit) XGE 350. EXERCISE FOR THE ELDERLY. Cour■e provide, information and experiences to develop and conduct phyaical activity programs for the elderly. Activities to maintain and improve health and fitne11, and corrective and therapeutic activities are also presented. Prerequiaites: XGE 204, HPE 314. (3 era.) S XGE 369. RURAL AGING. Overview of rural, non-metropolitan are_as aa they relate to older adult■ • compares rural older adult■ to their urban metropolitan counterpart■. (3 en.) Cour■e XGE 370. NURSING HOMES. Examines nuning homes from historical, medical, managerial, environmental, and psycho■ocial per■pectives. (3 era.) XGE 380. ADULT DEVELOPMENT AND AGING. Introduction to psychology of aging. An overview of late life cognitive processes including intelligence, learning, memory, problem solving, and creativity. Examination of adult ■ocialization, per■onality adjustment, psychopathology, and death . Prerequisites: XGE 101 , 102, 204, 205, and junior level standing. (3 era.) S XGE 439 . SEMINAR IN AGING. For advanced Gerontology students to intensively examine and discuss ■elected aging subject■. Topics chosen by instructor; research paper/project required . Prerequisites: XGE 101, 102, 201, 204, acnior status, and permiaaion of instructor. (3 era.) F XGE 449, Section 1. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM. Opportunity to apply theoretical knowledge to practice through placement in agency or institution serving older people. Practicum sites include acnior center■, nur■ing homes, adult day care center■, independent living facilities, or area agencies on aging. Prerequisites: Permission of instructor and extensive cour■ework . (Variable credit.) F S XGE 449, Section 2. GERONTOLOGY PRACTICUM: SURVEY OF AGING PROGRAMS AND SERVICES. Claa■ field trips to observe available aging programs and service■. Reacarch paper on aging programs and acrvices required. (Variable credit.) XGE 449, Section 3 . GERONTOLOG'i'. PRACTICUM: SENIOR CENTER OPERATIONS . Claas field trips to observe wide range of acnior center■. Reacarch paper on acnior center operations required. (Variable credit.) 218 DEPARTMENT OF GERONTOLOGY The following couneaaR taught in other dcpartmcnu of the University other than Gerontology but aR nonctheleu Gerontology Major Electives. EDF 318. FOUNDATIONS OF DEATH AND DYING. A multidisciplinary introduction to dcath-Rlatcd topic■ from anthropological, psychological, philosophical, educational, literary, and musical perspectives. (3 era.) ENG 223. LITERATURE AND AGING. Positive and negative views of aging as portrayed in poetry, fiction, and drama. Studenu learn techniques for intcrpRting litcratuR and exploR criticism of the litcratuR. (3 era.) HIS 205. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in historical perspective, emphasizing social, cultural, and economic conditions that have effect on the aging population. (3 era.) DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 219 DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND SAFETY HEALffl AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION (HPE) DRIVER EDUCATION (HSD) Associate Professor Terry E. Scott, chair; Assistant Professors Carol A. McMahon, Floyd W. Shuler; Instructor Harry L. Ervin The Department offers courses reflecting the wellness concept. Presently, it functions as a service oriented department. However, there is a certification program in Driver Education Certification. Driver Education Certification Program The Department offers a certification program for a student seeking to become qualified as a Driver Education teacher in the secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements of this program, the student must complete a minimum of 12 semester hours. Six of the 12 hours are required in the program (HSD 300, Introduction to Safety, and HSD 305, Driver Education and Traffic Safety). The same 12 hours required in the Driver Education Endorsement Program can be used as "free electives" in the 30-hour free elective block. For further information concerning the program, contact the chairperson of the Health, Physical Education and Safety Department in Hamer Hall. DRIVER EDUCATION COURSES (HSD) _ F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. •HSD 300. INTRODUCTION TO SAFETY EDUCATION. The history and development of the aafety movement. Psychological variable• 111ch as attitudes, habits, emotions and values arc considered in tenm of their importance in the total accident picture. Home, farm, traffic , fire industrial and many other areas of aafety arc discussed. (3 crs.) F S •HSD JOS. DRIVER EDUCATION AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Designed to prepare a teacher to teach a complete thirty-and-1ix Driver Education clan. Emphasis upon euential facta, principle,, skills and p1ychological variable• necesaary for good driving and the teaching of the aame to beginning drivers. Enrolled atudenta arc required to teach a beginner the behind-the-wheel driving sequence. Prerequisite: a driver's license. (3 crs.) F S 220 DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION HSD 306 . MATERIALS AND METHODS IN SAFETY IN THE SECONDARY AND ELEMENTARY SCHOOLS. The various teaching methods and materials that can be uaed to teach aafety in the elementary or secondary school ■. (3 era.) F HSD 307. MOTORCYCLE SAFETY. A comprehenaive study of all aspects of motorcycle aafety. Various classroom and nnge experience, are provided to enable each student to become a proficient cyclilt. The coune alao prepare■ the student to teach others how to ride. Prerequi ■ite: HSD 305. (3 en.) F HSD 405 . ORGANIZATION AND ADMINISTRATION OF SAFETY EDUCATION. Organizing and Safety Education Prognm■ nnging from the elementary school through college. School aafety prognm■, environmental safety, and safety services are analyzed in detail. Prerequi■ite: HSD 330. (3 en.) S admini ■tering HSD 408 . PROBLEMS IN ORNER AND TRAFFIC SAFETY. Current problem■ in many area■ of the driver and traffic safety. Federal Highway Safety Program Standards are analyzed . (3 en.) F S •Required courses for Driver Education Endorsement Program. HEALm AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION COURSES (HPE) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. CPE 205 . FOUNDATIONS OF ATHLETICS . The basic theory, organization, and coaching technique■ of several sports are covered. (2 en.) F S HPE 100. HEALTH. Provide ■ the student with a critical analysis of health problem■ facing people today . Topic ■ studied include communicable diseases, chronic di■eases, abusive substances, mental health, sex education, nutrition, exercise, and ltreu management. (2 era.) F S HPE 102. AIDS PREVENTION. The course ia taught by an interdisciplinary team of public health providers and university faculty. During the five-week course, the student will learn all the dimenaiona of AIDS . (1 er.) F S HPE 202 . COED AEROBIC FITNESS AND NUTRITION. The course is designed to increase an individual' ■ fitness through higher level exercises. The activity portion of the class will include high impact aerobic ■ , rope jumping, swimming, etc ., to improve the student' ■ cardiopulmonary endunnce, ltrength and flexibility . There will be lectures on nutrition and basic exercise physiology. (2 era.) F S HPE 231. BEGINNING BADMINTON AND TENNIS . Basic inltrUction in the rules, ltntegy, etiquette of both badminton and tennis . (1 er.) technique■ and HPE 232. INTERMEDIATE BADMINTON AND TENNIS . An opportunity ia provided for the student to advance beyond the beginner level and to acquire a greater degree of skill through advanced analysis of techniques and stntegy. (1 er.) F S HPE 241. BEGINNING SWIMMING. The course places emphasis on the development of skills that will enable a student to move safely in and around the water with ease and enjoyment. Shallow water. (1 er.) F S HPE 242. INTERMEDIATE SWIMMING. Advanced beginner and intermediate swimming inltrUction i■ provided. Emphasis is placed on perfecting the nine basic ltrokes and on becoming more comfortable in, on, or near the water. Students should feel safe in deep water in order to enter this course. (1 er.) F S DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 221 HPE 250. MODERN DANCE. Contemporary dance fonna, techniqueund compo1itionarc prcacntcd. The atudent experience, working with exprcuive movement proble1111 in force, time, apace, line and level,. No prcrequi1ite. 2 houn combined lecture-laboratory. (1 er.) F S HPE 252. JAZZ DANCE I. The courac i1 de■igncd to atimulate penonal ■ati1faction through the jazz dance form of movement. It i1 offered II an introductory courac in jazz technique. (1 er.) F S HPE 256. CONDmONING AND MOVEMENT EDUCATION. Encourage, an appreciation of the ability and capacity to control and direct the movementl of the body with wll and intelligence. (l er.) F S HPE 265 . BADMINTON AND GOLF. Buie instruction in the rule■, ■trategy , technique■ and courte1ie1 of both golf and badminton. (l er.) F S HPE 266. TENNIS AND VOLLEYBALL. Fundamental• and game technique■ of tenni1 and volleyball. Game drill• and conditioning exen:iac■ arc al ■o a part of the courac. (l er.) FS HPE 267. ARCHERY, BILLIARDS , TABLE TENNIS . In■truction in the fundamental skill■ of the three activities. (l er.) HPE 271 . SLIMNASTICS. The courac is designed for weight management and cardiopulmonary endurance through aerobic activitiea. The ■tudent will learn the ■afe type of aerobic exen:i■c ■ and diacu■■ dietary goala. (l er.) F S HPE 275 . VOLLEYBALL AND BASKETBALL. lnstnlction and participation in the fundamental techniques, methods, rule■, and game strategy of the two aporta . (l er.) F S HPE 308. KINESIOLOGY . the biomechanic ■ of motor performance. Prepare, atudentl to analyze movement in order to teach, correct, or improve human performance. Offered aa part of the Sportl Medicine Pro,ram. (3 en.) F HPE 309 . EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY. The courac coven the acientific theories and principle, underlying lllrcngth, muacular endurance, cardio-vaacular endurance, flexibility , training and conditioning in human movement. Offered 11 part of the Sporta Medicine Program. (3 en.) S HPE 312. WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTOR. Conducted under the auapice■ of the American Red Cro■s, the courac is designed to equip the individual with the basic knowledge and skills neceaury to save one ' ■ own life or the live■ of othen. The courac provides certification in water safety instruction. Prerequisite: Current lifeguard training certificate. (3 en.) S HPE 314. FIRST AID PERSONAL SAFETY. Provide■ an undentanding of the cauac-effcct, prevention and treatment of emergency ■ituation■ . Thia courac i■ helpful to all ■tudentl, eapccially ■tudentl in the teacher education program. No prerequisite. Three-year certification is offered by the American Red Crou. (3 en.) F S HPE 315. CARDIOPULMONARY RESUSCITATION . Include■ preventive heart practice,, baaic conccptl of heart and lung function■ and ■kill■ for managilli obatructcd airways and cardiac arrclt. Certification ia by the American Heart Auociation. No prerequisite. Offered when there ia ■tudent need and interc■t . (l er.) F S HPE 316. LIFEGUARD TRAINING . Conducted under the auspice■ of the American Red Crou, the courac give■ con■ ideration to swimming, life-saving techniques, and pool management. American Red Crou Certification iuued . Prcrequ~ite: Water Teat, CPR, and First Aid. (3 en.) F S Ii· HPE 338 . PHYSICAL EDUCATION FOR THE EXCEPTIONAL CHILD. An introduction to the principle■, technique ■ , and rc■can:h in the phy■ical education training for the exceptional child. Major empha■i■ is on gro■a­ motor akilla and physical activities leading to lifetime recreation and aporta . (3 en.) 222 DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION HPE 347. BASKETBALL OFFICIATING. Enables studenta to become qualified PIAA basketball officials. Course content includes analysis of roles, regulations and the mechanics of officiating. Studenta receive game officiating practice. (2 en.) S HPE 400. ADVANCED FIRST AID. Students learn advanced emergency first aid technique, auch as delivering babies, extricating victims from automobiles, performing C.P.R. in transport, using Hare Traction splint for open fractures, and understanding basic ambulance equipment. Three-year certification by the American Red Cross. (3 en.) S HPE 500. EMERGENCY MEDICAL TECHNICIAN (EM1). Prepares studenta to become certified as Emergency Medical Technicians. Emphasis is placed upon the care and treatment of the ill or injured in a variety of emergency situations. Studenta arc required to devote at least ten houn to actual in-hospital observation. Prerequisite: Age 16 . (4 en.) F DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES 223 DEPARTMENT OF ffiSTORY AND URBAN STUDIES ffiSTORY (HIS) URBAN STUDIES (XUA) Associate Professor Anthony P. McGrew, chair. Professors John F. Bauman, Frank T. Edwards, J. K. Folmar; Associate Professors Margaret A. Spratt; Assistant Professor Sean C. Madden. PURPOSE The recording and explanation of the events that constitute social, organiutional or personal existence comprise the discipline of history. History, with its special concern for what is unique in human events, is an integrative discipline. Its narratives and explanations are contextual. As such, historians take cogni7.ance of the works of artists, philosophers and social scientists. For example, social historians utilize the methods of the social scientist. This integrative aspect of historical narrative and explanation continues to make it a primary part of a Liberal Arts education. In as much as it reveals every person's past, it makes possible greater personal freedom and creativity. PROGRAMS The department offers two degree programs: History and Urban Studies. The Urban Affairs major provides the student with the information and perspectives necessary to understand and analyze any complex urban system. It incorporates the principles and methods of urban planning and administration. This program provides the student the opportunity to participate in a practicum. Students interested in careers in Planning, Public Administration, Business, or Law Enforcement are encouraged to take a full semester of practicum credits in their junior or senior year. The History major is general in nature, providing students with the opportunity to select areas of topical interest. In relation to the major, the department, in conjunction with the College of Education and Human Services, provides requisite courses for Social Science certification for teaching in Secondary Schools. Students interested in teacher certification can secure further information from the College of Education and Human Services Office. HONOR SOCIETY Students who meet the academic requirements are eligible for membership in Phi Alpha Theta (~A0), the International Honor Society. Information can be obtained from faculty advisors and the departmental office. DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES 224 AWARDS The History Faculty Award for Academic Excellence is given annually to the History major who has demonstrated outstanding achievement. The Edward McNall Burns Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History or Urban Affairs. See the departmental office for further information. CAREERS Teacher, archivist, museum curator are professions directly related to the history major. Careers in law, religion, foreign service, both corporate and governmental, and diplomacy have a great reliance on historical knowledge. The urban affairs major will find career opportunities in urban and regional planning, in public and private agencies which provide data analysis relative to housing, market, transportation, crime and traffic patterns. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN lllSTORY Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition I-II (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita ofNatunl Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: (l) Required Western History - 15 credita; History of the United States to 1877 (HIS 101); History of the United Stateaaince 1877 (HIS 102); History of Western Society to 1740 (HIS 104); History of Western Society since 1740 (HIS 106); History Seminar (HIS 495) . (2) A minimum of two courses in Non-Western History - 6 credits; (3) History Electives - 24 credits: These must include at least three topical and three chronological courses listed on the History Major Distribution sheet, (4) Social Science Electives - 9 credits: These credits require one course from three of the following discipline, : Economics, Sociology; Geognphy, Anthropology, Political Science; (5) Related Electives - 14 credits. 1. . ______ B_A_C_HE_L_O_R_O_F_AR_T_S_IN_URB __AN __ STUD __m_s_____...... Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG l 0 l, l 02); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natunl Science; 12 credits of Social Science; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101); Municipal Government (POS 205); Urban Geognphy (GEO 210); Political Economy (XUA 217); Urban Sociology (SOC 235); History of Urban American (HIS 236); Urban Transportation (GEO 315); Seminar in Urban Studie1 (XUA 480); 18-24 credits of restricted electives, 6-12 credits of applied courses, and 11-14 credits of related elective,. A 6-12 credit Pncticum in Urban Studies i1 optional. DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES 225 IIlSTORY COURSES (HIS) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) +HIS 101. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES TO 18TI. American history from the Pilgrima to the age of modem indultly: the colonial heritage, American Revolution, the emergence of a new nation, weltwanl expanaion, Civil War, and poltWar Reconatruction. (3 en.) F,S +HIS 102. HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES SINCE 1877. The emergence of modem America, its achievements and its problema: prosperity and depreaaion; war and social unrest; World War I through the Vietnam era and beyond; the computer age and its challenges. (3 crs.) F, S +HIS 104. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIEI"Y TO 1740: Western society from its origins in the near East to the period of Absolutism in Europe. (3 crs.) +HIS 106. HISTORY OF WESTERN SOCIETY SINCE 1740: Western society from the Enlightenment to the preacnt. (3 en.) +HIS 111. THE DEVELOPMENT OF MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS. The proceaa and interplay of the major world cultures in their evolution: Indian, Moslem, East Asian (China, Korea, Japan), Slavic, Western European, Latin American, and African. (3 crs.) + HIS 112. MAJOR WORLD CIVILIZATIONS IN TRANSITION. Significant factors influencing change in there world'• major cultural areas: industrialization and urban conflict; the democratic revolution and the riac of charismatic leaden from Napoleon to Hitler. (3 en.) +HIS 121. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY TO 1815 . The development of the social, economic, political, religioua, and cultural experiences of the European people. F, S +HIS 122. EUROPEAN LIFE AND SOCIETY SINCE 1815. The development of Europe from the CongreH of Vienna to the end of the twentieth century; the social, political and economic stimulations that led to the emergence of nationaliam, dictatorship, and war. (3 en.) F,S HIS 147. HISTORY OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A history of the region, emphasizing the twentieth century interplay of cultural changes with tnditional ways: Islam and modernization; Soviet-American rivalry; the politics of oil; the Arab-Israeli conflict; and Arab nationalism: its leaden; the role of tem>rism. (3 era.) HIS 150. HISTORY OF THE ANCIENT WORLD. A study of the origins of Western Civilization from prehistoric man to the diaintegration of the Roman Empire; the cultural aspects of the Fertile Crescent and Greco-Roman civilizations. (3 en.) HIS 180. INTRODUCTION TO WOMEN'S HISTORY. An introductory courac designed to examine a variety of women'• issue, using an intenliaciplinary approach . (3 era.) HIS 187. FAMILY HISTORY. The techniques and proce88Cs used to tnce, study and analyze family history, including such new developments as oral history, penonal family archives, census data retrieval, quantitative methodologiea that are adaptable to family history, and the uaca of public documents and original aourcea. (3 en.) 226 DEPARTMENT OF IIlSTORY AND URBAN STUDIES HIS 188. LOCAL HISTORY. An introduction to the location, evaluation and significance of local hilltOry by uaing the problem-solving and genealogical approach. Specific topic, are analyzed in order to get to know at tint hand the importance of local and family history at the gra11 roota level. (3 en.) HIS 200. HISTORY OF PENNSYLVANIA. The hilltOry of Pennsylvania from colonial time■ to the present; the changes involved in social, political, and economic life are treated from internal and external pointa of view. (3 en.) HIS 201 . CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION . The cause, of the Civil War; the military, political, economic, and social development■ during the war; the consequence, of the poatwar period from the standpoint of contemporary development■ and their application■ today. (3 en.) HIS 203 . HISTORY OF TRANSPORTATION IN PENNSYLVANIA. The role■ that Pennsylvania ha ■ played in the development of transportation ayatema ■ince Colonial times, includifli turnpike ■, canals, river transport (flatboat■ to ateamboata), railroads, and motor transportation. HIS 204. HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES ON AGING. A chronological survey of aging in American culture from colonial times to the present. Principal subject■ for examination are the emergence and development of retirement program■, -and institutional and non-institutional treatment of the elderly in social, religiou1, political and cultural contexta. (3 en.) HIS 215. THE EXPANSION OF AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY. The emergence of modem American foreign policy and the facton that have influenced ita operation in the twentieth century: the interplay of military atrategy and the conduct of foreign relation■; the role of an expanding intelligence activity 1ince World War II; alobal economic problems; modem revolutionary movement■; the scientific revolution. (3 en.) HIS 216. HISTORY OF ENGLAND. The rise of England II a world power from the reian of Henry VII to the modem era, with particular attention to the social and economic aspect■ of Britiah life, the rise and fall of the Britiah colonial empire and its consequence, on world affain. (3 en.) HIS 217. THE AFRO-AMERICAN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A survey of the role of Afro-American& in the coune of American hilltOry, from the beginning to the present. (3 en.) HIS 218. HISTORY OF SPORT IN AMERICA. Sport a ■ a pervasive facet of our popular culture, a ■ a social in&titution, aa an arena of human activity, and aa a drama; sports and cultural value■ and values conflict; the relationahip of sport to social change throuahout American hilltOry. (3 en.) HIS 220. UNITED STATES MILITARY HISTORY. The development of America' s military strategy and the growth of the United States military establiahment: principal campaigns and battles; the role of the anncd forces as a f()Cial and political in&titution from the Revolution to the post-Vietnam Era. Emphasis is given to twentiethcentury strategy and related policy problem■ . (3 en.) HIS 225. HISTORY OF CONTEMPORARY EUROPE. Major development■ in Europe within the last 45 years which have significance in challenging and transforming many of the traditional values of society. The decline in the pre-eminent position of Europe in world affairs and the rise of a global civilization. (3 en.) HIS 226. HISTORY OF MEDIEVAL EUROPE. A study of the political, social, economic, and cultural force• of the Middle Ages, with emphasis on inatitutional and cultural life from the fall of Rome to the Renaissance. (3 en.) HIS 227 . RENAISSANCE AND REFORMATION. A study of Renaissance culture in Europe from the fourteenth to the sixteenth century, with emphasia on Italy, conaidering late medieval civilization, humanism, the artistic Renaissance, and the growth of the middle class, the universal church, and the appearance and character of the principal branches of Protestantism. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES 227 HIS 230. HISTORY OF EASTERN EUROPE. The medieval origin.I of Poland, Czechoalovakia, Hungary, Yugoalavia, and Bulgaria; Romania through the period of national revival of the nineteenth century, independence after World War I, sovietization after World War II, and reemerging nationalism. (3 en.) HIS 234. URBAN PLANNING IN HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVE. The planning implicationa ofuroanization; the early city planning of the pre-induatrial era, and the efforta by city plannen and developen to make the city more attractive and liveable in various period ■ of uroan growth . (3 en.) HIS 236 . HISTORY OF URBAN AMERICA. The uroan experience in American from the aeventeenth century to the preaent. Uroan America in the context of world uroanization, demographic trend ■ , technolojy, and the implicationa of theae force■ on the soci~onomic acene of uroan development. (3 en.) HIS 237. SOCIAL HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES. The major grouping• and waya of the United States from colonial day■ to the preaent. (3 en.) HIS 238 . HISTORY OF AMERICAN LABOR. American labor from early Colonial times to the present. (3 en.) HIS 240. HISTORY OF THE COLD WAR. The origina and continuance of Soviet-American rivalry 1ince World War II; confrontation in Europe; NATO; the Wanaw Pact; the growing nuclear anenal; regional conflict in Africa, Latin America and Asia; the Congo, Angola, Cuba, Iran, China, Vietnam; the politic ■ and leadenhip of both nationa; the emergence of Ru11ia a ■ a global power. (3 en.) HIS 245. HISTORY OF RUSSIA. Rusaian hiltory, culture, and inatitutiona from the inception of the Kievan state to the present; the pre-Soviet periods and those aspects of development of the RuHian state and people that have played a dominant role in the shaping ofRu11ian character, temperament, and history. (3 en.) HIS 247. HISTORY OF ETHNIC AMERICA. The immigrant in United States hi1tory from the eighteenth century through the contemporary period . (3 en.) HIS 250. AMERICAN CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY . The growth of the American conatitutional system, with special emphasis on those aspects of conatitutional growth that relate closely to the fundamental structure of American government and social order. (3 en .) HIS 260. WOMEN IN UNITED STATES HISTORY: A study of women from the Colonial Era until the present, arranged around·topics such a ■ reform, abolition, political activism, working conditiona and contemporary issue■ . (3 en.) HIS 265 . HISTORY OF LATIN AMERICA. The emergence of modem Latin America from the Aztecs to Castro; economic and social development of the region in the twentieth century; struggle for social justice among divene culturca; conflicts within Latin American political life; military dictatonhipa; parliamentary democracy; guerrilla warfare and counterterrorism. (3 en.) HIS 303. TALE OF THREE CITIES . A comparative approach to the proceu of uroan growth and the social, economic and political forces shaping the American city over time. Three cities, Washington, Pennaylvania, Pittsburgh and Philadelphia are examined to demonatrate how social, economic, political and technological forces shaped the uroan landacape over the yean 1750-1980. (3 en.) HIS 304. THE GREAT DEPRESSION AND WORLD WAR II. The stresses and straina of the 1930-1945 period of United State ■ history, using recent trends in acholanhip . (3 en.) HIS 305 . CONTEMPORARY HISTORY OF THE UNITED STATES . The unprecedented occurred in the United States since the end of World War II. (3 en.) change■ that have 228 DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES HIS 320. THE ANATOMY OF DICTATORSHIP. The basic, 10Cial, economic, psychological, and political clements that make up the modem dictatonhip . (3 en.) HIS 350. ADOLF HITLER.. The philo110phical and psychological clements that led to the rise of National Socialism, and its impact upon the western world . (3 en.) HIS 379. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN HISTORY. Development of individual prognms by students. (Variable en.) HIS 495 . SEMINAR IN UNITED STATES HISTORY. A study of American historians and their writings; the changing interpretations of major topic■ in American hi■tory. (3 en.) S URBAN STUDIES COURSES (XUA) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) + XUA 101. SURVEY OF URBAN AFFAIRS. An introduction to the basic concepts and language used to define and undentand urban life. The course seek■ to familiarize students with the dynamics of urban life as well as with the iuuc■ and problems which have hi■torically confronted the city and its people. (3 en.) +XUA 173 . COMMUNITY ACTION ANDNEIGHBORHOODGOVER.NMENT. Aninterdi1eiplinaryanalysis of the various aspects of community organization and neighborhood government of use to urban planncn and managcn, policy analy ■ta, nd those seeking careen in local voluntary or governmental agencies and institutions. (3 en.) +XUA 217. POLmCAL ECONOMY. The application to issues in urban affain of the analytic methods and common to planning law, politics, and economics. (3 en.) principle ■ + XUA 254. HOUSING AND HOUSING POLICY . Urban housing from the 10Ciological, economic, and historical pcnpcctivc: the nature of ahclter, the elements of housing, and such topics as housing and transportation, housing and the private sector, public housing, housing design, housing finance and slum creaton. (3 en .) +XUA 264. ORGANIZATIONAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE BEHAVIOR. Organizational and administrative behavior in the context of planning, policy development, purveyance, and implementation. In order to promote basic undcntanding of the various activitic■ and proccsacs involved, a number of concrete policy cases are used as vehicles for di1eu11ion and illumination. (3 en.) XUA 328 . LEISURE LEARNING . An overview of both leisure and recreation with emphasis placed upon the history, economics, education and the role of government and the private sector as they affect both leisure and recreation in the twentieth century. (3 en.) XUA 335 . RECREATION LEADERSHIP. A study of leadership theory practice and practical application as they relate to the administration, service and delivery of recreational programs. (3 en.) XUA 357. RECREATION FOR THE PHYSICALLY AND EMOTIONALLY DISABLED. Designed to assist students to develop pcnonalized recreation programs for those individuals who are mainstreamed into both public and private recreation programs. (3 en.) XUA 449 . PRACTICUM IN URBAN AFFAIRS . An intemahip in one of numerous planning, development or 10Cial agencies or oraanizations serving the Washington, Greene, Westmoreland, Fayette, and Allegheny County regions. Can be taken for 4-16 credits, and includes cooperating agency supervision as well as performance review . (Variable en.) HONORS COURSES 229 HONORS COURSES Admission to the Honors Program is a prerequisite for all of ·these courses. description of the Honors Program earlier in this catalog (page 29). See the HON 281. KNOWLEDGE AND CULTURE: SOME EXPLORATIONS. •To be culturally literate is to possess the basic infonnation needed to thrive in the modem world"-E.D. Hinch. This course explore ■ what every student need■ to know to read intelligently. Cius scuions focus on ■kill ■ needed to acquire cultural literacy, i.e ., the grasp of a coherent community of value■ and recognitions. The course provide■ honon students with a framcworlc of reference and bibliographic 1kill1 that they can utilize in their area■ of study. (3 en.) HON 285. PROTEST MOVEMENTS IN THE 1960'S. A general and comprehensive perspective on the unique, exciting, and dangerous world of 19601 politic,. Undentanding the period entails the use of films, videos, and record■ as well as extensive reading. (3 en.) HON 287. THE LITERATURE OF SOCIAL UNREST. The relationship between literature and aocial change as mirrored in contemporary fiction and drama from Eaatem Europe, Latin America, and South Africa. Class discuuion will emphasize the historical and political aignificance of works by such authors as Jerzy Kosinski, Milan Kundera, Vaclay Havel, Gabriel Garci'a M,rquez, Athol Fugard and Nadine Gordimer. (3 en.) HON 295. LITERATURE, THE VISUAL ARTS, AND THE WORLD VIEW. The relationships bttween literature and the visual arts, primarily sculpture and painting, illustrated in various periods of history and culture-Ancient Greece, the Renaissance, Manncriam, the Baroque, the Rococo, Romanticism, Realism and Naturaliam, Impre1sionism, and Expressionism; and, by study of the historical, aocial, and philosophical background■, an exploration of the •world view" of each period and how it ia expressed in artistic movements or •schools." (3 crs.) HON 381. EVOLUTION OF EARTH SYSTEMS. The evolutionary dynamic, of living systems; namely, how the interrelationship, between plants, animals, humans and environment shape their evolution, extinction, diversity, geographic distribution, geologic history, and, for humans, their cultural history. Specific examples of past and present biotic communities include Ice Age vertebrates, living mammals, amphibians and reptiles, continental and ialand fauna,, and human cultures from Peru, Egypt, the Amazon Basin and the Arctic. Lectures are strongly aupplemcnted with study of apecimcna, artifacts, and exhibits from The Carnegie Museum of Natural History. (3 en.) HON 385 . BIOLOGICAL ORIGINS OF SOCIAL BEHAVIOR. Socio-biology and the influence of the process of natural selection on aocial behavior in non-human and human animals. Findings from the biological and aocial science, are integrated to provide a comprehensive view of the origin and nature of various aocial behaviors. Field and laboratory observations of animal behavior are used to demonatrate a complex variety of aocial behaviors. (3 en.) HON 388. PRINCES AND PAUPERS: STUDIES IN SOCIAL CLASS, WEALTH AND POVERTY IN WORLD HISTORY. The impact of aocial and economic inequality on world history, using a case study approach to the exiatence of wealth and poverty in Ancient Rome, in Medieval and Refonnation Europe, in Colonial America, in Victorian England, and in 20th Century Urban America. (3 crs.) HON 499. HONORS THESIS. The thesis serve• as the capstone of the university Honors Program. Under the aupcrviaion of a faculty adviser of the student' ■ choice, the honors student seeks to make a substantive contribution to the discipline. Considerable latitude in the form of the contribution ia permitted; empirical and historical research as well ■ 1 creative products are all appropriate. A reader/reviewer ia assigned to pass judgment independently on the student'• scholastic effort. An oral defense, demonstration or display of the completed thesis i• required. (3 en.) 230 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOWGY Bachelor's Degree Programs: Electrical Engineering Technology (1) B. S. degree, 4 years (2) Upper level, 2 year transfer Graphic Communications: Options - Electrographics - Photolithography Offset - Screen Printing Industrial Management: Options - Manufacturing - Printing Industrial Technology Manufacturing Technology Technology Education (formerly Industrial Arts) ~ate Degree Programs: Automation Technology: Options - Numerical Control Machining - Robotics Drafting Technology Electronics Technology Screen Printing Faculty: Professor Jay D. Helsel, chair. Professors Ronald G. Dreucci, Richard C. Grim, John R. Kallis, John H. Lucy, Mark L. Nowak, Joseph E. Pecosh, Charles A. Schuler, Alfred E. Simpson, Darrell L. Smith. Associate Professors Mark E. Bronakowski, Stanley A. Komacek, John W. Loney, James R. Means, Jr., Joseph A. Sanfilippo, John M. Thompson, Jaroslav V. Vaverka. Assistant Professors Larry D. Horath, Rene L. Horath, Steve C. Hsiung, David V. Kolick, Jeffrey S. Sumey. Instructors Joseph G. Schickel, Susan G. Urbine. The Department of Industry and Technology offers six bachelor's and four associate degrees with various options. The Department has earned a national reputation of excellence in its many technology programs. Technology courses are taught in the Shriver L. Coover Complex, which houses twenty-two laboratories in two buildings. All laboratories are well-equipped with state-of-the-art equipment. Some of the facilities found in the Complex are three electronics laboratories, CADD equipped drafting rooms, a numerical control machining laboratory, a robotics DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 231 laboratory, two graphics laboratories, an electronic composition laboratory, a material testing laboratory, and a machine tool laboratory. In addition, laboratories in communication, production, and transportation technology are available for use in the teacher education program (Technology Education). In all the curricular descriptions below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY Electrical Engineering Technology is a branch of higher education dealing with both abstrac! and practical concepts from science, mathematics, engineering and technology. Considerable emphasis is placed on applications of current technology to meet the needs of everyday problems and situations. The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides students with the knowledge required to design, develop, modify, maintain and repair sophisticated electrical and electronic systems. Career Outlook Opportunities for employment in the field of Electrical Engineering Technology are diverse and plentiful. Graduates will find challenging jobs in all areas of the United States. Typical positions include: Electronic Design Instrumentation Design Systems Control Microprocessor/Computer Applications Software Development Electronic Field Representative Sales Representative Engineering Administration Curricul1DD The Electrical Engineering Technology program provides students with a comprehensive understanding of the current engineering technology available to solve many of the technical problems confronting business, industry and government. The necessary background in mathematics, physics and computer science is provided so that meaningful mathematical modeling can be introduced and applied. Computer/microprocessor interfacing and programming are heavily used to demonstrate flexibility and simplicity in instrumentation design, communications, signal processing, and controls. Classical linear systems are presented to provide the student with an understanding of linear active filters, transient analysis, transducer interfacing, linearization, instrumentation, communications and controls. Finally, the student has an opportunity to develop wider intellectual horizons through the university's general education program. 232 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY Program A~ion In addition to the conventional freshman admission procedure, student admission also includes those who have successfully completed a two-year associate degree in Electrical Engineering Technology or its equivalent. Students graduating with an Electrical Engineering Technology associate degree from institutions having an articulation agreement* with the University will normally enter the program with junior class standing. Students with an educational background in a field related to Electrical Engineering Technology who apply for admission to the program will be evaluated on an individual basis. Requirements: Bachelor of Science Degree - Electrical Engineering One hundred and thirty-two credits are required for tM degree. A. General Educalion: 59 credits MAT 181 College Algebra (F,S) MAT 191 College Trigonometry (F,S) MAT 281 & 282 Calculus I & II (F,S) CSC 12X Computer Science I (F,S) (Any language) PHY 101 (S) & 202 (F) College Physics I & II ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S) COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) Humanities Electives - 6 crs. Social Science Elective - 9 crs. Natural Science Elective - 4 crs. Free Electives - 9 crs. B. Professional Specialty: 73 credits Electrical Engineering Technology- 65 crs. EET EET EET EET EET EET EET EET 110 DC Circuits (F) 160 AC Circuits (S) 170 Digital Electronics Design (S) 210 & 260 Linear Electronics I (F) & II (S) 220 Introduction to El_ectric Power (F) 270 Introduction to Microprocessor Design (S) 310 Methods in Engineering Analysis (F) 320 Network Analysis (F) EET 330 Advanced Microprocessor Design (F) EET 360 Microprocessor Engineering(S) EET 370 & 420 Instrumentation Design l(S) & II(F) EET 400 Senior Project Proposal (F) EET 410 Automatic Control Systems (F) EET 430 RF Communications (S) EET 450 Senior Project (S) EET 460 Digital Signal Proc. (S) Technical Electives - 8 crs . minimum • Articulation agreements : Community College of Allegheny County - South Campus Westmoreland County Community College Butler County Community College DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 233 GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS TECHNOLOGY A reliable system for the transmission of ideas and messages is necessary in our fast-paced progressive world. The "printed word" or graphic communications serve as a most effective method of transferring those ideas and messages. Graphic communications involve all of the people, processes, materials, and related fields necessary to reproduce words, pictures, ideas and symbols in printed form on physical media such as paper, metal or cloth, in any quantity. The graphic communications industry is a large and diverse industry employing over one million people. Among all U. S. manufacturing industries, graphic communications ranks first in the number of establishments, sixth in total payroll and sixth in total number of employees. This large and ever changing industry is experiencing many technological changes that will create new slcills, jobs and challenges for tomorrow's workers. The Graphic Communications Technology Program at California University prepares people to enter the field by offering a curriculum of technical studies with laboratory-based experiences in the major printing processes. Students in the program study both general education, technical, and technical specialty courses. They have the opportunity to concentrate in one of three technical specialty areas: Electro-Graphics, Photo-Offset Lithography, or Screen Printing. The facilities used by the Graphic Communication Technology and Printing Management programs include three well equipped graphic communication laboratories with two photographic darkrooms, a phototypesetting laboratory, two modem electronic laboratories, and two drafting and design rooms. A wide variety of modem photo composing, cameras, film processors, printing presses and other equipment is available for instruction and student use. Career Outlook The future for people involved in graphic communications is bright. Because of both the sire and tremendous diversity in the graphic communications industry there is a wide variety of career opportunities for men and women of all interests, talents and educational levels. Recent estimates indicate that up to 500,000 people will be needed in the next five years in the nation's 100,000 printing plants. It would be impossible to list all of the individual job descriptions that exist, but typically Graphic Communications Technology graduates expect to fill positions in production areas, printing sales, quality control, customer service, estimating, scheduling, print buying, product design, marketing, equipment sales and technical service. Opportunities are available with advertising agencies, publishers, commercial printers, manufacturers of equipment and graphic communications suppliers, as well as graphic communications electronic equipment and control systems. 234 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY Curriculwn The Graphic Communications Technology program provides students with a comprehensive understanding of graphic communications concepts applicable to the solution of problems encountered on the job. In addition, the program provides students with experiences in the application of principles of business management and the development of analytical, and verbal skills. Students also acquire computer programming skills to prepare them to carry out their job responsibilities more effectively. To gain a more thorough understanding of computers and other electronic systems, they also take some required course work in electronics. Finally, students develop wider intellectual horiz.ons through their general education program. A unique opportunity in this program is the Graphic Communications Internship whereby students may spend a junior or senior semester or a summer working in an industrial setting. This internship broadens the students' education by offering the opportunity to work in a real-world setting, experiencing the day-to-day operations in a printing plant. Students observe how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions reached. In addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees. Requirements: Bachelor of Science Degree - Graphic Communications Technology One hundred mid rwenl)l-eighl credits are required for the degree. A . General Education: 48 credits ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math l&Il (F,S) PHY 121 General Physics I (F,S) COM 250 Oral Communication: Mgt (F,S) Humanities - 6 credits Social Sciences - 6 credits Natural Science - 6 credits Free Electives - 12 credits 8 . Photo Offset Option: 80 credits Management - 23 en. GCT 340 & 440 Eat. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S) ITE 375 Principles of Production (F,S) ITE 455 Quality Control (F,S) MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S) MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S) MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S) MGT 362 Labor Relationa (F,S) Technical Concentration - 27 en. IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns. I & Il (F,S) GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (F,S) GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F) GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniques 1 (F), n (S), & m (F) GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F, S) GCT 375 Finishing and Compoaing DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY 235 Technical Support - 21 crs. CSC I0S Buie Programming Language (F,S) IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S) IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysis (F,S) PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S) IND 13S Digital Electronic, (F,S) PSY 209 Industrial P■ychology (F,S) rrE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S) C. Screen PrlMng Opdon: 80 crediu Management - 23 crs. OCT 340 & 440 Est. & Cost Analysis I (F) & Il (S) ECO 201 Introduction to Microeconomics (F,S) rra 37S Principles of Production (F,S) rrE 4SS Quality Control (F,S) MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S) MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S) Electives - 2 crs. Technical Concentration - 27 crs. IND 140 & 240 Graphic Communa I & Il (F,S) OCT lSS, 2SS & 3SS Screen Printing I (S), n (F), & m cs) OCT 22S Principles of Layout & Design (F,S) OCT 23S Photographic Techniques (F) OCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S) IND 14S Photography (F,S) Technical Support - 21 crs. IND 101 Drawing & Design (F,S) CSC l0S Ba ■ic Programming Language (F,S) PHS 13S Chemistry of Material, (F,S) IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S) IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S) PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S) ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) OCT 49S Graphic Communication Intem.ahip or Approved Courses - 9 crs. (F,S) D . Electro-Graphics: 80 credits Management - 14 crs. MOT 201 Principles of Management (F,S) MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S) rrE 37S Principles of Production (F,S) OCT 340 Estimating & Coat Analysis I (F) Electives - 2 crs. Technical Concentration - 39 crs. IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commna. I & II (F,S) OCT 320 & 321 Elect. Composition I & Il (F,S) qCT 3S0 Photolithoiraphic Techniques I (F) IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S) IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S) IND 13S Digital Electronics (F,S) IND 14S IND 230 IND 23S IND 33S IND 330 Photography (F,S) Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ (F,S) Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S) Advanced Microproceuors (S) Industrial Electricity/Electronics (F,S) DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 236 Technical Support - 18 era. PHS 135 Chemistry of Material, (S) CSC 121 & 221 Computer Science I & II (F,S) PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S) ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I (F,S) OCT 495 Graphic Communication Internahip or Approved Courses - 9 era. (F ,S) INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY The need for educated personnel to participate in the development and application of technological change is evident; trained and experienced managers of production ensure that the benefits of modem technology are realized. The complexity of modem production processes requires higher levels of sophistication for planning, organizing, operating and controlling these activities. The Industrial Management curriculum combines a core of business and management courses with a selected technical area of study to prepare graduates for managerial roles in industry. Three technical option areas are available: Computer Science, Manufacturing, and Printing Management. The Manufacturing and Printing Management options are administered by the Department of Industry and Technology, while the Computer Science option is administered by the Mathematics and Computer Science Department (see pages 268 and following below). Career outlook The graduate of the Industrial Management Technology program is prepared for a wide variety of employment opportunities depending in part upon the chosen technical option area. Several possible career possibilities are listed below: Industrial Engineering Technology Production Planning Production Supervision Quality Assurance Numerical Control Programming Industrial Sales Systems Analysis Computer Programming In-House Printing Management Field or Service Representation Personnel Management Marketing Management & Planning Curriculwn The student may select the appropriate option in order to gain the necessary skills for a career in a business or industrial-related position. In addition the program: provides the student with sufficient elective courses to allow for an exposure to the humanities, the natural sciences and the social sciences; DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 237 presents the students with opportunities to develop the habits of reasoning critically and thinking clearly; provides the student with opportunities to develop appropriate communication and quantitative skills; exposes the student to an environment and activities that will provide an understanding of the field of business and management; provides the student with opportunities to develop competency in a technical area such as printing management, computer science or technology. Requirements: Bachelor of Science Degree - Industrial Management One hundred and twenty-eight credits are required. A. General Education: 48 credits ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 & 192 Technical Math I & II (F,S) PHY 121 General Phyaica I (F,S) COM 2.S0 Oral Communication: Management (F,S) Humanities - 6 era . Natural Science - 6 era . Social Science - 6 era. Free Electives - 12 era. B. Manufacturing Option: 80 credits Management - 30 era. PSY 209 lnduatrial Psychology (F,S) ACC 201 & 202 Accounting I & II (F,S) ACC 331 Coll Accounting I (F ,S) ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S) ECO 202 Introductory Macroeconomics (F,S) ECO 322 Managerial Economics (F,S) MOT 361 Labor Relations (F,S) ENG 211 Business Writing I (F,S) ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) Computer Courses - 6 era. CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) CSC 218 COBOL I (F,S) Metal Machining - 18 era. IND 16.S & 26.S Machine Processes I (F,S) & II (S) MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I & II (F,S) MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT II) (F) MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S) Technical Drawing - 6 era. IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S) 238 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY Electro-Mechanical - IS en. IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S) IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F,S) IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S) ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S) ITE 181 Material Technology (F) Elective Labs - S en. C. Printing Managemenl Opdon: 80 credits Management - 29 en. ECO 201 Introductory Microeconomics (F,S) ACC 201 Accounting I (F,S) ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S) •ITE 4SS Quality Control I (F) & ll (S) MKT 221 Salesmanship (F,S) MKT 301 Principles of Marketing (F,S) GCT 340 & 440 Estimating & Cost Analysis MTE 201 Principles of Management (F,S) Elective - 2 en. Technical Concentration - 27 en. GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S) GCT 235 Photographic Techniques GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S) IND 140 & 240 Graphic Commns I (F,S) & ll (F,S) GCT 350,351 & 352 PhotolithographicTechniqucs 1 (F), n (S) & m (F) IND 145 Photography (F,S) Technical Support - 15 en. PSY 209 Industrial Psychology (F,S) ITE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S) MAT 171 Mathematics of Finance (F ,S) PHS 135 Chemistry of Materials (S) GCT 495 Graphic Communication Internship or Approved Councs - 9 en. (F,S) D. Computer Option: Sec Mathematics and Computer Science Department List INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY The role of technology becomes increasingly important as lagging productivity, rising prices and soaring energy costs combine to add to the economic difficulties of industries, workers, and consumers. The need for educated men and women to work in the development and application of technology has never been greater. The Industrial Technology program provides students with the knowledge and skills to become highly qualified technical middle managers who oversee and guide production and carry out the important research and development needed in a variety of industries. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 239 Career Outlook Students enrolled in the Industrial Technology program are required to complete several management courses in addition to a core group of Industrial Technology courses. Typical entry level positions for. graduates are: Systems Analysis Product Design Purchasing Safety Management Motion and Time Specialist Technical Problem Solving Product Supervision Quality Assurance Production Control Industrial Relations Personnel Management Sales and Service Students have no difficulty in finding employment in business and industrial careers that require knowledge in science, manufacturing, and management. Curriculwn The Bachelor of Science Degree in Industrial Technology has been planned to prepare management-oriented technical graduates. A significant portion of the program is devoted to the study of technological concepts, principles, and their relation to automation, productivity, and manufacturing systems. Students may elect various technical options which focus on the technologies of today and tomorrow through a laboratory-based approach. Requiremeata: Bachelor of Science Degt't!e - Industrial Technology One lumdrt!d and twenty-eight credits art! required/or the degree. A . General Education: 48 Ct't!dilS ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&ll (F,S) COM 250 Oral Communication: Management (F,S) CSC XXX Computer Science - 3 era. Humanities - 6 era. Social Science - 6 era. Natural Science - 6 era. Free Electives - 12 era. B. Industrial Technology: 80 Ct't!dilS Physical Science - 8 era. PHY 121 & 122 General Physics I & ll (F,S) 240 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY Industrial Technology - 39 en. IND 110 Technical Dnwing I (F,S) IND 180 Introduction to Robotics IND 215 CAD I (F,S) ITE 101 lndultrial Safety (F,S) ITE 480 Problema in Industrial Technology (S) ITE 181 & 182 Material Technology I (F) & Il (S) ITE 460 Principles of Manufacturing (S) IND 165 Machine Processes I (F,S) IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S) or IND 135 Digital Electronic, (F,S) or IND 230 Introductory Linear Electronics (F,S) or IND 235 Introduction to Microproceuon (F ,S) MAT 215 Statistic, (F,S Management - 21 en. MGT 201 Principles of Management (F,S) ITE 375 Principle■ of Production (F,S) ITE 445 Quality Control (F,S) ITE 385 lndultrial Cost Estimating (F) ECO 100 Elements of Economics (F,S) MGT 362 Labor Relations (F,S) ITE 420 Production Analysis (F) Technical Electives - 12 en. Students will select from an approved list. MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY One measure of humanity's growth and progress is the ability to manufacture goods effectively. It has been estimated that in the 1990' s over 22 million men and women will be employed in the manufacturing industry. A sizeable portion of this growing labor force is needed to engage in the management, manufacture, sale and programming of new manufacturing and computer-aided design equipment. The Manufacturing Technology program, while placing emphasis on the principles of numerical control (N /C) technology, provides students with a broad, flexible education, enabling them to enter the manufacturing work force in a variety of professional positions. The facilities available to majors in the manufacturing technology programs include a modem Numerical Control Machining laboratory and a well equipped Machining laboratory. A wide variety of modem equipment such as N. C. Vertical Milling Machine, a N. C. Turning Center, computers and computer terminals and other traditional machining equipment is located in the laboratories. Career Outlook Opportunities for employment in the field of Manufacturing Technology are diverse and available. Graduates will find challenging job placements in all geographical areas of the United States. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 241 Some careers in Manufacturing Technology are: N/C Field Representative N/C Technician N/C Programmer N/C Coordinator Technician Manufacturing Supervisor Production Manager Quality Control Technician Sales Representative Industrial Engineering CurricullDD The Manufacturing Technology Program provides students with experiences in manufacturing processes that will help them understand and solve problems they may confront in the manufacturing world. The necessary background in math is provided so that meaningful machine tool programming problems can be resolved. Students will study four programming languages: BASIC, FORTRAN, COMPACT II and APT. Basic techniques are studied in technical foundations courses such as technical drawing, electronics, and machine shop. Advanced technology in CADD, Robotics, Hydraulics and Numerical Control provides a capstone· of computer-assisted techniques used by modem industry to increase quality and productivity. This technical background, coupled with managerial subjects and the general education requirements, positions the manufacturing technology students for many attractive job opportunities. A unique opportunity within this program is the Manufacturing Technology Internship whereby students may spend a semester or a summer working in an industrial setting. This internship broadens the student's education, offering the opportunity to work in a real world setting experiencing the day-to-day operations of a manufacturing facility . Students observe how different jobs are produced, problems are handled, and solutions are reached. In addition, the employer has an opportunity to observe students as prospective employees. Requirements: Bachelor of Science Degree - Mamifacturing Technology One hundred and twenty-eighl credits are required for the degree. A. Gmeral Education: 48 credits ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 & 192 Technical Mathematica l&Il (F,S) CSC 105 Basic Prognmming Language (F,S) COM 250 Onl Communication: Management (F ,S) Humanities - 6 crs. Social Science - 6 era. Natunl Science - 6 era . Free Electives - 12 era. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 242 B. Manufacturing Technology: 80 credits Indultrial Techoology - IS en. PSY 209 Indultrial Psychology (F,S) CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) lTE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S) lTE 375 Principle, of Production (F,S) lTE 445 Quality Control (F,S) Elec~Mechanical - 8 en. IND 180 Introduction to Robotic, (F,S) IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analy1i1 (F,S) IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic, (F,S) IND 330 lndultrial Electricity/Electronic• (F,S) IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S) lTE 181 Material, Technology I (F) Metal Machining - 24 en. IND 165 & 265 Machine Proceuing I & n (F,S) MTE 236 & 336 Num. Cont. Proa. I & Il (F,S) Approved elective lab, - 6 en. MTE 337 COMPACT Il (S) MTE 338 APT (F) Technical Drawing - 9 en. IND llO & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S) IND 215 CAD I (F,S) MTE 495 Manufacturing Technology Internahip - 14 en. (F,S) or Approved Counea TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION (formerly Industrial Arts) The Technology Education program prepares the prospective teacher for employment in both primary and secondary schools. Graduates of this program are awarded a Bachelor of Science Degree in Education and an Instructional I certificate making them eligible for teaching Technology Education/Industrial Arts in grades K-12. Due to our ever-expanding knowledge base in a world community, technology education majors are required to develop a strong academic background in the humanities, sciences, mathematics and personal communication skills. In addition, these undergraduates must have an understanding of how young students learn within a multicultural society. Technology Education majors are required to complete a series of laboratory classes related to technical systems of transportation, production, and communication. These laboratory courses develop skills in the use of tools, materials and processes. Computer applications are evident as current softwares and supporting devices are developed. Students make extensive use of the universal systems model while studying production, services, and their social/cultural impacts. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY 243 Career Outlook While the reputation for our program in Technology Education at California University of Pennsylvania remains rather high, the demand for its graduates is even higher. For the most part, these teachers have been successfully employed in Pennsylvania and other states. This profession is open to both men and women. While most graduates have remained in classroom teaching, many have become certified as either a building principal, superintendent, guidance counselor or a special education instructor. Some obtain advanced degrees and are eventually employed at a college or university. Annual Open House Prospective students are encouraged to attend the Annual Open House, which is held the last Thursday in April. This is an excellent opportunity to tour the facilities and see a variety of activities being conducted in the laboratories. Parents, teachers, administrators and guidance counselors are also welcome. For more information, please call the departmental office at (412) 938-4086. Curriculwn This curriculum includes a study of selected technologies which explore the solutions of technical problems and their associated impacts encountered by people as they transport, produce and communicate on a daily basis. More specifically, these systems are as follows. Communication Technology. Communication technology is concerned with the study of the methods by which humans communicate. This system includes experiences in such areas as drafting, design, computer-aided drafting, photography, graphic arts, computer networking, video production and desktop publishing. Production Technology. Production technology is concerned with the study of the methods by which humans produce goods both in-plant and on-site. This system includes courses in manufacturing and construction technologies which provide an understanding in the fabricating, forming, combining, and testing of such materials as composites, wood, plastics, ceramics and metals. In addition, these classes contain activities which include the use of computer-aided machining processes. Transpo71ation Technology. Transportation technology is concerned with the study of how people, products and materials are transported from one place to another. This system also encourages the student to complete classes in electronics, digital circuitry, microprocessors, pneumatics, hydraulics, robotics, energy/power systems and small gasoline engines. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 244 Requiranmu: Bachelor of Scimce Deglle in Educalion: Cenijicalion in Industrial Ans/Technology Educalionfor Grades K-12 One hundlld and thirry clldits all llquilldfor the deglle. A . General Educalion: 48 clldits CHE 101 General Chemistry I (F,S) ENG 102 Englilh Composition II (F,S) MAT 192 Technical Mathematica II (F,S) PHY 121 & 202 General Physics 1&11 (F,S) . COM 101 Oral Communication (F,S) Humanities Elective - 9 era. Social Science Electives - 6 era. Health/Physical Activities - 3 era. Electives - 7 era . B. Professional Educalion: 15 credits EDF 100 Foundations of Education (F,S) EDU 210 Teaching in a Multicultural Society (F,S) EDU 340 Mainstreamina Exceptional I.camera (F,S) EDS 465 Dev. Reading Sec. School (F ,S) PSY 208 Educational Psychology (F,S) C. Professional Specialty: 24 credits TED 280 Technology/Society/Education(F,S) TED 410Teaching-CommunicationTech. (Rotated) TED 420 Teaching Production Technology (Rotated) TED 430 Teaching Transportation (Rotated) TED 461 Student Teaching and School Law (12 era.) (F,S) D. Curriculum Specialty: 42 clldits Communications - 15 era. Required Course, TED 110 Introduction to Communication (F,S) IND 101 Drawing and Design IND 110 Technical Drawing I (F ,S) Two Communication Electives (Select one course from Graphics and one course from Drafting from the courses lilted below): Graphic• Elective IND 140 Graphic Communications I IND 145 Photography IND 240 Graphic Communications II Drafting Elective IND 210 Technical Drawing II IND 215 Computer Aided Drafting I IND 320 Architectural Drafting and Design DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 245 F.nergyffransportalion - 15 en. Required Counea TED 130 Introduction to Energyfrnnaportation (F,S) IND 130 Introduction to Circuit Analysia (F,S) Power Elective (Select One Coune) IND 180 Introduction to Robotic ■ IND 184 Ene1JY and Power System, IND 186 Hydnulic Fluid Power IND 188 Pneumatic Fluid Power IND 282 Small Gaaoline Engines Electronic ■ Elective (Select One Coune) IND 135 Digital Electronics IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electronic ■ IND 235 Introduction to Microproceaaon Enerufrnnaportation Elective (Select one other coune from the power or electronic, coune1 lilted above.) Production - 12 en. Required Courses TED 120 Introduction to Production Manufacturing Elective (Select one course) IND 160 Material Fabricating IND 165 Machine Proceaaing I (Fundamental, of Machine) IND 275 Materials Testing IND 278 Plaatica Technoloiy MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I Construction Elective (Select one coune) IND 250 Construction I IND 350 Construction II IND 355 Wood Technology Production Elective (Select one other course from the construction or manufacturing courses lilted above.) Penmylvania Certification requires a satisfactory score on the National Teachers' Examination (NTE). 246 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY ~ociate Degrees The Department offers four associate degrees. The Automation Technology degree has two options: Numerical Control Machining and Robotics systems. The other two technical choices are in Screen Printing and Drafting Technology. All programs are supported by the twenty-two laboratories located in the Shriver L. Coover Complex. The associate degree requires the completion of 66 credits. Associate degree credits can be transferred toward the completion of a Bachelor of Science degree. The associate degree is designed to provide graduates with the skills essential to enter the work force as a technical skilled worker. In the curricular requirements below, F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY: NUMERICAL CONTROL OPl'ION Numerical control (N/C) of machine tools is a relatively recent innovation that has provi~ed manufacturing industries, both large and small, a means of increasing productivity. The change in this method of manufacturing requires that industries have educated personnel that can develop complex numerical control programs. California University of Pennsylvania has an outstanding Numerical Control Machining Laboratory. It is equipped with two Bridgeport CNC vertical milling machines and CNC lathe. High speed terminals and punches are available for computer access when writing programs. Also, plotters and microcomputers are available for the preparation of programs. Career Outlook Career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Individuals trained in the programming of numerical control machines can expect to be employed as N/C Technicians. Personnel with N/C skills are needed in most geographic regions in the United States. Jobs are available to these graduates who excel and desire a job in N/C Programming. Curriculwn Students in the Numerical Control option of the Automation Technology Program will learn to write manual programs in the format detail of the machine tool, employing linear and circular interpolation addressing three axes. In-house COMPACT II and APT are the two machine tool languages that are studied. The computer programs prepared by the students are interfaced with the machine tool with post processor software. Individual programs are DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 247 loaded into the memory of a CNC lathe or CNC mill and the part is then manufactured. Students, therefore, are experienced N/C machine operators as well as manual, APT, and COMPACT II programmers. The principal objective of the Numerical Control Option of the Automation Technology Degree is to provide the student with sufficient skills and expertise in the programming and operation of computerized numerical control equipment to secure employment. Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to: 1. 2. 3. 4 5. Program, set up, and operate CNC equipment, i.e. lathes and mills. Program using manual programming and the COMPACT II and APT programming languages. Prepare supporting documentation for machine setup and operation. Program linear and circular moves. Machine parts on a mill and a lathe using a N/C program prepared by the student. Requiremmta: Associaze Degree in Auzomation Technology Numerical Control Oprion: 66 credits A. General Studies: 27 credits CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S) PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S) Humanities Elective - 3 en. Social Science Elective - 3 en. Natural Science Elective - 3 en. Free Elective - 3 en. B. Technical Studies: 39 credits Numerical Control Machining - 24 en. IND 165 & i65 Machine Processing I & D (F,S) MTE 236 & 336 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S) & D (S) MTE 337 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (COMPACT D) (F) MTE 338 Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S) MTE 437 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (Compact D) (S) MTE 438 Advanced Computer Programming Numerically Controlled Equipment (APT) (S) Related Electives - 15 en. IND 110 & 210 Technical Drawing I & II (F,S) IND 135 Digital Electronics (F ,S) IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S) IND 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S) 248 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN AUTOMATION TECHNOLOGY: ROBOTICS SYSTEMS OPfION Robots are automated devices that are used in the industrial world. These robots are used individually or with other pieces of automated equipment. A variety of manufacturing industries need people skilled in automated systems and robotics in order to increase productivity and provide better quality control in the manufacturing of goods and materials. California University of Pennsylvania has a well-equipped state-of-the-art Robotics Systems Laboratory. A variety of robotic arms, from small educational robots to large industrial robots, are used in providing instruction, along with an automatic guided vehicle (AGV), an artificial vision system, programmable controllers, and automatic identification equipment. This laboratory is an outstanding facility for the teaching of automated systems. Career Outlook The career opportunities appear to be excellent in this area. Various sources indicate that the demand for automation technicians will increase 25-34% in the 1990's. Persons trained in this field are expected to become automated manufacturing systems technicians in a variety of settings where automated manufacturing principles are employed. The program is structured as an interdisciplinary approach where each course emphasizes the understanding of integrated systems that use automated equipment and components. Curriculwn The major purpose of this program is to train persons to become automated manufacturing technicians who will be able to program, interface, set up, and operate the various components that make up an automated system. Students will be able to understand the operational behavior of individual robots and at the same time have an awareness of robots in an automated manufacturing system. The graduate of the program will have sufficient skills and expertise in automated systems, including robotics, to secure employment. Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Program, setup, maintain, and operate servo and non servo robots, artificial vision systems, and other automated equipment. Interface the different components of an automated system. Prepare supporting documentation that is clear, concise and accurate. Select equipment and components best suited for use in automation. Solve industrial problems through the application of automation technology. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 249 Requiremmta: Associale Degree in Automation Technology: Robotic Systems Option: 66 credits A. General Srwlies: 27 credits ENG 101 Engliah Compo■ition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 Technical Mathematics I (F,S) PHY 121 General Phy1ic1 I (F,S) CSC 105 Basic Programming Language (F,S) PHI 247 Science, Technolou & Society (F,S) Humanitiea Elective - 3 credits Social Science Elective - 3 en. Free Elective, - 3 credits B. Technical Srwlies: 39 credits Robotic, Syatcma - 15 credits IND 180 Introduction to Robotics (F,S) MTE 270 Electro-Hydraulic Servo Systems (F) MTE 280 & 281 Robotics Syatcma I (F) & D (S) MTE 290 Applications of Industrial Robotics Systems (S) Related Arca - 24 credits IND IND IND IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S) 135 Digital Electronics (F,S) 186 Hydraulic Fluid Power (F,S) 188 Pneumatic Fluid Power (F,S) IND 230 Introduction to Linear Electron (F,S) IND 235 Introduction to Microprocesson (F,S) IND 330 Industrial Elec/Electron (F,S) Technical Elective (One of the Following) MTE 236 Numerical Control Programming I (F,S) IND 335 Advanced Microprocessors (F) or Course by advisor approval ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN DRAFI'ING TECHNOLOGY Drafting is generally considered to be the primary means of communicating technical ideas. It is the graphic language of industry and is essential to the process of design, manufacturing, and service. A modem drafting laboratory and a well equipped CAD laboratory with terminals and plotters are available to support this program. The CADD systems are of industrial quality using the ANVIL 5000 language and AUTOCAD. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 250 Career Outlook As we continue to grow technologically, the need for drafting technicians will continue to increase. Since technological growth is expected to continue for many years to come, the need for personnel in drafting and related fields will, presumably, also continue to grow. The placement of graduates from this program has been at nearly the 100% level and is expected to continue at that rate for many years to come. Curriculum The principal objective of the Drafting Technology program is to provide students with sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment in drafting or a related field. In addition, all credits earned in this Associate Degree program are applicable to several four-year Bachelor of Science degree programs. Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to do at least the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Communicate technical ideas through freehand sketching. Make technical drawings that fully describe a design idea. Solve technical problems by using the tools and techniques of drafting. Prepare pictorial presentation drawings in pencil, ink, and water color. Write technical reports that are clear, concise, and accurate. Prepare drawings and solve design problems using a modem CADD (computer-aided drafting and design) system. Requiremeats: Associale Degree in Drafting Technology - 66 credits A. General Studies: 27 credits CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 Technical Mathematica I (F,S) Pm 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S) Humanities Elective - 3 era. Social Science Elective - 3 era. Natunl Science Elective - 3 era. Free Elective - 3 era. B. Technical Studies: 39 credits Technical Dnwing - 30 credits IND 110, 210 & 310 Technical Dnwing I (F,S), Il (F,S), & ill (S) IND 101 Dnwing and Design (F,S) IND 215 & 315 Computer Aided Dnfting I (F,S) & Il (F,S) IND 218 Deacriptive Geometry and Surface Development (F) EAS 271 Cartognphy (F) IND 318 Airliruah Techniques (F,S) IND 320 Architcctunl Dnwing & De■ign (S) DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 251 Related Area - 9 credits (Select 3 of the following) IND 140 Gnphic Communicationa I (F,S) rrE 181 Material■ Technology I (F) IND 165 Machine Proceuea I (F,S) rrE 101 Indultrial Safety (F,S) IND 160 Material Fabricating (F,S) ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN ELECTRONICS TECHNOLOGY Electronics Technology deals with devices, circuits, systems, and instrumentation. This curriculum prepares students to install, analyze, diagnose, and repair electronic equipment and systems. The University has three outstanding laboratories for instruction in electricity and electronics. One laboratory is devoted to courses in digital and microprocessor electronics, one_to circuit analysis and linear electronics, and one to advanced courses with emphasis on sophisticated instrumentation systems. All of the laboratories are equipped with microcomputers, and a complete instrumentation package is available at every student work station. Students work in teams of two, and laboratory enrollment is limited to 24 persons. In addition to the electronics center, students have access to a robotics laboratory and a numerical control machining laboratory. Career Outlook Electronics is a vital and ever-expanding technology. The national job market is excellent in this area as more and more businesses, industries, and institutions turn to electronic solutions for many of their problems. The continued growth of electronics is expected to provide many new positions for skilled technicians and technologists for the foreseeable future. Curriculwn The Electronics Technology curriculum is designed to develop analytic skills and problem-solving abilities in students. The courses are structured as a blend of applied mathematics, theory, and laboratory practice. The content is modem with emphasis on digital techniques, microprocessors, linear electronics, system analysis, product development, and RF communications. The principal objective of the Electronics Technology Associate degree is to provide the student with sufficient skills and expertise to secure employment. Upon completion of the program, the graduate is expected to be able to: 252 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY Analyze circuits with quantitative and computer skills for problem solving purposes. Understand the concepts of de and ac circuits as applied to electrical and electronic instrumentation. Program, interface, and troubleshoot microprocessor based designs. Apply the theory of radio frequency devices and circuits to modem communication and telecommunication systems. Work safely with electrical and electronics circuits while using electronic tools and testing equipment. Understand and work with solid-state devices and their application in digital and linear electronic circuits. Requinmeats: Associate Degree in Electronics Technology - 66 credits A. General Studies: 27 credits CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) ENG 101 English Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 Technical Mathematica (F,S) PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S) Humanities Elective - 3 era. Social Science Elective - 3 era. Natural Science Elective - 3 era. Free Elective - 3 era. 8. Technical Studies: 39 credits IND IND IND IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis (F,S) 135 Digital Electronics (F ,S) 230 Introduction to Linear Electronics (F ,S) 235 Introduction to Microprocessors (F,S) IND 330 Industrial EUEL (F,S) IND 332 Communication Electron (S) IND 335 Advanced Microproce880ra (F) IND 336 Electron. Systems & Product Dvpmt. (F) Technical Electives - IS era. (Advisor approval is required.) ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN SCREEN PRINTING TECHNOLOGY Screen printing is one component of the rapidly growing graphic communications industry. This industry has been growing at an annual rate of between six and eight percent a year. Because of the increasing complexity of the communications industry, individuals trained in screen printing are needed. Four outstanding graphic laboratories are utilized in this program. Each has modem equipment related to its area of study. Modem photo-composing equipment has recently been purchased for the Electronic Composition area. Modem screening presses, dryers, computer stencil transfer equipment and other support items were recently installed in the screening laboratory for student use. DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 253 Career Outlook Career opportunities are outstanding. People trained in screen printing will find employment opportunities in most segments of the communications industry, small printing shops, and large corporations with communications divisions or departments. Curriculwn The principal objective of the Screen Printing program is to provide students with knowledge and expertise in the applications of screen printing, thus enabling them to become productive members of the graphic arts industry. This program of studies offers the flexibility of scheduling business electives for the acquisition of knowledge and skills to initiate and manage one's own screen printing business. Upon completion of the program, the graduate will be able to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Identify materials capable of being screen printed, based on a particular application. Formulate a plan for the production of a screen printed product consistent with the individual's career objective. Produce quality screen printing plates for given applications. Screen print a quality image on a designated material, in accordance with detailed specifications. Assess the quality and value of a screen printed production. Recogni:ze the importance of membership in professional associations which support individual career objectives and further professional growth. In addition, all credits earned in this Associate (two year) program, are transferable to a four year Bachelor of Science degree program. Requin!ments: Associaze Degree in Screen Prinling Technology - 66 credits A. General Studies: 27 credits CSC 121 Computer Science I (F,S) ENG 101 Engliah Composition I (F,S) ENG 217 Scientific & Technical Writing (F,S) MAT 182 Technical Mathematic, I (F,S) PHI 247 Science, Technology & Society (F,S) Humanitie■ Elective - 3 en. Social Science Elective - 3 en. Natural Science Elective - 3 en. Free Elective - 3 en. B. Technical Studies: 39 credits Screen Printing - 30 credits OCT 155, 255 & 355 Screen Printing I (S), II (F), & ill (S) IND 140 Graphic Communication■ I (F ,S) 254 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY GCT 225 Principles of Layout & Design (S) GCT 340 Estimating & Cost Analysis I (F) IND 101 Drawing and Design (F,S) IND 210 Technical Drawing Il (F,S) IND 145 Photography (F,S) GCT 320 Electronic Composition I (F,S) 1TE 101 Industrial Safety (F,S) Related Area Electives - 9 credits (Select three of the following) GCT 235 Photographic Techniques (F) IND 240 Graphic Communications Il (F,S) GCT 350 Photolithographic Techniques I (F) IND 278 Plastics Technology (S) ITE 375 Principles of Production (F ,S) PHY 135 Chemistry of Materials (S) TED 120 Introduction to Production (F,S) IND 130 Introductory Circuit Analysis(F,S) DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 255 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (EET) EET 110. DC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits. Topic ■ include resistance, voltage, current, meah analysis, and nodal analysis. Network theorems pertaining to de 10Urces are presented. Corequisite: MAT 181. (4 en.) EET 160. AC CIRCUITS. An introduction to the study of electrical circuits in the sinusoidal steady state. Topics include capaciton, inducton, complex numben, ac mesh analy1i1, ac nodal analysis and network theorems pertainina to ac 10Urce1. Prerequisite: EET 110. Corequisite: MAT 191. (4 en.) EET 170. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS DESIGN. An introduction to the design of combination and sequential digital logic circuits. Topics include number systems, code■, gates, latche■, decoden, multiplexen, flip-flops, counten, AID and DIA concepts and memory circuits. Prerequisite: None. (3 en.) EET 210. LINEAR ELECTRONICS I. A study of solid state diodes and transiston. Methods of biasing, temperature stabilization, determining voltage gain and input resistance for small signal amplifien. Prerequisite: EET 160. (4 en.) EET 220. INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRIC POWER. A study of the fundamentals of three-phase circuits, transformen, de machines, polyphase ac machines, and single-phase ac machine■ . Prerequisite: EET 160. (4 en.) EET 260. LINEAR ELECTRONICS D. An introduction to power amplifien, differential amplifien, field effect operational amplifien, frequency effects, voltage re,ulation, and operational amplifier applications. Prequi1ite1: EET 210, MAT 281. (4 en.) transi■ton, EET 270. INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Introduction to programming concepts include■ branching, stack operations, ■ubroutines and vector interrupts. Interfacing topics include decoding, driven, D/ A and AID convenion. Prerequisite: EET 178. (3 en.) EET 310. METHODS IN ENGINEERING ANALYSIS . Introduction to matrix theory, classical fint and second order transient analy1i1, active filter and o■cillator de■ign, and Fourier analysis. Computer solutions to ■pecial problems will be presented . Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 . Corequisites: EET 320, MAT 282. (4 en.) EET 320. NETWORK ANALYSIS . A calculus-based circuit theory course. Topics include the introduction to Laplace transforms, and the utilization of Laplace transforms in the study of circuit analysis, transfer functions and frequency re■ponse . Circuit analysis programming i■ used to compare computer solutions with analytic solutions. Prerequisites: EET 260, MAT 281 Corequisitea: EET 310, MAT 282. (4 en.) EET 330. ADV ANCED MICROPROCESSOR DESIGN. Applications of microprocesson and microcomputen to instrumentation, control, and communications. Topics include machine and assembly language programming, 1/0 interfacina circuits, advanced AID and D/A convenions, handahaking, interrupts, serial and parallel communications and programmable timer algorithms. A semester project is required. Prerequisite : EET 270. (3 en.) EET 360. MICROPROCESSOR ENGINEERING . The analy1i1 and development of MCU stand-alone controllen. The requirements for the design of industrial applications and the use of advanced software development tools and PCs as development systems will be presented. Prerequisite: EET 330. (4 en.) EET 370. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN I. The design of electronic instruments utilizing linear and digital integrated circuits and opto--electronic devices. Topic■ will include dual slope digital voltmeten, electronic 256 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY thennometen, iaolation amplifien, frequency counten and function generaton. Numerical linearization method, for non linear tranaducen are introduced. Prerequisite: EET 320. (4 en.) E!IT 400. SENIOR PROJECT PROPOSAL. The student will submit a written proposal for a project. After approval of the project the student will be auigned a faculty adviaor. Minimum requirementa for the proposal are aubmiuion of a functional specification and a time schedule for completion. Prerequisite: Senior Statu ■. Corequiaite: ENG 217. (1 er.) EET 410. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS . Design of feedback control aystema and device, aa applied to electrical machinery and tranaducen. Topic■ will include Bode plots, the root-locus method and nyquiat diagnma. Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequisite: EET 420. (4 en.) EET 420. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN D. A microproce110r-baaed imtrumentation deai,n coune utilizing linear, digital and opto-electronic device,. Software aolutions to input/output problems will be considered along with aoftware aolutions to nonlinear transducer data . Prerequisite: EET 370. Corequiaite: EET 410. (4 en.) EET 430. RF COMMUNICATIONS . Communication systems principles including: AM/FM modulation, AM/FM demodulation, transmitten, receivers, antennas, transmiuion lines, digital techniques and protocols. Prerequisite: EET 320 . (4 en.) EET 450. SENIOR PROJECT. Employs the design, construction and analysis of an electronic device or imtrument. Depending on the complexity of the project, total construction may not be required . With the approval from the adviaor, group projects may alao be involved. Prerequisite: EET 400. (3 en.) EET 460. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING. Introduction to linear systems, digital filters and the Z-Tranafonn, and the Falt Fourier Transform. Fundamental• of sampling concepts and the interfacing of analog and digital ■ignal proceuin, will alao be covered. Prerequi■itea: EET 410, EET 360. (4 en.) EET 475 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY. A study of the widely used medical devices with emphaaia upon those types used for patient care in the hospital . The Physics and Engineering of various device, will be presented and their relationship to human anatomy and physiology will be emphasized. Hospital organization and the role of the Clinical Engineering department will be examined. Prerequisite: EET 420. (4 en.) EET 476 . BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Upon acceptance to a hospital the student will work with a Clinical Engineer and/or a Biomedical Equipment Technician inspecting, maintaining, calibrating and modifying biomedical equipment. Prognma of instruction will vary from hospital to hospital but the student will be exposed to medical devices from all special and critical care areas . Prerequisite: EET 475 . (4 en.) GRAPIIlC COMMUNICATIONS COURSES (GCT) Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per week. GCT 155 . SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES I (LAB) . The first in a aeries of three counes that define and analyze the proce11 of screen printing, this coune is an introduction to the various applications of screen printing. Student-deaianed activities are supported by exercises that provide quality and control for the printing proceaa. Empha1i1 of the coune is centered on establishing repeatability of the printing process by controlling variable,; photognphically generated stencil systems; single and multiple color image generation, conversion, aaaembly and transfer; sheet-fed manual and semi-automatic preaawork; flat aubatrate printing applications of simple and complex close register line artwork. Prerequisite: IND 140. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 257 GCT 225. PRINCIPLES OF LAYOUT AND DESIGN. A presentation of design elements and principles used to produce various layouts for printing production. The individual must strive to develop harmonious relationships between these design elements and principles and various printing applications through practical activity assignments. The fundamentals of producing mechanical layouts for newspaper, magazine, direct mail, poster, display and point of purchase advertising are considered to serve the individual's career direction. The explanation and use of computers for electronic/desktop publishing is emphasized for practical application. Production and practical application assignments are to be performed in conjunction with theory explanations as out of class activitie ■. (3 era.) GCT 235. PHOTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES (LAB). A study of the concepts and techniques involved in producing color prints and color transparencies from color negatives. Emphasis is placed on picture composition, developing color negatives, contact printing, filter fundamentals, enlarging calibration procedures and photo finishing . Microphotography and positive print techniques are also covered. Prerequisite: IND 145 . (3 era.) GCT 240. ELECTRONIC DESKTOP PUBLISHING (LAB). This course provides an in-depth study into the electronic desktop publishing systems and their concept of architecture, operation, networking, financing, and design role in the publishing industry. It covers the basic aspects of graphic designing, creating page layouts, scanning of text and continuous tone photographs, connectivity, telecommunications, image setting, and encryption of data. Each student will experience hands-on activities with microcomputers utilizing high-end design, draw, paint, scanning, and integrated layout software packages. GCT 255. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A study of the techniques used for image transfer of line and halftone copy on substrates commonly used by the screen printer. Each student has the opportunity to identify, calibrate and print upon selected substrates.Prerequisite: GCT 155. (3 crs.) GCT 320. ELECTRONIC COMPOSITION I (LAB). An introduction to the operation of phototypesetting systems. A variety of jobs are set which represent the range of standard typesetting formats in use in the industry. Work with direct and indirect systems is carried out in the form of projects. A variety of input devices are used, including paper tape, magnetic disk, optical character recognition and visual display systems. In addition students are required to gather data about the state of the art of phototypesetting equipment presently in use. Prerequisite: IND 140. (3 era.) GCT 321. ELECTRONIC COMPOSmON II (LAB) . Emphasis is placed on analysis of photocomposition systems from an understanding of basic functions and their compatibility with other components or systems. Some handson experience is provided to alter the compatibility for better system function. Prerequisite: GCT 320. (3 era.) GCT 340. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS I. A critical examination of the operations involved in the production of graphic materials for the purpose of determining costs of the operations to be included. The procedures necessary to assemble this information to produce estimates of typical printing matter are discussed. The identification and study of cost centers as they relate to the hour costs and ultimately to the selling price are examined. Students are required to prepare a number of cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 255 or GCT 350. (3 era.) GCT 350. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES I (LAB). An in-depth study of photographic process as it relates to line and halftone reproduction of graphic materials. Projects are produced which represent the various combinations of line and halftone materials as they are used in the industrial setting. Besides the projects required of each student, the theoretical aspects of the optical system are investigated, as well as the areas of sensitive materials, light and related chemical reactions. Prerequisites: IND 140 and IND 240. (3 era.) GCT 351. PHITTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES II (LAB). A continuation of GCT 350 which utilizes the film elements produced in order to complete required projects for this course. This course treats the subjects of stripping, platemaking and presswork. A critical study of imposition of various type of jobs, from simple single-<:olor to more complex multi-<:olor jobs. The latest techniques of platemaking as well as information on types of plates presently in use are discussed. Feeder-delivery setup, press packing methods, inking/dampening systems, 258 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY control devices, rollers, blankets and other related press activities are thoroughly discussed. Also, some folding and binding techniques are included. Prerequisite: GCT 350. (3 era.) GCT 352. PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES ill (LAB) . Primary emphaaia ia placed on developing an understanding of the nature of light, the nature of color, its relation to filters and printing inks used in the graphics industry and the problems caused by color contamination in making color separations. A presentation of direct and indirect methods of color separations as well as the various masking techniques is included. The use of various control devices is discussed and employed in the laboratory. Special techniques required to atrip projects, make the plates, and produce them on the press are also covered. Prerequisites: GCT 225, GCT 235, GCT 320 and GCT 351. (3 en.) GCT 355. SCREEN PRINTING TECHNIQUES ill (LAB). This course is directed study relevant to the individual' s career objectives based on specific screen printing applications. The student formulates specifications, estimates and a procedural rationale for self-determined screen printed product productions. These student productions are organized as a portfolio consistent with the individual career objective that haa been developed through previous screen printing coursework. Four-color process screen printing with ultraviolet curing theory and practice is analyzed for application through student independent study coursework. Prerequisite: GCT 255. (3 en.) GCT 375. FINISHING AND BINDING (LAB) . This course provides an introduction to the operations performed in the finishing and binding of printed materials. Various operations such as cutting, trimming, folding, folding schemes, impositioning methods, gathering, stitching, casemaking, gluing, laminating, perforating, hot stamping, sewing, and drilling will be considered. Analysis of the various kinds of adhesives and adhesion materials available and their most effective uses will be discussed . Additionally, this course is heavily supplemented with field trips to selected printing firms for first hand observations. Prerequisite: IND 240. (3 era.) GCT 440. ESTIMATING AND COST ANALYSIS II. This second in the series of two courses dedicated to estimating and cost analysis for printing production processes analyzes current computerized programs for estimating, scheduling, determining cash flow , and inventory control. The need for computer literacy in the area■ of estimating, time-reporting, comparative ratio analysis and related activities are emphasized. No previous technical knowledge about computers is required. The course is based on the student's comprehension and ability to perform the specific objectives stated in Estimating and Cost Analysis I. Students are required to prepare a number of computer assisted cost estimates for the course. Prerequisite: GCT 340. (3 en.) GCT 495. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an organiution which most nearly approximates their goals for employment. If this is not possible, students are placed in some type of graphics environment which is available at the time . The intent of the internship is to provide students with practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with real problems requiring real solutions in a relatively short time frame . Advisor and Department chairperson approval is required before course enrollment. This is a repeatable course and may be taken as follows : Students may earn up to nine credits of internship in the following curriculums: Graphic Communications - Photo Offset; Graphic Communications - Electro-Graphics; Graphic Communications - Screen Printing. The student is permitted to take nine credits of internship. However, they may enroll for twelve credits for a full semester load and use three credits for free elective. Prerequisite: Upper Level Slanding . (1-12 crs.) DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 259 INDUSTRY COURSES (IND) IND -classes meet for two lecture and four laboratory hours per week. IND 101. DRAWING AND DESIGN. An introductory coune for thoae who wiah to become more altilled and confident in their ability to draw and deaian. Deaian elements, principle, and practice, are studied. Creativity, aelf-discovery, and aelf-expreuion are encouraged. The student ia required to develop a disciplined approach to problem aolving and a aensitivity to craftamanahip in order to create aolutions to a wide variety of challenging de1ian auiinments. (3 en.) IND 110. TECHNICAL DRAWING I. A beginning coune with emphaaia on the graphic language, mechanical drawina, lettering, geometric construction, sketching and ahape description, multi-view projection, aectional view,, dimensioning, axonometric projection, and oblique projection. (3 en.) IND 130. INTRODUCTORY CIRCUIT ANALYSIS. An introduction to DC and AC circuit theory and analyaia. The theory include, electrical meaBUrement ■yatema, Ohm'• Law, Kirchoff's Law■, circuit theorems, and component characterilltica. Laboratory work provide■ experience, with electrical components, schematic ■ , electrical tool,, and basic electrical and electronic instrumentation. (3 en.) IND 13S. DIGITAL ELECTRONICS. An introduction to the theory and application of logic gates, Boolean algebra, combinational logic, ■equential logic, ■hift regiaten, counten, and arithmetic circuits. Laboratory experiments provide experiences with digital integrated circuits, circuit behavior, and digital trouble■hooting technique,. (3 en.) IND 140. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS I. Thia coune offen the student an opportunity for experience, of practical application in the five major printing proce11e1. It coven image de1ign, convenion, aaaembly, carrier preparation, transfer and fini■hina technique, related to lithographic, screen, letterpreu, flexographic, and gravure printing. Related areaa of studiea include duplication, ink chemistry, paper uae and aelection, and photography. (3 en.) IND 14S. PHOTOGRAPHY. Thia course provide■ the opportunity to learn the technique■ involved in monochromatic lltill photography and introduces color photography. It coven the basic aspects of picture taking, camera operation, film proceuing, enlarging, print proceuing, finishing procedures and selecting photographic equipment and lllppliea. (3 en.) IND 160. MATERIAL FABRICATING . A BUrvey course designed to acquaint students with the origin and industrial/technological UICI of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Laboratory experiences will include safety, aa well aa conatruction of metal producta using a variety of fabricating procesaea and techniques. (3 era.) IND 16S. MACHINE PROCESSING I. An introduction to basic foundry (metalcaating) and machine metalworking proceaaea. Include, aand moldmalting and gating, layout, tool geometry, lathe work, milling, shaping, drilling, and bench work . (3 en.) IND 180. INTRODUCTION TO ROBOTICS. The course i1 de■iined to provide a variety of activities in automated manufacturing emphasizing the use of robotic equipment. Theoretical as well aa practical hands-on laboratory applications in robotic components, types, 1yatema and controllen are studied. Robotic programming include, teach pendant, off-line programming, BASIC language, and ROBOTALIC. Practical applications include interfacing with other peripherals in a workcell setting. (3 en.) IND 184. ENERGY AND POWER SYSTEMS. An application of the 1y1tema approach to the study of energy 1011rce1 and converten, power transmisaion, and control■. lnatruction will focu■ on energy a~ it i• applied to 260 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY propulaion ayatema, residential conservation, and induatrial uaca. Energy alternatives, 1y1tem efficiency and conservation arc empha■izcd . (3 en.) IND 186. HYDRAULIC FLUID POWER. Thia counc atudies basic hydnulic components and circuits. Topic, to be included arc: hydnulic fluids , filtntion, power supply, actuaton, controls, conditionen, and monitoring device ■ . Teaching and learning activities include lectures, class discussion and labontory activities. (3 en.) IND 188. PNEUMATIC FLUID POWER. An introductory counc in the ■tudy of pneumatic fluid power components and circuits that include• gas law,, comprc880n, air lines, air distribution, air-conditioning components, control devices, circuit diagnma, circuit deaign and construction, and troubleshooting of comprcaacd air 1y1tems. Theoretical concepts arc verified by corresponding pnctical labontory activities. (3 en.) IND 210. TECHNICAL DRAWING II. Provides experiences in problem-aolving through the uac of technical workioi dnwing■ . Special emphasis is placed on American National Standards dnwing pncticea, shop proce1ac1, conventional representation, standardization of machine part.I and fastcnen, prcpantion oftncinga, the reproduction of dnwinga, and aurface development. Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.) IND 215 . COMPUTER-AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) I. Thia counc involve, the uac of computer aoftwarc and hardware II applied to mechanical design and dnfting. Students learn to manipulate basic geometric entities (points, lines, and area) to create 2-D and 3-D model,. Experiences dealing with dimensioning, level/layer 111rface1 and planes arc alao explored . Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.) IND 218 . DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY AND SURFACE DEVELOPMENT. Adding to the knowledge and experience, gained in Technical Dnwing I, thia counc coven the theory of projection in detail with emphaais on the manipulation of points, lines and planes in space. In addition, 111rface development and design in order to acrve of value in future advances auch aa computer-aided dnfting, computer-aided instruction and computer-aided manufacturing. Prerequisite: IND 110 (3 en.) IND 230. INTRODUCTION TO LINEAR ELECTRONICS. An investigation into the fundamental concepts of analog electronic, including semiconductor device theory, power 111pplies, amplifiers, opentional amplifiers, oscillaton, plate linear integntcd circuita, and control circuits. Labontory experiments provide experience, with electronic instrumentation, electronic components, and electronic circuit behavior. Prerequisite: IND 130. (3 en.) IND 235 . INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS . A presentation of number systems and codes, rnicroproce880r architecture, computer arithmetic, machine language prognmrning, and microprocesaor interfacing. Emphasis ia placed on labontory experiments dealing with machine language prognm execution and rnicroproce880r interfacing. Prerequisite: IND 135 (3 en .) IND 240. GRAPHIC COMMUNICATIONS D. The emphasis in this second counc in gnphic communications is on the equipment, processes, material, and supplies utilized by the industry for phototypesetting, photo-composition, darkroom techniques, image assembly, platemaking, and offset duplicator opentions. The student ia provided with learning experiences to develop a comprehensive understanding of the scope, structure, products and related procesa of the printing industry. Prerequisite: IND 140 (3 en.) IND 250. CONSTRUCTION PROCESSES I. An introductory course in construction with an emphasis on residential houaing . Instruction and experiences will include aspects of construction 111ch as planning and estimating, personnel and time management, site prcpantion, footings and foundations, fnming , and roofing . The safe and intelligent uac of tools and material ■ ia strcaacd. Prerequisite: TED 120. (3 en.) IND 265 . MACHINE PROCESSES II. Current foundry (metalcasting) procesaca arc ltudied. Advanced machine metalworking procesaca, including indexing and gear cutting arc emphasized . Students arc responsible for determining the sequence of opentions nece ■sary to produce a product. Prerequisite: IND 165 . (3 en.) IND 275 MATERIALS TESTING . A ■tudy of the theory and application of materials testing uacd to determine the chemical, phy■ical , mechanical and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 261 propertie1 of metal■, polymen, ceramic, and compo1it.e material, are investigated. Provi1iona are made for individual and clan development of test ■pecimena and their subaequent evaluation. Instruction ia provided in the recording and interpretation of test data. (3 en.) IND 278. PLASTICS TECHNOLOGY. Thi, i1 a survey coune de1igned to provide the student with an opportunity to gain information about the industrial and technological u■e1 of plastic-like materials. Laboratory experience, are required in which the student de1ign,, constructaand u ■e1 a variety of tool,, forms and mold 1. Depending upon the activity and the time allotted, students will be encouraged to create well-deaigned products for penonal and/or profe11ional u■e . (3 en.) IND 282. SMALL GASOLINE ENGINES. An introduction to the theory, operation and major overhaul procedures of ■mall 2 and 4 cycle gaaoline engine,. Engine componenta, diagnosis, testing, maintenance, diuuembly, reauembly, and trouble ■hooting are streued in the coune to afford the participants the opportunity to develop the experti■e in coune content 1kil11 and the background to repair amall gaaoline engine,. Laboratory work provides for the opportunity to apply theoretical concepta in general practice,. (3 en.) IND 284. FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTO MECHANICS. An introduction to automobile mechanic■ with theory and practical application,; limited to basic preventive and tune-up procedures in the areas of carburetion, pollution device, and control 1, complete engine tune-up, diagnostic 1kill1, u ■e of testing equipment, ignition circuita, charging circuita, and cranking circuita. Counea are offered at General Moton Training Cent.er by approval. Prerequisite: IND 184. (3 en.) IND 310. TECHNICAL DRAWING m. An ext.enaion of Technical Drawing I and II with continued emphasis on skill, technique, and the u■e of ANSI and ISO drafting standards. The course is developed around current industrial drafting practices and include■ instruction in geometric tolerancing, surface texture, weldments, metrication, etc. Prerequisite■ : IND 101, IND 110, and IND 210. (3 en.) IND 315 . COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD) II. Thia course is an ext.enaion of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) I and will include more complex problem■ and procedure, in the development of graphic aolutiona . The use of ext.ended geometry will compri ■e an important part of the coune. Students will gain additional experiences on PC baaed computer drafting aystem■ . Prerequisite: IND 215. (3 en.) IND 318. AIRBRUSH TECHNIQUES. Preci ■e pictorial line representation as it relates to technical illustration ia stres■ed . Mechanical and freehand techniques uaed in pictorial line drawing are explored in detail. Students gain experience in the theory of light and ■hadow . Emphasia ia placed on exploring more advanced graphic media in technical illustration. Ext.enaive experience is provided in airbrush rendering techniques. Prerequisite : IND 110 (3 en.) IND 320. ARCHITECTURAL DRAFTING AND DESIGN. Experience ia provided in basic residential design. The fundamental aequence1 in deaigning and drawing are atreaaed as the student completes the architectural drawing• neceaury for the construction of a reaidence. Elements of the coune include architectural atyles, area planning, structural detailing, pictorial rendering, building specification,, and cost analysis . Prerequisite: IND 110. (3 en.) IND 330. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRICITY/ELECTRONICS. An inveatigation into the theory and application■ of moton and motor controllen, thyriston, tranaducen, programmable controllen, microproce110r controllen, ■ervomechaniama, and Robotic, . Laboratory experience, include motor identification, motor diaas■embly and repair, motor testing, control circuitry, and ■ervomechaniama. Prerequisite■: IND 130 and IND 230. (3 en.) IND 332. COMMUNICATION ELECTRONICS. The application of devices and circuits to electronic communication,. The major topic, include modulation, demodulation, tranamission, data tranafer, optical technique,, test equipment, and aystem analyaia. Prerequiait.ea: IND 230 and IND 235. (3 en.) 262 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY IND 335 . ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS. This coune deals with advanced concepts in machine Jan,uage programming. It introduce■ the world of editora, auemblera, and debuggera . It also coven the advanced architecture of modem microproceuora and their more sophisticated illllrllction sell and addreuUJi mode,. The student will learn to develop hardware and software required to apply microproceuora to real world problema. Prerequiaite: IND 235 . (3 era.) IND 336. ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT. Thia coune provides a development experience for electronic systema and/or products. The student will select a project subject to illllrllctor approval and develop that project to the prototype lllage. The llUdent will also verify all performance specifications for their project. Prerequisites: IND 235 and IND 230. (3 era.) IND 355. WOOD TECHNOLOGY. A llUdy of woodworking providing illllrllction in furniture and case work. The safe use and care of machines and hand tool, i1 lllreued. Emphasis i1 placed on project planning and design, colt analy1i1, wood technology, material selection and product development. Students design and produce a project involving operations on basic machine■. (3 era.) IND 365 . SPECIAL MACHINE PROCESSING. A special coune designed to allow the llUdent to investigate a specific area of interest in the metal machining field. Students interested in taking this coune will complete a document identifying- the ■cope of their interest, specifying the activities that will be pursued throughout the semester, and have it approved by the illllrllctor 1ix weeks before the beginning of the clau. The llUdent'• background in the metal machining proceues will be broadened by completing the laboratory experience, outlined in the approved proposal. Prerequisites : IND 165 and IND 265. (3 era.) IND 384. ADV AN CED AUTO MECHANICS. An advanced study in auto mechanics that provides for both an in-depth underlllanding of basic automotive principles and a broadening in ■cope of other areas of preventive and tune-up procedures. Theoretical and practical activities in carburetion, ignition circuits, charging circuits, cranking circuits, and the use of testing equipment applicable to the unit of llUdy. Counes are offered at General Moton Training Center by approval. Prerequiaite: IND 284. (3 era.) INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY COURSES (ITE) Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week. ITE 101. INDUSTRIAL SAFETY. An introduction to the fundamentals of safety as well as aound management-oriented practices related to the development of a safe work place. Legal requirements of OSHA and worker's compensation laws are diacuued. Students will be able to identify cause of accidents, identify safety hazards, and apply methods of accident prevention. (3 era.) ITE 181. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY I (LAB) . A study of the theory and application of materials and materials testing used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study includes the chemical, physical, mechanical and dimensional properties of metallic materials including ceramics. Sufficient background in general chemistry is included to provide a proper foundation . (3 era.) ITE 182. MATERIALS TECHNOLOGY ll (LAB). A continuation of Materials Technology I with an emphasis on non-metals including natural and man-made polymera, wood and paper and composite,. Additional study of materials testing ia included with provisions made for individual and clau development of test specimens and their subsequent evaluation. Instruction is provided in the recording and interpretation of test data. Prerequisite: ITE 181. (3 era.) ITE 205 . INTRODUCTION TO INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . A study of the theory and application of material, used in a wide variety of industrial applications. Study include• the chemical, physical, mechanical, and dimensional properties of materials. Specifically, the structure and properties of metals, polymera, ceramics, DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 263 and composite materials are investigated. Provision, are made for the telling of materials to demon.atrate the various concepts being presented in clau. (3 en.) ITE 311. INDUSTRIAL ERGONOMICS. An introduction to techniques and procedure■ for developing and applying the principle• of human facton and ergonomics to system deaign and the systematic analysis, identification, and evaluation of human-machine systems. Current advances in practical biomechanics and ergonomic■ in industry in combating musculoskeletal injury and illneu will be discuued. Prerequisite: ITE 101 . (3 en.) ITE 375 . PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCTION. An introduction to the methods used in analyzing the production flow from raw material to the finiahed product. Topic■ covered include a lludy of the major manufacturing proceases, material, handling, plant layout, operation, analysis, industrial engineering, inventory control and ahipping . An overview of the role of production management as it relates to the various areas of industrial environment will be presented. (3 en.) ITE 385. INDUSTRIAL COST ESTIMATING . An introduction to the methods used to cost and budget a production organization. Topics include ■ome accounting basics, cost accounting, the time value of money and cost estimating as related to induatrial operations. (3 en.) ITE 420. PRODUCTION ANALYSIS . A continuation of the principles of production with an emphasis on the calculation, auociated with production management. Topics include linear programming, scheduling and project management as with pert, simulation and inventory control. Use ia made of per■onal computen for the calculations involved . Prerequisite: ITE 375 . (3 en .) ITE 445. QUALITY CONTROL. An introduction to the method■ used in analyzing quality control. Topic ■ include a lludy of the fundamental ■ of statiatica and probability, the constnJction and use of control and attribute charta, the definition and use of acceptance criteria and the use of computen in modem quality control operations. An overview of the role of quality control department of a manufacturing facility will be presented. (3 en.) ITE 460. PRINCIPLES OF MANUFACTURING . An introduction to the methods used in manufacturing proceues. Topics covered include a lludy of the manufacturing ability, fabricability, and marketability of manufactured products. Problems encountered by production managen in changing raw materials into a consumable product are discuued . The use of per■onal computen for the ■olution of manufacturing problems is included. Prerequisite : ITE 375 and ITE 385 . (3 en.) ITE 480. PROBLFMS IN INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY (LAB) . This is a multidiscipline course that combines the variou■ elements in indu■trial technology, giving the student the opportunity to study problems typically encountered by an industrial technologist. The exact content of the course will vary depending upon the background and experience of the instructor but it ia intended to include problem ■olving and role playing in a wide variety of industrial setting ■ . lnduatrial consultants will al■o be uaed to expose the student to modem industry . Prerequiaite: Senior Standing. (3 en.) ITE 495 . INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns will be placed with an industrial organization which moat nearly approximate■ their goals for employment. The intent of the internship ia to provide lludents with practical work experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems requiring real ■olution■ in a relative abort time frame. Advi ■or and Department Chairper■on approval i ■ required before course enrollment. Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing . (1-6 en .) 264 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY COURSES (MTE) Courses marked (LAB) have two hours of lecture and four hours of laboratory per week. MTE 236. NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING I (LAB). An introduction to the procedures for manually proplllDlllJi numerically controlled equipment. Studenta write programs followinB a machine format detail, u1ing carteaian coordinate, for motion command and incorporating preparatory and miacellaneoua command, neceuary to manufacture parts on a machining and turnilli center. (3 era.) MTE 270. ELECTROHYDRAULIC SERVO SYSTEMS (LAB). Activities relevant to this coune provide for the functional underatanding and application of principles of electrohydraulic servo control robot systems. Topic, include the operation and adjustment of electrohydraulic servo systems controlling, position, velocity, acceleration, preuure, force and torque on both linear and rotary applications. Other topics and activities include servo-valve applications, selection, and characteristic, and the study of transducers. Prerequisite■: IND 135 or IND 186 . (3 era.) MTE 280. ROBOTICS SYSTEMS I (LAB). Activities in this coune focua on the practical application and programmilli of non-servo controlled robota. Propmming of the robot ia accompliahed through the use of programmable electronic controllers (PEC) . The three aeneral areas of study include : robot operation and proplllDlllJi, robot maintenance and repair, and robot application in applied problems. Servo type applications will 1110 be contraated. Robot operation includes site preparation, electrical and power control,, fluid power, velocity control, machine interlocb, controller and connections, emergency procedures, and ufety precautions. Studies in maintenance and repair procedure include theory diagrams, preventive and dia,nostic checb, and replacement procedures . Robot application involves applyinB non-servo robota and programmable controllers to industrial situations. Prerequisite: IND 180. (3 era.) MTE 281 . ROBOTICS SYSTEMS D (LAB). Studenta learn to use servo robota II part of a work:cell through theoretical and practical hands-on activities. Topics will include components of servo robota, controller components, confi,uration and operation, controller proarammilli, pro,ram input and output, dynamic performance of servo robota, servo robot operation, and servo robot testing and troubleshooting. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270, MTE 280. (3 era.) MTE 290. APPLICATIONS OF INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS SYSTEMS (LAB). Thia coune provides activities in the planni!li, preparation, installation, and operation of automated activitiea in integrated work:cella. Topics include application planning, feed devices, development trends, end effectors, computer interfacing, automatic identification, and automation interfacin,. The use and programmilli of an artificial vision system is introduced in thia coune. Prerequisites: IND 180, MTE 270, MTE 280, and MTE 281. (3 era.) MTE 336 . NUMERICAL CONTROL PROGRAMMING D (LAB). The second of two counea in the manual programming of numerically controlled machines. Concentration is placed on continuoua path machining of parts using the linear interpretation capability of machines to cut chords of area to closely approximate curves. Circular interpolation ia studied with the additional word addresses that are nece11Bry. Auignments provide experiences in three axis linear interpolation programming and two axis circular interpolated progralllDlllJi. Prerequisite: MTE 236 . (3 era.) m. MTE 337. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (COMPACT A study of the COMPACT computer languaae used to produce machine tape imtructions for manufacturilli parts. Students learn to access and utilize a computer to produce part geometry and direct a machine tool to accompliah a variety of metal machining operations. The graphics capability of BRAVOS aoftware will be explored. Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.) MTE 338. COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (API). An investigation of the APT machine tool language for programming numerical controlled machine tools. Students DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY 265 write APT proarams and operate equipment with the produced tape, to manufacture milled and turned paru. Prerequisite: MTE 236. (3 era.) MTE 437. ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (COMPACT D) . An invellligation into the more aophiaticatcd proceuea of the COMPACT D machine tool programming language. Paru are programmed and manufactured on a CNC milling machine and lathe u1ina the COMPACT D language and the BRAVOS graphic aoftware. Prerequisite: MTE 337. (3 era.) MTE 438 . ADVANCED COMPUTER PROGRAMMING NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT (APT). The machining of parts using matrixe1, loops, pocketing, macros, and other advanced techniques. Theac methods are applied to the operation of a CNC vertical milling machine and a CNC lathe. Prerequisite: MTE 338. (3 era.) MTE 495 . MANUFACTURING TECHNOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Student interns are placed with an industrial organization which most nearly approximates their goals for employment. The intent of the internship is to provide students with practical work: experience in an environment in which they will be dealing with practical problems requiring real aolutiona in a relative short time frame . Adviaor and Department Chairperaon approval i, required before courac enrollment. Thia is a repeatable courac and may be taken as follows: Students may take up to 14 credits. The extra credit may be used as a free elective or for a credit deficiency due to other program changes. Prerequisite: Upper Level Standing. (1-14 era .) TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION COURSES (TED) Courses marked (LAB) will meet for two hours of lecture and four laboratory hours per week. TED 110. INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICATION (LAB) . A broad overview of communication systems, specifically, print, acoustic, light, audio-visual and electronic media as they relate to the realm of communicationa. Students experience individualized and group laboratory activitiea in the combined areas of generating, aaacmbly, processing, diueminating and assimilating of a communicative message. (3 era.) TED 120. INTRODUCTION TO PRODUCTION (LAB). An introduction to production technology as it relates to manufacturing and conatruction. Activities include manufacturing proceues, material testing, and a studentdirected manufacturing enterpriac. (3 era.) TED 130. INTRODUCTION TO ENERGYfl'RANSPORTATION (LAB). An analysis of energy sources and transportation systems, their operation, efficiencies, historical and future development, and social and environmental impacts. Students design transportation systems and verify their safety, energy, and economic efficiency. (3 era.) TED 280. TECHNOLOGY/EDUCATION/SOCIETY . A claBB for all Technology Education majors; to be taken during the aophomore or junior year. Students study the development of general education in relationship to technology as found in a pluralistic society. Readings and discuBBion will focus on the taxonomies and systems for technology education, professional organizationa, developmental rates of youth, laboratory safety, special need learners, teacher liability, and certification requirements. The technology education major is required to spend each Friday making visitationa to industrial sites, urban schools and a regular teaching center. This class meets two lecture houra per week: and all day Friday (to meet the requirements of the Early Field Experience Program) . Prerequisites: TED 110, TED 120, TED 130 and 9 credits in IND couracs. (3 crs.) TED 410 . TEACHING COMMUNICATION (LAB). Advanced studies in the areas of light, print, acoustic, audiovisual and electronic systems aa they relate to communicationa. The student develops inatructional units, laboratory applications, evaluation systems, design communicationa facility and prepare instructional materials for 266 DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY uae in teaching communications technology K thru 12. Peer teaching is utilized to determine the content validity of the developed inatructional unita . Prerequisites: TED 110 and TED 280. (3 en.) TED 420. TEACHING PRODUCTION (LAB). A courae designed to provide technology education majon with experiences relating to the teaching of production technology in the public schools. Cius participanta examine methods of promoting the program, teaching special needs studcnta, design production facilities, and develop instructional unita for uae in teaching manufacturing and construction on the primary and aecondary level. This development includes the identification of problems, individual research, laboratory applications, and writing inatructional materials. Computer applications such as CAD/CAM and a student-directed cnterpriae activity will be included. Prerequisites: TED 120 and TED 280. (3 era.) TED 430. TEACHING ENERGY/TRANSPORTATION (LAB). Studenta will draw on their technical slcills and knowledge in the areas of transportation, energy, electronic ■, fluid power, and robotics to develop curriculum plans and inatructional activities appropriate for public school teaching of transportation technology. In addition, enhancing technical skill ■ and teaching techniques will be emphaaized along with the integration of computen, mathematics, and science into transportation technology education. Prerequisitea: TED 130 and TED 280. (3 en.) TED 461. STUDENT TEACHING - TECHNOLOGY EDUCATION. Student teaching is the culminating experience of teacher education majors in the Technology Education curriculum. The student teacher i1 auigned to and worb under the supervision of two different master teachers at two different field locations during the aemester. The development and refinement of contemporary pedagogical skills constitute the primary learning purpoae for each student teacher. Specific teacher-learning skill ■ which are developed are tenon planning, delivery method ■, Ofianizational procedures, class control, laboratory management, aafcty practices, record keeping, and educational measurement and evaluation. An integral component of the student teaching experience is a weekly practicum. The practicum aerves as a means of coordinating activities and interchanging ideaa and experience• of the student teachers. (12 era.) INDEPENDENT STUDY COURSES TED 310. STUDIES IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 era.) TED 320. STUDIES IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.) TED 330. STUDIES IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 en.) '"TED 460. HONORS STUDY IN COMMUNICATION (1-3 en.) '"TED 470. HONORS STUDY IN PRODUCTION (l-3 era.) '"TED 480. HONORS STUDY IN TRANSPORTATION (1-3 era.) Tbcae are independent studies in which the student works in an area of interest under the guidance of an inatructor with similar interesta. The student prepares triplicate copies of a proposal which preaents the objective■ to be achieved and a procedural outline, states special conditions and expected findings, and specifics how the activity will be evaluated . Studenla are entitled to a minimum of five houn of individual faculty time per credit. instructor and department approval before the student registen in the courae. Proposal ■ must receive •Honors couraes are reaerved for studenta with a MB" grade or better quality point average in the Technology Education curriculum specialty couraes taken. DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES 267 DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SERVICES William L. Beck, Dean of Library Services. Associate Professor Albert R. Pokol, Chair. Professors Kade Kos, Albert F. Maruskin; Associate Professors Clyde Y. Kiang, Richard M. Matovich, Lola E. Maxwell; Assistant Professors Marsha L. Nolf, Betty Shaw; Instructor, Alice G. Dennison; Kathleen A. Joki, Systems Analyst. A fuller description of the services and materials available in the library may be found in the General Information section, towards the beginning of this catalog. The members of this department are in charge of the Manderino Library. They also supply, to students, faculty, and staff, such services as instruction in the use of the VULCAT on-line catalog, the CD-ROM computerized indexes to periodicals, and other library resources. They offer assistance in reference questions, interlibrary loans, and advanced bibliographical searches in other databases. They offer instruction in the use of the library for individual classes at both beginning and advanced levels, and they are responsible for collection development and the processing of materials as they arrive at the library. 268 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE DEPARTMENT OF MATIIEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE MATHEMATICS (MAT) COMPUTER SCIENCE (CSC) COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW) Professor Howard L. Hausher, chair. Associate Professor John A. Beyer, assistant chair. Professors Michael R. Gross, Robert T. Little, Andrew J. Machusko, Lawrence D. Romboski, Paul D. Williams; Associate Professors Robert M. Berry, William F. Blank, Antonio J. Fernandes, John S. Gibson, Jr., Judith I. Hall, George D. Novak, Anthony S. Pyulrowski, Donald R. Sapko, Elwyn M. Schmidt, John S. Skocik, Jr., Brian E. Weinrich; Assistant Professors Jerry M. Blackmon, Anette M. DeNardo, Barbara Hess, Karla A. Hoffman, Nancy A. Skocik The Department of Mathematics and Computer Science offers several degree programs: The Bachelor of Science degree in Applied Computer Science is designed to provide the student with a strong computer science background supplemented with a substantial core of courses in a related academic discipline. The Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer Science is a careful blending of courses that offers the student both theory and applications in mathematics and computer science. The Bachelor of Science degree in Industrial Management Technology: Management and Computer Science Option emphasizes management and business courses along with computer science courses. The program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the graduate level or for employment in business, industry, or government. The Bachelor of Arts degree in Mathematics is a sufficiently flexible program that permits the student to select courses that meet particular interests and needs. It allows for both depth and breadth of study in mathematics as well as study in the natural sciences. It is designed to provide the student with an excellent background for graduate studies in mathematics and for employment opportunities in business, industry, or government. The Bachelor of Science in Education degree is a program designed for the student who wishes to pursue a career in secondary teaching of mathematics. It provides the prospective teacher the opportunity to acquire the knowledge, attitudes, skills, and understanding necessary to become an effective educator. The Associate degree in Computer Science is a two-year program designed to provide the student with career-oriented computer science technology background. Though its emphasis is on training for job placement in the computer industry after a two-year curriculum, the program is designed to allow for transfer into the Bachelor of Science programs. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 269 In addition to the degree programs, there is offered an 18-credit hour certificate program in personal computer applications. Provision is made in several of the programs to accommodate student internships. The availability of these internships is dependent upon the needs of various governmental agencies and private employers, and they are not a guaranteed part of the program. If selected, the student may earn a salary as well as college credit and invaluable experience. Faculty advisors work carefully with the student to select the courses best suited to the student's interests and goals. An open-door policy prevails in the Department of Mathematics and Computer Science so that students may discuss problems freely with their advisors or members of the department. Student work-study assignments are available for those who desire and qualify for employment. Students may assist in the Mathematics Department, the Computer Center, the Computer Laboratory, or the Mathematics Laboratory. Hence, students learn while they earn. In order to encourage and recogni:re academic achievement, the Department of Mathematics and Computer Science makes the following awards: Computer Science Award: The computer science award is presented annually to the graduating student of the Mathematics and Computer Science Department who has achieved a high level of academic excellence in computer science courses. Frederick E. Atkins Memorial Award: In honor of the contributions made by Frederick E. Atkins to the Mathematics Department and to the many students he taught, an award established in his name is presented to the graduating student of the Mathematics and Computer Science Department who has achieved a high level of academic excellence in Mathematics courses, in either the Mathematics and Computer Science program or the Bachelor of Arts in Mathematics program. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 270 BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN APPLIED COMPUTER SCIENCE This program is a careful blending of courses designed to provide the student sufficient specificity to achieve a solid computer science background as well as sufficient flexibility to allow for the development of an interest in another academic area. It is for students who do not require the mathematics-oriented or business-oriented approach provided by the department' s other programs. Curriculum: (A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Oral Comrnunications-Management(COM 103); Basic Programming (CSC 105) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); Technical Mathematica I (MAT 182); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Science■ ; 6 credits in Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Free Elective■ . (B): Area ofCoaceotration: Stati■tic ■ (MAT 215); Discrete Mathematic ■ (MAT 272); Basic Calculus (MAT 273); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Micro■ and Application Software (CSC 101), Computer Science with C (CSC 223) ; Pascal Programming (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Logic & Switching Theory (CSC 316); .A■aembler Language (CSC 323); Information Structures (CSC 377); Computer Architecture (CSC 378); Operating Systems (CSC 400); Data Comrnunications(CSC 405); Lisp Programming (CSC 410); Structure of Programming Languages (CSC 455) ; Language Translation (CSC 460) . 9 credits of Computer Science Electives selected from the following : Computer Science ll (CSC 221); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Operations Research (CSC 309); Cobol ll (CSC 318); Computer Graphics (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 375); Artificial Intelligence (CSC 420); Numerical Analysis (CSC 424); Data Base Management Systems (CSC 456); Theory of Languages (CSC 475); Computer Science Internship (CSC 419) . 20 credits of related electives must be taken in a single discipline selected by the student and approved by the faculty advisor and the department chairperson (at least 14 credits must be 200 level or higher) . BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE The program leading to the Bachelor of Science degree in Mathematics and Computer Science is a careful blending of courses which offers students the theory and application of problems in mathematics and computer science. A demanding but versatile program, it permits students with a deficiency in mathematics to take introductory courses to provide them sufficient background to effectively take courses in their area of concentration. Although the introductory courses do not count in the area of concentration, they do count as free electives in the program. · This program is designed to prepare the student for continued study at the graduate level ~r for employment in business, industry, and government in computer operations, computer programming, systems analysis, or computer equipment analysis, or as a computer specialist in research, analysis, information storage and retrieval, or computer sales. Curriculum: (A) General Education: English Composition I & ll (ENG 101 & 102); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Formal Logic I (PHI 211); Mathematic ■ of Finance ll (MAT 271); Basic Programming Language (CSC DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 271 l0S) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); 6 credits in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Science,; 12 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Coacentration: Calculu■ I, Il, m & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, 382); Diacrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Abltract Algebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear Alaebn I (MAT 341); Differential Equations (MAT 406); Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223): Auembler Language (CSC 323); Coboll (CSC 218); Information Structure, (CSC 377); Structure of Pro,nmming Languages (CSC 4SS); Numerical Analysis (CSC 424); LoJic and Switchin, Theory (CSC 316); Computer Architecture (CSC 378); Theory of Languages (CSC 47S); 6 credits from Mathematica Counea; Linear Alaebn Il (MAT 441); Abltract Algebn Il (MAT 4Sl); Statillical Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Honon (MAT 469); Advanced Calculua I & Il (MAT 481 & 482); Topology (MAT 490); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 49S). 17 credits from Computer Science Coune1: Computer Science Il (CSC 221); Computer Opentions (CSC 300); Survey ofOpentions Research (CSC 309); Cobol Il (CSC 318); ComputerGnphica (CSC 324); Systems Analysis (CSC 37S); Openting Systems (CSC 400); Data Communications (CSC 40S); Artificial lnlelliaence (CSC 420); Lisp Prognmming (CSC 410); Data Base Manaaement (CSC 4S6); Languaae Tnnalation (CSC 460); lnlernahip (maximum 12 en. allowed) (CSC 419). BACHELOR OF ARTS IN MATHEMATICS Curriculum: (A) General Education: Compoaition 1-Il (ENG 101, I 02); 12 credits of Humanitie1; 12 credits of Natunl 12 credits of Social Science■; 18 credits of free elective,. Science■; (B) Area of Coacentration: Calculus I, Il, m, & IV (MAT 281, 282, 381, & 382); Geometry (MAT 203); Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Linear AIJebn I (MAT 341); Statillical Analysi1 I {MAT 461); Differential Equations (MAT 406); Advanced Calculus I (MAT 481) and Il (MAT 482); Topoloay (MAT 490); 12 credits in Physics and/or Chemistry; 20 credits in Natunl Science Elective,. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN MATHEMATICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) General Education: lS credits in Humanitie1, iocludin, Composition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits in Natunl Science■; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Onl Communication (COM 101); Genenl P1ychofogy (PSY 100); 9 credits of free elective,. (B) Profes.,ional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teltl and Meaaurementa in Secondary School, (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 46S); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teachin, in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainatreaming Exceptional Child (EDU 340); Teaching of Mathematica in Secondary School, (EDS 460) or Modem Method• (EDS 4SS); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461). (C) Profes.,ional SpeciaJization: Required: Calculus I, Il, m, (MAT 281, 282, 381); Diacrete Mathematics (MAT 272); Geometry (MAT 203); Abltract Alaebn I (MAT 3Sl); Statistical Analy1i1 I (MAT 461); Linear Algebn I (MAT 341); Hi1tory of Mathematica (MAT 304); Basic Pro,nmming Language (CSC l0S) or Introduction to Computer Science with Paacal (CSC 123). 272 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE Reltricted Eective,: Choose one from Group I and one from Group Il. Group I: Calculua IV (MAT 382); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); Abstract Algebra Il (MAT 451); Statistical Analy1i1 Il (MAT 462); Linear Algebra Il (MAT 441); Honon Coune in Mathematic, (MAT 469); Theory of Equationa (MAT 305); Seminar in Mathematic, (MAT 495) . Group Il: Basic Program Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pucal (CSC 123); Introduction to Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Aaaembler Language (CSC 323); Information Structure, (CSC 377); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375). Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire Pennsylvania certification. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN INDUSI'IUAL MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGY: MANAGEMENT AND COMPUTER SCIENCE OPfION Curriculum: (A) GeDen1 Education: English Compo■ition I (ENG 101); Busineu Writing I (ENG 211); Scientific and Technical Writing (ENG 217); Technical Mathematic, I (MAT 182) or College Algebra (MAT 181); Mathematica of Finance I (MAT 171); Ba1ic Calculus (MAT 273); 6 credit in Humanities; 6 credits in Social Sciences; 6 credits in Natural Science,; 12 credits of free elective■. (B) Area of Coacemtratioa: Mathematic ■ of Finance Il (MAT 271); Statistics (MAT 215) or Bu1ine11 Statistic, (MAT 22.5); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Oral Communication Management (COM 103); General Psychology (PSY 100); Indultrial P■ychology (PSY 209); Introduction to MicroproceB10nand Application Software (CSC 101); Baaic Prognmmina Language (CSC 105) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Computer Science with C (CSC 223); Cobol I & Il (CSC 218 & 318); Information Structure, (CSC 377); Data Baae Management (CSC 456); Syatema Analy1i1 (CSC 375); Survey of Operationa Research (CSC 309); 5 credits of 200 level or above computer science elective,. Accountina I & Il (ACC 201 & 202); Managerial Accounting (ACC 321) or Coat Accountina (ACC 331); Introductory Microeconomic• (ECO 201); Introductory Macroeconomic, (ECO 202); Principle, of Management (MOT 201); Fmancial Management (FIN 301); Labor Relationa (MOT 362); 3 credits of 300 level or above in Accountina, Busineu, Economic1, Management, Marketina or Fmance. ASSOCIATE OF SCIENCE DEGREE IN COMPUTER SCIENCE TECHNOLOGY This two:year associate degree program provides students with training in computer science technology. This high-quality program is career-oriented. All credits earned in this program are directly transferable to the four-year Bachelor's degree in Industrial Management Technology-Management and Computer Science Option. DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 273 Curricululll: (A) General Educatioa: English Compoaitionl (ENG IOI); Busineaa Writing I (ENG 211); Colle1e Algebra (MAT 181) or Technical Mathematic ■ I (MAT 182); Baaic Programmin, LallJU&ge (CSC I OS) or Computer Science I (CSC 121); Science, Technoloiy, and Society (PHI 247); 3 credit.sin Humanities; 3 credit.sin Social Sciences; 3 credit.s in Natural Science,; 3 credit.s in Free Elective,. (B) Area ofConcentratioa: Mathematica of Finance I (MAT 171); Statistics (MAT 215) or Buaine11Stati1tic1 (MAT 225); Discrete Mathematica (MAT 272); Introduction to Microproce880r■ and Applications Software (CSC 101); Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Cobol I (CSC 218); Computer Operations (CSC 300); Systems Analyaia (CSC 375); Information Structures (CSC 377); 12 credita Mathematica and/or Computer Science elective ■ 200 level or above . CERTIFICATE IN PERSONAL COMPUTER APPLICATIONS This eighteen-credit certificate program is designed for both undergraduates interested in concentrating their elective course work in the area of micro-computer applications and non-degree seeking students interested in learning how to use microcomputers in their daily lives. The course requirements are divided into three areas: Programming (6 credits), Application Software (9 credits), and Field Experience (3 credits). The Systems Analysis course may be substituted for the field experience. Curriculum: Basic Programming Language (CSC 105); Introduction to Computer Science with Pascal (CSC 123); Micro, and Application Software (CSC 101); PC Applications Programming (CAW 105); Word Proceaaing (ENG 151); Lotua 1-2-3 (CAW 102); Advanced Lotus Workshop (CAW 103); Field Experience in Computer Science (CSC 199) or Systems Analy1i1 (CSC 375) . MATHEMATICS COURSES (MAT) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) + MAT 098. BASIC MATHEMATICS . A review of the fundamentals of arithmetic computations to include: whole number, fractions and decimals, percent.B, ratio and proportion. Basic geometric measures and formulas. Some elementary alaebra . (3 era.) 1his course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation. Thia course may not be uaed aa a Natural Science elective. +MAT 099. INTRODUCTORY ALGEBRA. Designed to aid the student in the transition from arithmetic to algebra. It may be a tenninal course for 10me or may be a preparation for a traditional College Algebra course and topic ■ will include: Operations on integen and polynomials, factoring and linear equations. (3 era.) Thia course may not be uaed aa a Natural Science elective. This course does IIOI eam credit toward graduation. +MAT 100. FUNDAMENTALS OF MATHEMATICS. Seta and their language; numeration aystems; properties of natural numben, whole numben, integers, rational and real numbers; elementary number theory; modular arithmetic; mathematical systems; logic. No prerequisite■ . (3 era.) 274 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE MAT 155. METRIC WORKSHOP. For one who wiahe1 to improve one'• uac of the metric 1yatem in all aspects of daily life. Activities applicable to tcachen, parents, and pcnona in bu1incu and indultry. Teaching 1trategie1, game■, and 1011rces of materials for tcachen. (1 er.) +MAT 161. DIAGNOSTIC AND REMEDIAL TECHNIQUES IN MATHF.MATICS . For Elementary Education majon. Various approaches and meth?(i• designed to engage the student in a critical analy1i1 of 1trength1 and weakncaac1 in approaches to teaching mathematics. Material■ and game■ to remedy deficiencies of the child . Teaching technique• such as flexible grouping pattern, and individual inatJUction. Prerequisite: Two yean of high achoo! mathematic,. (3 en.) MAT 163. INTUITIVE GEOMETRY. To develop basic concepts of geometry: congruence, similarity, measure, symmetry, etc. Lecture,, group and individual projects. Geometry for the elementary gndes i1 emphasized . (3 en.) + MAT 171 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE I. Simple intcreat, compound intereat, value of money relative to time and intcreat, diacounting, accumulation, mortgage points, annuitie1, amortization achedule1, and equation■ of value. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182 (3 en.) +MAT 181. COLLEGE ALGEBRA. Fundamental operation■; factoring and fraction■, exponents and radicals; and gnpha; equation■ and inequalities; ayatem■ of equation■. Prerequisite: MAT 099 or high achoo! algebra. (3 en.) function■ +MAT 182. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS I. An introduction to algebraic topic ■ usually covered in a highachool algebra coune, 111ch a ■ function■ , graphs, exponents and radicals, and linear and quadratic equations. Emphasis on technology application■ . (3 en.) +MAT 191. COLLEGE TRIGONOMETRY. Polar coordinates; identities; solving trigonometric equationa; functiona and invene functiona, complex numben and logarithm■. Prerequiaite: The student ahould have an adequate background in algebra, and some plane geometry ia de1inble . (3 en.) +MAT 192. TECHNICAL MATHEMATICS Il. An emphaaia on trigonometry: trigonometric functiona, vccton, graph• of trigonometric functiona, exponents and logarithm■, and additional topics in trigonometry. Empha1i1 on technology applicationa. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.) + MAT 199. PRE-CALCULUS . Fundamental notion■ (functiona, lines, acgments, slopea, angle between and equation■), conic ■, algebnic and tranacendental curve,. (3 en.) line■ , graph■ MAT 203. GEOMETRY. Analysis of axiomatic system■ , axiomatic development of elementary Euclidean geometry and non-Euclidean geometry. Prerequisites: MAT 181 and MAT 191, or three yean of high-achoo! mathematics. (3 en.) MAT 215 . STATISTICS. For non-mathematics majon; not counted toward a mathematics major. Frequency diatribution, percentile■, mea111rea of central tendency and variability, nonnal diatribution and curve, populations, samples, sampling diatribution of means, sampling diatribution of proportion, null and alternative hypotheac1, type I and type Il erron, teats of mean■, confidence intervala, dcciaion procedure,, correlation, chi-square, 1imple analysis of variance and design of experimenta. Prerequisite: MAT 181. (3 en.) MAT 225. BUSINESS STATISTICS. Statistical technique, relevant to buainc11 applicationa. Primary emphaais i1 placed upon identification of appropriate atatistical method, to uac, proper interpretation and appropriate preacntation of reaulta. Topics include descriptive atatiatica, probability concepta, the nonnal probability diatribution, estimation techniques, teata of hypotheac1, 1imple and multiple linear regre11ion. Statistical software i1 uacd to implement many of the statistical method■ . Prerequiaite: MAT 181 or MAT 182. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 275 MAT 271 . MATHEMATICS OF FINANCE II. Gencnliud aMuitie■; bond ■, amortization of premium, and accumulation of diacount; c11h flows; depreciation achedules; comparison of depreciation; net ca■h flow; nte of return; capitaliud coll and aMual return; life aMuitie■; life inaunnce. Prerequisite: MAT 171 (3 en.) MAT 272. DISCRETE MATHEMATICS. An introduction to theories and methods of mathematic athat are relative to computer acience. topic• include: logic, sell, elementary number theory, mathematical induction, combinatorics, relations, dignpha, Boolean matrice1, t.rcca. (3 en.) MAT 273 . BASIC CALCULUS . The techniques of differentiation and integntion are covered without the theory oflimita and continuity. Applicationa in buaineaaand biological acience are conaidered . Prerequisite■ : MAT 181 or MAT 182, MAT 191 or MAT 192. (3 en.) .MAT 281. CALCULUS I. A revie~ of absolute value and inequalities; an introduction to analytic geometry; functions, limits, and continuity; the derivative; applications of the derivative. Prerequisite: MAT 181 or MAT 199 or four yean of high-achoo! mathematics. (3 en.) MAT 282. CALCULUS II. The integnl; fundamental theorem of integnl calculus; applications of the integnl; invenc functiona; logarithmic functiona; exponential functiona; trigonometric functiona; hyperbolic functiona; techniques of integntion. Prerequisite: MAT 281. (3 en.) MAT 300. MATHEMATICAL INSIGHTS . A gndual introduction to the basic concepll of logic, set theory, and abatnct algebn. The axiomatic structure i1 emphasiud. (3 en.) MAT 304. HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS . Thia counc ia a hiatorical ■ummary of the development of mathematic ■ . Empha■is will be relating mathematic ■ to the development of world culture and ita relation■hip with all aspects of our culture. The lives and diacoveries of many mathematiciana are discu1sed. Methods of incorponting the hillory of mathematic, into high school mathematics councs are a major focu1 of the counc. Prerequisite ■ : MAT 203 and MAT 282. (3 en.) S MAT 305 . THEORY OF EQUATIONS . Complex numben; theorems involving polynomial1 in one variable; cubic and biquadratic equations; sepantion of roots, Stunn' a theorem, and approximate evaluation of roots. Prerequisite: Junior or Senior 11tandi111, (3 en.) S MAT 341. LINEAR ALGEBRA I. Systems of linear equations and matrices; detenninanll; vecton in 2-space and 3-space; vector spaces; linear tnnsfonnations (3 en.) MAT 351. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA I. Fundamental concepll of logic; natunl numbers, well-ordering property, induction, elementary concepll of number theory;_.iJ:8UPS;-cosell, Lagrange's theorem, normal sub-groups, factor groups; homomorphism, i■omorphism, and related topic■ inclu~ Cayley'a theorem, natural hemomorphism, and the three fundamental homomorphism theorems. (3 en.) MAT 381. CALCULUS m. Indeterminate fonna and improper intc ls, polar coordinates and conic sections, infinite aerie■ , and the theory of infinite aerie■ . Prerequisite: MAT 28 . en.) MAT 382 . CALCULUS IV. Vectors in the plane; vectors in three space; theory or curve ■ and surfaces; the differential calculua and the integnl calculu■ of function■ of several variable■ . Prerequisite: MAT 381. (3 en.) MAT 406 . DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS . Ordinary differential equations and their ■olutions . The exilllence and uniquencaa of ■olutions . Various types of differential equationa and the techniques for obtaining their ■olution . Some basic applications, including numerical techniques. Computer ■olution techniques are discus■ed . Prerequisite: MAT 282 and MAT 381. (3 en.) 276 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE MAT 441. LINEAR ALGEBRA Il. Extend• the concepta learned in Linear Algebra I. The content i1 not fixed , but usually includes the following topics: linear transfonnations, change-of-baae ■ matricea, repreaentation matrice1; inner-product spaces, eigenvalues and eigenvecton, diagonalization. Prerequi1ite: MAT 341 (3 en.) F MAT 451. ABSTRACT ALGEBRA Il. Study of ring■, ideals, quotient ringa, inte,ral domaina, and fields ; ring homomorphisnu; polynomial rings, diviaion algorithnu, factorization of polynomial,, unique factorization, extensions, fundamental theorem; finite field■. Prerequi1ite: MAT 35 I . (3 en.) MAT 461. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS I. Baaic concepta of both diacrete and continuoua probability theory. The study of random variable,, probability diatributions, mathematical expectation and a number of 1ignificant probability models. Introduction to atatiatical eatimation and hypotheaia teating . Prerequiaitea: MAT 282 (3 en.) MAT 462. STATISTICAL ANALYSIS Il. Statiatical theory and application of atatiatical eatimation technique■ and hypothesis teating methods. Simple linear and multiple linear regreaaion models. Statiatical techniques are implemented with microcomputer atatiatical aoftware . Prerequisite■: MAT 461 (3 en.) S MAT 469. HONORS COURSE IN MATHEMATICS. Mathematica majon mull, aa a prerequisite for this courae, have completed 64 credita with a QPA of 3 .25 in all work and the permiaaion of the department chair or nonrepeatable. (3 en.) MAT 481. ADVANCED CALCULUS I. Logic and technique, of proof; relation■ , function■, cardinality, and naive aet theory; development of real numben from natural numben through topology of the line; convergence and related idea, dealing with function■ (sequence, and aerie■) including continuity. MAT 482. ADVANCED CALCULUS Il. Further development of the limit concept pertaining to functions including differentiation and integration along with appropriate theorenu and propertie ■; continuation of development of sequences and aeries including functions . Prerequi■ite : MAT 481. (3 en.) MAT 490. TOPOLOGY. Set theory as applied to topological spaces including the real line; metric spaces. Prerequisite: MAT 351 or MAT 481. (3 en.) MAT 490. SEMINAR IN MATHEMATICS . Topic, in thi■ courae are choaenjointly by the inatructor and the student or atudenta involved. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor and chairman of department. Repeatable for a maximum of 3 credita. (1 to 3 en.) COMPUTER SCIENCE COURSES (CSC) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +). +CSC 101. INTRODUCTION TO MICROCOMPUTER AND APPLICATION SOFIWARE. An introductory study of the IBM-PC microcomputer, ita operating system, and its moat popular application■. Major topics: Computer hardware, MS-DOS, word processing, spread aheeta, graphic■, data baaea. (3 en.) +CSC 105 . BASIC PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE. The nature and atructure of computen, the history and development of computen, flow charting and elementa of the BASIC language involved in reading and printing, transfer atatementa, looping, subroutines, conversational programming, etc . The computer language taught i■ BASIC. (3 en.) +CSC 121. COMPUTER SCIENCE. Thia courae ia an introduction to computer acience using a recent venion of the FORTRAN programming language. The concept of structured programming, input and output technique■, DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 277 exprcuion evaluation, the uaignment lllatement, decision lllatementa, looping techniques, and arrays arc among the topic• covered in thia coune. Prcrequiaite: MAT 181. (3 en.) CSC 123. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH PASCAL. Thia coune introduce, the ltudent to computen, algorithma, and pro,rama. Empha1i1 ia on efficient pro,nm deai,n using llnlcturcd pro,nmming technique,. Students arc required to run PASCAL programa on the Univenity's computer ayatem and/or on penonal computen. (3 en.) CSC 199. FIELD EXPERIENCE IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Thia coune ia designed for the Auociate Degree in Computer Science prognm. It affords •handa-on" job-related experience in computer acience. Availability of this coune ia dependent upon finding a hoat organization. Not repeatable. (3 en.) CSC 218. COBOL I. Introductory concepts of data proceuing through the buic components of COBOL prognmming. Includes structured programming, input/output computational, conditionals, and table handling facilities. Prerequisite : An introductory coune in computer acience is recommended . (3 en.) CSC 221. COMPUTER SCIENCE Il. Thia coune involves advanced pro,nmming technique, using the moat recent venion of the FORTRAN programming language. Among the topic• covered in this coune arc advanced array technique■ , character manipulation, subroutine, and function subpro,nma, the internal rcprcaentation of character and numeric value,, and file proceuing. Prcrequiaite: CSC 121. (3 en.) CSC 223. INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE wrrH C. Thi ■ coune introduce• the student to the C environment. Emph11i1 is on efficient software development using llnlctured programming techniques. Students arc required to run C programa on the Univenity' s computer system and/or on personal computen. Prerequisite: CSC 123 or equivalent. (3 en.) CSC 256. COMPUTER-AIDED INSTRUCTION (CAI). The coune is taught on a lecture-laboratory baais. Students arc expected to be able to uae the Math and Computer Science department's personal computers and should be familiar with at least one converutional computer language, preferably BASIC. In the laboratory seaaion, students arc expoaed to various types of CAI prognmming materials and instructed in the development of their own CAI •pack.age" using appropriate software. Prerequisite: CSC 105 or CSC 121 or CSC 123. (3 en.) F CSC 300. COMPUTER. OPERATIONS . Introduction to the hardware of the computer and the usage and operation of the Central Proceuing Unit and its peripheral equipment. Prerequisites: CSC 221 or CSC 123 . (3 en.) CSC 309 . SURVEY OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH. Lecture and laboratory aessiona utilizing the computer in the performance of quantitative methods of decision-making. Survey of prcaent operations rcaearch tools available to the administrator and manager is an integral part of the coune. Prerequisites: Junior or Senior It.anding, MAT 215 or MAT 225, along with MAT 341 arc desirable. (3 en.) '. CSC 316 . LOGIC AND SWITCHING THEORY OF THE COMPUTER. Thia coune is designed to provide an in-depth 1tudy of Boolean algebra and its application to switching and gating networks . Prerequisites: CSC 105 or CSC 121 or CSC 123 or MAT 272. Recommended couraes arc MAT 273 or MAT 281 and CSC 323 . (3 en.) CSC 318. COBOL Il. A continuation of COBOL I emphaaizing aequential and indexed files, disk: storage, table handling, subpro,nma, library copy facilities, interactive proceuing, sorting, character manipulation and debugging. Top-down deai,n and principle ■ of structured programming permeate the courae. File editing, file updating and file maintenance programs arc covered in detail. Prerequisite: CSC 218 (3 en.) CSC 323. ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING . Computer organization, rcprcaentation of numbers and characters, instruction codes, machine language, macros, and subroutines. Prerequisite: CSC 123 or CSC 221 (3 en.) 278 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 'AND COMPUTER SCIENCE CSC 324. COMPUTER GRAPHICS. Lecture and labontory aeaaiona utilizing the computer via inter-active gnphic1 terminal,, and study of the theory and hardware of gnphica device■. Development and utilization of gnphic1 10ftware i1 the major goal of thi1 coune. Prerequisites: CSC 123 or CSC 221 . (3 en.) CSC 375. SYSTEMS ANALYSIS . An introduction to the baaic conccpta and tool• of 1yatema analy1i1 within the context of real life problem situationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 101 and CSC 123 or permiaaion of imtnactor. (3 en.) s CSC 377. INFORMATION STRUCTURES. Data llructures, conccpta and algorithm■ uaed in 10lution of nonnumerical problem■. Topics include atacb, queue■, linked liata and binary tree■, 10rting and ■earching method■, and 10me analy1i1 of algorithm■ . Prerequi1ite1: MAT 272 and CSC 123. (3 en.) CSC 378. COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE. Centnl proceaaor organization, imtnaction formata, addreaaing schemes, hienrchiea of atonge, executive, and priority proceuing, 11 well as input and output. Prerequi1ite: CSC 123 or CSC 221 and CSC 316 and CSC 323. (3 en.) F CSC 400. OPERATING SYSTEMS. An introduction to the function, purpose, chancteristics, and design objectives of computer operating syatema. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377. (3 en.) F CSC 405. DATA COMMUNICATIONS . A study of the theory, implementation procedure■, and problem■ a110Ciatcd with data communicationa. Prerequi1ite: CSC 378, MAT 272, CSC 377 and MAT 341. (3 en.) S CSC 410. LISP PROGRAMMING. An introduction to LISP (List Proceuing) 11 a vehicle for encoding intelligence-exhibiting procesaea. Topic ■ include a ■urvey of lambda calculus and recursive function theory. Prerequi1ite1: CSC 377 (3 en.) F CSC 419. MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE INTERNSHIP. Focuae1 on job related experience in Computer Science and Mathematic,. Opportunitiea may be available to studenta off and on campu1. (l-15 en.) CSC 420. ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE. To ■urvey the 10ftware pacbgea needed for artificial intelligence and to uae theae II tool, in a representative sample of Al topics . Prerequisites: CSC 377 and CSC 410. (3 en.) S CSC 424. NUMERICAL ANALYSIS . Round-off errors and computer arithmetic; numerical instability; error analy1i1 and estimation; cubic spline interpolation; condition number of a matrix; Gauuian elimination and pivoting atntegiea for linear system■; numerical integntion and 10lution of differential equation,. Prerequisite,: CSC 123 or CSC 221 and MAT 382. (3 en.) F CSC 455. STRUCTURE OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES . The power and limitationa of algebraic language■ , string manipulation languagesand intenctive languagenre studied together with compiler llructure and technique, . Pre!CQuiaite: CSC 223. (3 en.) F CSC 456. DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS. Design, implementation and application of data base management 1yatems. Prerequisite: CSC 218. (3 en.) CSC 460. LANGUAGE TRANSLATION. Theory and design of asaemblen, interpreters, and compilers for digital computers. Topics include analysis of 10Urce language, genention of efficient-object code, and optimization techniques. Prerequisites: CSC 323 and CSC 377 . (3 en.) S CSC 475. THEORY OF LANGUAGES. An introduction to abatnct machine theory, combinatorial 1yatems, computable functions, and formal linguistics. Topics include tinite-atate machines, regular aeta, Turing machines, Chomsky bienrchy gnmman and language,. Empb11i1 is on ■urveying baaic topics and developing an intuitive understanding in the theory of languages. Prerequisite,: CSC 377, MAT 272 or MAT 351. (3 en.) S DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE 279 CSC 485. SPECIAL TOPICS IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Individual study or research on topic ■ and materials not ordinarily covered by other courses. Repeatable for a maximum of three credits. Prcrequi1ite: Pennission of illBlructor. (3 en.) CSC 496. SEMINAR IN COMPUTER. SCIENCE. Topics to be chosen jointly by the instructor and the student or students involved. Prerequisite: Approval of instructor. (I to 3 en.) COMPUTER ASSISTED WORKSHOPS (CAW) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. CAW 102. LOTUS WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 Worksheet Program. Worksheet entries and LOTUS 1-2-3 commands and graphs. (1 er.) CAW 103. ADV ANCED LOTUS WORKSHOP. A study of the LOTUS 1-2-3 macro command language, data base commands, and worksheet consolidation. Prerequisite: CAW 102. (I er.) CAW 105. PC APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING WORKSHOP. An introductory study of the personal computer operatina 1y■tcm includina batch files, confi,uration files and communicatiom. (3 en.) S 280 DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE (ARMY ROTC) Major Rand C. Lewis, Professor of Military Science; Captain Steven Roberts, Assistant Professor, officer in charge; Captain John Haselrig, Assistant Professor; Captain Andrew E. Kwortelc, Assistant Professor The Army Reserve Officers Training Corps (Army ROTC) is a national program that provides college-trained officers for the U.S. Army, the Army National Guard and the U.S. Army Reserve. Army ROTC enhances students' education by providing unique leadership and management experience and helps develop self-discipline, physical stamina and poise. This education experience is further enhanced through the Professional Military Education program. This program encourages students to take additional courses in military history, written communication, human behavior, management, and national security studies. Participation in field training/trips may be required during each semester. For additional information not covered below, please call the Military Science department (938-4074) or visit the ROTC building on the University campus. THE BASIC PROGRAM Army ROTC is traditionally a four-year program consisting of a Basic and Advanced Program. The Basic Program is usually taken in the freshman and sophomore years. The student incurs no military obligation. Students may discontinue the Basic Program at any time. It consists of four semesters of training and instruction on areas of national defense, land navigation, small unit leadership, military history and leadership development. Uniform, necessary textbooks, and equipment are furnished without cost to the student. To be eligible for the Basic Program, a student must be enrolled as a full-time student at California University and not be a conscientious objector. Students who have taken Junior ROTC or have military experience (active duty or reserves) may receive advanced placement credit for the Basic Program. THE ADVANCED PROGRAM The Advanced Program is normally taken in the final two years of college. Instruction includes further leadership development and evaluation, organiz.ational and management techniques, tactics and administration. Training is directed towards preparing the student to be commissioned and assume responsibilities as a Second Lieutenant upon completion of all program requirements. A paid Advanced Camp is held during the summer between the junior and senior year and is required of all advanced course students. This camp permits the cadet to put into practice the principles and theories acquired in classroom instruction. In addition to being paid approximately $600 (for six weeks of leadership training), the cadet is paid travel DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 281 expenses, room and board, medical and dental care, and other benefits while attending Advanced Camp. To be eligible for the Advanced Program, a student must (1) fulfill the requirements for the Basic Program, (2) successfully complete the Professor of Military Science's (PMS) interview and selection process, (3) meet Army medical standards, (4) pass an Officer Selection Battery (OSB), (5) have a Grade Point Average of 2.0 or better (2.2 or better preferred), and (6) meet Army physical fitness standards. Two-Year Program The two-year program enables students who did not enroll in the Basic Program to become eligible for entry into the Advanced Program through one of three methods: (1) Armed Forces veterans and Junior ROTC graduates may qualify for entry into the Advanced Program. (2) Students may elect to attend the ROTC Basic Camp (a six-week program completed during the summer) before entering the Advanced Program. (3) Students may attend Basic Training as members of an Army Reserve or National Guard unit. To be eligible for the two-year program one must be a full-time student in good standing with the university and must have at least junior status, be pursuing a four-year degree, and satisfy all the entry requirements outlined above for the Advanced Program. Anny ROTC Stipend All students that are enrolled and contracted into the Advanced Program receive a stipend of $100 per month for ten months of each school year during the last two years of the ROTC program. This stipend is non-taxable. Anny ROTC Scholarships Advanced freshmen may compete for three-year merit scholarships whether or not they are enrolled in Military Science courses. These scholarships pay for tuition, fees, a flat book rate, and a $100 per month ROTC stipend during the school year for the length of the scholarship. Applications for these .scholarships are accepted from the end of the fall semester through the beginning of the spring semester. Simultaneous Membership Program (SMP) This program provides membership in ROTC and an Army Reserve or Army National Guard unit at the same time. While enrolled in ROTC, the student is also filling a leadership position such as platoon leader in a Reserve or National Guard unit. This affords the student the opportunity gain valuable leadership and management experience while attending California. The student receives the ROTC stipend ($100/month) and drill pay from the Reserves (approximately $120/month). Students who qualify and take advantage of all the benefits that are available through this program may receive benefits of as much as $10,000. DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 282 Milftary Science Student Activities Military Science students are encouraged to participate in university and civic activities as much as their course load will allow. The Military Science Department and the Vulcan Cadet Corps sponsor numerous activities such as serving as color guard for all home football and basketball games and university functions, Red Cross blood drives, marching in parades, and formal and semi-formal social activities. Military Adventure Training In addition to all the training and activities offered by the Department of Military Science, a selected number of highly motivated cadets are afforded the opportunity to attend some of the U.S. Army's most prestigious and challenging military schools. Limited numbers of positions are available for California cadets to attend the U.S. Army Airborne School (at Fort Benning, Georgia), the U.S. Army Air Assault School (at Fort Campbell, Kentucky), and the U.S. Army Northern Warfare School (at Fort Greenly, Alaska). School allocations are awarded on a competitive basis. A Suggested Military Science Curriculwn Fall Semester Spring Semester Basic Course Freshman Sophomore GMS 111 GMS 213 Junior Senior GMS 315 GMS 417 GMS 112 GMS 214 Advanced Course GMS 316 GMS 418 MILITARY SCIENCE BASIC PROGRAM: GMS COURSES The first four semesters of Military Science (100 and 200 series courses) constitute the Basic Program, allowing the college student to gain insight into the military as a profession without incurring any military obligation. The student learns about the role of the US Army in providing for national security, basic leadership and management skills, as well as basic military skills. The student is afforded the opportunity to partake in outdoor activities such as rappelling, swim survival and white water rafting besides participating in the various social activities sponsored by the Cadet Corps. DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 283 F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. GMS 111 . LEADERSHIP CONCEPl'S AND COMMUNICATIONS SKILL. Develop, the atudent'a leadenhip and management 1kill1 through a aeries of caae atudiea and role-playing model■. Studenta learn communication skills, interpenonal 1kill1 and penonnel conflict reaolution . One hour lecture and one hour leadc;_nhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) F GMS 112. ROLE OF THE U .S . ARMY IN NATIONAL SECURJI'Y. Familiarize, the atudent with the organization of the Department of Defenae, focu1i111 on the U .S . Anny, Reaerve componenta, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO), Soviet Anny doctrine, and baaic aoldering 1kill1. One hour lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) S GMS 213. FUNDAMENTALS OF MILITARY SKILLS AND SMALL UNIT LEADERSHIP. Studenta learn baaic land na"igational 1kill1 by using the military topographical map and the lenaatic compau. Additionally, the atudent ia taught basic, in ,mall unit leadenhip and tactic, of aquad-aized unita. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) F GMS 214. MILITARY HISTORY: LEADERS AND BATTLES. An analytical study of the principles of war and their application■ in U .S . military history from the American Revolution through the Vietnam conflict. The atudent will atudy the commander' ■ penpective and how it affected the outcome of the battle. Three houn lecture per week. (3 en.) S LEADERSHIP LABORATORY: (Baaic Program cadeta/atudenta)ln laboratory the cadet learn■ basic military 1kill1, 111ch II fint aid , awim 111rvival, and mountaineering 1kill1 and ia afforded the opportunity to rappel. Cadeta are 1)10 afforded the opportunity to gain leadenhip experience through various challe111ing aquad or platoon poaitiona. Leadenhip laboratory mull be acheduled u part of each basic Military Science courae (GMS 111 thru GMS 214) . Mll..ITARY SCIENCE ADVANCED PROGRAM: GMS COURSES The 300 and 400 series courses constitute the advanced courses of military instruction for men and women who desire a commission as Second Lieutenant in the active Anny, the Anny Reserve, or the National Guard. This phase is composed of studies in advanced leadership and management, tactics, military law, modem instructional and training techniques and ethics and professionalism. Students are evaluated on their leadership skills in various leadership positions. Acceptance by the Professor of Military Science is a prerequisite for enrollment in the Advanced Program. F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. GMS 315 . ADVANCED MILITARY SKILLS AND LEADERSHIP DEVELOPMENT. Extcnaive atudy and experience in military leadenhip and military combat akilla, 111ch a■ drill and ceremony, land navigation, communication■, and phy■ical fitneu. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Acceptance into the Advanced Program. (2 en.) F GMS 316 . ADVANCEDMil..ITARY TACTICS AND COMBAT OPERATIONS . Extcnaive atudy and handa-on experi~nce in small unit ~ctica and leadenhip 1kill1, including operation■ orden, offenaive and defenaive combat operation■ and leadenhip development. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week. (2 en.) s 284 DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE GMS 417. DYNAMICS OF MILITARY LEADERSHIP AND ARMY FUNCTIONS. A study of the U.S. Army's command and staff functions, military justice system, and the Army Training Management Syatem. In-depth discu11ions of ethic• and professionalism required of the Officer Corps. Two hours lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week:. (2 era.) F GMS 418. THE MILITARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM AND OFFICER TRANSmON. An introduction to the U.S. Army'• personnel and logistical management system and personnel evaluation system. The course conclude■ with a worbhop to a11ist the cadet to make the transition into the military profe11ion. Two houn lecture and one hour leadenhip laboratory per week:. (2 en.) S LEADERSHIP LABORATORY. (Advanced Program cadets) During leadenhip laboratory cadets are evaluated in various leadenhip positions at the battalion and company level. Leadership laboratory i1 de1igned to prepare cadets for advanced camp and future appointments as Second Lieutenants. Senior level cadets conduct the training and administration of the Cadet Corps. Leadership laboratory must be scheduled in conjunction with the advanced Military Science courses (GMS 315 through GMS 418). 285 DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC MUSIC (MUS) HUMANITIES AREA Associate Professor Gene G. Suskalo, chair. Associate Professors Paul P. Dolinar, Max A. Gonano, Shirley J. Sutton, Albert Tiberio PURPOSE People, regardless of time and place, are expressive about the circumstances of their lives, as well as about their hopes and dreams. One form of that expression is music. To comprehend its meaning and importance necessitates relating it to an historical context and to understanding the science of sound production behind this art form. Music is not simply an end in itself. Music is also a means by which the values and interests of a society are revealed. The music curriculum is designed to give a general introduction to the appreciation of modem and classical music as well as to provide interested students with the opportunity to participate in the university's band, choirs, and instrumental ensembles. PROGRAM The university has no major in music. The curriculum serves the General Studies Program of the university and the Co-Curricular Program sponsored by Student Affairs, Inc. Located in the Music Department is the Humanities Area Major. It provides students with the opportunity and flexibility to structure a course of study from across disciplines in the humanities - Music, Art, Theater, Philosophy, Communication Studies, English, and the Foreign Languages and Cultures. MUSIC COURSES (MUS) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). +MUS 100. INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC. Expoaes the student to the various hiatorical, analytical and aesthetic elements of muaic, thereby providing an opportunity to broaden and enrich peraonal enjoyment. This expoaure to mu■ic ia made through the uae of villl41 aid■, audio recording■, radio, television, films, and concerts. (3 en.) F-S DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 286 MUS 104. VOICE CLASS I. Thi, courx i, deaigned for students who want to improve their singing voice I I a musically exprcuive instrument. Breathiq, vocal placement, and diction will be emphasized. Attention will also be given to improving 1ight-1inging ability. (3 en.) +MUS 105. SURVEY OF JAZZ. Coven the historical background of jazz from 1900 to the present, the important artiata and ensemble, and their contributions to the art fonn, and analyze• of jazz styles and forms via guided liatening1 to recording,, video,, and attendance at live performance,. (3 en.) F-S + MUS 106. SURVEY OF TWENTIETH-CENTURY MUSIC . Auiata in a realization and undentanding of the impact of modern twentieth-century compositional and performance techniques upon the tnditional muaical heritage. The student will emerge with a theoretical knowledae of numerou■ twentieth-century musical concepts and technique,, 11 well I I an appropriate vocabulary. Important compoacn and a de■criptive analy1i1 of their worb will play a dominalll role throughout the courx. (3 en.) F-S + MUS 107. AMERICAN MUSIC . Presents a panoramic view of the musical activities which have occurred in America from Colonial time, through the present. Included in thia study of American folk, popular and art muaic arc the various upects of primitive music, psalmody, early opera, and concert life, African and European folk music•• influence in America, the ■inging ■chool , the mu■ical effect of European immigrants, and the roots of jazz and its ramifications. (3 en.) F-S MUS 114. VOICE CLASS ll. This course continue, the objectives of Voice I (MUS 104). A more demanding level of vocal literature, commensurate with the student'• 1ingina ability will be performed. + MUS 11 S. FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC. Provide■ a knowledge of the fundamentals of muaic and an ability to execute baaic 1kill1, including the study of note value,, meter signature■, ■cales, key signature,, and the use of syllables in reading music . A b11ic introduction to the piano keyboard i1 also included . Strongly recommended for Elementary Education students and any ochen interested in ■trcngthening their knowledge of music fundamental,. (3 en.) F-S MUS 196. JAZZ ENSEMBLE. Entnnce by interview with Jazz Ensemble Director. Required attendance at rchcaraala and all public performance,. Membenhip ,ranted only by audition. (1 er.) F-S MUS 197. CALIFORNIA CHORALE. A ,roup of approximately 25 mixed voices. Memben arc chosen from the ltudent body, faculty , and mcmbcn of surrounding communitie■. Membership is granted only by audition. (1 er.) F-S MUS 203 . SURVEY OF THE AMERICAN MUSICAL. Thi, course will present the variou■ historical, cultural and social elements of the American Muaical. Thia will be accompli■hed through the use of visual aid ■ , audio recording,, television, video tape■ , film■ , and whenever pouible, attendance at live performances. Experts in the field will be utilized II guest lecturcn. (3 en.) MUS 211. KEYBOARD I. For the beginning ltudents intercated in achieving facility at the piano. Includes playing of major and minor ■cale■, pattel'III and fingering,. Chord, (I, IV, V) in both major and minor key■ followed by their invenion■ and the common tone chord sequence pattern. A student completing the course ahould be able to play aimple song■ by combining melody with chord accompaniment. It ia expected that atudenll will be at an entry level in keyboard experience. (3 en.) F-S MUS 212. KEYBOARD ll. A continuation of Keyboard I for the more advanced student. Review of ■cales, chords, invenion■, and sight readings followed by the improvisation of simple accompaniments from chord 1ymbol1. Modulation study is begun with the study of the circle of fifths; further method• of modulation arc introduced II time permits. Transposition at boch the accond and third is introduced. A thorough study of dominant seventh chord, relating the ■imple improvisation within any given key. (3 en.) S • • • 287 DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC CCU 187. PEP BAND. The Pep Band ia composed of bra11, woodwind and percuaaioniata from the University Band. Thia enacmble performs at aclected basketball 1ame1. (1 er. aprin, acmeater) S CCU 188 . WOODWIND ENSEMBLE. The Woodwind Enacmble ia composed of woodwind players from the University Band. It explore, all phaaca of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one hour a week and performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S CCU 189. BRASS ENSEMBLE. The Brau Enacmble ia composed of bra11 players from the University Band. It explores all phaacs of literature composed for thia type of enacmble. The ,roup rehearaea one hour a week and performs both on and off campua. (1 er. per acmeater) F-S CCU 197. UNIVERSITY BAND. The University Band follow■ two curricula determined by the acmeater. During the fall acmeater, the University Band performs at football 1ame1 and parades and ia the featured exhibition band at numerous marchiDB band feativala. Membership in thi1 enacmble ia open to any intereated inatrumentaliat. Membership ia alao open to thoac wilhiDB to audition for feature twirler or for a po1ition on the Silk, Squad, Dance Linc, or Rifle Linc. DuriDB the SpriDB Scmeater, the University Band performs literature which encompaaaca all facets of the idiom. Thia enacmble performs at convocationa and concerts, both on and off campus. (1 er. per acmeater) ' CCU 198. CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY CHOIR. The California University Choir provides an opportunity for atudents to aing a wide variety of music from the contemporary I I well I I the traditional repertoire . They perform frequently on campua and throughout the area. Membership in the Choir ia elective; auditions are not required. (1 er.) F-S CCU 199. CALIFORNIA SINGERS. The California Sillier& ia a amall performiDB enacmble. Membership in the ,roup is determined by audition. There are an equal number of men and women . The baaic performance atyle is that of a pop/ahow/awing choir, although other atyles of muaic are performed when appropriate for the acaaon or the audience. Smaller groups, such I I a women'• trio or a men'• barbershop quartet, are formed within thia group. Choreography ia a regular part of the performance, preacnted by thia group. (1 cr.)F-S • • • ECE 217. MUSIC IN EARLY CHILDHOOD. A creative approach to the muaic intereata and nccda of the very young child, de1igncd to acquaint the prospective teacher with current music education practice, in pre-achoo! and the primary ,rades. Experiences are provided in 1ingi11B, liateniDB, playiDB inatnnncnts, rhythmic movement, and creative music activitie1. (3 era.) F-S EDE 207. TEACHING OF MUSIC IN ELEMENTARY GRADES K-8 . Thia course teachea the proper technique, of teaching muaic to children and include, the atudy of much aource material and its proper application in the cla11room. Students develop technique■ and procedure, through actual teaching experience in a cla11room actting. Although not required, Fundamental■ of Muaic (115) ia atroDBIY advised . (3 era.) F-S 288 DEPARTMENT OF NURSING DEPARTMENT OF NURSING Professor Margaret A. Marcinek, chair. Associate Professor Jacqueline Stefanik; Assistant Professors Suz.anne M. Palko, Debra A. Shelapinsky. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING The Department of Nursing, an upper-division nursing program for registered nurses who have graduated from associate degree and diploma programs, is accredited by the National League for Nursing. The Bachelor of Science in Nursing program is designed to build upon the prior knowledge and experience of registered nurses. It prepares the graduate to practice as a generalist in a variety of health settings through the internalization of concepts relevant to professional nursing. The course of study combines general education in the humanities as well as the biophysical and psychosocial sciences with comprehensive theory and practice in nursing. All of the academic requirements of the University apply to the Nursing Program. In addition, a minimum grade of "C" is required in each upper-division nursing course. All RN students are admitted into the Pre-BSN Program and must complete all Pre-BSN requirements before being admitted to the upper-division BSN nursing courses. An overall QPA of 2.0 is required for entrance into upper-division nursing courses, and a subsequent QPA of 2.0 in nursing courses must he met for graduation requirements. Lower-division courses may he accepted as transfer credits from accredited institutions, or they may he completed at California University of Pennsylvania. Selected courses may he challenged by examination. Specific information on challenge examinations for General Education courses may he obtained from the Department of Nursing. Knowledge from previously completed nursing courses must he validated in order to grant lower-division credit in nursing. Validation examinations are administered in the department and are composed of the NLN Mobility Profile II Examinations and the Clinical Performance Examination. In addition, participation in the optional Portfolio Review process may permit students to waive selected clinical requirements. Further information on validation examinations and Portfolio Review may he obtained from the department. Specified General Education and support courses must he completed at California University of Pennsylvania. All exceptions to this policy must he approved by the chairperson of the department and the Dean of the College of Science and Technology. Students enrolled in upper-division nursing courses must meet the annual health requirements. In addition, students must provide evidence of professional and personal liability insurance coverage, evidence of current RN licensure, and current CPR certification. Scholarship opportunities for the RN student entering this program are available through various local, state and national nursing organizations. Additionally, the Department of Nursing maintains a Nursing Honor Society and a Nursing Alumni Society which presents a yearly award to the outstanding graduating senior. DEPARTMENT OF NURSING 289 Curriculum: (A) Geaeral F.ducatioa: Compositionl-Il (ENG 101 and 102); College Algebra (MAT 181); Statistic ■ (MAT 215 or 225); General Psychology (PSY 100); Principle■ of Sociology (SOC 100); Developmental P■ychology (PSY 207); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); Penpective1 in Philoaophy (PHI 100) or Ethics (PHI 220); 3 en. Humanities elective; Human Anatomy and Physiology I and Il (BIO 230, 260); Chemillry for Health Profe11ional1 (CHE ISO); Microbiology (BIO 226); 7 en. of free electives. (B) Support Counes: Principles of Manaiement (MGT 201); Introduction to Microcomputen (CSC 101) total of 6 en. from any 2 area■ in Computer Science, Gerontology, Buaineaa Writing, Public School Nuning, Nutrition (BIO 228), or Nuning elective (NUR 200). (C) Area of Coaceatntioa: Nuning Placement Examinationa: NLN Mobility Profile Il Examinationa and Clinical Performance Examination (30 en.); Philoaophy of Profe11ional Nuning (NUR 330); Health Aaaeaament (NUR 350); Trend ■ and laaue■ in Nuning (NUR 360); Profe11ional Nuning in Health Promotion (NUR 390); Method■ of Nuning Research (NUR 430); Profeaaional Nuning in Health Restoration (NUR 440); Profeaaional Nuning; Social lmplicationa (NUR 460); Leadenhip and Change in Nuning (NUR 490). NURSING COURSES (NOR) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. NUR 101. WOMEN'S HEALTH ISSUES. Thi■ and cogs;em■ of women in today'• ■ociety . Emphasi■ coune ia designed to address the various health care issues, needs is on the biological, developmental, psychological and ■ocial concepts related to women'• health care. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL STUDENTS. (3 en.) S NUR 105 : PARENTING; INSIGHTS AND ISSUES . This coune examines the challenge of parenthood and effective parenting in today' ■ world . Explication of the functiona, proceaa and problems of parenting serves a s a foundation for di■cu■sion of effective parenting ■kills and behavion. FREE ELECTIVE. OPEN TO ALL STUDENTS. (3 en.) S NUR 200. TRANSmONS IN NURSING . This RN/BSN tnnaition coune is deaigned to assist the reiistered nune in developing and achieving profeaaional goal■. Empha1i1 i■ on educational trends in nuning, concepts of profeaaionali■m, theories of role tnnaition, and culture shock. (3 en.) F ■tudent NUR 330. PHILOSOPHY OF PROFESSIONAL NURSING. Focuses on theoretical frameworks for professional nuning practice, including an introduction to the nuning proce11. Allignments assist students to develop and apply a penonal philosophy of profeaaional nuning, and to independently plan appropriate interventiona for multicultural clients of all ages. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) F NUR 350. HEALTH ASSESSMENT. Concepts and skills of history-taking and physical asseaament are emphasized, focusing on the variationa in approach as well as in findings at different stages of human development. Prerequi■ite : BSN Statu1. (3 en.) F NUR 360. TRENDS AND ISSUES IN NURSING. Analysis of professional nuning aa well aa bi~thical issues from historical and contemporary viewpoints with implicationa for profe■sional nuninJ practice in the health care delivery ■ystem. Prerequisite: BSN Status. (3 en.) S NUR 390. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH PROMOTION. Reviews concepts and principles of profeaaional nuning practice related to health promotion and maintenance for individuals and familiea 1cro11 the life span. Emphasis ia on enhancement of health aaseaament skills and utilization of the nuning proceaa to manage health promotion activities. Prerequisites: NUR 330, NUR 350. (6 en.) S 290 DEPARTMENT OF NURSING NUR. 430. MEI'HODS OF NURSING RESEARCH. Basic concepts and methods related to the reaearch proce11. Opportunity i■ provided for the- development of critical thinking- and decision-making ■killa needed by the profeuional nune to analyze and evaluate reaearch findings for application to practice. Prerequisite: BSN Statu1. (3 era.) F NUR. 440. PROFESSIONAL NURSING IN HEALTH RESTORATION. Focuses on health restoration and rehabilitation of individual& acro11 the life ■pan . Practicum■ provide the opportunity for direct client care in a variety of aettinga. Emphasis i■ on the development of a theoretical base for nursing practice and scientific analy1i1 of nursing care. Prerequisite: NUR. 390 (6 en.) F NUR. 460. PROFESSIONAL NURSING: SOCIETAL IMPLICATIONS. Societal influences on the health care delivery aystcm and professional nursing practice are examined. Clinical experiences focus on application of advanced decision-making skills utilizing the nursing proceBB to meet health care needs of an identified population. Prerequisite: NUR. 440. (3 era.) S NUR. 490. LEADERSHIP AND CHANGE IN NURSING. Enhances leadership skills through analysis of and experiential exercises. Practicum■ provide for application of theory in critical analy1i1 of situations and decision-making within the practice of nursing to meet emerging health needs of consumers. Prerequisite■: NUR. 440 and MOT 201. (6 en.) S theorie■/conccpts DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 291 DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY Professor Ronald C. Hoy, Chair. Professors John J. Bums, Vincent F. Lackner, Barbara Ann Demartino Swyhart, John J. Walsh; Assistant Professor Gary A. Smith. The word philosophy comes from two Greek words that mean love (..fo,, phileo) and knowledge (<10ux, sophia), and throughout much of history anyone who sought wisdom was called a philosopher. Socrates was esteemed to be wise because he was aware of how little he knew. In knowing this, however, he was wiser than the "authorities" and "experts" whose unreflective confidence in their beliefs was mistaken. With time, philosophy as an academic discipline became the critical study of the justification of beliefs and the attempt to put together different kinds of beliefs to form a workable view of reality as a whole. In brief, philosophy is the critical study of beliefs about truth, knowledge, reality, and values. Aristotle thought the study of philosophy was intrinsically rewarding because it fulfilled a distinctively human potential-the ability to reason and to know. But if minimizing one's mistaken or dogmatic beliefs has practical value, then philosophy also can serve pragmatic purposes. Philosophy students study the historical development of theories about the nature of knowledge, reality, and values, and they learn how to assess the correctness of such theories. Students develop their abilities to think logically, to explore ethical issues from different perspectives, and to present their ideas effectively in writing. PROGRAMS The Department of Philosophy has two majors. The first is a traditional, general, course of study which includes the historical, normative (e.g., ethics and aesthetics) and methodological (e.g., logic) professional areas. The second, in addition to traditional course work, focuses on topics and issues pertinent to graduate study, particularly those related to the legal profession, such as the philosophy of law, ethics, social and political philosophy. ACTMTIES The Philosophy Department sponsors a student Philosophy Club which gives students informal social opportunities for discussions, debates, and lectures. The Philosophy faculty also present or host topical lectures and forums. 292 DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY CAREERS Philosophy majors can go on to a variety of careers: law, ministry, teaching, civil service, management, to name a few. Indeed, a philosophy major is well suited for any career that valu~ critical reasoning, logical problem solving, and an ability to look at issu~ from many perspectiv~. Increasingly, for example, the business world is looking for liberally educated employees who have learned how to go on learning. Philosophy majors should work closely with their advisor to choose major and non-major cou~ that will help them achieve their individual career goals. The Philosophy program at California University is d~igned to be flexible so that it can be tailored to the diverse needs and inte~ts of philosophy majors. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHILOSOPHY Curricuhma: (A) Geaera1 Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science,; 12 credits of Social Science,; 18 credits of Free Electives. (B) l'lliloaoplly COKeatration: Logic and Language (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI 201); Sixteenth to Eighteenth Century Philosophy (PHI 206) . Restricted ElectiTes: twenty-one credits: two courac1 in each of the following areas of philosophy: Historical, Normative, and Methodological. One additional courac from one of the above mentioned areas . Related Electins: thirty-eight credits. (C) l'llilosopby/Pre-Law COKeatration: Logic and Languaae (PHI 115); History of Ancient Philosophy (PHI 201); 16th-18th Century Philosophy (PHI 206); Social and Political Philosophy (PHI 225); Ethical Theory (PHI 320); Philosophy of Law (PHI 370); four additional advanced Philosophy couracs. Related Electins: 12 credits of advanced Philosophy couracs. Electives: 14 credits PHILOSOPHY COURSES (Pill) Introductory cou~ are indicated by a plus ( +). F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. +PHI 100. PERSPECTIVES IN PHILOSOPHY. Analysi■ of such major philosophical issues as the nature of knowledge, reality, religion and moral,. (3 en.) F S +PHI 115. LOGIC AND LANGUAGE. An introduction to basic principles and techniques for distinguishing correct from incorrect reasoning. (3 en.) F S + PHI 200. WORLD RELIGIONS. The study of the ■even world religions, including their origins and doctrines. (3 en.) + PHI 20 I. HISTORY OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY. Analysis of the texts of the pre-Socratic philosophen, Plato, Aristotle, the Stoic,, Epicureans, and the Skeptic,. (3 en.) F + PHI 206. SIXTEENTH TO EIGHTEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. Introduction to such influential thinken Francia Bacon, Dcacartcs, Hobbea, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant. (3 era.) S 11 DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY 293 PHI 211. FORMAL LOGIC I. Introduction to the ■yntax and language,, and al10 to prooftheorie1 for ■uch languages. (3 en.) ■emantics of truth-functional and first-order + PHI 220. IITHICS. An examination of ■elected ethical 1y11tem1 and their philo■ophical foundation■. emph11i1 on understanding 111ch b11ic moral concepta I I good, right and duty. (3 en.) Lay■ ■pecial + PHI 225. SOCIAL AND POLmCAL PHILOSOPHY. An examination of ■elected ■ocial or political 1y11tem1 and their philo■ophical foundation■. Lay■ ■pecial emph11i1 on 111ch baaic concepta I I natural righta, equality, justice, individual freedom and political authority. (3 en.) PHI 231. PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION. A con■ ideration of the nature of religion, ■peculatiom and argumenta of the nature and existence of God, the po11ibility of religious knowledge, claim■ to religious experience and revelation, the problem of evil, the belief in immortality and the meaningfulneaa of religious language . (3 era.) + PHI 247. SCIBNCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND SOCIETY. Examines the philo■ophical i1111e1 that stem from the impact that evolving science and technology have on people's beliefs, values, and behavior. (3 era.) F S +PHI 266. PHILOSOPHY OF PLAY. Seeb to clarify human play and/or lei111re activitie1. Special attention i ■ given to the problem of con■tructive and destructive form■ of play and their relationship to human freedom and anxiety. (3 en.) +PHI 270. PHILOSOPHY OF MARXISM. An examination of the basic texta of Marx and Engels and the development of Marxist philo10phy. Attempta a critical evaluation in light of contemporary political philo■ophy. (3 en.) 111b ■equent PHI 305. MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY. Begin■ with Neo-Platonism and proceeds with 111ch thinkers as Augustine, Erigena, Amelm, Thomas Aquina1, Roger Bacon, Dun■ Scotu1 and William of Ockham. (3 en.) PHI 310. NINETEENTH CENTURY PHILOSOPHY. A 111rvey of the development of German idealism after Kant and the voluntaristic reaction■ to it. A110 considen British Empirici■m and French Positivism. (3 era.) PHI 312. FORMAL LOGIC II. A continuation of Formal Logic I, with emphasis on the meta-theory of truth-functional and first-order languages. It al10 considers ■elected topics in the philo■ophy of logic and the philo■ophy of mathematics. Prerequisite: PHI 211. (3 era.) PHI 320. IITHICAL THEORY. An examination of the poaaibility and nature of ethical knowledge and the meaning of moral diacour■e. Special consideration is given to contemporary discussions. (3 era.) PHI 325 . PHILOSOPHY OF SCIBNCE. A study of the methods, concepts and presuppositions of scientific inquiry. An attempt is made to understand the historical development of science in the context of various theorie■ of knowledge and reality. (3 era.) PHI 335. AESTHETIC THEORY. An examination of the nature and basis of criticism in the fine arts and literature - the nature and function of art, aesthetic standard ■, the concept of beauty, artistic creativity and the meaning and truth in literature and the art■ . (3 era.) PHI 370. THE PHILOSOPHY OF LAW. A survey of the debate about the concept of law in the history of philo10phy and an examination of the recent revival of the debate in greater detail. Specific topic ■ include the nature of legal rea ■oning, the legal enforcement of morality, the problem of responsibility, and the concept of justice. PHI 405 . EPISTEMOLOGY. An examination of contemporary discuaaion■. (3 en.) ■elected theories of knowledge with special emph11i1 on 294 DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY PHI 410. METAPHYSICS M. An inquiry into the nature of reality and the meaning of existence. (3 en.) PHI 415. PHILOSOPHY OF MIND. An examination of important atAges in the philosophical development of the notion of mind. Diacusaea such contemporary problema aa the relation of mind and body and the nature of conaciouaneu, and analyze• 111ch notiona a ■ will, emotion, action and memory. (3 en.) PHI 420. PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE. An exploration of the relationa between the variou1 dimenaiona of traditional philosophical problema. Examine• theories of meaning, kinda of meaning, and uaea of language•. (3 en.) PHI 426. PHENOMENOLOGY AND EXISTENTIALISM. A study of the historical background and development of twentieth century European philosophy, with particular emphasis on 111ch major philosophen aa Hu1aerl, Heidegger, Sartre and Merleau-Ponty. (3 en.) PHI 431. ANALYTICAL PHILOSOPHY. An exploration of selected philosophical issues (e.g ., knowledge, truth and meaning), utilizing recent work in conceptual and methodological analysia. Though the coune ia usually problem-oriented, a aood deal of the history of recent Anglo-American philosophy is covered. Recommended prerequisites: PHI 206 and PHI 211 . (3 en.) PHI 459. TUI'ORIAL IN PHILOSOPHY. (Variable credita) PHI 470. SPECIAL PROBLEMS IN PHILOSOPHY. A discussion of aome special problem or i11Ue in philoaophy . (3 en.) PHI 490. SEMINAR IN PHILOSOPHY. A diacuuion of either one prominent philosopher or a movement in philosophy. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 295 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE CHEMISTRY (CHE) PHYSICS (PHY) PRE-ENGINEERING PHYSICAL SCIENCE (PBS) NATURAL SCIENCE GENERAL SCIENCE TEACHER CERTIDCATION Associate Professor Clyde W. Clendaniel, chair. Professors Theodore L. Dominick, Gabriel C. Fusco, David L. Johnson, Anthony Lazzaro, David W. Pajerski; Associate Professors Gregg Gould, Michael Hackett, Michael Walt Robin, Robert L. Zoppetti; Instructor Elaine S. Costello The Physical Science Department is a unique department in that it houses both the Chemistry and Physics programs at the University. Both of these programs are located in the New Science building which was renovated in 1984. Along with the building renovation the department acquired state-of-the art chemical instrumentation, and more recently has acquired a number of computers for use in both the physics and chemistry programs. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN CHEMISTRY This program focuses upon studies of the nature and structure of matter and provides a strong foundation in the fundamentals of chemistry, physics and mathematics. Upon successful completion of this program, the graduate is qualified to assume a position as a chemist in either the private or public sector. Program graduates should also be well prepared to undertake graduate studies leading to the M.A., M.S., or Ph.D. in Chemistry. Through consultation with an advisor, students obtain information that will guide them toward a proper selection of electives in General Education. Such a judicious selection of electives based upon the student's objectives may help to promote additional career opportunities upon graduation and also satisfy the admissions standards of various professional and graduate schools. Some graduates have thus chosen to continue their education or to pursue careers in medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, management, college and university teaching, and research. Career opportunities include positions as an analytical chemist, a quality control specialist, an industrial management trainee, a technical writer, a chemical purchasing agent and a sales person with the chemistry industry. The program also provides preprofessional training in medicine, dentistry, and law, as well as preparation for graduate school. 296 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE Curriculum: (A) General Education: Compo■ition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanitie1; 12 credita of Natural Sciences; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free electives. (B) Area of Coacentratioa: General Chemilltry 1-D-m (CHE 101, 102 and 203); Analytical Chemilltry I (CHE 261); Organic Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 331 and 332); Physical Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 451 and 452); 4 credita of Chemilltry elective■; Calculu11-D (MAT 281 and 282); College Physics 1-D (PHY 101 and 202); 18 Olher credits of related electives. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PHYSICS The program leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree in Physics offers the student a variety of choices which may be tailored to one's needs. From the Physics curriculum the student may choose between a diversity of courses in classical and contemporary physics, including such courses in applied physics as Plasma Physics, Quantum Mechanics, Special and General Relativity, and Astrophysics. Advanced laboratories include facilities for studies in photometry, holography, X-ray diffraction, and digital electronics. The flexibility of the program allows the graduate to prepare for many occupations, including admission to an advanced degree program in Physics or Engineering, and technical or research positions with industry or government. The programs also serve as excellent training for entrance to professional schools. Curriculum: (A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); IS credits of free elective ■ including Composition 1-D (ENG IOI, 102). (B) Area of Coacentratioa: College Physic ■ 1-D-m (PHY 101, 202, and 203); Intermediate Mechanics (PHY 221); Intermediate Electricity and Magneti■m (PHY 301); Modem Phy1ic1 I (PHY 331); Calculu■ 1-D-m (MAT 281, 282, and 381); Differential Equations (MAT 406); General Chemilltry 1-D (CHE 101 and 102); 6 credita of Phy■ic, Electives; 19 credits of Advanced Related Elective,. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN CHEMISTRY FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) General Education: IS credits in Humanities, including Composition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 11 credita in Natural Sciences, including Principles ofBiolou (BIO 115), Organic Chemilltry (CHE 322), and an approved Earth Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM IOI); General Psychology (PSY 100); 6 credits of free electives, including a science elective. (B) ProfEllSional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Teats and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 467) or Modem Methods (EDS 455); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461). DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 297 (C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101, 102); Geochemiatry (CHE 255); Analytical Chemistry I (CHE 261); Organic Chemistry I (CHE 331); Organic Chemistry Il (CHE 332); Biochemistry (CHE 441) ; Physical Chemiatry I (CHE 451); Individual Work I (CHE 368); Calculu ■ I (MAT 281); Calculu1 Il (MAT 282); Principles of Biology (BIO 115); College Phy■ic ■ I (PHY 101). Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN PHYSICS FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Compo1ition I - Il (ENG 101, 102); 11 credits in Natural Sciences, including Principles of Biology (BIO 115), General Chemistry (CHE 102), and an Earth Science elective; 9 credits in Social Science; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 1 credit of free elective,. (B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary School, (EDS 465); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Leamen (EDU 340); Teaching of Science in Secondary School■ (EDS 467) or Modem Method■ (EDS 455); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461) . (C) Professional Speciali.r.ation: College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Intermediate Mechanics (PHY 221); Intermediate Electricity and Magnetism (PHY 301); Modem Physics (PHY 331); Mathematical Methods of Physics I (PHY 341); Physics Seminar (PHY 495); Calculus 1-Il-m (MAT 281, 282 and 381); General Chemistry I (CHE 101). Pennsylvania certification requires a satisfactory score on the NTE. COOPERATIVE ENGINEERING PROGRAM California University of Pennsylvania participates in cooperative liberal arts engineering programs with both the Pennsylvania State University and the University of Pittsburgh. The student undertakes a three-year curriculum at California University of Pennsylvania concentrating on studies in liberal arts and pre-engineering courses in natural sciences. Upon successful completion of that curriculum and the recommendation of faculty, the student spends two years at the Pennsylvania State .University or the University of Pittsburgh, at which time the student will complete the engineering course requirements as specified by the institution. Some advantages of such cooperative programs include the following: 1. For students who have yet to choose between engineering or another discipline as a field endeavor, the programs provide initial studies in both the arts and sciences at California University of Pennsylvania, during which time they may ascertain whether their abilities and interests lie in the field of engineering or another discipline. 298 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 2. The program permits qualified students to receive both a liberal and technical education at relatively low cost. Curriculum: (A) General Education: 9 credita in Humanities including Perspective, in Philosophy (PHI 100); 6 credita in Natural Sciences; 12 credita in Social Sciences, including Elementa of Economic, (ECO 100); Composition 1-Il (ENG 101 and 102); Oral Communication (COM 101). (B) Area or Concentration: Technical Drawing I (IND 110); Engineering Seminar; General Chemistry 1-Il (CHE 101 and 102); College Physics 1-Il-m (PHY 101, 202 and 203); Calculus 1-Il-ill-IV (MAT 281, 282, 381 and 382); Linear Algebra I (MAT 341); Computer Science I (CSC 121); Differential Equationa (MAT 406); 16 credita of Engineering Discipline Courses. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN NATURAL SCIENCE This extremely flexible program provides the student with an opportunity to structure a course of study that encompasses the broad areas of science and mathematics. Students enrolling in this program are expected to work carefully and regulai:ly with their academic advisor to develop a program that meets their individual needs. Course distribution sheets outlining the curricular structure of the program are available in both the Physical Science Department office and the office of the College of Science and Technology. GENERAL SCIENCE CERTIFICATION The College of Education and Human Services offers a program for a student who has already received certification but seeks also to he qualified as a teacher of General Science in secondary schools. In order to fulfill the requirements of this program the student must complete twenty-seven semester hours. The courses required are: General Zoology (BIO 120); General Botany (BIO 125); General Chemistry 1-11 (CHE 101 and 102); General Physics 1-11 (PHY 121 and 122); Geology (EAS 150); Introduction to Oceanography (EAS 163). Further information may he obtained at the Office of Education and Human Services in the Keystone Education Building. CHEMISI'RY COURSES (CHE) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. +CHE 100. INTRODUCTION TO CHEMISTRY. A preparatory course emphasizing the mathematical and reaaoning 11cill1 needed to be aucceaaful in General Chemistry. There are no prerequisites, and the course aati1fie1 requirementa in the Natural Science area for non-science majors. Thia course is not an elective for Chemillry majors. Three clan hours each week. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 299 +CHE 101. GENERAL CHEMISTRY I. An introductory COUl'IIC for majon and non-majon. Topic, covered include atomic structure, bonding, stoichiometry, chemical reactions (including redox reactions) , solutions, and the liquid state. Three claaa houra and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.) +CHE 102. GENERAL CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of General Chemistry I. The gaaeou ■ state, solutions, thermodynamics, kinetics, acids and bases, gaseoua and ionic equilibria. Prerequisite: CHE 101. Three claaa and three laboratory houn each week. (4 era.) CHE 150. CHEMISTRY FOR THE HEALTH PROFESSIONS . The basic principles of general chemistry, orianic chemistry, and biochemistry needed for the health sciences (specifically nursing chemistry). Three lecture hours and three laboratory houra each week. (4 era.) F CHE 203. GENERAL CHEMISTRY m. A continuation of General Chemistry Il. Descriptive chemistry of metala and nonmetal,, electrochcmistry, nuclear chemistry, solid state molecular orbitals, coordination chemistry . Laboratory :' Equilibrium and qualitative chemistry of the elements. Three class and three laboratory hours each week. Prerequisite: CHE 102. (4 en.) S CHE 255 . GEOCHEMISTRY. Basic chemical principles employed in the solution of some geologic problems. Geologic dating, sedimentary geochemistry, chemical weathering, colloids and structural aspects of clay minerals and soila. Three claaa houn each week. (3 en.) F CHE 261. ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to quantitative analytical techniques and procedure including volumetric, gravimetric, and spectroscopic methods. Prerequisites: CHE 101 and 102. Three lecture houra and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) F CHE 262. INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS I. An introduction to various instrumental and separation techniques including 111ch topics II chromatography, clcctrochcmistry, and atomic absorption spectroscopy . Prerequisite: CHE 261. Three lecture hours and three laboratory hours each week. (4 en.) S CHE 331 . ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. An introduction to the basic principles which govern the reactions of carbon compound,. Particular emphasis is placed on the structure and atereochemistry of organic molecules, acid-base theory, reaction mechanisms, and an introduction to the reactions and synthesis of alkanes, alkenes, alkynes, alicyclica, alkyl halides and aromatic compounds. Three hours lecture and three hours laboratory . Prerequisites: CHE 101 and 102. (4 en.) F CHE 332. ORGANIC CHEMISTRY Il. A continuation of the study of organic compounds. The student is introduced to the important functional groups present in such families as alcohols, ethers, carboxylic acids, caters, amides, aldehyde,, kctonca, amines, phenols, aryl halides, and reactions, and synthetic interconversion of these compound,. Three houra lecture and three houn laboratory. Prerequisites: CHE 331 . (4 en.) S CHE 340. ORGANIC SPECTROSCOPIC INTERPRJITATION. Introductory theory and interpretation of infrared spectroscopy, ultraviolet spectroscopy, nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, and maas spectrometry. Prerequisites: CHE 101 and CHE 331. Three claas hours each week. (3 en.) S CHE 345 . ~EDICINAL CHEMISTRY . A comprehensive survey of the major classes of organic pharmaceutical agents, with particular cmpha ■is on the structurea, synthesis and pharmacological properties, aa well a ■ the structure-activity relationships of the important classes of drugs used in medicine. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S CHE 350. COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN CHEMISTRY. This coul'IIC engages the student in activitiea which focus on computer solution of chemical problcma. Both software coding and usage, as well aa interfacing of microcomputera to chemical instruments, are covered. Prerequisites: CHE 101; CHE 102 and BASIC Programmiq Language. Three claaa hours each week. (3 en.) S 300 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE CHE 368 . INDIVIDUAL WORK I. An opportunity for atudenta apecializing in chemistry to organiu, inveltiaate, and report on a apecific problem of their own selection. (1 er.) CHE 410. CHEMISTRY INTERNSHIP. The atudent i■ provided an opportunity to work: in an indu■trial or nonprofit research laboratory . This practical training is intended to ■upplement the academic pro,ram. Prerequi■ite: Junior or Senior ■tanding and permission of the department. (Variable: 1-12 en.) CHE 411. BIOCHEMISTRY I. A comprehensive ■urvey of the properties, reactions, and atructure of amino acids, proteins, enzyme ■, carbohydrates, fats and lipids, and nucleic acid■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F CHE 412. BIOCHEMISTRY ll. A comprehensive ■urvey of metabolic proceue■, including carbohydrate metaboli■m, the Kreb ■ cycle, photo■ynthe ■i ■, fatty acid and protein metaboli■m, aa well aa protein bio■ynthe■i■, fatty acid bio■ynthe■i■ and DNA replication. Prerequi■ite: CHE 411. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) S CHE 421. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. Modem treatment of principles of inorganic chemistry, empha■izing chemical bonding and stereochemistry, with emphaaia on periodic properties, acida and baaea, and nonaqueous solvents. Coordination compounds; nomenclature stereochemistry, and kinetics of coordination coq,ounda of the abort and long transition metals. Three clau houn each weelt. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (3 en.) F CHE 422. ADV ANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A atudy of the chemistry of metal coordination compounds. The hiatorical development of coordination theory i■ presented 11 well I I the modem concepta of valence bond, cry■tal field and molecular orbital theories I I they apply to coordination compound■ • Prerequisite: CHE 425 . ORGANIC PREPARATIONS. An advanced coune in synthetic organic chemiatry with emphaaia on the moat recently discovered method■ of synthe■ia of organic compound■. Prerequisites: CHE 331 and CHE 332. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F CHE 426 . QUALU ATIVE ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. A laboratory coune in which the identifications of organic compound, are determined by experimental analyaia. A basic aim i■ to develop in the atudent a more active acquaintance with the concepts and facts introduced in elementary organic chemistry. Thia implies recoune to chemical reactions rather than reliance on inatrumental analysis. Nevertheleu, the use of infrared and nuclear ma,netic resonance inatrumentation will also form an integral part of the coune. Prerequiaites: CHE 331 and 332. (3 era.) S CHE 433. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY I. A detailed atudy of the mechanism■ of the main typea of organic chemical reactions, and the methods - both kinetic and non-kinetic - used to atudy reaction mechaniama. Prerequisite■: CHE 331 , CHE 332, CHE 451 and CHE 452. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 era.) F CHE 434. ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY ll. A continuation of the material presented in Advanced Organic Chemiatry I (CHE 433) with particular emphasis on photochemistry, pericyclic and aromatic rearrangementa, and the chemistry of radicals and carbenes. Prerequisites: CHE 433. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) S CHE 445 . MATHEMATICS FOR CHEMISTS. Mathematical technique■ including differential and inte,ral calculua, ordinary and partial differential equations, ,raphical method■, approximation methods, complex numben, Fourier aerie, expansions, determinants coordinate aystema, vector analy1i1, vector and matrix alaebra with emphasis on application to chemical systema. Prerequisite■: Differential and Inte,ral Calculua. Three clau houn each weelt. (3 en.) F S CHE 4S 1. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I. Properties of gaaea, kinetic-molecular theory, molecularenergiea, clauical and ■tatiltical development of thennodynamics, with applications to thermochemistry and chemical equilibria. Prerequiaitea: CHE 261 and mathematics throuah Integral Calculua. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houra each weelt. (4 en.) F DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 301 CHE 452. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY Il. Kinetic ■ of chemical reaction,, properties of liquids, phase equilibria, aolutiona, thermodynamics, properties of elcctrolytc1 in solution; and elcctrochemistry. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: CHE 451. (4 en.) S CHE 495. CHEMISTRY SEMINAR. Student■ may choose a particular topic in chemistry and, under the supervision of a faculty member, prepare and present a seminar report on it. The topics arc to be on material not covered in the undergraduate councs, or may be extcnaiona of ■ome particular aspect of chemistry included in less detail in an undergraduate counc. (I er.) F S PHYSICS COURSES (PHY) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. + PHY I 01 . COLLEGE PHYSICS I. Introductory Phy1ics. Vecton, mechanics, energy, momentum, conservation principles and oacillatory motion. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Corequisite: MAT 281 (4 en.) S PHY 121. GENERAL PHYSICS I. An introductory non-calculus counc dealing with mechanic, and heat. A functional knowledge of algebra and elementary trigonometry is a1111med. Three clas■ houn and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.) PHY 122. GENERAL PHYSICS Il. An introductory non-calculu ■ counc addreBSing the areas of ■ound, light and electricity and magnetism. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 121. (4 en.) +PHY 202. COLLEGE PHYSICS Il. A continuation of College Physics 101. Heat and thermodynamics, and acoustics, electricity, magnetism and AC circuits. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prerequisite: PHY 101 Corequisite: MAT 282. (4 en.) F hydrostatic■, wave■ PHY 203 . COLLEGE PHYSICS m. A continuation of College Physics 202. Maxwell'• equation and electromagnetic waves, light, atomic and nuclear physics, and special relativity. Some time is al■o spent reviewing material from College Physic ■ 101 and 202 . Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite: PHY 202. Corequisite: MAT 381. (4 en.) S PHY 221. INTERMEDIATE MECHANICS. Vector calculus, Newtonian kinematics, and dynamic, of many particle 1y1tcma with emph11i1 on integral relation,, motion in a central potential, acattcring theory, 1y1tcma with conatraints, variational principles in mechanics, ■mall oscillationa, wave equation, and special relativity. Three class houn and three laboratory houn each week. Prcrequi1ite: PHY 202. Corequisite : MAT 381. (4 en.) S PHY 235. GEOPHYSICS . Primary empha■ ia i■ on geophysical prospecting for oil. Particularly focuse1 on the following prospecting methods: seismic refraction and reflection, gravitational, magnetic, and electrical. Three class houn each week. (3 en.) F S PHY 30 I . INTERMEDIATE ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM. Electric and magnetic field■ and energy, the effects of matter on them, circuits, Maxwell'• equations, electromagnetic waves. Vector calculu■ and differential equation, uacd. Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Recommended: PHY 221, MAT 382 and MAT 341. Three lecture houn and three laboratory houn each week. (4 en.) F PHY 331. MODERN PHYSICS I. Relativistic kinematics and dynamic■, particle and wave aspects of radiation and particles, the atructure of the hydrogen atom, and the many-electron atom■ . Quantum mechanic, introduced for 1be tint time here . Prerequisites: PHY 203 and MAT 381 . Three class houn each week. (3 en.) F DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICAL SCIENCE 302 PHY 341. MATHEMATICAL METHODS OF PHYSICS I. Vector calculus, Fourier series and integrals, ordinary differential equations, partial differential equation, general series representations of functions and special functions . Prerequi1ite1: PHY 203 and MAT 381. Three clau houra each week:. (3 en.) S PHY 451 . ADV ANCED LABORATORY I. Experiment& selected from topics discul&ed in Modem Physic ■ I. The lecture time ia uaed to discu11 error analyaia, curve fitting, and points of interest to the laboratory reports. Prerequi■ite : 12 Phy1ic1 credits. One clau hour each week: and three laboratory houn each week:. (1 er.) F S PHY 495 . PHYSICS SEMINAR. An introduction to literature, history, teaching, and research methods in the Junior standing and at least 19 houra of physic, (including College Phy1ic1 1-11) (1 er.) F S phy■ical science■• Prerequisite■: PHYSICAL SCIENCE COURSES (PHS) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. + PHS 117. BASIC PHYSICAL SCIENCE. An elementary, non-laboratory approach to the physical world. Topics may be selected jointly by the students and the instructor. Three class hours each week:. (3 crs.) PHS 125. OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY. This course is designed to present an opportunity to acquire a general understanding of the Night-Time sky as it relates to Astronomy as well as experiences and opportunities for observation. Two class hours each week:. (2 crs.) PHS 135. CHEMISTRY OF MATERIALS. An introduction to the science of chemistry, in which the principles are lhown in a nonmathematical manner. Thia course attempts to lhow how chemistry is an integral part of our lives and how it has both solved and created many problems in a modem technological society . Three claaa hours each week:. (3 en.) S PHS 145 . ASTRONOMY. A presentation of methods of investigation and results of astronomical discoveries. Survey of facts and important astronomical theories. Solar system, what is a star, multiple star systems, variable atan and stellar evolution will be discuaaed. Instruments of the astronomer - telescopes, spectroscopes, etc. will be uaed . Three cla11 hours each week:. (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 303 DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOWGY GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Associate Professor Stephen Levendos, chair. Professors Gail Ditkoff, Ira London, Richard Scott, M. Eugene Wilson; Associate Professors Kirk John, Dennis C. Sweeney, Sylvia Williams; Assistant Professor Elizabeth Mason; Instructor Sammy Lonich. PURPOSE Psychology is one of the social science disciplines engaged in the systematic study of human behavior. Psychology focuses on the study and explanation of patterns of individual behavior. The latter rests not only on mental processes but on social and physiological ones. The field of psychology seeks to understand individual behavior as an end in itself as well as use that information to assist persons to live more productive and fulfilling lives. PROGRAMS The department offers two majors: General Psychology and Industrial/ Organizational Psychology. Industrial/Organizational Psychology is the research and applied specialty which is concerned with the impact of organizational dynamics upon individual decisionmaking. It is the major for students interested in human resource management careers. Within the General Psychology major there are options for students interested in counseling and mental health care careers, educational, child, or developmental psychology. The department makes available to its majors a publication entitled "The Survival Manual," which states policies, procedures, course requirements, and other information of interest to majors. AWARDS The David W. Hambacher Memorial Fund Scholarship Award is given annually. Applicants must be Psychology majors with a 3.5 &rade point average. Information about the award is available in the departmental office. An Outstanding Senior Award is given annually at the spring Psychology Club banquet. HONOR AND PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES Qualified majors can join Psi Chi (i'X), the national honor society. The department also sponsors a Psychology Club which hosts guest speakers, organizes trips to conferences of professional interest, and provides career and employment information. DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 304 CAREERS With a bachelor's degree in Psychology, a graduate can secure a variety of entry-level positions at mental health centers and clinics. A Bachelor of Psychology in the lndustrial/Organiz.ational area can find employment in personnel resource management. Students will be prepared to do personnel recruitment, training, testing, and supervision. Most career opportunities in psychology, however, require an advanced degree. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN PSYCHOLOGY Curriculum: (A) Geaen1 Educatioo: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credita of Natural Science■; 12 credita of Social Science; 18 credita of free electives. (B)AreaofConceatratioa: Required: General P1ychology (PSY 100); P■ycholojical Statistic ■ (PSY 225); P■ychology of Leaming (PSY 235); Hilltory and Sy■tema of P■ychology (PSY 345); Experimental P1ychology (PSY 360). Oae of the following: Child P■ychology (PSY 205) or Adoleacent P■ychology (PSY 206) or Developmental Psycholou (PSY 207). Two of the followina: Educational Paycholou (PSY 208) or lnduatrial Psychology (PSY 209) or Social P■ycholou (PSY 211) or Psycholojical Testing (PSY 340). One of the following: P■ychology of Penonality (PSY 305) or Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400). Nine to 24 credita of additional Psychology courae ■. Seventeen to 35 credita in related elective,, including courae, in at lea■t three of the followina area■ : Anthropology, Biology, Chemi■try, Education, Gerontology, Political Science, Philosophy, Physic ■, Social Work, Sociology, and Special Education. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN INDUSTRIAL/ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY Curricalum: (A) Geaenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science■; 12 credita of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: General Psychology (PSY 100); Advanced Industrial Psycholou (PSY 428); Psychology of Gender Roles (PSY 311); Social Psychology (PSY 211); Psychological Statistics (PSY 225); lndu■trial Psychology (PSY 209); Psychology of Leaming (PSY 235); Psychology of Testing (PSY 340); Hilltory and Sy■tema (PSY 345); Interviewing Skills (PSY 370); Principle■ of Management (MOT 201); Organizational Behavior (MOT 301); Human Reaource Management (MOT 352); Compensation Management (MOT 353); Labor Relations (MOT 362). 8 credits of psychology electives. 15 credita of Re■tricted Elective■ from Communication Studie1, Buaineu, Accounting, E.conomics, lndu ■trial Technology Education, Computer Auiated Workshop ■, and Englilh. DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 305 PSYCHOLOGY COURSES (PSY) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. + PSY 100. GENERAL PSYCHOLOGY. A general introduction to the scientific study of the principle■ of behavior with emphaai■ on auch topic■ 11 method■ of re ■earch, development of the individual, learning, motivation, emotiona, cOjllitive proceue1, senaation, perception, telling, peraonality, behavior diaorders, and individual difference■. Experimental re ■earch as well as practical application is stres■ed . (3 era.) F S +PSY 205. CHil.D PSYCHOLOGY. Age-related change■ in ■ocial, cognitive, emotional, and phyaical Development from prenatal ■tage■ through later childhood i1 included . Socialization of the child i■ examined. Prerequi■ite : PSY 100. (3 era.) F S characteri■tic■. + PSY 206. ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY. Factors that influence the growth and development of adolescent■ • on the relationahip among physiological, psychological and ■ociological factors and theoretical system■ u■ed to deacribe, explain, predict, and work with adolescents. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S Emphaai■ +PSY 207. DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. The patterna of phyaical, mental, development throu1hout the life ■pan . Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 era.) F S ■ocial and emotional + PSY 208. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY. The learning proceu, with emphasis on learning in school settinga, i1 examined. The application of current theories and research findings to school settings is considered. The application of current theorie1 and re■earch finding, to cl11sroom ■ituations ia stressed. Thia course examine■ coJnitive development, intelligence, motivation, discipline, behavioral objective■, and mea■urement and evaluation. Prerequi■ite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S PSY 209. INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The application of paychological principle■ of behavior to people and work conditiona. An examination of buaine■a and induatrial activities and the role of the psycholoJill plays in auch activitie■• A ltrolli emphuis on the practical and everyday problem■ that confront people in the world of work. Prerequi■ite : PSY 100 (3 era.) F S PSY 211. SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY. The interaction between the individual and ■ocial groups within a cultural context: the individual in a ■ocial role, ■ocial 1roup1, and ■ocial institutions. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S PSY 215 . PSYCHOLOGY OF EXCEPI'IONAL CHILDREN . The psychological problem■ of children who have hearilli, apeech, mental and behavioral deficits, as well as culturally disadvantaged and gifted children are explored. A major objective ia to gain a functional understanding of these problems and of modem intervention techniques. The student i ■ given the opportunity to gain firsthand experience with exceptional children in an observation of a apecial cla■a in the public schools. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 205 for Psychology Majors; PSY 100 and 205 or 207 for non-P1ycholo1y Majors. (3 era.) F S PSY 222. PSYCHOLOGY OF STRESS MANAGEMENT. Source of streu, effects of streu, mediation of streu will be examined with the focua being on practical application. (3 era.) and method, of copilli with ltreaa PSY 225. PSYCHOLOGICAL STATISTICS. This course provides the student with a working knowledge of 1tati■tical procedures and their application to p■ychological meaaurement and re■earch in the ■ocial and behavioral acience■• A variety of 1tati■tical method■, includilli meaaure1 of central tendency, variability, and correlation coefficient■, are presented. Hypothesia te■tilli and prediction are alao included. The student use, the computer to analyze data and interpret■ the reault■ generated. The application of ltati ■tical procedure, to re■earch que■tiona in the field of behavioral and ■ocial acience i■ emph11ized. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 era.) F S 306 DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY PSY 235. PSYCHOLOGY OF LEARNING. The nature and conditiona of learning, the type, of learning and the experimental procedures uaed in the atudy of learning problema. The variou1 interpretationa of the proceu are examined and evaluated. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) F PSY 305. PSYCHOLOGY OF PERSONALITY. The euential facton that result in creating individual differences of human behavior. Current theories uaed to explain the development and lltnlcture of penonality are preaented. The characteriatic1 of the normal and the maladjulted penonality are identified, with apecial concern for developmental patterna. Prerequi1ite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S PSY 310. MENTAL HEALTH/PSYCHOLOGY OF ADJUSTMENT. Problema of penonality and mechani1m1 of adjuatment, including a atudy of the oriJin and re10lution of conflicts, and the role of emotion in the patterna of behavior. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en) F PSY 311. PSYCHOLOGY OF GENDER ROLES . How gender roles develop , the facton that sultain theae roles, and how gender role■ influence the daily livea of men and women. Sex difference, are viewed from hillorical, biological, psychological, aociological, and anthropologicalpenpective1. Prerequisite PSY 100 (3 en.) S PSY 340. PSYCHOLOGICAL TESTING. The nature and function of measurement in p1ychology with concentration on teat conlltnlction problema and procedure■ and an examination of 10me typical teats in the fields of intelligence, penonality, aptitude■, abilities, and intereats. Prerequisites: PSY 100 and 225 . (3 en.) F S PSY 345 . HISTORY AND SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY. A detailed look at the evolution of paychological thought. The early problema and method• of paychology are examined in 10me detail aa are the varioua achoola of paychological thought. Emphasis ia directed toward the effect of the diacoveriea and thinking of the time• on the courae of the development of psychology aa a acience. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.) S PSY 350. PRINCIPLES OF BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION. A conaideration of the application of the principle■ of contemporary behaviorism to the problem of behavior modification in educational and clinical aettinga. Major emphasis ia placed on the remediation of problema of academic, emotional, and aocial adjustment in the claaaroom context. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 (3 en.) PSY 360. EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY. Empha1iu1 the design of reaearch strategies for evaluating hypotheaea about behavior and the quantitative analy1i1 of reaearch results. Theae principle• of reaearch are preaented in the context of, and are applied to the content of experimental inquiry such as aenaation and perception, conditioning and learning, memory, thinking and problem-10lving, aocial influence proceues, and paychological telling. Prerequisite: PSY 225 (3 en.) F PSY 365. METHODS OF RESEARCH. Handa-on laboratory experience• in the application of experimental procedure• to lhe acientific wdy of behavior. ·Students apply a variety of melhods to reaearch problema in a number of content areaa and are exposed to the reaearch literature in theae area ■ . A110 included i1 instruction in the preparation of a formal reaearch report. Prerequisite: PSY 225 and 360 (3 en.) S PSY 370. INTERVIEWING SKILLS . For aenior students who will soon be aeeking employment in an organizational aetting, providing knowledge and practical experience in aeveral different and specific type• of interview,, especially the aelection interview for employment, the career planning interview, exit interview and the performance evaluation interview. Prerequi1ite: Junior or aenior 1tandi11J. (3 en.) S PSY 375 . PSYCHOPATHOLOGICAL DISORDERS OF CHILDHOOD. Thi■ courae explore• lhe varioua p1ychopathological di10rden of childhood. The particular manife1tation in children will be diacuued for each di10rder, with emphasis on the quantitative nature of clinical symptom characteriatica as illustrated by caae atudie1. The differentiation between 1imilar diagnoae1 and ■ymptoma, H well a1 the relationahipa between each di10rder and other emotional familial problema, will be diacuued. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100 and 205 . PSY 400. ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY . A survey of behavioral pathology - including paychoaea, neuroaes, character di10rden including drug addiction and p1ychophysiological di10rder - together with a general DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 307 conaiderationof etiology, treatment, and pro,no1i1. Prerequisite: PSY 100 and 12 credit■ in P1ychology. (3 en.) FS PSY 410. CLINICAL CHll.D PSYCHOLOGY. Thi■ coune ia a comprehenaive introduction to the field of Clinical Child PaycholoJY. It will explore the major concept■, reaearch findinaa, and profeuional iuuea influencina the practice of Clinical Child PaycholoJY. Prerequi1ite1: PSY 100, 205 and 375. (3 en.) PSY 411. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY I. Deai,ned to aid ltUdentl to think creatively about the kinda of information and data to be obtained in ltlldying individual■. Seeb to point out some of the problerna and procedure, which conatitute types of clinical procedure■ • Not de■i,ned to train the ltUdent to become a clinical p ■ychologiat, but rather an introduction to the applied area■ of clinical p■ychology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 305, 340, 400, and Senior standing. (3 en.) F PSY 412. CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY II. The projective technique, u■ed to a■ae ■s individual personality. The conatruction and method■ of interpretation of theae technique,. An introduction to some of the tools of the clinical p ■ychologiat and counaelor. Prerequisite■: PSY 350, 340, 400, and Senior standing. (3 en.) S PSY 428. ADVANCED INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. A survey of aeveral important i■sue■ not considered in PSY 209, including organizational dynamic,, paychological evaluationa, employee right■ law■ , wage and aalary p1ychologie1, and the undentanding of employee motivationa. Prerequisite: PSY 209 (3 en.) S PSY 430. PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY. The relationahips between bodily procesaes and behavior. The relationahip between p■ychological phenomena and the phy■iological functioning of the organism. Senaation and perception, reflexive behavior, motivation, emotional behavior, and critical functioning. Some laboratory experience i, included. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en.) F PSY 452. CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY I. Special study in caae study methods, paychological testing, and psychopathology . Prerequi1ite1: PSY 340, 400, 411 , and permission of the chairperson of the department. (3 en.) F PSY 453 . CLINICAL PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY II. A continuation of Clinical Practicum I, but with ,reater empha1i1 on psychotherapy, uae of clinical instrument■, dia,noatic caae1, and visit■ to hospital■ and clinics. Prerequisites: PSY 452 and permiaaion of the chairperson of the department. (3 en.) S PSY 455 . PSYCHOLOGY OF SOCIAL CONTROL. Analyaes of fictionalized descriptiona of attempt■ to control human behavior from the viewpoint of contemporary behavioral science. Such analyaes reveal the degree to which the procedure■ and outcome■ described in fictional account■ are conaistent with what is known or aasumed to be true about behavior and it■ cauae1. Fictionalized account■ of such technique, as physical puni■hmcntl, threats, indoctrination and brainwashing, drug■ , and hypno1i1 applied to both individuals and group ■ are conaidered. The moral and ethical i■sue, involved in ■ocial control venue individual freedom are examined in the light of• rapidly developing behavioral technology and an increaaing real-life incidence of miaapplicationa and abuaes. Prerequisite: PSY 100. (3 en.) S PSY 469. PSYCHOLOGY INTERNSHIPS. Student■ will be placed with profeaaional psychological agenciea off campu1. They will integrate, under supervi1ion, what they have academically been studying - the dutie1 and re■ponaibilitie1 aui,ned to them by practicing p ■ychologiat■ in the field . Eligibility requirement■ and procedures for application are available at the departmental office. 01A credit 3-16) 308 DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING (PSN) BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING The Public School Nursing Program provides an academic background and the field experience required to function effectively as a nurse in a school setting from kindergarten through grade twelve. The program is specifically designed to prepare students for a dual role as school nurse and health educator. Applicants to the program must have completed an approved nursing program and be registered nurses. Upon completion of the program, the Bachelor of Science in Education degree with a major in Public School Nursing will be awarded. The Office of Placement and Career Services at California University of Pennsylvania is active in assisting graduates seeking employment as public school nurses. The State Department of Education mandates that school nurses be hired according to a student ratio of 1: 1,500. Therefore, it is expected that the need for highly qualified school nurses will continue. Additionally, the demand for competent school nurses can be expected to increase because of the expanding number of handicapped students mainstreamed into the regular classroom. Increased emphasis on health education and health counseling should have a significant effect on the demand. The general objectives of the Public School Nursing Program are to enable the student to: Acquire the knowledge, attitudes, and skills essential for professional school nursing; Apply theories and concepts pertaining to the role of a school nurse during a supervised practicum; Comprehend the nature of an educational setting and serve as an active participant in curriculum design, faculty affairs, and professional activities; Function as an integral part of the school health team; Foster an appreciation of the existing community services for children and youth; Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations; Appreciate the professional organizations of the school nurse that focus on continuing education and maintaining high-quality standards of performance. The Public School Nursing Program is designed for applicants who have completed an approved nursing program and are registered nurses. California University of Pennsylvania grants up to a total of 68 credits for completion of the R.N. from a hospital program. Students receiving the R.N. from an associate degree program will have their credits evaluated according to the credits taken at the college granting the degree. The University will transfer no more than 90 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior College. PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING PROGRAM 309 Usually, at least sixty additional credits are required in order to earn a Bachelor of Science degree in Education and certification as a Public School Nurse. The applicant must possess current licensure as a professional registered nurse in Pennsylvania. The applicant must give evidence of one year's supervised experience as a graduate nurse. Thirty credits must be earned at California University of Pennsylvania in fulfillment of the residency requirements. Curriculum: Public School Nuning (PSN 306); Public Health Nuning I & ll (PSN 301 & 302); Nutrition and Community Health (PSN 305); Prevention and Control of Communicable Diaeaac (PSN 405); Foundation, of Education (EDF 100); Educational P■ychology (PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Guidance (EDS 420); one Sociology counc; Introduction to Exceptionality (ESP SOI); 9 credits in Humanitie1; 9 credit■ in Social Science,; 8 credits of free elective,. A minimum of fifteen houn of practicum in the public school i1 required in addition to the regular classroom work. PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING COURSES (PSN) PSN 301. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING I. A lltlldy of the American health care delivery ayatcm in terma of an hiatorical, philosophical, and sociological pcnpcctive. Arcaa of emphasis include current trends in health care, utilization of health acrvice■, resource,, government participation in health promotion, rcaearch, and iMOvationa in the health field. (3 en.) PSN 302. PUBLIC HEALTH NURSING ll. The need for health education as it relates to the taxonomy of lifestyle; the concept of wellne11 i■ examined. Contemporary iaauea and trend■ arc analyzed in depth in terma of promotion of penonal and community health, current legislation, and the role of the achoo! nunc as a health educator. (3 en.) PSN 305. NUTRITION AND COMMUNITY HEALTH. A review of the basic concept■ and principles in nutrition; the aaac11ment of nutritional need, at different stages of growth and development. Focuaca upon cultural difference, in food habit■, aclection of food, importance of diet in health and diaeaac, quackery, budgeting, special nutrition problema of the achoo! age child, nutrition education, and role of the achoo! nunc . (3 en.) PSN 306. PUBLIC SCHOOL NURSING. A comprchenaive lltlldy of the _physical, aocial, and emotional development of children with aaac11ment procedures for identification of deviation, from nonnal. Basic principles and concept■ relating to the organization of the school health program, school health services, health inatruction, and healthful school living. Practicum in a public achoo! setting provides opportunity for application of concept■ developed in theory . Prerequisite: Student■ must aubmit evidence of current CPR certification prior to entering this practicum. (4 en.) PSN 405. PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASE. A conceptual approach to the lltlldy of communicable diaeaacs with recognition of significant historical events, as well as identification of the social, psychological and economic facton involved. Explores current control meaaurcs, roles of administrative agencies, methods of epidemiological investigation, and the role of the achoo! nunc. (3 en.) 310 R. N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM R. N. ANESTIIETIST PROGRAM BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION FOR C.R.N.A. This program for Certified Registered Nurse Anesthetists is designed for persons who have completed an approved anesthetist program and are currently licensed CRNA's. The program provides the academic background and field experience necessary for the student to develop skill in functioning more effectively in an instructional and administrative capacity. The CRNA Program is offered by the College of Education and Human Services. The College of Education and Human Services meets all standards of accrediting agencies. California University of Pennsylvania is accredited by the Middle States Association of Colleges and Universities. The College of Education and Human Services has national accreditation from the National Association of Colleges of Teacher Education. Studies have indicated a strong demand for nurse anesthetists. Certainly, unlimited opportunities are available to the Certified Nurse Anesthetist who has additional preparation in the area of instruction. The general objectives of the program are to enable the student to: Develop the competencies required for effective media utili:zation practice; Develop competencies in group dynamics and public relations; Develop competencies relating to the administrative aspects of anesthesia as a result of planned field experience; Design a conceptual framework for curriculum planning; Develop a theory of learning which lends support and evidence of applicability to an effective instructional process; Understand the principles underlying the construction of tests and the statistical measures of evaluation. California University of Pennsylvania will grant up to a total of 68 credits for completion of the R.N. and an additional 26 credits for completion of the anesthetist program. All R. N. 's graduating from an Associate Degree Program must have their transcripts evaluated to determine the number of credits to be granted. The University will transfer no more than 75 credits per student from any two-year Community or Junior College. To complete the requirements for a Bachelor of Science in Education, students must complete 34 additional credits of approved undergraduate work. Thirty credits must be earned at California University of Pennsylvania. R.N.ANESTHETISTPROGRAM 311 Curriculum: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Learning Re10Urce1 and Instructional Technology (EDF 308); Introduction to Guidance (EDS 420); The Secondary School Curriculum (EDS 456); Introduction to Instruction (EDS 425); Educational Teata and Measurements (EDS 430); Administration and Field Experience (EDS 411); 12 credilll in Humanities and Social Sciences. REGISTERED NURSE ANESTHETIST COURSES (RNA) RNA 411 . ADMINISTRATION AND FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR NURSE ANESTHETIST. The principles and practice of administration of nurse anaesthetiat and policies concerning planning, human relations, and personnel as well aa the administration of business affairs, legal liability and organizational problems. In addition to the regular classroom work, a 15-hour field experience affords studenlll opportunities for practical experiences in administrative functions through observation and participation in the programs of nearby hospitals. (4 crs.) 312 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE ANTHROPOLOGY (ANT) POLITICAL SCIENCE (POS) -GENERAL - INTERNATIONAL STUDIES: POLITICAL SCIENCE -PRE-LAW -PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION SOCIAL SCIENCE (SOS) - SOCIAL SCIENCE AREA MAJOR SOCIOLOGY (SOC) Associate Professor James Wood, chair. Professors Rollin M. Barber, Ronald L. Michael, William F. Schweiker; Associate Professors William D. Hepner; Assistant Professors Joseph C. Heim, John P. Nass, Willie H. Pigg. PURPOSE Common to the degree programs offered by the Department of Social Science is the study of people interacting with one another. Their common approach is scientific; that is, they study patterns of human behavior by objective, measurable methodologies. Anthropology is the most comprehensive since there is no aspect of human development or behavior that it does not study, although it traditionally has focused on pre-industrial societies. Anthropology includes such diverse subject areas as ethnology, medical and psychological anthropology, archaeology, and human evolution. Political Science is the most prescribed of the above disciplines. It limits its interests to the political aspects of human behavior, both national and international, including the study of power and public organizations. For this reason Pre-law and Public Administration are two areas closely related to Political Science. Sociology, which is closely aligned with anthropology, is less comprehensive. It concentrates on the nature, structure and interactional processes in large and small groups, institutions and societies, usually found in modem industrial societies. It can focus, for example, on political institutions and behavior, but it usually does this in relation to other institutions, such as the economic, educational, familial and religious ones. The Social Science Area major is general and interdisciplinary in nature. It presents an overview and the interrelationship of all the social science disciplines, not simply those stated above. For more information about this program, please inquire at the departmental office. Courses in this area contribute to a historical perspective within the social sciences. . DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE 313 PROGRAMS Anthropology, Social Science and Sociology are majors without optional specializations. Political Science is a major with three options: General Political Science, Public Administration, and Pre-law. The Public Administration option is an interdisciplinary field of study with courses offered through the programs in Business and Economics and Urban Affairs, as well as Political Science. Under the International Studies Program, Political Science advises the International Studies: Political Science option. This course of study also is interdisciplinary in its coursework. Finally, the department, in conjunction with the College of Education and Human Services, provides a teacher certification program for those interested in teaching the social sciences in secondary schools. Field experiences are available in archaeology and political science. An archaeology field school runs during the summer school session. Students participate in the excavation of an archaeological site whereby they apply what was learned in class to an actual dig. An internship in Political Science is a form of field experience. Students are placed in governmental agencies and the offices of public administrators and elected officials where they can observe and practice what they have learned in the classroom. HONOR SOCIETIES Anthropology majors are eligible for membership in the Gamma Chapter of Lambda Alpha (AA), the national honor society. Requirements are the completion of twelve credits of Anthropology course work and a 3.0 grade point average or higher in the major, as well as an overall 2. 7 GPA. Students in the social sciences are eligible for membership in Pi Gamma Mu (IlrM), the social science honor society. Students must have completed sixty-four university credits, including a minimum of twenty credits in social science course work, and have a 3.0 or higher grade point average. AWARDS The Joseph Lynn Marino Memorial Award is presented annually. For consideration an applicant must have a minimum grade point average of 3.5, be enrolled in the College of Liberal Arts and have successfully completed two courses in Anthropology. Persons interested in applying can secure further information from the departmental office. The Edward McNall Bums Scholarship Award is given annually to any individual majoring in Anthropology, Sociology, Political Science, Economics, History, or Urban Affairs. See the departmental office for further information. CAREERS Students with an undergraduate degree can secure work in entry level social service and personnel resource areas. Career opportunities, however, increase with the attainment of 314 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE graduate course work and degrees. The social sciences as a whole prepare students to enter careers in law, public administration, the ministry, personnel resource management, education, social service professions and law enforcement. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN ANTHROPOLOGY Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 crcdita of Humanitiea; 12 crcdita of Natural Science,; 12 crcdita of Social Sciences; 18 credita of free elective,. (B) Area of Concentration: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT I 00); History of Anthropology (ANT 420); World Elhnology (ANT 255); Field School (ANT 100) or Prehistoric American Indiana (ANT 355); 21 credita of elective, in Anthropology; Principles of Sociology; plua 32 credita of related elective,. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credita in Natural Science■; 12 credita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration (68 credits): Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National Government (POS 105); Seminar in American Politic, (POS 450). One course each in American Politics, Political Theory, International Relationa/Comparative Politic,, and Public Administration/Public Policy. 15 credita of Political Science elcctivea. At leall nine crcdita mull be at the 300 level or above. Related couraca (32 crcdita) : Hiatory of the United State, to 1877 (HIS 101); Hiatory of the United State, aince 1877 (HIS 102); European Life and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society 1ince 1815 (HIS 122); 20 crcdita in related couraca, 15 crcdita of which mull be at the 200 level or above. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN POLITICAL SCIENCE PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION TRACK Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 12 credits in Humanities; 12 credits in Natural Science,; 12 crcdita in Social Sciences; 18 crcdita of free elective,. (B) Area of Concentration (68 crcdita): Political Science: Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National Government (POS 105); Introduction to Public Adminiatration (POS 220); Introduction to Public Policy (POS 300); Seminar in American Politics (POS 450). Manaaement: Introduction to Microeconomic, (ECO 201); Introduction to Macroeconomics (ECO 202); State and Local Finance (ECO 307); Financial Management of Non-Profit Organizations (FIN 307); Principles of Management (MOT 201); Marketing for Non-Profit Organizations (M1CT 341). Urban Studies: Survey of Urban Affairs (XUA 101). Ilectiv~: 18 credita from approved lill. With the rccommendationofthe Political Science faculty members, studenta may earn up to 6 hours credit through an internship program. Related Courses: Computer Science (specific course selected with advisor's approval); Stati ■tics (MAT 215); Group Diacuaaion Management (COM 102); Oral Communication: Management (COM 250); 2 credits of related electives selected with advisor's approval. DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE 315 BACHELOR OF ARTS IN SOCIOLOGY Curriculum: (A) General Education. Composition 1-D (ENG 101, 102); 12 credita of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Science■ ; 12 credit& of Social Sciences; 18 credit& of free elective■ • (B) Area of Concentration: Principle, of Sociology (SOC 100); Re■carch Method■ (SOC 200); History of Social Thought (SOC 375); 27 credita of major electives. Related Courses: Introduction to Anthropoloay (ANT 100); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American National Government (POS 105); Statistic, (MAT 215); Elements of Economics (ECO 100); General Psychology (PSY 100); Social P■ychology (PSY 211); 3 credita in Philo■ophy; 8 credit& of electives. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: CERTIFICATION IN SOCIAL STUDIES FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS Curriculum: (A) Geaeral Education: 15 credita in Humanities, including Composition I - D (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits in Natural Sciences; 9 credita in Social Sciences; 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities; Oral Communication (COM 101); General Psychology (PSY 100); 9 credita of free electives. (B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Problems of Secondary Education (EDS 300); Educational Testa and Measurements in Secondary Schools (EDS 430); Developmental Reading in Secondary Schools (EDS 465); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Mainstreaming Exceptional Learners (EDU 340); Teaching of Social Science in Secondary Schools (EDS 445) or Modem Methods (EDS 455); Student Teaching and School Law (EDS 461). (C) Professional Specialization: Introduction to Anthropology (ANT 100) and one additional Anthropology course; Introduction to Geography (GEO 100) md one additional Geography course; History of the United States to 1877 (HIS 101); History of the United State■ 1ince 1877 (HIS 102); Elemcnta of Economics (ECO 100); Introductory Microeconomics (ECO 201) or Introductory Macroeconomics (ECO 202); Introduction to Political Science (POS 100); American Government (POS 105); Educational Psychology (PSY 11 O); Adolescent Psychology (PSY 206); Principles of Sociology (SOC 100) and one additional Sociology course. (1) For concentralion in Anthropology: Origins of Man (ANT 285). 9 credita from the following : Culture Block (choose 3 or 6 credita): Primitive Institutions (ANT 210); Enculturation (ANT 235); Peasant and Folk Culture (ANT 240); Culture Change and Culture Shock (ANT 250); World Ethnology (ANT 255); Southwest Ethnology (ANT 270); Indians of North American (ANT 280). Archaeology Block (choose 3 or 6 credits): Archaeology Field School I (ANT 101 - maximum of 3 credita); Old World Prehistory (ANT 200); classical Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology (ANT 260); Archaeology & Culture History (ANT 287); Prehistoric American Indians (ANT 355). (2) For concentralion in Economics: Intermediate Microeconomics (ECO 301); Intermediate Macroeconomics (ECO 302); 6 credita from Economics course■ 200 level or above. (3) For concentralion in Geography: Physical Geography (EAS 160); Human Geography (GEO 105); Economic Geography (GEO 200); Cartography (EAS 171 or Map and Aerial Photography (EAS 272). (4) For concentration in History : European Life and Society to 1815 (HIS 121); European Life and Society since 1815 (HIS 122); Seminar in United State■ History (HlS 495); any History elective. (5) For concentralion in Political Science: 6 credit& from the following : Municipal Government (POS 205); Political Parties (POS 218); Introduction to Public Administration (POS 220); Constitutional Law (POS 250); Civil Liberties (POS 215). also 6 credits from the following : Comparative Politics (POS 215); Development of Political Thought (POS 225); International Relations (POS 236); Politics and Government in the Soviet Union (POS 280); foreign Policy: A Comparative Approach (POS 320). (6) For concentralion in Psychology: Child Psychology (PSY 205); Mental Hygiene (PSY 310); Social Psychology (PSY 211); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400) . 316 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE (1) For concentralion in Sociology: Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); Minority Group Relationa (SOW 218); The Family (SOC 220); Url>an Sociology (SOC 235); Social Inatitutiona (SOC 240). Students must also achieve a satisfactory score on the NTE in order to acquire Pennsylvania certification. ANTHROPOLOGY COURSES (ANT) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. + ANT 100. INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY. An introduction to biological anlhropoloJY (primatoloJY, hominid evolution, variation in modem man); archaeoloJY (methods, evidence, of the evolution and diffusion of culture); anthropological linguiatica; and cultural anthropology (methods of participant observation, comparative data from non-Welllem 10eietiea, divenity and unity of culture). F, S + ANT 101. ARCHAEOLOGY FIELD SCHOOL. An introduction to archaeological procedure, by participation in the excavation of a ailc. Students will be involved in all phaaca of an archaeological excavation, from initial preparation of the site for excavation through the proceaaing of artifacts at the campu1 archaeological laboratory. (3-6 credits) ANT 200. OLD WORLD PREHISTORY. A middle-level aurvey of the main archaeological focal pointa of the Old World, requiring a basic understanding of archaeological concepts, goala and technique,. (3 en.) ANT 205. CULTURAL RESOURCE MANAGF.MENT: HISTORICAL PRESF.RV ATION. The counc acquainta the student with the need for preservation of cultural rcaource1 (hiatoric preservation), the legialation aupportin, auch work, and the way the work is performed. Studenta learn what i1 meant by hiatoric preservation and cultural rcaource atudy, what types of queations prcacrvationiata mull acck anawen to, how significant rcaourcea (hiatoric and archaeological) arc identified, how it i■ detennincd whether a rcaource i■ considered significant, how to do architectural deacriptions of historic atructurca, and how to complete the National Regilller of Hiatoric Place, nomination forms. Part of the course involve ■ on-site atudy of rcaourcea. Prcrcquiaite: ANT 100. (3 en.) ANT 210. PRIMrrIVE INSTITUTIONS . Analysia and compariaon of the 10eial, political, and religious institutions of pre-literate and pre-industrial peoplea. (3 en.) ANT 220. AZTECS, MAYAS, AND INCAS. An introduction to and aurvey of the ethnoloJY and pre-conquest archaeology of the advanced American Indian culturca ofMeao-Amcrica and the Andean Culture area. Inquiry into the problems of cultural precocity. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.) ANT 225 . EIGHTEENTH AND NINETEENTH CENTURY FOLK CRAFTS AND TRADmONS . Studenta learn how to place American folk crafts and tnditions in cultural perspective by learning how to identify auch crafts and tnditions, detennining how they have evolved through time, and identifying the role auch practice, held in the American family. They learn the rudimenti of a number of the crafts and tnditions by observing them bein, performed and by doing them. They learn how to gather material folk cultural data by collcctin, data on a craft or folk tradition in Southwestern Pennaylvania. (3 en.) ANT 226. HISTORIC SITES ARCHAEOLOGY. The course acquaints atudents with techniques, philoaophy, work, and aims of that branch of history and anthropology that atudiea the American pall from a cultural-archaeological point of view. The course includes study of military and community restorations baaed on hiatorical archaeoloay, DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE 317 auch as Colonial Williamsburi, Plimouth Plantation, Independence Square, Fort Michilimackinac, Fort Ligonier, and Fort Neceuity. Some laboratory and field experience• included. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.) ANT 231 . MEDICAL ANTHROPOLOGY . An introductory coune that emphasize, the contributiona from biological anthropoloJY, archaeology, and cultural anthropoloJY to the ltudy of human aickneu and health. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.) ANT 235 . ENCULTURATION. A croaH:ultural examination of the univeraal human problem of transforming a neonate into a functioning adult in a particular culture. (3 en.) ANT 250. CULTURE CHANGE AND CULTURE SHOCK. Conditiona and facton which stimulate or retard cultural change are conaidered with reference to specific historical, ethnological and aociological data and theories . Emphasize, the impact of Weatem technoloiy upon non-We■tem culture■ while alao treatina of the •primitivization• of the Welllem world. Prerequisite: ANT 100. (3 en.) ANT 255. WORLD ETHNOLOGY. An advanced coune in cultural anthropology, in which comparative data from text and films about non-Welllem culture, are uaed to reveal cultural differences and similarities and the nature of the ethnographic enterpriae. (3 en.) ANT 260. CLASSICAL ARCHAEOLOGY. The ba1ic concept of Western man as revealed in the archaeological record from Crete through the Hellenistic period. (3 en.) ANT 270. SOUTHWEST ETHNOLOGY. An examination of the conatantly changing cultural life styles that have existed in the Southwest Cultural Area of North American. (3 en.) ANT 280. INDIANS OF NORTH AMERICA. Social anthropology and cultural ecology of American Indian culture,. (3 en.) ANT 281. SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA. The cultural anthropology of aelected African groups, past and contemporary. (3 en.) ANT 285 . ORIGINS OF MAN . Contemporary biological anthropology, emphasizing the evolution of human being■ part of the evolution of the primates. (3 en.) H ANT 287. ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURE HISTORY . A comprehensive survey of archaeology: history, theory and techniques. (3 en.) ANT 329. ANTHROPOLOGY INTERNSHIP. Application of theoretical knowledge to practical aituationa, to meet career and program need ■ by meana of auperviaion and training, to enhance a student'• profe11ional viability. (VA credit) ANT 355 . PREHISTORIC AMERICAN INDIANS . The archaeology and reconstnicted culture of Indiana of the ealtem United State,. (3 en.) ANT 385 . PRIMATE SOCIETIES AND BEHAVIOR. Advanced 1tudy of the non-human primates, including clauification to the generic level. Prerequisite: ANT 285 or permi11ion of the instnictor. (3 en.) ANT 420. HISTORY OF ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.) ANT 495 . SEMINAR IN ANTHROPOLOGY. (3 en.) 318 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE POLITICAL SCIENCE COURSES (POS) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. +POS 100. INTRODUCTION TO POLrrICAL SCIENCE. Thi ■ course is designed to introduce lllldenu to key proceue1, and acton in the political world. It is intended to be a general, not detailed, examination, and attempU to encourage undentandina, reflection and critical thinking. (3 en.) F,S idea■, in■titutiona, + POS IOS. AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Thia ia an introductory course in American government, focusing on the major inatitutions and processe■ in the American political system. Topics discussed in the course include separation of powen, checks and balances, civil liberties, political parties, the Congress, the President, the Supreme Court, federalism, and policy-making proceuea. (3 en.) F, S POS 205. MUNICIPAL GOVERNMENT. The organizational forms of municipalitie1, the proceu of decisionmaking and implementation, and proposed 10lutiona to problems of an urlian society. (3 en.) POS 210. POLrrICS OF WESTERN EUROPE. A comparative analysi1 of the of the nation■ of Great Britain, France, and Well Germany, and how these ■y■tem. Prerequisite■ : POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.) S in■titutiona, proceue■, nation■ and policiea relate to the United Statea POS 218. POLmCAL PARTIES, CAMPAIGNS, AND ELECTIONS . The organization and operations of political parties in the United States. Careful attention is given to the methods used by parties in nominating candidates in conducting campaign■ and to the significance of pressure groups, public opinion, and the electorate in our political life. Prerequisite: POS 105. (3 en.) POS 219. THE MASS MEDIA AND AMERICAN POLITICS. The interaction of politics and the mau media within American society. Topic ■ include media effecu on political socialization, techniques of opinion manipulation, propaganda, pre11 responsibility, public opinion polling, and government control of the media. Special attention ia devoted to the use of television as an instrument of communication. Prerequisites: POS 105. (3 en.) POS 220. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION. Primarily an introduction to the study of American public adminiatration, this course seeks to achieve several broad objectives. Firat, it attempta to convey an understanding of the significant role played by administration in present-day American government and of the implication■ of that role for a democratic society. It ha ■ the further purpose of providing insight into the specific relationahipa between administration and the broad political environment from which it arises and in which it operates. Finally, and mainly, the course offen opportunity for consideration of those more specialized and technical facton, ■uch as public organization, public penonnel, budgeting, and executive leadership, that are involved in the formulation and administration of public policy. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.) POS 222. THE ADMINISTRATION OF CRIMINAL JUSTICE IN THE UNITED STATES. The operations of the criminal ju■tice ay■tem in the United States. Topics include crime in American, the rule of law, the role of the police, the function of the prosecuting and defense attorney, criminal courts and trial processes, sentencing, corrections, incarceration, probation and parole. Prerequisite: POS !OS. (3 en.) POS 228. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: CLASSICAL AND MEDIEVAL. The basic ideas, value,, and methods of the profound political thinken and philosophers from Claaaical Greece, Rome, and the Chri■tian Church. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.) DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE 319 POS 229. DEVELOPMENT OF POLmCAL THOUGHT: MODF.RN. A sequel to the questions and approaches niacd in POS 228. The major political philoaophen from the Renaissance to the beginning of the twentieth century. Prerequisites: POS JOO and POS 105. (3 en.) POS 235. STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. A treatment of the organiution, powen, functions, and problem of It.ate and local governmental units . Emphaais ia placed on the growing complexity of relationship, among the various levels of government II a remit of technological developments and the growth of metropolitan areas. (3 en.) POS 236. INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS. A pnctical and theoretical introduction to a atudy of syatcmatic patterns in international relations. Includes analysis of rules, instruments, proceucs, decisionmaking facton, and conflict resolution. (3 en.) POS 237. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS. An analysis and evaluation of the United Nations and other international organiutions, and of aome of the theoretical concepts and pnctical problems involved. Prerequisite: POS 100 or pcnniuion of instructor. (3 en.) POS 270. POLmCS OF THE DEVELOPING AREAS . A compantive analy1i1 of the problems faced by recently independent nations of the Third World and the idea ■ and institutions they have developed in an attempt to addrcu the difficulties of political, economic, and aocial change. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 en.) POS 280. POLmcs IN THE SOVIET UNION. Basic components of Soviet politics: background history, Marxist ideology, and the historical development of Ruaaian political institutions and pncticea from the Revolution to the prcacnt. Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F POS 300. INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC POLICY. Primarily in acminar faahion . Students prcacnt and discuss major idea■ from aasigned readings . Formal lectures arc alao scheduled when needed to prcacnt basic ideas and information. Prerequisite: Any Political Science course or penniuion of the instructor. (3 era.) POS 306. CONGRESS . An intensive examination of the legislative problems and procedure■ of Congress. Students arc introduced to auch topic, as the rcprcacntational functions of Congrcu, the role of parties and leaden in Congrcu, the importance of the committee system, and the forces affecting congrcuional decision-making. Prerequisites: POS 105 or pennisaion of the instructor. (3 era.) POS 307. REVOLUTION . A compantive study of the phenomenon of revolution, encompassing the cauacs, eventa, and principal acton in thoac periods that culminate in the outbreak of violent political change. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105 . (3 era.) F POS 310. THE PRESIDENCY. Intensive study of the American presidency, focusing on personality, organiution of the office, uac and miauac of power, and policy making. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniuion of instructor. (3 en.) POS 314. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: GOVERNMENTAL POWERS . A study of the major provisions of the American Constitution and the growth of American constitutional law baaed on analysis and discussion of leading judicial decisions. Prerequisite ■ : POS 105 or pennisaion of instructor. (3 era.) POS 315. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW: CIVIL LIBERTIES . A atudy of the development and meaning of the rights and liberties guannteed to persona under the Constitution of the United States. Special emphasis ia placed on the antccedenta of and the adoption of the Bill of Righta and a description of the court structure through which the meaning of civil liberties is determined in specific situations. Prerequisites: POS 105 or penniaaion of the instructor. (3 en.) 320 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE POS 316. JUDICIAL PROCESS. Intensive ltlldy of the judicial proceu in the United States and the relationship between the judicial ayatem and the larger American social ayatem. Prerequisite: POS 105 or permiuion of the imtructor. (3 en.) POS 320. U. S. FOREIGN POLICY: Policy objectives, patterns of decision-making, and U .S. foreign policy actions. The roles of interest groups, public opinion, Congress, and other external influences in U. S. foreign policy are alao examined. Prerequisite: POS 105 . (3 en.) POS 322. POLIDCS OF THE MIDDLE EAST. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proceues, and politic• of Middle Eastern governments and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region. Prerequiaite: POS 100. (3 en.) POS 323. POLIDCS OF LATIN AMERICA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, proce1se1, and politic, of Latin American countries and how these have been shaped by the international relations of the region . Prerequisite: POS 100. (3 crs.) POS 325. POLIDCS OF ASIA. A comparative analysis of the institutions, processes,and policies of China, Japan, and India and how these nations relate to the system in the United States. Prerequisites: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 en.) POS 327. CONTEMPORARY POLIDCAL THOUGHT. A general survey of the major political ideas and thinken of the twentieth century, drawing connections between these ideas and contemporary developments in philosophy, paychology, economics, and sociology . Prerequisite,: POS 100 and POS 105. (3 crs.) POS 329 . INTERNSHIP IN POLIDCAL SCIENCE. Practical field experience to supplement academic wor~, developing profesaional competencies in research and communication skills. POS 330. AMERICAN POLIDCAL IDEAS. An advanced course in political theory: the major political ideas and controversiea that are associated with the development of American political thought. Prerequisites : Any Political Science course or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) POS 335 . ADMINISTRATIVE LAW. The legal structure and political environment within federal administrative agencies in the United States that formulate public policy . Emphasis is given to the growth of the administrative state within the United States, the necessity for the delegation of legislative authority to administrative agencies and the need for judicial control of the bureaucracy . Prerequisites: POS 100, POS 105 or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) POS 450. SEMINAR IN AMERICAN POLITICS . Thia seminar, required of all Political Science majors, is deaigned to provide intensive examination of a specific and narrowly focused area in the field of American politics. The course ia research-oriented and consists of individually prepared contributions by all participants, which are discussed and critically appraised by all members of the class. Prerequisites: Students taking this course must be Seniors majoring in Political Science. (3 en.) S SOCIOLOGY COURSES (SOC) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. +SOC 100. PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY. Examines interaction among human beings. Emphasis on natural and social heritage, the meaning and functions of culture, and the origin, function, and characteristics of social DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE 321 institution,, with inquiry into the nature and genesis of 10Cial pathology. (3 en.) F, S +SOC 110. ETHNIC, RACIAL AND SEXUAL MINORITIES. Disadvantaged, not just numerical, minoritiea are studied in tenna of their demoaraphic and ecoloaical characteristic,. Contemporary iuues are studied in historical context. (3 en.) + SOC 125 . MEN, WOMEN AND WORK. Through readings, audio-visual material■ , panel, and informal student reporta, clasa memben investigate the role• of men and women in the existing economic structure, the reason, for the■e role, and the development of trends and changes in the economic area . Diacu11ion-cenlered. (3 en.) +SOC 155. CHARISMATIC LEADERS. The characteristic, of chariamatic leaden and the methodology u■ed to study thia phenomenon. Diacu11ion-centered cla1■e1 . (3 en.) + SOC 165. MODERN FREEDOM MOVEMENTS. The study of 10Cial movements in American IOCiety. Basic focus is upon 10Cial change brought about by 10Cial movements. (3 en.) SOC 175 . CONTEMPORARY WOMEN'S MOVEMENT. An investigation of themes, philosophies, and activists in the current women's movement. (3 en.) SOC 200. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIOLOGY. Fundamental concepta of systematic, empirical 10Cial research; the logical and procedural rulea for scientific problem solving and the method■ and techniques for implementing the■e rules in actual research. (3 en.) SOC 205 . CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL PROBLEMS . Contrasting theoretical approaches provide alternative approachea to undentanding and analyzing 10Cial problems. (3 en.) F,S SOC 210. SOCIAL STRATIFICATION. The student is made more aware of the class, status, and power inequities of our stratified 10Ciety. Claa■, cute, and estate ayatems are compared. Prcrequiaite: SOC 110. (3 en.) SOC 215 . SOCIOLOGY OF THE WORKPLACE. Basic patterns of work behavior in American culture. Some emphaai■ ia placed upon career path, and the impact of technological change upon work. (3 en.) SOC 220. THE FAMILY. The institution of the family within the context of American culture. Prerequisite: SIC 100. (3 en.) SOC 225. SOCIOLOGY OF AGING . Theoretical issues of aging, research, and the methodological tradition, involved in the study of the human aging proce11. Special emphasis is placed upon the interaction of pertinent biological and sociological variables related to the proces■es of work, retirement, leisure, institutionalization, and death . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOC 240. URBAN SOCIOLOGY. Focu■ea on the relationahip between the demographics of urbanization and the 10Cial-psychological characteristic, of urbanism. Dcterminiat, compositional, and sub-cultural theories are compared. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOC 260. CRIME. Types of criminal behavior, the epidemiology of crime in the United States, the social baais of law, and major etiological forces responsible for lawbreaking. General systems theory is the basic theoretical penpective u■ed in this cour■e . Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOC 285 . SOCIOLOGY OF SUBSTANCE USE AND ABUSE. The 10Ciology of substance uae and abuae, as well as the approaches for treatment. Special emphasis is given to alcohol and the more commonly abused drugs (e.g., nicotine, marijuana, and cocaine). The course focuacs on the social procesacs that influence substance abuac and the 10Cietal coats and con,equencea. Prerequisite: SOC 100 or permission of the instructor. (3 en.) 322 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL SCIENCE SOC 305 . SYMBOLIC INTERACTIONISM. A 10eiological contribution to 10eial psychology, aymbolic interactioniam, ia viewed as complementing paychological contribution■ to the field, particularly to the Gestalt, p ■ychoanalytical , and neo-behavioral theorie,. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOC 370. SOCIOLOGICAL THEORY BUILDING . Some of the logical baaca for determining the relative merits of alternative a1&Umptiona concerning matten of fact or 10eial policy. Prerequisite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOC 375 . HISTORY OF SOCIAL THOUGHT. Major theoretical penpectivea are compared in terms of their aaaumptiona and utility in explaining social behavior; emphasis is on conflict theory, aymbolic interactioniam, and structure functionaliam. Intended primarily for Sociology and Social Work: majon in the sixth semester or higher. (3 en.) SOC 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIOLOGY. (3 en.) SOCIAL SCIENCE COURSES (SOS) Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. +SOS 100. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL SCIENCE. An introduction to the broad field of human behavioral studies, with concern for the changing and contrasting patterns evidenced therein. (3 era.) F, S +SOS I 01 . WORLD CULTURE. A survey of the evolution of human culture: governmental, economic, 10eial, religious, intellectual, and aesthetic activities from ancient times to the beginning of the modem world . (3 era.) +SOS 107. UNIVERSAL CULTURE PROBLEMS . Problems of technological change in ancient Egypt and in modem China; problems of social organization in industrial western nations and in the U .S.S.R.; problems of allocation of authority in ancient Greece and in Nazi Germany; and problems of religion in medieval Europe and the Middle Eaat today . (3 era.) SOS 110. QUALITY OF LIFE. (3 era .) SOS 155 . CULTURAL VIEWS OF WOMEN. Women in five different cultures. Special attention ia given to the work: ofMafiaret Mead . (3 era.) DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK 323 DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK SOCIAL WORK Associate Professor Edward Brown, chair. Professors Beverly G. Willison. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SOCIAL WORK The Social Work program is designed to (1) provide the student with generalist skills for direct entry into social work practice through a variety of agencies and human services settings at a beginning professional level; (2) to prepare the student for entrance to graduate programs of social work or related professional schools; and (3) to contribute to a general college education by helping students to understand social welfare needs, services, and issues relevant to a modem industrial democracy. Graduates of the program are eligible for full membership in the National Association of Social Workers and also for advanced standing if they choose to continue their social work education at an accredited graduate social work program. The program provides career opportunities in such areas as personal services (casework counseling, family development, therapy, etc.); protection services (corrections, public health,judicial system, etc.); maintenance services (child care, institutions, mental health, physical health, public welfare, etc.); and information/advising services (education, hot lines, crisis centers, consulting, etc.). For graduation student must maintain at least a 2.0 QPA average in the major. Curriculum: (A) General Education: Compoaition 1-D (ENG 101-102); 12 credits in Humanitie■ ; 12 credits in Natural Science,; 12 credits in Social Science; 18 credits of free elective■ . (B) Ana of Concentration: Introduction to Social Work (SOW 150); Social Work Interviewing (SOW 301); Social Work Method■ I (SOW 255); Social Work Method ■ D (SOW 346); Social Work Methods ill (SOW 347); Social Work Reacarch Method• (SOW 450); Human Growth and Behavior I (SOW 215); Human Growth and Behavior (SOW 216); Minority Group Relation• (SOW 208); Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400); Human Sexuality and Society (SOW 475); Social Change (SOW 370); Delivery of Servic e ■ (SOW 365); Social Welfare as a Social lnatitution (SOW 290); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Juvenile Delinquency (SOW 265); Contemporary Social Problems (SOW 205); Advanced Clinical Methoda in Social Work (SOW 352); Welfare Practicum I ((SOW 309); Welfare Practicum D (SOW 319); and Seminar in Social Work (SOW 495) . DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK 324 SOCIAL WORK COURSES (SOW) Introductory courses are indicated by a plus ( + ). +SOW 150. INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK. Introduce, the social, political, and economic dimensions of poverty and welfare service, of the United State,. Complementa other beginning counea in the aocial science, by intepting this knowledge in a fashion which aida in the comprehension of welfare service, while eatabliahing a ba1i1 for movement towards higher level counea. (3 en.) SOW 208. MINORITY GROUP RELATIONS. Analysis of the historical, economic and political relations of relations of American religiou1, ethnic, and racial minorities in tenna of aocial change and aocial atructure . f aocial change and aocial atructure. Special attention given to Puerto Rican, Chicano and Indian subculture,. Source1 of prejudice and discrimination, aocial processea including conflict segregation, a1similation, accommodation, and cooperation. Prerequi1ite: SOC 100. (3 en.) SOW 215 . HUMAN GROWfH AND BEHAVIOR Il. Prerequisite: SOW 215 (3 en.) A continuation of Human Growth and Behavior I. SOW 255 . SOCIAL WORK METHODS I. Designed for people who work: with other people. Auume1 that although the task:I that a human service worker may be a1k:ed to perform vary from agency to agency, there are, nevertheleu, certain attitudes, knowledge, and skills that are basic to all such work:. It further auume1 that H these attitudes, knowledge, and skills become more acutely developed, self-awareness will develop with subsequent development of a profeBSionalized self. Prerequisites: SOW 150 and SOW 100. (3 en.) SOW 265 . JUVENILE DELINQUENCY. The causes, prevention, and treatment of deviancy among youth. Emphasi, on concept of the non-adversary role of the juvenile court system and the urgent need for change. An exploration of the aociological theories for deviancy and the changing attitude toward treatment and treatment facilities. Prerequisite: PSY 100 (3 en.) SOW 270. CHILD WELFARE. The services which are peculiar to programs in a Child Welfare agency. Casework: with children, natural parenta and substitute parenta is discussed. Separation theories are presented and related to the undentanding of this experience for children. Some historical, as well aa, current practice in homemaker service, day care, foster care, (foster home inatitutiona, group home■, and residential treatment centen) and adoption will be presented. Case material will be used to focus the discussion of the caseworker'• role in these service,. Prerequisite: SOW 150 (3 en.) SOW 290. SOCIAL WELFARE AS A SOCIAL INSTITUTION. Historical approach to aocial welfare aa an inatitution in order to focus on the proceu of inatitutionaliution in which behavior that ia anticipated and unpredictable evolve■ into that which is regular, patterned and recurring. The historical approach alao enable■ atudenta to make aome correlation between values, beliefs and norms emanating from aocial welfare in aixteenth, eighteenth and nineteenth century Europe and concepta, attitude, and philoaophies auociated with aocial welfare in twentieth century America. Prerequisite,: PSY 100 and SOW 150. (3 en.) SOW 301. SOCIAL WORK INTERVIEW. Thia coune ia designed to familiarize atudenta with the euential componenta of interviewing skills in collecting information, asseBSing client problems and interviewing in the proceu of ameliorating individual or small group disfunctioning. This coune emphasizes the importance of the interview H a major means of communication with penona in need of help. (3 en.) SOW 309. WELFARE PRACTICUM I. An opportunity to learn and apply theoretical knowledge to practice through involvement in a aocial welfare agency setting or inatitution. The student is required to apend 16 clock: houn per week: in the field. Prerequisite: Permiuion of the inatructor. (6 en.) DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK 325 SOW 319. WELFARE PRACTICUM Il. Continuation of Welfare Practicum I. The student continue, to work: under a trained aocial worker, prefenbly in the aame setting aa the previous placement. The student ia expected to demomtnte a considenble amount of clauroom knowledge and ahould ahow conviction about the value of aocial work: in improving the client'• psycho-aocial functioning . The student ia required to spend 16 clock houn per week in the field . Prerequisite: SOW 309 and permiaaion of the inatnlctor. (6 en.) SOW 346. SOCIAL WORK METHODS Il: GROUP WORK. Hiatory of aocial group work:, the aocial the aocial work: valuea, the aaaessment of goals and objectives in the group, the principles of aocial group work:, and the various model ■ of group thenpy. Prerequi1ite1: SOW 150 and SOW 255. (3 en.) SOW 347. SOCIAL WORK METHODS m: COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION. A comprehensive review and descriptive hiatory of the evolution of community organiution methodologies with emphasis upon their generic aocial work: qualities. Concern is devoted to both the character of the proceaa and task:■ aaaociated therewith, aa well aa the role community organiution plays in aocial reform in the United States. The course material relates to collective aocial behavior, aocial institutions, the politics of aocial services delivery, community problem-solving, and aocial planning . Prerequisite: SOW 346. (3 en.) SOW 352. ADVANCED CLINICAL METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. Builds upon the elements of casework: pncticea introduced in Social Work Method• I. The proceaa of paychoaocial study, diagnosia, and treatment more adequately developed. Abundant use of aaaigned tests and case material, particularly those concerned with aocial welfare . Pedagogic use of role playing ia also ayatematically developed . Generic concepts ltreaaed, but specific setting topically considered. For example, relaxation training, biofeedback:, hypnoaia and projective telling for the aocial worker are typically considered . Prerequisite: SOW 255 (3 en.) SOW 365. DELIVERY OF SERVICES. Deals with macro practice techniques. Theoretical underpinnings are examined from a aocial systems prospective. The primary value ltreaaed is that the student must become sensitive to consumers and empathetic to their concerns is prerequisite to becoming a professional aocial worker. It is felt that such a goal cannot be attained simply by talking about consumers, but that consumerism must be experienced. Therefore, the student is required during the semeater to become involved in a consumer concern, which will be agreed upon by the student and the instructor, and write a paper describing their experience and how it relates to the course. Prerequisite: SOW 346. SOW 370. SOCIAL CHANGE. A continuation of SOW 365, Delivery of Services, and also emphasis on macro, genenlist techniques, drawn from aocial syatem theory . It is also stressed that aocietal representative• will effect needed change• only if the human service worker initiates change efforts in a faahion that provides adequate feedback: to decision makers. It is assumed that decision makers effect needed aocietal change• satisfied. Prerequisitea: SOW 346, 365. (3 en.) SOW 450. RESEARCH METHODS IN SOCIAL WORK. The aocial work: scientific endeavor is presented as a special type of problem-solving and analytical thinking activity. Its thrust is to teach the undergnduate student to become a critical consumer of research reports and to prepare the student to begin to understand the critical importance of research aa a profeaaional endeavor. SOW 475 . HUMAN SEXUALITY. Thia course provides a basic overview of the human sexual syatem. Social sexual value■ and attitudes will be examined along with information on physiological and psychological sexual dysfunctioning. A special emphasis will be on the skills and knowledge needed to provide information to clienta aa well as thenpeutic interventions. (3 en.) SOW 495 . SEMINAR IN SOCIAL WORK. (variable) 326 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION SPECIAL EDUCATION MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED: PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION Professor Wallace D. Hodge, chair. Professors Robert A. Bauman, Peter J. Belch, Robert F. Dickie, Jay R. Powell; Associate Professors Albert Dascenzo, Regis Laz.or, Ben A. Mule, Angela K. Zondos; Assistant Professor Paul L. Lancaster The Department of Special Education, accredited by the American Association of Colleges of Teacher Education, offers several programs leading to the baccalaureate degree with a major in Special Education. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped curriculum leads to a Pennsylvania Instructional I Certification. This certificate entitles the graduate to teach children manifesting the following handicaps: mental retardation, learning disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage. The Mentally/Physically Handicapped curriculum with Physical Education and Recreation emphasis also leads to Pennsylvania certification. In addition graduates of this program can provide adaptive physical education instruction for each of the handicap categories. Majors in either Early Childhood or Elementary education may dual major in Special Education. Graduates of these programs receive certification in both Early Childhood/Elementary and Mentally/Physically Handicapped. Pennsylvania teacher certification requires a satisfactory grade on the NIE. The field of special education, both within the state of Pennsylvania and nationally, continues to grow, providing excellent professional career opportunities. Recent federal legislation has mandated new services for handicapped youngsters and provided increased funding. The impetus should be toward an increased growth rate in special education programs, particularly for children with severe and/or profound handicaps. The area of physical education and recreation for the handicapped is also presently characterized by expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing the needs of handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to participate in recreational activities. Graduates of the Mentally/Physically Handicapped program are qualified to assume several professional roles including: special education classroom teacher, resource room teacher, homebound instruction teacher, hospital teacher, itinerant physical education teacher for the handicapped, recreational director in an institutional or agency setting, recreational program specialist for governmental agencies involving parks and playgrounds as well as a variety of roles in sheltered workshops and community-living arrangements for handicapped adults. DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 327 The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid. It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain higher levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial instruction in some areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of children while continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in Early Childhood or Special Education will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children and the other staff members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles, including regular early childhood classroom teacher (nurserythird grade), special education classroom teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade), and resource room teacher. The Special Education Department also offers two programs for majors preparing to work with the handicapped in various community settings. Students may complete a twoyear associate degree or a four-year baccalaureate degree in the Community Services Personnel Training Program. This program emphasizes providing service to the handicapped in other than school settings. Training stresses a comprehensive non-categorical approach to understanding handicapping conditions. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED EDUCATION This program, leading to the Pennsylvania Instructional Level I certification, entitles the graduate to teach children with the following handicaps: Mental retardation, learning disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage. The general objectives of the program are: To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development; To demonstrate an ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies appropriate to the needs of exceptional children; To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe appropriate educational experiences; To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in promoting learning among handicapped students; To demonstrate competency to initiate instructional programs that facilitate appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically handicapped. 328 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION Curriculam: (A) Gmenl Education: 9 credita in Humanitie1; 9 credita in Natunl Science■; 9 credita in Social Science■ ; 3 credita of Health or Phyaical Activitie1; Onl Communication (COM IOI); Gencnl Paycholoi)' (PSY 101); 22 credita of free elective,, including Engliah Composition 1-ll (ENG 101 , 102). (B) Profeuioaal Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Paychology (PSY 208); Developmental P■ycholoi)' (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultunl Society (EDU 210); Computcn for Teachen (EDF 301); 6 creditB of electivea; Student Teaching and Pncticum (C) Area ofCoaceatratioa: Exceptional Child 1-ll (ESP 100, 201); Behavior Principles 1-ll (ESP 301,401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Phyaical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum Methods 1-ll (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Tnining (ESP 506) . BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN SPECIAL EDUCATION: COMMUNITY SERVICES The Community Services Personnel Training Program is a four-year undergraduate curriculum leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Special Education. It emphasizes career working with the handicapped in community settings other than schools. Training stresses a comprehensive non-categorical approach to understanding handicapping conditions. Students learn to work with the mentally retarded, learning disabled, physically handicapped, emotionally disturbed, and brain-injured. The field of community alternative services for the handicapped is the fastest growing area in the field of human care services. Both philosophical concern and legal mandates have drastically altered the nature of such services during the past few years. Communities are beginning to recognize and respond to their responsibility for handicapped residents. Large-scale warehousing of human beings within institutions has been significantly reduced, and, more importantly, society is re-examining the central question of institutionali:r.ation on humanitarian and constitutional grounds. This shift has opened an entirely new professional career field-providing community-based alternative programs for the handicapped. Expansion, while rapid, has been impeded by the lack of trained personnel. The need for competent personnel in this area will very probably continue to expand. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume professional roles as resident managers of community living arrangements, mental retardation specialists in MH/MR community programs, supervisors of work activity centers, supervisors of therapeutic activity centers, supervisors of adult development centers, supervisors of child development centers. The general objectives of the Community Services Personnel Training Program are: To demonstrate the ability to use effectively behavior management principles in a number of applied settings; To demonstrate the ability to program effectively and provide instruction to handicapped clients in the area of daily living skills. To demonstrate the ability to provide effective counseling services to clients and their families. DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 329 Curriculum: (A) Gt11era1 Educatioo: 9 credits in Humanities; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credits in Health or Physical Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100); 20 credit, of free electives, including English Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102). (B) Professional Specialization: 15 credita from the following: Abnormal Psychology (PSY 400); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Social Psychology (PSY 209); Principles of Behavior Modification (PSY 350); Child Welfare (SOW 270); Contemporary Social Problems (SOC 205); The Family (SOC 220): Juvenile Delinquency (SOW 265); Social Institutions (SOC 240); Social Change (SOW 370). (C) Professional Education: Exceptional Child 1-Il (ESP 101,200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301,401); Education of Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278); Occupational and Daily Living Skill Training (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrces and Public Relations (ESP 378); Buaineu Management and Legal Factors (ESP 379); Client Counseling and Psycho-Social Development and Client Counseling (ESP 478); Program Evaluation and Personnel Management (ESP 479); Internship and Practicum. ASSOCIATE DEGREE IN COMMUNITY LIVING ARRANGEMENTS One of the most significant new developments in the field of human services has been the rapid and dramatic growth of community-based programs for the mentally retarded. These community living arrangements (CLAs) need trained staff members to provide client services. This program is specifically designed to incorporate skills that will lead to immediate employment in a CLA after completion of the program. Curriculum: (A) Genenl Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credits in Social Sciences (including General Psychology [PSY 100) and one Psychology elective and a Sociology course); 6 credits in Natural Sciences including Fundamental• of Mathematics (MAT 100); 3 credits of free electives. (B) Professional Counes: Exceptional Children 1-Il (ESP 101, 200); Behavior Principles 1-Il (ESP 301 , 401); Academic and Recreational Skill Training (ESP 278); Occupational Skill Training and Activities of Daily Living (AOL) (ESP 279); Community ReBOUrce Utilization and Public Relations (ESP 378); Practicum. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: MENTALLY/PHYSICALLY HANDICAPPED: PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION The Comprehensive Mentally/Physically Handicapped Physical Education and Recreation program is a four-year undergraduate program leading to a Bachelor of Science degree in Education and to the Pennsylvania Instructional I certification. This certificate entitles the graduate to teach children with the following handicaps: mental retardation, learning disability, physical handicaps, emotional disturbance, and brain damage. Majors pursuing the Physical Education and Recreation area of interest can provide physical education instruction for each of these handicap categories. The area of physical education and recreation for the handicapped is presently characteri.zed by expanding interest and activity. More and more programs are recognizing the needs of handicapped children to develop their physical skills and their ability to 330 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION participate in recreational activities. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles, including special education teacher for the handicapped, recreational director in an _institutional or agency setting, and recreational program specialist for governmental agencies involving parks and playgrounds. The objectives of this program are: To demonstrate an understanding of the nature of handicapping conditions and the impact of these conditions on normal growth and development; To demonstrate the ability to effectively use alternative instructional strategies appropriate to the needs of exceptional children; To demonstrate the ability to identify the educationally relevant characteristics of various exceptional children and to effectively diagnose and prescribe appropriate educational experiences; To demonstrate the ability to function as a competent classroom manager in promoting learning among handicapped students; To demonstrate competency to initiate the instructional programs that facilitate appropriate career and vocational goals for the mentally/physically handicapped; To demonstrate the ability to implement physical education programs for handicapped youngsters, with emphasis on gross-motor skills and physical activities leading to lifetime recreation skills. Curriculum: (A) General Education: 9 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM lCJO); 3 credita in Health and Physical Education; 9 credits in Natural Sciences; 9 credits in Social Sciences, including General Psychology (PSY lCJO); 21 credita of Free Electives, including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102) (B) Profeuiooal Education: 32 credita: Educational Foundations (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computen for Teachen (EDF 301); six credita of electivea; Student Teacbina and School Law: 12 credits. (C) Area of Concentration: 39 credita: Exceptional Child 1-11 (ESP 100, 200); Behavioral Principles 1-11 (ESP 301, 401); Education of the Severely and Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnoltic Telling and Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Phyaical Activitiea for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Curriculum and Methods 1-11 (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506). (D) Physical Education and Recreation: 16 credita: Anatomy, Kinesiology and Physiology (ESP 315); Motor Learning (ESP 316); Rhythmical Analysis and Creative Movement (ESP 317); School-Community Recreation and Crafts (ESP 415); Methods of Physical Education and Recreation (ESP 416) . BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: EARLY CHILDHOOD/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR) Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Early Childhood Education or Special Education are encouraged to consider pursuing a dual curriculum leading to Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Current educational thought advocates the placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher. Students who DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 331 successfully complete this dual-major program will possess demonstrated competencies in facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American education and society. The growth of mainstreaming programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid. It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild forms of handicaps typically attain higher levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special selfcontained classroom. These children do, however, need special help and remedial instruction in some areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of these children while continuing to maintain their enrollment in regular classrooms. This process of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both Early Childhood and Special Education will be able to provide excellent resource services to both children and the other staff members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles, including regular early childhood classroom teacher (nursery-third grade) , special education classroom teacher-mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged (nursery-twelfth grade)-and resource room teacher. Early Childhood/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies associated with each of the individual certificate programs (refer to the Early Childhood and Special Education programs). In addition, the following general objectives must be met: To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special service; To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs; To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive interpersonal relationships; To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning needs of students; To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions based on assessment data; To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies or materials to provide for the unique needs of students manifesting learning handicaps. Curriculum: (A) General Education: 15 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and Composition I-II (ENG 101-102); 15 credits in Natural Sciences; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General Psychology (PSY 100); 3 credits in Health or Physical Activities. (B) Professional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching and Prscticum. (C) Early Childhood Courses: Field Experience in Early Childhood (ECE 202); Laboratory Experiences in Nursery/Kindergarten (ECE 201); Art for Early Childhood (ECE 215); Music for Early Childhood (ECE 217); 332 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION Health and Physical Education for Early Childhood (ECE 218) or Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Reading Experiences in Early Childhood (ECE 301); Children' s Literature (ECE 311); Mathematics Content in Early Childhood (ECE 315); The Child in Social and Physical Environment (ECE 316); Science for Early Childhood (ECE 317); Early Childhood Seminar (ECE 405). (D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100,201); Behavioral Principles I-II (ESP 301 , 401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for Elementary Grades; Curriculum Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506). BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ELEMENTARY/SPECIAL EDUCATION (DUAL MAJOR) The growth of mainstream programs for mildly handicapped youngsters has been rapid. It has been recogniz.ed that children with mild handicaps typically attain higher levels of achievement in the regular class environment than in the special self-contained classroom. However, these children still need special help and remedial instruction in some areas of the curriculum. Thus, a relatively new educational concept, the resource room, is becoming an increasingly common means of addressing the needs of mildly handicapped children. This process of integrating the handicapped child should be initiated early, preferably at the preschool level, or no later than the early elementary years. Teachers trained in both Elementary and Special Education are able to provide excellent resource services to both children and other staff members of an elementary school. Graduates of this program are qualified to assume several professional roles: regular elementary classroom teacher (K-8), special education classroom teacher (mentally retarded, emotionally disturbed, physically handicapped, learning disabled, brain-damaged, nursery-grade 12), and resource room teacher. Students of superior academic achievement who are majoring in either Elementary Education or Special Education are encouraged to pursue a dual curriculum leading to Pennsylvania certification in both fields. Since current educational thought advocates the placement of mildly handicapped youngsters in regular classrooms with special education resource services made available to the student and the classroom teacher, students who successfully complete this dual major program will possess demonstrated competencies in facilitating the assimilation of the mildly handicapped into the mainstream of American education and society. Elementary/Special Education dual majors must demonstrate the competencies associated with each of the individual certification programs (refer to the competencies given in this and the Elementary Education sections of this catalog). In addition, the following general objectives must be satisfied: To demonstrate the ability to identify students who are in need of some special service; To demonstrate the ability to work effectively with other teachers in cooperatively planning programs for children with special needs; To demonstrate the ability to facilitate the social acceptance of children with handicaps by structuring classroom environments that reinforce positive interpersonal relationships; DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 333 To demonstrate the ability to complete educational assessment of the learning needs of students; To demonstrate the ability to develop individual educational prescriptions for children based on assessment data; To demonstrate the ability to effectively modify instructional strategies and/or materials to provide for the unique needs of students with learning handicaps. Curriculum: (A) General Education: 18 credits in Humanities, including Oral Communication (COM 100) and Composition 1-11 (ENG 101 -102), courses in art, history, and music; 15 credits in Natural Sciences, including algebra, biology, physical science, and Man and His Environment; 15 credits in Social Sciences, including General Psychology (PSY I 00), American Government, U.S. History (Before or Since I 877), Elements of Economics, and Geography; Co-Ed Health and one credit of Physical Education (B) Proft!Mional Education: Foundations of Education (EDF 100); Educational Psychology (PSY 208); Child Psychology (PSY 205) or Developmental Psychology (PSY 207); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210); Computers for Teachers (EDF 301); Student Teaching; Practicum and School Law. (C) Elementary Education Courses: Elementary Health and Physical Education (EDE 208) or Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337); Teaching of Reading (EDE 301); Children's Literature I (EDE 311); Field Experiences in Early Childhood Education (ECE 202); Mathematics Content and Methods in the Elementary School (EDE 305); Teaching of Social Studies (EDE 306); Science for Elementary Teachers (EDE 307); Teaching Language Arts (EDE 308) . (D) Special Education Courses: Exceptional Child I-II (ESP 100, 201); Behavioral Principles 1-11 (ESP 301, 401); Education of the Severely/Profoundly Handicapped (ESP 502); Diagnostic Testing/Prescriptive Teaching (ESP 503); Physical Activities for the Exceptional Child (HPE 337) or Health and Physical Education for the Elementary School (EDE 208); Curriculum and Methods I-II (ESP 504-505); Habilitation Training (ESP 506). 334 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION SPECIAL EDUCATION COURSES (ESP) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. B indicates that the courses are usually offered both semesters. ESP 101 & 200. EXCEPTIONAL CHILD I & II. A tw<>--<:oune introductory sequence to handicapped children and to the field of special education. Theac coune■ examine the range of handicaps in children and their broad 10eiological, educational, and vocational implication■. Specifically, the acquence develop■ competencies in such area, 11 the historical development of acrvice1 for handicapped, children, definition■ and clauification of children'• handicap,, the impact of labelling children and main■tream programa, pre-school and poat-school programa for the handicapped, family acrvices, prosthetic devices and program modifications for the physically handicapped and a behavioral analysis of normal child development. Theac counea atress obacrvation of the various target groups of handicapped children. ( 4 en. each) F ESP 250. WORKSHOP FOR TEACHER AIDES . For teacher aides who worlc in clasac■ for handicapped children. the content i1, however, of great value to all teacher' s aides since it deals with methods that might enable the participants to deal more easily and more effectively with any children. Numerous activities characterize the worbhop; it i ■ not a lecture coune. (3 en.) B ESP 278 . ACADEMIC AND RECREATIONAL SKILL TRAINING. Handicapped penon■ residing in the community mull acquire thoac sltills which will facilitate assimilation to the community at large. Important among theac ■ltil11 are baaic competencie■ in academic area■ such as reading, writing, communication, and computational abilitie■. In order to live independently, the handicapped must also be capable of -nonnal" behavioral responaca in varioua 10eial, vocational and recreational situation■. (3 en.) F ESP 279. OCCUPATIONAL SKILL TRAINING AND ACTIVITIES OF DAILY LIVING (ADL) . Thia coune focuac1 on the prevocational and vocational need■ of handicapped youth and adults as well II thoac supportive 11till1 ncce ...ry for achieving acceptable level• of -nonnal adult adjuatmcnt. • Since the habilitation and training need ■ of the handicapped population are so divene, the nature of coune content and emphasis is also broad, to include such programa as sheltered worlcahops and rehabilitation facilities, worlc activity centen, therapeutic activity centen, CLS'1, etc . (3 en.) F ESP 301 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES I. Provides the student with the verbal and performance sltills in measurement and obacrvation nccesury to apply the principles of behavior modification in schools and a variety of other acttings. Students who complete the coune will have mastered sltills in data collection, data manipulation, and data-display including graphing, behavioral definitions, the principles of reinforcement and extinction, and databased decision malting. (4 en.) F ESP 315. ANATOMY, KINESIOLOGY, PHYSIOLOGY. An introduction to practical lcnowledge of human growth and development, human anatomy and physiology. Special focus on the biomechanics of human motion in relation to sport and recreational sltills for handicapped and nonhandicapped penon■. (3 en.) S ESP 316. MOTOR LEARNING . A preparatory coune for teaching adapted physical education to handicapped children. A 1y1tcmatic approach baaed on the I CAN Curriculum is used to 11ac11, teach and evaluate paychomotor 11till1. Child development theories are atudied and applied to the development of special physical education programs for handicapped children. (3 en.) S ESP 317. RHYTHMICAL ANALYSIS AND CREATIVE MOVEMENT. An introductory coune that focuaca on the therapeutic value of music and dance. Special emphasis is placed on Laban' s Effort-Shape System of Movement Analysis. (3 en.) S ESP 360. FIELD EXPERIENCE FOR SPECIAL EDUCATION . Provides a vehicle for obtaining needed practical experience, with various groups of handicapped children. The type of practicum site may vary widely and includes DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION 335 such acttinga aa public and private residential inatitutiona, day care centen, therapeutic activity centen, lheltered worbhopa, rehabilitation centen, community MH/MR programs, and summer camps for handicapped children. (Variable credit) B ESP 378. COMMUNITY RESOURCE UTILIZATION AND PUBLIC RELATIONS. Community-baaedprognma for handicapped individuala utilize community facilitiea, agenciea, and acrvicea to provide broad-baaed support and auiatance to the client populationa. In thoac aituationa where an insufficient or inadequate level of support ia in place, the public II well a ■ the policy maken muat be mobilized to fill identified voids . Very often the apringboard from which an effective acrvice baac can be eatablilhed ia a well developed program of public relationa. the public relationa prognm al110 acrvea the handicapped by educating the community memben-the neighbon of handicapped penona living in the community. (3 en.) B ESP 379 . BUSINESS MANAGEMENT AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS . Community-based prognma currently exiat both aa a mandate of law and at the pleasure of legislation from a fiscal standpoint. Further, the relationahipa between providen and clienta, providen and agencies, agenciea and clients, etc . are all regulated. Thia courac, therefore, explores the many legal implicationa involved in community-baaed programs and apecifiea the reaponaibility that atudents will face as profe11ional1. (3 en.) B ESP 401 . BEHAVIOR PRINCIPLES II. Thia courac familiarize, the atudent the laboratory derived learning principle, that constitute the field of applied behavior analysis. An experimental component provides each atudent the opportunity to observe and report on a behavioral intervention program. (4 en.) S ESP 415 . SCHOOL, COMMUNITY RECREATION, AND CRAFTS FOR HANDICAPPED PERSON . Basic philosophical foundationa of leisure and recreation. Special focus ia on the aima and benefits of the recreation proce11 and therapeutic recreation. A third of this courac includes supervised practice with penona who are handicapped. (3 en.) B ESP 416. METHODS OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION AND RECREATION FOR HANDICAPPED PERSONS . Prepare, teachen of the handicapped to plan, aaaeu, prescribe, teach, and evaluate special physical education programs for penona who are mentally retarded, learning disabled, hearing impaired , visually handicapped, emotionally diaturbed , orthopedically handicapped, and multi-handicapped . (4 en.) B ESP 459 . STUDENT TEACHING. In the new comprehenaive curriculum, each courac has a practicum associated with it that involves conaistent contact throughout each semester with apecial children. The Special Education ataff memben make a concerted effort to ensure that Special Education majon are exposed to the full range of children covered under the comprehenaive certification, i.e., mentally retarded, emotionally diaturbed, learning disabled, brain damaged, and physically handicapped . Students are also expoaed to the dimenaiona of mild-profound and elementary-aecondary since the new certification coven K-12, mild through profound, in each of the handicapping areas for their atudent teaching experience. the areas relate to their specific vocational goals and their own intereata and atrengtha . The major practicum, Student Teaching, provides an intenaive experience for the atudent in two of the handicapping areas for a period of sixteen weeks . (12 en.) B ESP 478. PSYCHO-SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT AND CLIENT COUNSELING. Examines the concept of nonnalization and how the emphasis on the nonnalization of the experience, of handicapped clients in communitybaaed prognma ia vital to their succeaaful adjuatment. Methods for developing nonnalizing experiences are also explored . (3 en.) B ESP 479 . PROGRAM EVALUATION AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT. Thia courac ia intended to fulfill the need of training of penonnel within community facilities who are required to perform management duties. The environments for which the training techniques in the courac are designed include community living arrangements, lheltered worklhops, adult activity centen (both therapeutic and work), and other human service providen and community aocial welfare agencies . Competencies are developed that are knowledge- or infonnation-baacd as well 11 akill-baaed. (3 en.) B 336 DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL EDUCATION ESP 490. PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM AND SCHOOL LAW. Meeta weekly to provide Special Education majors working toward, a comprchenaivecertificate (Mentally Retarded, Emotionally Disturbed, Leaming Disabled, Brain Damaged and Physically Handicapped) with an opportunity to diacuss problems encountered by the studenta in their teaching experiences. The studenta arc provided with opportunities to demonatrate the effectiveness and functionality of their teacher-made devices, learning centers, and curriculum materials uaed in their claaaroom. (2 era.) B ESP 495. HONORS SEMINAR. (3 era.) B ESP 498 . INTERNSHIP. Each student majoring in the Handicapped Persona Community Service Personnel Training Program completes a one-semester (15-week) internship assigned to community agencies. Ten weelcs are spent worlcifii in all phases of a community living arrangement (CLA), including client counseling, slcill training, recreational planning, public rclationa, buaincss and personnel management, etc . Interns arc required to live at the CLA facility when it i ■ conaidered essential to their training . The remaining five weeks of the internship arc spent in another type of community program for the handicapped, such aa therapeutic activitiea centers, worlc activity centers, adult development centers, sheltered workshops, etc . Studenta arc encouraged to identify the type of agency they arc interested in and attcmpta arc made to arrange an appropriate affiliation. (Variable.) B ESP 501. INTRODUCTION TO THE EXCEPTIONAL CHil.D. An introduction to handicapped children and to the field of special education, examining the broad range of handicaps in children and their sociological, educational, and vocational implicationa. (Variable.) B ESP 502. EDUCATION OF THE SEVERELY/PROFOUNDLY HANDICAPPED. How to work with children and adulta who display severe/profound learning and/or behavior problems. Studenta spend time tutoring at facilities for this population. (Variable.) F ESP 503 . DIAGNOSTIC TESTING AND PRESCRIPTIVE TEACHING . This course deals with both normreferenced and criterion-referenced testa and their use with exceptional children. Class participanta must administer selected testa and preacribe remediation based on the resulta . (Variable.) S ESP 504 AND ESP 505 . CURRICULUM PLANNING AND METHODS I AND II. Curriculum and Methods I and II are a block of courses that are offered to Special Education majors the semester prior to their student teaching experience. The major purpose of these courses is the inatruction of communication and arithmetic slcills to all age groups of exceptional children. Specifically, Curriculum and Methods I is concerned with communication slcills (reading-silent and oral-vocabulary development and comprehension) . Curriculum and Methods II emphasizes arithmetic slcills. Both courses stress: (1) a behavioral diagnosis of communication and arithmetic strengths and wealcnesses; (2) the development and implementation of intervention strategies for various populations of exceptional children; (3) the selection and/or development of appropriate materials for instruction; and (4) the procedures and techniques for continuous evaluation for the instructional process in order to determine effectivencsa. (Variable.) B ESP 506. HABILITATION TRAINING . This course deals with special education programs for senior high school studenta as well as those persons who reside in the community. Emphasis is placed on vocational preparation and training . Specific techniques for task analysis of jobs, daily living slcills, and social adaptation constitute a major portion of this course. Emphasis is placed on the development of functional slcills that contribute to normalized development. (Variable.) B DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY 337 DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PAIBOWGY AND AUDIOWGY Associate Professor Albert E. Yates, chair. Professors R. Michael Feldman; Associate Professors Charles A. Gismondi, D. Frank McPherson, Richard R. Nemec BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: SPEECH/LANGUAGE PAfflOLOGY The experiences in the Speech Pathology and Audiology Department are integrated with the overall undergraduate program in order to provide students with a broad understanding of the needs of individuals who have communication disorders. The department also provides clinical services for individuals who have communication disorders. Students observe and/or assist in diagnostic evaluations and therapy programs. The work includes experiences with individuals of all ages, ranging from pre-school to adult. The undergraduate program in Speech Pathology and Audiology (SPA) is a preprofessional degree program. Students, therefore, should be preparing themselves for future graduate training in order to pursue a career in the profession of Speech/Language Pathology. (At California University of Pennsylvania, teacher certification in SPA is not offered as an undergraduate program, but may be obtained in graduate school.) Students planning to complete the undergraduate program in SPA should maintain a grade point average (GPA) sufficient to enhance the probability that they can be admitted to a graduate program. Since unconditional admission to most graduate programs in SPA requires a 3. 0 GPA in the major area and a 2.8 overall GPA in undergraduate work, these are the minimum goals which undergraduates should strive to achieve. To facilitate the attainment of these goals, the faculty in SPA have determined that students should be maintaining the following GPAs at the indicated points in their undergraduate program: I I OVERALL GPA I SPA GPA End of Freshman Year (32 credit hours) 2 .20 2 .50 End of Sophomore Year (64 credit hours) 2 .40 2 .65 End of Junior Year (96 credit hours) 2 .60 2 .80 Graduation (128 credit hours) 2 .80 3.00 I Students who are not achieving the above standards will be counseled each semester concerning the options which are available to them : (1) Make a more concerted effort to improve their level of performance, (2) consider transferring to some other program, or (3) graduate from the program with the minimum allowable GPA (2.3 overall and 2.5 in SPA), but with the understanding that employment opportunities in the profession with only the 338 DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY B.S. degree will be extremely limited if not completely nonexistent. Every effort will be made to assist students with whatever option they choose. • • • • • The objectives of this program are to: Develop an understanding of the basic acoustical, anatomical, neurological, and normal development of speech, language, and hearing; Develop knowledge of the various disorders affecting speech and language and the underlying pathologies and symptoms of the disorders; Create awareness of the instruments and procedures available to assess speech and language disorders and develop the ability to select and use such instruments correctly; Develop the clinical skills to effectively perform therapeutic procedures to correct or improve speech and language disorders; Instill the principles and practices of ethical professional behavior. Curriculum: (A) General Education (56 credits): Humanities: 18 credits (from two disciplines), including Composition 1-11 (ENG 101-102) and Oral Communication(COM 101); Natural Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); Social Sciences: 9 credits (from two disciplines); 3 credits Health or Physical Activities; General Psychology (PSY 100); Free Electives: 14 credits. (B) ReJated Professional Courses (30 credits selected from adviser-approved university courses), including Developmental Psychology (PSY 207), Teaching in a Multicultural Society (EDU 210) or Ethnic, Racial, and Social Minorities (SOC 110), Computers for Teachers (EDF 301), Foundations of Education (EDF 100), and Educational Psychology (PSY 110). (EDF 100 and PSY 110 are required only for Pennsylvania Certification.) (C) Speech Pathology and Audiology (42 credits): ASHA Basic Science Requirements (selected from matrix) : 6 credits in Biological Sciences, Physical Sciences, or Mathematica; 6 credits in Behavioral or Social Sciences; Survey of Speech Pathology (SPA 100); Language and Speech Development (SPA 105); Phonetics (SPA 203); Anatomy and Physiology (SPA 204); Acoustics and Psychoacoustics (SPA 211); Speech Pathology I (SPA 300); Speech Pathology II (SPA 30 l ); Auditory Training and Speech Reading (SPA 302); Introduction to Audiology (SPA 305); Clinical Practicum (SPA 400). SPEECH PAfflOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY COURSES (SPA) SPA 100. SURVEY OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY. This course introduces the student to the field of communication disorders through a description of the communicatively handicapped. (3 era.) SPA 105 . LANGUAGE AND SPEECH DEVELOPMENT. The course emphasis is on the normal development of speech, language, and communication. The form and function of language are considered, i.e., phonology, syntax, morphology, semantics, and pragmatics. (3 era.) SPA 203. PHONETICS. Introduces practical phonology and phonetic, as they apply to the communicative proce11. The student is required to learn and use the International Phonetic Alphabet. (3 era.) SPA 204. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY. The structure and normal function of the components of the human body participating in the production of speech; how the function of these components may change during speech production. Prerequisite: 6 er. in biological sciences. (3 era.) SPA 211. ACOUSTICS AND PSYCHOACOUSTICS. This course will provide the student with a basic understanding of how sound is generated and measured. In addition, the manner in which the human auditory DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY 339 system encodes sound information and subsequently extracts meaning from it will be investigated. Prerequisite: 6 credits of Physical Science or Mathematics. (3 crs.) SPA 300. SPEECH PATHOLOGY I. This course provides students with introductory knowledge of children with language and speech disorders. They will become aware of procedures and principles utilized by speech-language pathologists in the assessment and management of children with language and speech delays/disorders. Prerequisites: SPA 100, 203 , 204 and 211. (3 crs.) SPA 301 . SPEECH PATHOLOGY II. Primary emphasis is placed on several of the major speech disorders, namely: fluency disorders, voice disorders, language disorders in adults, dysar1hria, apraxia, and dysphagia. Prerequisites: SPA 203, 204, 211. (3 crs.) SPA 302. AUDITORY TRAINING AND SPEECH READING . The course will emphasize work with hearing handicapped individuals in the following areas: (a) diagnostic information; (b) speech reading methods; (c) auditory training techniques; and (d) speech training for the aurally handicapped . Prerequisites : SPA 211 and 305. (3 crs.) SPA 305. INTRODUCTION TO AUDIOLOGY. The course will provide the student with an understsnding of the genetic and disease processes producing hearing loss in children and adults and the procedures used to assess hearing loss and rehabilitste persons with hearing impairment. Prerequisite: SPA 204, 211. (3 crs.) SPA 400. CLINICAL PRACTICUM. Provides the student clinician with a variety of therapeutic and evaluation experiences with children or adults having speech, language or hearing disorders. Prerequisites: SPA 300 and 301 . (3 crs.) DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE 340 DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE ATIIl..ETIC TRAINING EDUCATION Associate Professor William B. Biddington, chair; Associate Professor Robert H. Kane, Jr.; Assistant Professor Bruce D. Barnhart; Instructor, Joni L. Cramer The Athletic Training Education Program provides interested students with the opportunity to develop the leadership, responsibilities, and special skills necessary for a career as a Certified Athletic Trainer. The basic concept of athletic training involves the prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries. The Athletic Training Education Program is a National Athletic Trainers' Association (NATA) approved curriculum and is approved by the State Board of Physical Therapy. Modem athletic training rooms are located in Hamer Hall and Adamson Stadium. The cadaver anatomy laboratory is also located in Hamer Hall. The California University intercollegiate athletic program, which is a strong NCAA Division II program and a member of the PSAC . (Pennsylvania State Athletic Conference), comprises 14 varsity sports that enable students to gain valuable experience as student athletic trainers. The high incidence of injuries occurring through athletic participation has become a national concern and has created demand for individuals who have completed athletic training courses, fulfilled clinical requirements, and earned a minimum of a bachelor's degree. Job opportunities for certified athletic trainers have increased substantially, and the employment potential for athletic trainers should continue to increase. The ultimate goal of this program is to prepare graduates for certification by the NATA and for careers in athletic training. Many high schools hire athletic trainers to help provide better health care for their interscholastic athletic programs. In addition, four-year colleges and universities and junior and community colleges provide significant possibilities for employment. Positions with professional teams exist; however, they are fewer in number than those associated with school athletic programs. There is also growing employment in sports medicine and rehabilitation clinics for athletic trainers. Admission into the Athletic Training Education Program is competitive, and only a limited number of students are selected each year. Applications for the Athletic Training curriculum are accepted during the second semester of the freshman year and screened by the Admissions and Academic Standards Committee (AASC). During the first semester of the sophomore year, -the student submits a letter of application to the AASC, which screens, interviews, and selects the remaining students to a maximum number of ten. Criteria for selection are a minimum of a 2.75 QPA, 350 observation hours over a three-semester period, interpersonal skills, and other qualifications, which can be obtained from the Program Director of the Athletic Training Education Program. DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE 341 BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ATHLETIC TRAINING EDUCATION (SINGLE MAJOR) This program will lead a prospective student to a Bachelor of Science degree in Education without teacher certification. Curriculum: (A) Gmeral F.ducation: IS credit, in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English Composition 1-Il (ENG 101, 102); 9 credit, in Natural Sciences; 9 credit, in Social Sciences; 2 credit, in Physical Activitie, and 37 credit, of free electives. (B) Area of Concentration: Practicum Athletic Training I, Il (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education (ATE 120); Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-Il (ATE 200, 210); Health (HPE 100); two courac1 in Psychology; Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Athletic Training 1-Il (ATE 220, 260); Administrative Aspect, of Athletic Training (ATE 230); Introduction to Educational Media (EDF 304); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainen (ATE 250); Nutrition for Sports (ATE 230); Emergency Medical Technician (HPE 500); Modality Principles and Techniques with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE 330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sports Medicine (ATE 400); and Special Topics in Sports Medicine (ATE 450). Clinical houn: minimum of 800 houn during junior and senior ycan. BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN EDUCATION: ATHLETIC TRAINING/SECONDARY EDUCATION DUAL MAJOR WITH: Biology Chemistry Communication (Speech) Communication (Theatre) Early Childhood Earth Science Elementary Education English Foreign Languages General Science Mathematics Physics Social Studies Special Education The dual major in Athletic Training/Secondary Education enables interested students to pursue the education and training necessary for a dual career as effective teachers and athletic trainers. The requirements listed below are for the Athletic Training component alone. Students interested in this program should contact the Program Director of the Athletic Training Education Program for details on the dual major. This program also requires satisfactory performance on the NTE in order to receive a Pennsylvania teaching certificate. 342 DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE Curriculum: (A) Genen1 Education: 15 credita in Humanities including Oral Communication (COM 101); English Composition 1-11 (ENG 101, 102); 9 credita in Social Sciences; 9 credita in Natural Sciences; 2 credita in Physical Activities. (Certain programs require specific counes in these areas). (B) Area or Concentration: Human Anatomy of the Extremities 1-11 (ATE 200, 210); Practicum Athletic Training I, II (ATE 100, 110); Substance Abuse Education (ATE 120); Health Co-ed (HPE 100); General Psychology (PSY 100); Kinesiology (HPE 310); Physiology of Exercise (HPE 311); Emergency Medical Technician (HPE 500); Athletic Training 1-11 (ATE 220, 260); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainera (ATE 230); Nutrition for Sport, (ATE 240); Human Physiology for Athletic Trainers (ATE 250); Modality Principles and Techniques with Laboratory (ATE 320); Therapeutic Exercise with Laboratory (ATE 330); Orthopedic Evaluations in Sporta Medicine (ATE 400) and Special Topic• in Sports Medicine (ATE 450). Clinical experience: minimum of 800 hours during junior and senior years. (C) Professional Education Requirements: Al required by the College of Education and Human Services. (D) Professional Specialization (Second Major): Al required by the specific major. A'IHLETIC TRAINING COURSES (ATE) F and S indicate whether a course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring semester. ATE 100. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic mechanical techniques of athletic training, 111ch as taping, transportation, modality usage, maintenance of equipment, record keeping, etc. (1 er.) F ATE 110. PRACTICUM ATHLETIC TRAINING II. A continuation of Practicum Athletic Training I; taping, evaluationa, rehabilitation equipment, etc. Prerequisite: ATE 100. (1 er.) S ATE 120. SUBSTANCE ABUSE EDUCATION . The knowledge of substance abuse as it relate, to athletics and competition, drug testing procedures as enforced by governing a880Ciationa, and the prevention and treatment of substance abuse. ATE 200. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES I. The organization, structures, and functiona of the human body: the development of the cell, tissues, integumentary system, digestive system, respiratory system, urinary system, reproductive system, lymphatic and cardiovascular systems. (3 era.) F ATE 210. HUMAN ANATOMY OF THE EXTREMITIES II. The organization, structure■ and functions of the human body; the development and function of the skeletal system, ligament and joint structure, muscular system, and the nervous system. Prerequisite: ATE 200. (3 era.) S ATE 220. ATHLETIC TRAINING I. The basic prevention, care, treatment, and rehabilitation of athletic injuries; understanding and demonstrating how to develop a conditioning program, basic evaluation of injuries, and how to manage them, and other topics related to sport, medicine. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum studenta only . (3 era.) F ATE 230. ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS OF ATHLETIC TRAINING . The administrative functions, litigation, staff relationships, ethics, budget and supplies, inventory, facility design, maintenance, safety assesament, student trainer organization and risum6 writing. Prerequisites: Open to curriculum students only. (1 er.) S ATE 240. NUTRITION FOR SPORTS. Nutrition and its applications to health and sport,: designed to provide the student with a sound nutritional background 10 that ■ound decisions may be made concerning all aspecta of nutrition. Additionally, specific nutritional techniques used to improve athletic performance are addressed. (3 era.) F DEPARTMENT OF SPORTS MEDICINE 343 ATE 250. HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY FOR ATHLETIC TRAINERS . An introductory course in human physiology examining the function of the body' s major systems. Particular attention is given to those systems of interest to prospective athletic trainers. Prerequisites: ATE 200, 210. (3 crs.) S ATE 260. ATHLETIC TRAINJNG Il. The spine and its extremities; the evaluation techniques that are used to determine the degree of injury found in the clinical setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.) s ATE 320. MODALITY PRJNCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory exercises that explain the use and theory of physical therapy modalities that are used in the sports medicine clinical setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) F ATE 330. THERAPEUTIC EXERCISE WITH LABORATORY. Lectures and laboratory exercises that explain the use and theory of therapeutic exercise and equipment used for rehabilitation in the sports medicine setting. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (4 crs.) S ATE 400. ORTHOPEDIC EVALUATIONS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Clinical evaluations of injured athletes by the student and the physician to be used in determining the extent of an injury. The student will register for this course again in a consecutive semester. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only . (1 er.) F S ATE 450. SPECIAL TOPICS 1N SPORTS MEDICJNE. Orienta the advanced student to research and experimentation in sports medicine and athletic training. Prerequisite: Open to curriculum students only. (3 crs.) F 344 THEATRE DEPARTMENT THEATRE DEPARTMENT THEATRE (THE) See also the program in Secondary Education Communication Certification (pages 164-165 in this catalog.) Professor Roger C. Emelson, chair. Associate Professor Malcolm P. Callery; Assistant Professor Michael J. Slavin; Instructor Richard James Helldobler PURPOSE As one of the performing arts, the theatre is a means of self-expression and social communication. Whether studying pure dramatic expression or musical dramatic expression, the objective is to understand how speech, as well as the non-verbal aspects of a production, such as lighting, movement, scenery and costumes, communicates ideas and emotion and how they have been used and are used for entertainment, education, reform and other social purposes. The study of the dramatic arts serves not only Theatre majors but those in other disciplines concerned with human interaction and symbolic expression, e.g., Art, Communication Studies, Political Science, Sociology, English, and Psychology. Students who are aware of the history and technology associated with the theatre hopefully will be, as participants, whether as actors or viewers, more appreciative of this art form. PROGRAM Theatre is an undergraduate degree program in the College of Liberal Arts. Theatre also is one option of the teacher certification program in Communication. Persons who receive certification in this area can teach English, Theatre, Speech, and Non-Print Media. The student interested in the certification program should contact the College of Education and Human Services. A master's degree program in Communication that includes theatre studies is available through the School of Graduate Studies. The Theatre Program as a whole serves a dual function. It provides occupational education and training for talented students who wish to pursue a career in Theatre, and it provides not only educational but performance opportunities for all students on campus. The addition of six dance courses, which range from basic ballet to theatre dance, gives the major a competitive advantage in professional preparation. The Theatre Department annually presents four on-campus play, dance and musical productions. Dance concerts which combine classical ballet and modem jazz contribute to the university's performing arts presentations. At Linden Hall, a nearby conference and recreation center, the department sponsors the Valley Theatre Company, which produces six plays and musicals from May through October. In cooperation with the Student Association, Incorporated, the department also sponsors three play-producing groups: the University THEATRE DEPARTMENT 345 credits. It is expected that each experience will be in a different area of play production. Theatre majors are required to take one practicum credit during each regularly enrolled term. A major must have a minimum of eight practicum credits. Practicum grades are awarded on the faculty advisor's evaluation of the quality of work performed and on the completion of the work hours agreed to at the time the practicum is undertaken. The Theatre Department recognizes student achievement. It rewards creative excellence by offering opportunities for upper level students to produce a musical variety show and to direct or design theatrical productions. The University's Steele Auditorium has a seating capacity of 955. It has a proscenium stage, a 16-channel sound mixer with multiple microphone and line inputs on stage, and is undergoing a complete renovation of its lighting system. The theatre also has scenery, lighting, costume, and property areas. HONOR SOCIETY Since 1938, outstanding students annually have been elected to the University Players' Hall of Fame. Membership in Alpha Psi Omega (A~O), the national honor society, can be achieved through active participation in theatre productions. CAREERS Graduates work throughout the country in professional and semi-professional theatre, in film and television, rehabilitational theatre, teaching, recreation, public relations, interior decoration, and arts management. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN THEATRE Curriculum: (A) General Education: Composition 1-Il (ENG 101-102); 12 credits of Humanities; 12 credits of Natural Sciences; 12 credits of Social Sciences; 18 credits of free electives. (B) Area Concentration: Required: 29 credits of Introduction to the Theatre (THE 100); Ballet Technique (THE 121); Fundamentals of Acting (THE 131); Stagecraft I (THE 151); History of the Theatre I & Il (THE 261 & 262); Production, Rehearsal and Performance (THE 392); Theatre Practicum (THE 350-358); 24 credits of theatre electives; 15 credits of related electives in disciplines closely related to Theatre. or THEATRE DEPARTMENT 346 THEATRE COURSES (THE) F and S indicate whether the course is usually offered in the Fall or the Spring. All the Theatre courses are offered during a student's four-year matriculation at California University. Introductory level courses are indicated by a plus ( +). +THE 100 INTRODUCTION TO THE THEATRE. A survey of the art and craft of the theatre from play script to play production. Theatre history and literature, acting, directing, design, and playhouse architecture are studied to discover what goes on in the theatre and what it all means. Students will be aaaigned as cast or crew for departmental productions during the term in which they are enrolled. Students can expect to participate in claaaroom performances. (3 era.) F,S +THE 101. VOICE AND SPEECH. A practical and useful course for the performer or anyone who wants a flexible , strong, controlled voice. The Lessac method involving the natural ways in which the body produces vocal sounds is primarily studied for clear and articulate speech which is free of regional qualities, affectation, imitation, and annoying physical habits. The course also involves trsnacription of the International Phonetic Alphabet for correct pronunciation. (3 era.) F +THE 102. VOICE AND INTERPRETATION. Methods of analysis and presentation for effective oral reading of dramatic literature, prose and poetry. (3 era.) S +THE 121. BALLET TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to ballet as practiced in western Europe and in the United States. Basic techniques include barre exercises, port de bras and center practice with jumps, beats, and turns. This course is suitable for the student who has no previous experience. (3 era.) F THE 122. BALLET TECHNIQUE ll. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of techniques demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations. Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form. Prerequisite : Ballet Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' • experience and ability. (1-3 era.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward graduation.) S +THE 126 MAKEUP. This course covers modeling the face and the body with makeup, and the addition ofthreedimensional prostheses. Historical, specific character, fantasy, corrective, street and fashion makeup will be researched, designed and applied . Students with an advanced interest will construct three-dimensional prostheses and hair pieces. (3 era.) +THE 131. FUNDAMENTALS OF ACTING. An introduction to the development of the basic tools of the actor' s craft, and personal discipline for the actor through the use of acting exercises, sensitivity exercises, theatre games and improvisation. (3 era.) F +THE 151. STAGECRAFT I. Introduction to the theory and practice of stagecraft, involving basic set construction, painting and plan reading. Practical experience for students majoring in performance media . (3 era.) F THE 152. STAGECRAFT ll. Advanced practice and principles of scenery and property construction. Practical experience with plastics, metals, silk screening, drafting and advanced woodworking is stressed . Prerequisite: Stagecraft I or permission of instructor. (3 era.) S THE 200. FUNDAMENTALS OF DIRECTING. The comprehensive study of a director's pre-production planning for a play presented on stage, film or television. The directorial analysis of plays and basic fundamentals of composition, picturization, pantomime with properties, movement, and ground plan are studied. The in-claaa THEATRE DEPARTMENT 347 prepantion of a complete directorial script for a one-act or cuning from a longer play may be directed as part of a public prognm of student-directed plays. (3 crs .) S THE 211. LIGIITING I. The basic theory and pnctice of lighting for the stage, film, and television. Pnctical experience for student& majoring in performance media is stressed. (3 crs.) F THE 212. LIGIITING D. Advanced pnctice of lighting for the stage, television and film. Pnctical application for students majoring in performance media is stressed. Prerequisite: Lighting I or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.) s +THE 220. JAZZ TECHNIQUE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to American jazz dance. Lengthening muscles and developing isolation techniques are pncticed as necessary for most forms of jazz dance. The Luigi Technique which includes standing and floor warm-up, stretch and center pnctice in jumps, turns and isolations is studied . (3 crs.) F THE 221. JAZZ TECHNIQUE D. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of jazz techniques as demonstnted in specialized study and drill . Emphasis is placed on quicker retention of complex combinations. Further emphasis is placed on center work to develop the student's artistry in the dance form . Prerequisite: Jazz Technique I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student's experience and ability . (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of 7 credits to count toward gnduation.) S THE 225 . COSTUME CONSTRUCTION. Basic pattern dnfting and sewing techniques applied to the construction of costumes. (3 crs.) THE 231. INTERMEDIATE ACTING . The development of a personal and useful acting method to create believable chancters for the stage. The acting method is developed through intense scene work that includes chancter and script analysis. Prerequisite: Fundamentals of Acting or consent of the instructor. (3 crs.) S +THE 240. CREATIVE DRAMATICS. The stimulation and development of creativity through playmaking exercises, storytelling, improvisation and sensitivity techniques useful for potential teachers and parenta. (3 crs.) FS THE 245 . CHILDREN'S THEATRE. The selection, direction and production of plays for children. (May be repeated for credit.) (3 crs.) +TH_E 255 . PUPPETRY. The planning and production of puppet plays. (3 crs.) +THE 257. HISTORY OF COSTUME. A survey of the history of costume in the western world . (3 crs.) +THE 261. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE I. The development of the theatre from the Classic through the Baroque, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F THE 262. HISTORY OF THE THEATRE D. The development of the theatre from the Baroque to the present day, including representative plays . (3 crs .) S +THE 263. AMERICAN THEATRE HISTORY . A survey of the American theatre from Colonial times to the present, including representative plays. (3 crs.) F THE 270. READERS THEATRE. The principles and pnctice of organizing and presenting Readers Theatre presentations. Prerequisite: THE 102 or COM 111 or permission of instructor. (3 crs.) THE 300. THEATRE DANCE I. Introductory instruction in the basic techniques applicable to the various dance forms used in musical theatre. The forms are tap, jazz, ballet, ethnic and modem dance . Choreognphic styles as THEATRE DEPARTMENT 348 originated by Agnes DeMille, Bob Fosse, Jerome Robbins and Jack Cole will be demonstrated and applied . Prerequisite: Ballet Technique D, Jazz Technique Dor permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) THE 301. THEATRE DANCED. The development of strength and fluidity through an extension of modem dance techniques as demonstrated in specialized study and drill. Emphasis is placed on principles stressed in Theatre Dance I with the addition of character shoes for women, partnering work and stage combat. Prerequisite: Theatre Dance I or permission of the instructor. Variable credits are awarded depending on the student' s experience and ability. (1-3 crs.) (Repeatable only for a maximum of7 credits to count toward graduation.) +THE 305 . SHAKESPEARE IN THE THEATRE. Representative Shakespearean plays studied as theatrical presentations. (3 crs.) THE 315. WORLD DRAMA ON STAGE. Classical to nineteenth-century plays (excluding Shakespeare) studied as theatrical preaentations. (3 era.) F THE 317. MODERN DRAMA ON STAGE. Nineteenth and twentieth-century plays studied as theatrical presentations. (3 crs.) S THE 323 . SCENERY DESIGN I. Introduction to the theory and practice of designing scenery for various environments . Prerequisite: Stagecraft I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs .) F THE 324. SCENERY DESIGN D. Advanced theory and practice of designing scenery for various environments . Prerequisite: Scenery Design I or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S THE 325. COSTUME DESIGN . Basic principles of costume design. Students complete various design projects for specific plays selected from a variety of historical periods. (3 crs.) THE 328 . SCENE PAINTING. The practice of scenery painting for the theatre. Students work with a variety of paints, texturing materials, and application techniques. Emphasis is placed on enlarging an existing art work to a size suitable for the stage. (3 era.) THE 330. ADVANCED ACTING. This course challenges the actor' s ability to demonstrate a personal and useful acting method through a wide range of problems as found in historical and modem plays, and in acting styles. Prerequisite: Intermediate Acting or permission of the instructor. (3 crs.) S THEATRE - CHANGE IN PRACTICUM LISTING . Theatre practicum is the application of learned skills in all areas of theatre and dance. Credit is variable. Maximum number of credits per term is five; maximum that will count toward graduation is eighteen. Courses numbered THE 350 through THE 358 are practicums that can be repeated up to 5 credits each . Courses THE 357 and 358 can be repeated, but cannot exceed 10 credits. +THE 350. +THE 351. +THE 352. +THE 353. +THE 354. +THE 355. +THE 356 . +THE 357. +THE 358 . THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: THEATRE PRACTICUM: ACTING. DANCE. DIRECTING. DESIGN. MANAGEMENT. TECHNICAL DIRECTOR. TECHNICAL PRODUCTION. TOURING THEATRE. SUMMER THEATRE. THE 392. PRODUCTION, REHEARSAL AND PERFORMANCE. Special acting, directing, management and design, or technical involvement in a play production. Prerequisite: Senior level only. (3 crs.) F S THE 400. DRAMATIC THEORY AND CRITICISM. Theories of dramatic structure and their application to theatrical presentations. (3 crs.) S 349 GOVERNANCE The State System of Higher Education California University of Pennsylvania: Administrative Officers and Staff Faculty and Administration Emeriti Faculty 350 STATE SYSTEM OF IIlGHER EDUCATION THE STATE SYSTEM OF IDGHER EDUCATION OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA James H. McCormick, Chancellor Emily Hannah Vice-Chancellor Academic Policy and Planning Wayne G. Failor Vice-Chancellor Finance and Administration Edward P. Kelley, Jr. Vice-Chancellor Employee and Labor Relations Sarah V. Souris Vice-Chancellor Advancement BOARD OF GOVERNORS F . Eugene Dixon, Jr., Chairperson Judy Ansill, Vice-chairperson James L. Larson, Vice-chairperson Muriel Berman The Honorable Donald M. Carroll, Jr. The Honorable Jeffrey W. Coy Jennifer Crissman G. Edward DeSeve Floyd M. Mains Mary Napoli Joseph M. Nespoli Darren K. Parr Philip D. Rowe, Jr. Rebecca F. Gross The Honorable Jere W. Schuler James A. Hughes The Honorable Patrick J. Stapleton The Honorable F. Joseph Loeper Julius Uehlein CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA 351 CALIFORNIA UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA John Pierce Watkins, President COUNCIL OF TRUSTEES Judy Ansill, Chairperson Carmine Durzo, Vice-chairperson Aaron Selekman, Secretary and Student Trustee William F. Barry Gail Lese Robert Billick Frank Mascara Frank DeLuca Gwendolyn Simmons Paul Lemmon Steven Stout 352 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF ACADEMIC AFFAIRS Vice-President for Academic Affairs Nancy Z. Nelson Acting Associate Vice-President for Academic Affairs Donald J. Thompson George W. Crane Dean, School of Graduate Studies and Research Stephen A. Pavlak Dean, College of Education and Human Services Acting Associate Dean, College of Education and Human Services Regis Lamr Director of Student Teaching Betty A. Ford Dean, College of Science and Technology Richard B. Hart Associate Dean, College of Science and Technology Harry M. Langley Dean, College of Liberal Arts Jesse A. Cignetti Associate Dean, College of Liberal Arts Walter A. Brumm William L. Beck Dean of Library Services Library Systems Analyst Kathleen A. Joki Dean for Enrollment Management and Academic Services Norman G. Hasbrouck Assistant Director of Admissions Amy C. Woodward Assistant Director of Admissions Jeannine Metal Director, Placement and Career Services Stephanie Lashway Assistant Director, Placement and Career Services Charles E. Talbert Coordinator, Cooperative Education Dawn Wilson DePasquale Director of Institutional Research Richard L. Kline Director of Honors Program Jay R. Powell STUDENT DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES Vice-President for Student Development and Services Dean of Students Dean of Student Life/University Judicial Officer Dean for Student Services Associate Dean for Residence Life Director, University Dining Services Associate Dean for Support Services, Director for Social Equity Director, Women's Center, Disabled Services Associate Dean for Student Services Residence Hall Director Residence Hall Director Residence Hall Director Residence Hall Director Residence Hall Director Elmo Natali Paul E. Burd Phillip L. Hayes Dennis Riegelnegg William F. Behrendt Lenora Angelone Alan K. James Alberta Graham Tim Susick Paul Bums Colleen Crooks William Edmonds Shawn Urbine Leslie Louse ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF Athletic Director Associate Athletic Director Dean/International Student Adviser Counseling Psychologist Counseling Psychologist Counselor, Drug & Alcohol Specialist, Director of CHOICES Campus Ministry Director of Student Publications Executive Director, Student Association, Inc. Assistant Director, Student Association, Inc. Operations Manager, Student Association, Inc. Program Director, Student Association, Inc. Assistant Program Director, Student Association, Inc. Systems Analyst Comptroller, Student Association, Inc. Director, Fitness Center University Physician Head Nurse University Nurse University Nurse University Nurse University Nurse University Nurse University Nurse Nurse Educator Manager, Book Store, Student Association, Inc. Manager, University Dining Services 353 Tom Pucci Paul Flores Nancy J. Tait Lynn R. Surrey Dawn Moeller Liz Gruber Sr. Karen Larkins William Bennett Paul E. Burd Barry Niccolai Dave Smith Jay R. Wheeler John G. Watkins Richard Olshefski Anna Coleman Paul Fazio Raymond Nino, M.D. Celeste H.Roskevitch Virginia Saunders Mary Ann Keruskin Lois Sheridan Bernice Barnhart Claudia Martucci Janet Todaro Norma Snyder Linda Timko Paul Taylor 354 ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS AND STAFF ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE Vice-President for Administration and Finance Associate Vice President for Administration and Finance Comptroller Director of Computer Services Director of Financial Aid Director of Grants Director of Health and Safety Director of Personnel Director of Physical Plant Director of Public Safety Director of Purchasing Director of Budget Inventory and Facilities Officer Director of Payroll Allan J. Golden Eugene P. Grilli Vacant Richard E. Cerullo Gary Seelye Sandra Huska Thomas Hartley, Sr. Penelope Stanick Thomas Jameson Jack Duvall Carl Maurer Charles W. Zinsser, Jr. Vacant Margaret M. Wilson DEVELOPMENT AND EXTERNAL RELATIONS Vice-President for Development and External Relations Executive Director, Mon Valley Renaissance Director of Alumni Relations Director of Public Relations Homer R. Pankey Richard H. Webb Pauline M. Tonsetic Cleo C. Boyle FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 355 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATION (The date is that of first appointment to California University of Pennsylvania.) M . EILEEN AIJCBN. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY BDUCATION B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., Brigham Young Univenity DBNCIL K. BACKUS. (1983) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES A.B., Glenville State College; M.A. , West Virginia Univenity MITCHELL M. BAILEY. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Rutgen Univenity JAN W . BAWN0. (1966) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVIRONMENTALSCIBNCES B.A., Univenity of Louisville; M .S., Purdue University; Ph .D ., Univenity of Louisville ROI.UN M . BARBER. (1976) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE B.S ., Ohio State Univenity; M .S. , Ohio State Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity BRUCE D . BARNHART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; A.T .C. JOHN F. BAUMAN. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES B.A. , Uninua College; M.A., Temple Univenity; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity ROBERT A. BAUMAN. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPl!CIAL EDUCATION B.S., Geneseo College; M .S., Indiana Univenity; Ed.D., Indiana Univenity WILLIAM J. BBARDSLEY. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH B.A., West Virginia University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity WILLIAM L. BBCK. (1970) OHAN, LIBRARY SERVICES B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh WIWAM F. BEHRENDT. (1971) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, STUDENT SERVICES; OHAN FOR RESIDENCE UFB B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Univenity of Pittaburgh PBT8R J. BBLCH. (1968) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF 0RADUATB PROORAM, special education B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., West Virginia Univenity WIWAM BENNETT. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BN0USH; DIRECl'OR OF STUDENT PUBUCATIONS B.A., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .A., Univenity of Pittaburgh ROBERT M . BERRY. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB B.A. , Univenity of Maine; M .A., Univeraity of Maine FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 356 JOHN A. BHYER.. (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB B.Ed ., Duquemc Univenity; M.Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; M. Math., Univenity of South Carolina Wll.JJAM B. BIDDINOTON. (1977) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPORTS MEDICINE B.S ., Welt Virginia Univenity; M .S., Welt Virginia Univenity; A.T.C. FOSTER E. BILLHEIMBR. (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCBS B.S., PcMtylvania State Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Texas; Ph.D., Rutgen Univenity JOHN C. BLACK. (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONALSTUDIES B.S., Clarion Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pitllburah JERRY M . BLACKMON . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB; DIRl!CTOR, P.C . LABS B.S., Oklahoma State Univenity; M .S., Oklahoma State Univenity; Regiatcrcd Profeuional Engineer (Electrical) P.E. WIIJJAM F . BLANK. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T. , Duke Univenity G. H . BLAYNEY. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH B.A., Lafayette College; M.A ., Brown Univenity; B.Litt., Univenity of Oxford Wll.JJAM F . BLOSEL. (1976) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S., PeMtylvania State Univenity; M.B.A., Univenity of Pittsburgh; C .P.A. MARCELLA A. RYE BLOUT. (1968) PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ed.D., Welt Virginia Univenity DAVID F. BoEHM. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., Welt Liberty State College; M.S., Welt Virginia Univenity; Ph.D ., Welt Virginia Univenity MARKE. BRONAKOWSKI. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMtylvania BURREU. A. BROWN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S. , California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .B.A., Univenity of Pitllburgh; J .D ., Univenity of Pitllburgh EDWARD BROWN. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL WORK B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M.L .S., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; M .S.W., Univenity of Pitllburgh ROBERT A. BROWN. (1969) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES B.A., University of New Hampshire; M .Ed., Univenity of Pitllburgh; Ph.D., University of Pitllburgh WALTER A. BRUMM. (1988) ASSOCIATE DEAN, COI.J.JlOE OF UBERALARTS B.A., Wittenberg Univenity; B.D., Methodist Theological School of Ohio; M .A., Kent State Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 357 THOMAS P. BUCKELEW. (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., Muhlenberg College; M .S., Univenity of South Carolina; Ph .D., Univenity of South Carolina (1969) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DEAN OF STUDENTS B.A., West Virginia Univenity; M.A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed.D., Well Virginia Univenity PAULE. BURD . (1969) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY B.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; M .A., Univenity of Toronto; J.D., Duquesne Univenity JOHN J . BURNS. MALcolM P. CALLERY. (1978) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, THEATRE B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .F .A., Southern Illinois Univenity N. CAMPBELL. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B. Ed ., Southeastern Louisiana Univenity; M.S. , Univenity of Illinois; Ph.D., Univenity of Illinois DAVID (1973) PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., Bucknell University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh DoROTHY M. CAMPBELL. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., Univenity of Massachusetts; M .S., Eastern Kentucky Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of North Dakota JOHN P . CARROLL. (1990) INSTRUCTOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A., Marshall University; M .A ., Ohio University JAMES 0. CARTER . (1967) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Brigham Young Univenity RAYMOND A. CATALANO . M . ARsHAD CHAWDHRY . (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S., University of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.S., Univenity of Agriculture (Pakistan); M.A., Univenity of Maryland; M .S., University of Illinois; Ph .D., Univenity of Illinois A. CHRIST . (1970) PROFESSOR, EU!MENTARY EDUCATION B.S., University of PittBburgh; M.Ed ., University of PittBburgh; Ed.D., Pennsylvania State University RONALD (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FRESHMAN WRITING, ENGLISH B.A., St. Vincent College; M.A ., University of Minnesota; Ph.D., Univenity of Minnesota. EDWARD J . CHUTE. A. CIGNll1TI. (1968) DEAN, COLl..llOE OF LIBERAL ARTS B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Duquesne Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio State Univenity JESSE CLYDE W. CLENDANIEL. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A.T., Indiana Univenity M . CLINGERMAN . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., West Virginia Univenity DEBRA (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.A., Harvard College; M.A., Tufts University; Ph.D., University of PittBburgh lsMAIL COLE. 358 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY (1967) PROFESSOR, BNGLISH B.S ., Southern Illinois University; M.A., University of Illinois; Ph.D., University of Illinoi ■ PHILIP Y. COLEMAN. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HARTH SCIENCES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.S., California University of Pennsylvania DoNALD J. CONTE. ELAINE S. COSTEU.O. (1966) INSTRUCTOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE B.S . , California University of Pennsylvania ROBERT C. COWLES . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF FORENSIC ACTIVITIES, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A., Marietta College; M .A., Bowling Green State University JONI L. CRAMER . (1991) INSTRUCTOR, SPORTS MEDICINE B.S ., West Virginia University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; A.T.C . (1969) DEAN, GRADUATE SCHOOL AND RESEARCH B.S ., State University of New York at Brockport; M.S., State University of New York at Fredonia; Ph.D., Ohio University GEORGE W . CRANE. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania ALBERT DASCENZO . J. DEFILIPPO . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania; D .A., Carnegie BERNARD Mellon University ANETTB M . DENARDO . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES B.A., West Liberty State College; M.A., West Virginia University MANUEL G. DEMETRAXIS. (1991) INSTRUCTOR AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN , LIBRARY SERVICES B.S ., Radford University; M.S., Radford University; M.L.S. , Florida State University AUCH G . DENNISON . (1990) COORDINATOR, COOPERATIVE EDUCATION B.A., Grove City College; M .A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania DAWN WILSON DEPASQUALE. (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West Virginia University ELWIN DICKERSON. F . DICJCJE. (1966) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION B.S., Bridgewater State College; M .A., Michigan State University; Ed .D., Michigan State University ROBERT FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 359 ROBERT W. DILLON, SR. (1970) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH A.B., Fairfield University; M.A., Ohio University; Ph.D ., Ohio University GAILS. DITJCOFF. (1986) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., State University of New York at BinaJamton; M.S., State University of New York at Albany; Ph .D., State University of New York at Albany PAUL P. DoUNAR. (1968) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MUSIC B.S., Duquesne University; M.Ed., Duquesne University THEODORE L. DoMINICK. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCB B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Weat Virginia University RONALD G. DREUCCI. (1973) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D., West Virginia University RAYMONDE. DUNLEVY. (1978) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Indiana University of Pennsylvania DILAWAR MUMBY EDWARDS. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES I.Sc ., St. Aloyaiua' College, Jabalpur, India; B.E. (Hon■.), Govt. Engineering College, Jabalpur, India; M .E.(I), Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore, India; M .Sc. in Ed., Indiana University; Ph.D., Indiana University FRANKT. EDWARDS. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES B.A., Antioch College; B.S., Georgetown School of Foreign Service; M.A., Georgetown University; Ph .D. , Catholic Univenity of America ROGER C. EMELSON. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, THEATRE · B.A. , Beloit College; M .F .A., Carnegie Mellon University; Ph.D ., Carnegie Mellon University HARRY L . ERVIN . (1971) INSTRUCTOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION B.S ., Hardin-Simmon■ College R . MICHAEL FELDMAN . (1969) PROFESSOR, SPF.llCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.A., University of Iowa; Ph .D., Northweatcm University; CCC Audiology ANTONIO J. FERNANDES. (1961) ASSOCtATB PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB B.A., Well Virginia University; M.S., Weat Virginia University SUMNER FERRIS. (1964) ASSOCtATE PROFESSOR, BNOUSH B.A., Harvard College PAUL A. FLoRES. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ATHumcs; ASSOCtATE DIRECTOR OF ATHumcs; WOMEN 'S BASKllTBALL COACH B.S. , Eaat Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania; M.S., East Stroudsburg University of Pennsylvania FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 360 L. FOIL. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF TELEVISION STUDIO, COMMUNICATION STUDIES 8.S .S., Northwestern University; M.A., Northwestern University; Ph.D ., Northwestern University SYLVIA J. K. FOLMAR.. (1969) PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES B.A., Samford University; M.A., Binningham-Southern College; Ph.D., University of Alabama (l'uacalooaa) BETTY A . FORD . (1989) DIRECTOR STUDENT TEACHING, COLI.EOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES B.A., Fairmont State College; M .A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., Ohio University (1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ENGLISH B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., North Dakota State University RONALD L. FORSYTHE. (1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES 8.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State University GEOROE J . FRANOOS . Fusco. (1967) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE 8 .S., Duquesne University; M .S., Duquesne University; Ph.D., University of Colorado GABRIEL C . E. GABOR . (1964) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., West Virginia University; M .S., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., West Virginia University WILUAM (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Michigan State University JOHNS . GIBSON, JR. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES 8.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M.Ed ., University of Pittsburgh; M .Pub.Mgmt., Carnegie Mellon University LIZBETH A . GILLE'ITE. CHARLES A. GISMONDI. COACH (1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPEECH PATHOLOOY AND AUDIOLOOY; HEAD BASEBALL B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.S ., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology (1981) VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE B.A., Fairleigh Dickinson University; M .A.T., Fairleigh Dickinson University; Ph .D ., New York University Ail.AN J . GOLDEN . MAx A. GONANO . (1982) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR OF BANDS B.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University; M.F.A., Carnegie Mellon University (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Pennsylvania State University JUDITH A . GooD . JACK D. GOODSTEIN. (1967) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ENGLISH B.A., Queens College; M.A., New York University; Ph .D ., New York University (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE 8 .A., Colgate University; Ph .D ., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill GREOO GOULD . (1971) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, WOMEN ' S CENTER B.S., Robert College; M. Ed., Loyola University of Chicago ALBERTHAL . GRAHAM. P. GRJW. (1982) ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT, ADMINISTRATION AND FINANCE B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M.B.A., University of Pittsburgh EUGENE FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 361 RICHARD C. GRIM. (1983) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOOY B.S ., Arbnaaa State Univenity; M.S ., Arkanaa■ State Univenity; Ed.D., Univenity ofTenneuee H. GRIMES. (1961) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH B.A., Welt Virginia Univenity; M.A., West Virginia Univenity ROBHRT RICHARD H. GRINSTEAD. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, ART B.A.E., Ohio State Univenity; B.F.A. , Ohio State Univenity; M .F .A., Ohio State Univenity; M .A.E., Ohio State Univenity R. GROSS . (1978) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE B.S ., Carnegie Mellon Univenity; Ph .D., Univenity of Pittaburgh MICHAEL EI.J7Alllmf A. GRUBHR . (1990) INSTRUCTOR, STUDBNT SHRVICBS B.S., Bowling Green State Univenity; M.A. , Youngstown State Univenity A. GUSTIN. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, BARTH SCJBNCBS B.S., Indiana State Univenity; M.A., Indiana State Univenity WIWAM MICHAEL HACIIBIT. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIBNCE B.S ., Univenity of Delaware; M .S., University of Delaware GBNB PATRICK HALB<>TH. (1965) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BNOUSH B.A., Marquette Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Chicago I. HALL. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFBSSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCJBNCE B.S., Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Pittaburgh JUDITH JOHN M. HANCHIN. (1967) PROFESSOR, BNOUSH B.A., Duque1nc Univenity; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Indiana University of Pennsylvania A. HART. (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, OHRONTOLOOY B.S ., Nebraska Wesleyan Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Graduate Aging Specialist Certificate, MARY University of Nebraska, Omaha RICHARD B. HART . (1968) DBAN, COLLEOB OF SCJBNCE AND TECHNOLOGY B.S ., Franklin and Marshall College; Ph.D. , University of Minneaota PATRICIA L. HARTMAN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFBMOR, BNOUSH B.A., Abilene Christian Univenity; M .A.T ., Johna Hopkins University; M .A., Ohio Univenity; Ph.D., Ohio University NORMAN G. HAsBROUCK. (1980) DBAN, BNROUMBNT MANAOBMBNT AND ACADBMIC SHRVICBS B.A., Thiel College; M.A., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania JOHN A. HAsBUUO. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCJBNCE B.S., Lock Haven University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny AU A . HAsHBMI . (1982) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S., Univenity of Tehran; M.P.A., University of Tehran; M.B.A., St. Louis Univenity; Ph .D., Northwestern Univenity 362 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY HOWARD L . HAUSHBR (1966) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB B.S., Wayneaburg College; M.A., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., University of Virginia PHIL HAYES. (1970) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SBRVJCBS; DEAN FOR STUDENT LIFE B.S., Fainnont State College; M .Ed., West Virginia University; Ed.D., West Virginia University C . HEIM. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE BA, University of Pittaburgh; MA, University of Pittaburgh; M. Phil., Cambridge University JOSEPH RICHARD JAMBS HBLUX)BLBR. (1988) INSTRUCTOR, CHAIR, AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, THEATRE B.B.A., University of Toledo; M.A., Bowling Green State University, Ph .D ., Bowling Green State University JAY D . HELSEL. (1961) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Pennsylvania State University; Ed.D ., University of Pittaburgh WU.LIAM HENDRICKS . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.A. , Caae Western Reserve University; M.A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh WU.LIAM D . HEPNER. (1956) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University BARBARA HESS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania WALLACB D . HOOOB. (1968) PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; Ed.D., West Virginia University KARLA A . HOFFMAN . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCB B.S., Towson State University; M.Ed ., University of Massachusetts; CAGS University of Massachusetts HALBERT H. HOl.LOWAY. {1985) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSOCIATE DlRllCTOR OF FORENSICS, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A., San Jose State University; M.A., San Francisco State University; Ph .D., Wayne State University LARRY D . HORATH . (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., Eastern Illinois University; M.S., Eastern Illinois University; Ph .D., Texas A&M University L. HORATH. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., Peru State College; M .S., Texas A & M University; Ph .D ., Texas A&M University REN~ KAREN L. HORNUNG . (1981) PROFESSOR, GERONTOLOGY . B.A., Geneva College; M .A., University of New Mexico; Ph.D ., University of Nebraska; Graduate A~ng Specialist, University of Michigan; Faculty Fellow, Geriatric Education Center of Pennsylvania RONALD C . HOY. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR , PHILOSOPHY B.A., University of California at Berkeley; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh STEVE C . HSIUNG . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.Ed., National Kaohsiung Nonna! University; M.S, University of North Dakota; MS . EE., Kansas State University FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY BARRY B. HUNTER. 363 (1968) PROFESSOR AND DIRECI'OR OF ORADUATE STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., California University of Penmylvania; M.S ., University of Minnesota; M .Ed., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University MADELON JACOBA. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH B.A., Albion College; M.A., Purdue University; Ph.D ., Purdue University (1970) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S., Eastern Michigan University; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University; Ph .D., Wayne State University ALU..N D. JACOBS . (1984) ASSOCIATE DEAN, STUDENT SERVICES; SOCtAL EQUITY OFFICER B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh ALAN K. JAMES . KIRK R. JOHN. (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., California University of Penmylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist; Pennsylvania Licensed Psychologist L. JOHNSON. (1968) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE B.S., University of Kansas; Ph .D ., Louisiana State University DAVID A. JOICL. (1988) SYSTEMS ANALYST, LIBRARY SERVICES B .S ., State University of New York at Buffalo; M.S.I.S., University of Pittsburgh KATHLEEN CAROLYN JONES . (1975) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES B.A., St. Augustine's College; M.A., North Carolina Central University T . JONES . (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S. , Waynesburg College; M.S ., Well Virginia University; C .P.A. DAVID GERALDINE M . JONES. (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND UPWARD BOUND DIRECTOR, ACADEMIC DEVllLOPMENT AND SERVICES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of Pennsylvania (1991) INSTRUCTOR, EARTH SCIENCES B.S., Salem State College BETTY I . JOYNT N. KAl.t. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A., Governors State University; M .A. , Governors State University; M.A., University of Illinois, Chicago; Ph .D., Indiana University, Bloomington MACDONALD JOHN R. KALuS . (1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., University of Pittsburgh (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPORTS MEDICINE B.S ., University of Connecticut; M.S ., University of Southern Maine; P.T.; A .T .C . ROBERT H . KANE, JR. 364 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY CAROLL. KAPIAN. (1984) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES B.A., Northwellem Univenity; M.A., Northwellem Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittaburgh GARY W . KENNEDY. (1962) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh CLYDE Y. KIANG. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHIBF CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES B.A., National Taiwan Univenity; M.A., Wellem Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity WIUJAM G. KIMMEL. (1976) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.A., Wilkes College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennsylvania State Univenity RICHARD L. KLINE. (1972) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR OF INSTITUTIONAL SEARCH B.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania ARTHUR W. KNIGHT. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.A., San Franciaco State Univenity; M .A ., San Franciaco State University DAVID V. KOLICX:. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; A.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania STANLBY A. KOMACBK. (1987) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., Miami University; Ed.D., West Virginia University ROBERT J. KOPKO. (1979) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S., Elon College; M.S., Pennsylvania State Univenity; C .P.A. ROBERT A. KORCHECK. (1967) PROFESSOR AND COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE STUDIES, ENGLISH B.A., St. Bonaventure University; M.A., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D., West Virginia Univenity KADE Kos . (1961) PROFESSOR AND CATALOGER, LIBRARY SERVICES B.S ., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S., Syracuse University; Ed.D ., University of Pittsburgh ALAN H. KRUECK. (1966) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES B.A ., Syracuse University; M.A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., University of Zurich EwALD C. KRUBOER. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMBNTALSCIENCES B.S., Oshkosh State College; M.S ., West Virginia University ANDREW E. KWORTEK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT), MILITARY SCIENCE B.A ., California University of Pennsylvania; Captain, U.S. Anny PAULL. LANCASTER. (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania HARRY M . LANGI.BY. (1989) ASSOCIATB DEAN, SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY B.S ., Texas Lutheran College; M.S ., Clemson Univenity; Ph.D., Clemson University FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 365 (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENOUSH A.B., Niagara University; M .A., Niagara University FREDERICKS. LAP!SARDI. (1988) DIRECTOR, PLACBMBNT AND CARBBR SERVICES B.A., University of Pennsylvania; M .S.Ed ., Duquesne University STEPHANIE URCHICIC LAsHWAY. REGIS LAzoR. (1972) ACTING ASSOCIATE DBAN, COLLBOE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES; ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBCIAL EDUCATION B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., University of Delaware (1966) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of North Carolina; Ph.D., Pennsylvania State University ANTHONY u.zzARO . (1986) PROFBSSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S., West Virginia University; M .B.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh KARBN L. LBMAsTERS . (1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Illinois State College STEPHEN LBVBNDOS. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.A., Brandeis University; M .S., Brown University; D.A., Carnegie Mellon ROBERT A. LBVJN . T. LITTLB. (1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D., West Virginia University ROBERT (1975) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES R.N., Uniontown Hospital School of Nursing; B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D ., West Virginia University; M.S ., California University of Pennsylvania SHIRLEY A. LITTLB. IRA T. LoNDON . (1970) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., University of Delaware; Ph .D ., University of Connecticut (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S ., Youngstown State University; M.S., Michigan Technological University JOHN W . LoNEY. SAM P . LoNICH . (1989) INSTRUCTOR, PSYCHOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., California University of Pennsylvania JOHN H. LUCY . (1972) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph .D., The Ohio State University (1970) PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Georgia; Ph.D ., University of Georgia ANDREW J. MACHUSKO. 366 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY F . MEL MADDBN. (1976) PROFESSOR, COUNSBLOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES S.T.B., St. Anthony-on-the Hudaon (with Catholic Univenity); M.A., Montclair State Colleje; Ed.D., Univenity of North Dakota SEAN C. MADDEN. (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES B.A., Xavier Univenity; M.A., Univenity of Notre Dame; D.A., Carnegie Mellon Univenity A. MARCINEK. (1983) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, NURSING B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.S .N., University of Maryland; Ed .D., West Vi[Jinia University; R.N . MAROARBT J . GREOORY MARTIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, BU!MBNTARY EDUCATION B.A., Miami University; M.A.T., Cornell Univenity; Ph.D., Cornell Univenity F . MARUSKJN . (1966) PROFESSOR AND COLLECJ1ON DHVBLOPMBNT LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Piu.burgh ALBERT ELIZABETH MAsoN . (1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; SUPERVISOR, SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY CLINIC B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Indiana Univenity of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., Ball State Univenity; NCSP; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist RICHARD M. MATOVICH . (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, AND INTER.UBRARY LOAN/DOCUMENTS LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Duque1ne Univenity; M.L.S., Univenity of Piu.burgh E. MAXwllU.. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CURRICULUMUBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES B.S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., University of Piu.burgh; M .L.S., Rutgen Univenity LoLA P. McGREW. (1968) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, HISTORY AND B.S., Brigham Young University; M.A., Brigham Young University AN11fONY URBAN AFFAIRS J . DRBW McGUKJN . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, DIRllCTOR OF COMMUNICATION LAB/RBSBARCH CBNTBR, COORDINATOR OF GRADUATE COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, COMMUNICATION STUDIBS B.A., Freed-Hardeman College; S.C .T ., Murny State University; Ph.D., Univenity of Nebraska PHYLus S . MCILWAIN . (1969) PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION B.S., Slippery Rock Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed. , Indiana University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., University of Piu.burgh CAROL A. MCMAHON . (1974) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION B.S., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Piu.burgh D . FRANK MCPHERSON . (1989) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBBCH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY B.S ., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M .S., University of Hawaii; Ph.D., Purdue University; C.C .C. Speech Pathology; C.C.C. Audiology FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 367 JAMFS T. MCVHY. (1966) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BNOUSH B.A., Youlliltown Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Virginia JAMFS R . MBANS, JR. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S., Well Virginia Univenity; M .S ., Univenity of Pittaburgh MELBNYz.ER. (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELBMENTARY EDUCATION B.S., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M.Ed ., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; Ed .D ., Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania BBVHRLY J. MBNDou. . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS M.S., Wayneaburg College; M .S ., Robert Morri■ College; C .P.A. EDWARD JBANNINBMBTAL. (1985) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS B.A., California Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennaylvania L. MICHAEL. (1969) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIBNCB B.S., Jameatown Colleae; M .A., Univenity of North Dakota; Ed.D., Ball State Univenity RONALD RICHARD MIBCZNIKOWSKI. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART B.S., Indiana Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .A ., State Univenity of New York at Alfred Univenity PATRICIA MILFORD . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A., George Mason Univenity; M .A ., Eastern Michigan Univenity; Ph.D ., Pennaylvania State Univenity C. ALLAN MILLER. (1976) PROFESSOR AND DIRBCTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVIRONMENTAL SCIBNCES B.S., Buena Villa Colleae; M .A ., Mankato State College; Ph.D ., North Dakota State Univenity L . MILLER. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.S., Dickinson State Univenity; M.A ., Colorado State Univenity PATRICK DAWN M. MOELLER. (1990) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, STUDBNT SERVICES B.A. , Univenity of Virginia; M.S. , Syracuse Univenity; Ph.D ., Syracuse Univenity SUSAN J . MONOBU.. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND BCONOMICS B.A., Seton Hill Colleae; M .A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Univenity of Pittsburgh C. MOON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.A., Kalamazoo College; M .A.T., Oberlin College; Ph.D ., Michigan State Uruver■ ity THOMAS JOHN P. MORESCHI, JR. (1972) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.S ., California Univenityof Pennaylvania; M .Ed., Univer■ity of Pittsburgh; Ed.D ., Univer■ ity of Pittsburgh LAWRBNCB L. MOSES. (1969) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, BARTH SCIBNCES B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennaylvania; M .Ed ., Pennaylvania State Pittaburgh Univer■ ity ; Ph.D., University of 368 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNNERSITY JBANETTB MUWNS. (1975) PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND BNVJRONMENTAL SCIBN<:m B.A ., Wayne State University; M .S ., Waync State University; Ph.D., North Dakota State University 8BN A. MULE. (1972) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, SPllCIAL BDUCATION B.S. , State University of New York at Genc1e0; M .Ed., University of Rochester WJWAM M . MURDICK. (1969) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BN0USH B.A. , State University of New York; M .F .A., University of Iowa JOHN P. NASS. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE B.A., Michigan State University; M .A., Western Michigan University; Ph.D. , The Ohio State University El.MO NATAU. (1962) VICE-PRBSIDBNT, STUDENTDHVELOPMBNT AND SERVJ<:m B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University J . ALAN NATAU. (1986) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EN0USH B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., California University of Pennsylvania JOANN NELSON . (1969) PROFESSOR, BDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.L.S ., University of Pittsburgh; Ph.D ., University of Pittsburgh NANCY Z. NELSON (1967) VJCE-PRBSIDENT, ACADEMIC AFFAIRS B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., University of Pittsburgh; Ed.D., University of Pittsburgh RICHARD R . NBMBC. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPBECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology DIANE H . NETTLES. (1989) ASSOCIATB PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION B.A., University of South Florida; M .A., University of South Florida; Ph.D ., University of South Florida MARsHA L. NOLF. (1987) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND BIBUOORAPHIC LECl'URER, UBRARY SERVJ<:m B.A., Waynesburg College; M .L.S., University of Pittsburgh GEORGE D . NOVAIC. (1959) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Litt., University of Pittsburgh MARK L. NOWAIC. (1985) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOGY B.S., University of Wisconsin, Stout; M.S ., Texas A&M University; Ed.D., Texaa A&M University; C .P.R. DAVIDE. OLSON, (1991) INSTRUCTOR, ART B.A., Pennsylvania State University; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University MAHMOOD A. K. OMARZAI . (1979) PROFESSOR, BUSIN~ AND ECONOMICS B.A., Y.D. College, India; M .A., Karachi University, Pakilltln; M.A., Indiana University; Ph.D ., Indiana University FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 369 J. ORIANDI . (1966) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.A., St. Vincent College; M .A., Well Virginia Univenity; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity ANGELO J. ORR. (1969) PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Pennsylvania State Univenity; Ed.D. , Pennsylvania State ROGER Univenity J . ORSAG. (1967) ASWCIATE PROFESSOR, BARTH SCJl!NCES B.S. , Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.L., Univenity of Pittsburgh HARRY DAVID W . PAJERSKI. (1969) PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCJl!NCE B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.S., Univenity of New Hampshire; Ph .D . , University of Pittsburgh SUZANN!! M. PALKO . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, NURSING B.S.N ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .S .N ., University of Pennsylvania; R .N . HOMER R. PANKEY. (1965) VICE-PRl!SIDENT, DEVELOPMENT AND BXTERNAL RELATIONS B.A., Shepherd College; M .A ., West Virginia University; Ed.D ., West Virginia University RALDo 0. PARASCENW . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M .Ed., University of Pittsburgh; M. Lit., University of Pittsburgh; D .Ph. & Lit., International University of Mexico J . PARK. (1977) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.P.A., Korea University; M.A., Temple University; Ph.D ., Temple University YOUNG A. PARKINSON . (1969) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART B.S ., Indiana University; M.S., University of Pittsburgh LESLIE WJWAM G . PARNELL. (1968) PROFESSOR, COUNSELOR EDUCATION AND SERVICES B .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., Eastern Michigan University; Ed.D ., West Virginia University C. PATHAK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.A., University of Delhi, India; M.A., University of Delhi, India; L .L .B., University of Delhi, India; M.A., PRATUL Univenity of Wisconsin-Milwaukee; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee MARILYN M. PATTERSON. (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, GERONTOLOGY B.A., Florida State University; M.S., Memphis State University; Ed.D. , Memphis State University; Certification, National Board for Certified Counselors K . PAULSON . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BIOLOGICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE B.A., Gustavus Adolphus College; M .S ., Michigan Technological University; Ph.D ., University of Oldahoma BRIAN STEPHEN A . PAVUJC. (1971) DEAN , COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND HUMAN SERVICES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of PeMsylvania; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh 370 FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY JosBPH E . PECosH. (1967) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh PAMELA 8. PlmUCK. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, READING CLINIC B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed .D, University of Pittaburgh JEFFREY L . PlrrR.UCCJ . (1981) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; HEAD FOOTBAIL COACH B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., California University of Pennsylvania WIWB H . PIOG. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, SOCIAL SCIENCE B.S., University of Tennessee; M.A., University of Tennessee ALBERT R. PoKOL. (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, CHAIR, AND REFERENCE LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SERVICES B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Duquesne University; M.L.S ., University of Pittaburgh ALTON N . PoWE. (1973) PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D., University of Pittsburgh JAY R. PoWELL. (1972) PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION; DIRECfOR, HONORS PROGRAM B.S., University of Illinois; M.A., Southern Illinois University; Ph .D ., Southern Illinois University WIWAM J. PROCASKY. (1965) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , University of Nebraska; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh TOM G. Pucci. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ATHLETICS; DIRECfOR OF ATHLETICS. B.S., California State University al Sacramento; M.Ed ., Pacific University; Ed.D ., University of New Mexico. ANTHONY S. PvzoROWSKJ . (1990) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE Associate, Pennsylvania State University; B.S., West Virginia University; M.S ., West Virginia University; Ph.D., West Virginia University; E.l.T. JOANNE RAulJGH . (1975) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ACT 10 I DIRECfOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT ANO SERVICES B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California University of Pennsylvania CONNIE MACK REA . (1963) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ENGLISH B.A., Centenary College; B.S., Centenary College; M .Ed ., University of Colorado; M .A., University of Southern California GEORGE A. REID . (1968) PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.A., Muskingham College; M.S ., Westminster College; Ph .D., University of Pittsburgh MARGARITA RIBAR. (1985) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES ANO CULTURES B.S., Universidad Pedag6gica, Bogota, Colombia; M.S ., Duquesne University MICHAEL K. RICH . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS ANO ECONOMICS B.S., Utah State University; M.B.A., Kent State University F. DENNIS RIEOELNEGO. (1978) DEAN OF STUDENT SERVICES B.A., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 371 (1988) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR (ADJUNCT) AND OFFICBR. IN CHARO£!, MIUTARY SCIENCE B.A., Virginia Military Institute; Captain, U.S. Anny STEVEN ROBBR.TS . (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIE!NCE! B.A., Hunter College; M .S., New York University MICHAEL WALT ROBIN. ill. (1969) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH A .B. , Boston University; M .A ., University of Michigan; Ph .D ., University of Michigan HORACE S. ROCKWOOD, JOANNB RODRIOUBZ- NAESBR . (1984) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF STUDENT SUPPORT SBR.VJCBS, ACADBMIC DHVELOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS B.A., California University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania D . ROMBOSKI . (1969) PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR. SCIE!NCE B.A., Washington and Jefferson College; M .A., Rutgers University; M.S. , Rutgers University; Ph .D ., Rutgers University I.AWRBNCE (1991) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.S ., Waynesburg College; M .S ., California University of Pennsylvania; C.M .A . FRBD RossBLL, JR. (1973) PROFESSOR, ACADBMIC DBVBLOPMBNT AND SBR.VJCBS B.S. , West Virginia University; M.Ed. , California University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh MBI..VIN J. SALLY . (1969) PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION B.S ., Duquesne University; M .Ed ., Duquesne University; Ph .D ., University of Pittsburgh ANTHONY J . SALUDIS. (1965) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR , INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Ball State University JOSEPH A. SANFILIPPO . (1966) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, FORBION LANOUAOBS AND CULTURES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A. , West Virginia University ELSBBTH E . SANT£!£!. R. SAPKO . (1961) ASSOCIATE! PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIBNCB B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.A., University of Pittsburgh DoNALD D . SCARMAZZ! . (1967) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, BI..BMBNTARY EDUCATION B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania JOSEPH (1968) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ART B.S., Kutztown University of Pennsylvania; M .Ed ., Temple University PHILIP E. SCHALTBNBRAND. G . SCHICKEL . (1988) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M. Ed. , Clemson University JOSEPH (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIE!NCB B.S. , Pennsylvania State University; M.S ., West Virginia University ELWYN M . SCHMIDT . (1966) PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; Ed.D ., Texas A&M University CHARLES A . SCHULBR. FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 372 WII.J.JAM F. SCHWEIKER. (1972) PRO~R, SOCIAL SCIBNCE B.A., Welt Virginia University; M.A., University of Minnesota; Ph .D. , University of Minnesota LISA M. SCHWBRDT. (1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, BNOLISH B.S. , Florida International University; B.A., Florida International University; M .A ., Purdue University; Ph.D., Purdue University RICHARD D . SCOTT . (1971) PRO~R, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., PeMaylvania State University; M .S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., University ofTenneuee TBRRY E. SCOTT. (1966) ASSOCIATB PRO~R AND CHAIR, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION B.A., William Jewell Colle1re; M.A., Washington University of St. Louis LoUISB E. SBRAFIN. (1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BUSINBSS AND BCONOMICS B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; E.M.B.A. , University of Pittsburgh BBTTY SHAW. (1988) ASSISTANT PRO~R AND RBFBRBNCB LIBRARIAN, LIBRARY SBRVICES B.S., University of Pittsburgh; M.L.S ., Carnegie Mellon University; M .A., Indiana State University (1991) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BDUCATIONAL STUDIBS B.S. , California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock University; Ph.D. , University of Pittsburgh CARYL SHBFFIBlD . A. SHBU.PINSICY. (1986) ASSISTANT PRO~R, NURSING B.S.N., University of Akron; M .S.N., University of Pittsburgh; R.N.; P.N.P. DBBRA JOHN W. SHIMKANIN. (1990) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, BLBMBNTARYBDUCATION B.S ., Moravian College; M .S., Clarion University of Pennsylvania; Ph .D., Penn State University Fl.oYO W. SHUL.BR. (1966) ASSISTANT PRO~R, HBALTH AND PHYSICAL BDUCATION B.A., Welt Liberty State College; M .S., Welt Virginia University ALFRED E. SIMPSON . (1976) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S ., Southern University; M.A., Welt Virginia University; Ph.D., The Ohio State University JOHNS . SKOCIK, JR. (1967) ASSOCIATB PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCB B.S ., California University of PeMaylvania; M .S., Welt Virginia University A. SKOCIK. (1990) ASSISTANT PRO~R, MATHBMATICS AND COMPUTBR SCIBNCE B.S., California University of PeMaylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania NANCY MICHAEL J. SLAVIN . (1989) ASSISTANT PRO~R, THBATRE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Welt Virginia University (1968) PRO~R, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S. , California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California University of PeMaylvania; Ed.D., Texa, A&M University DAR.REILL. SMITH. FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 373 G. RALPH SMITH, 0 . (1964) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, BNOUSH A.B., Franklin and Marshall College GARY A. SMITH. (1967) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, PHILOSOPHY B.A., Juniata College; M .A., Wayne State Univenity MADEUNE C. SMITH. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, ENOUSH B.A., Mt. St. Mary College; M .A., SUNY-New Paiz; Ph.D., West Virginia Univenity JANNENE SOlITHWORTH-MACINTYRB. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, BLBMBNTARY EDUCATION B.S., Ball State Univenity; M.A., Ball State Univenity; Ed.D ., Univenity of PittBburgh MAROARBT A. SPRATT. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, HISTORY AND URBAN STUDIES B.A., Transylvania Univenity; M.A., Duke Univenity; Ph.D., Univenity of Kentucky MARILYNN STANARD. (1987) PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.A., Western Michigan Univenity; M.A., Michigan State Univenity; Ph .D ., Michigan State Univenity JACQUEUNE STEFANIK. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, NURSINO B.S.N., Pennsylvania State Univenity; M .S.N., West Virginia Univenity;M.P.A., West Virginia Univenity; C.R.N.P. JEFFREYS . SUMEY. (1990) ASSISTANT PROFBSWR, INDUSTRY AND TBCHNOLOOY B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., West Virginia Univenity LYNN R. SURREY. (1988) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSBUNO PSYCHOLOOIST B.A., Olivet Nazarene Univenity; M.A. , Univenity of Mis10Uri at Kansai City; Ph.D., Univenity of Miaaouri at Kansas City GBNE G. SUSKALO. (1967) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, MUSIC B.S., Duquesne Univenity; M.S., Duquesne Univenity; M .Music, Duquesne Univenity SHIRLEY J. SUTTON. (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, MUSIC; DIRECTOR, CALIFORNIA CHORALE B.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity; M.Mus.Ed., Drake Univenity DENNIS C . SWEENEY. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFBSWR, PSYCHOLOOY B.S., Univenity of Nol1h Carolina; M .A., Bowling Green State Univenity; Ph.D., Bowling Green State Univenity BARBARA ANN DEMAR.TINO SWYHART. (1986) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY B.A., Marquette Univenity; M .A., Marquette Univenity; Ph .D., Temple Univenity MARC A. SYLVESTER. (1973) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES, BIOLOOICAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.A., Waahington and Jeffenon College; M.S ., West Virginia Univenity; Ph .D ., West Virginia Univenity FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 374 (1971) PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; COUNSELOR, CENTER FOR STUDENT DEVELOPMENT 8.S. , Lake Erie College; M .S., Northern Illinois Univenity; Ed.D ., Indiana Univenity NANCY J . TAIT. E. TALBERT . (1978) ASSOCIATE DJJtECTOR, PL\CEMENT AND CAREER SERVICES B.A., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., California Univenity of Pennsylvania CHARLES P. (1978) PROFESSOR, BUSINESS AND ECONOMICS B.A., Marietta College; M.A ., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , Univenity of Pittaburgh RONAID TARULLO . (1965) PROFESSOR, ENGLISH 8.A. , West Virginia Univenity; 8 .S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .A .. , West Virginia Univenity Pennsylvania; M.Ed., California Univenity of PeMSylvania; Ed .D ., West Virginia Univenity C . R . THOMAS. DoNALD J. THOMPSON . (1969) ACTING ASSOCIATE VICE-PRESIDENT FOR ACADEMIC AFFAIRS; PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES B.A., Monmouth College; M.A. , Indiana Univenity; Ph .D ., Washington Univenity JOHN M. THOMPSON . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; M .S., Univenity of Pittaburgh; Ph.D ., Univenity of Pittaburgh (1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MUSIC 8 .S. , The Juilliard School; M.A., Columbia Univenity; P.O., Teachen College of Columbia Univenity ALBERT nBE!RIO . G. URBINE. (1990) INSTRUCTOR, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M .Ed., CleDlllOn Univenity SUSAN JOHN R. VARGO . (1970) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ELEMENTARY EDUCATION B.S., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.A., West Virginia Univenity (1984) PROFESSOR, EARTH SCIENCES B.S ., California Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.S., Syracuse Univenity; Ph .D ., Syracuse Univenity ROBERT A . VARGO . (1990) ASSOCIATE, INDUSTRY AND TECHNOLOGY B.S., DUX School of Mines, Czechoslovakia; M.8.A., Baldwin-Wallace College; M .S., Columbia Pacific Univenity JAROSLAV V . VAVERXA . L. WAHL. (1972) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, ACADEMIC DEVELOPMENT AND SERVICES B.S ., Edinboro Univenity of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Slippery Rock: Univenity of Pennsylvania DEAN JOHN H. WALSH . (1961) PROFESSOR, PHILOSOPHY A .B., Duquesne Univenity; M.A., Duquesne Univenity; Ph .D ., Georgetown University A. WATERHOUSE. (1986) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, ENOUSH B.A., University of Pittsburgh; M.F.A ., Univenity of Pittsburgh; Ph.D., Ohio University CAROLE FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 375 JOHN PIERCE WATKINS . (1957) PRESIDENT B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.A ., West Virginia University; Ph.D., University of Pittaburgh RICHARD H . WEBB . {1969) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, STUDENT SERVICES; DIRECTOR, MON VALUN RENAISSANCE B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University BRIAN E . WEINRICH. (1984) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S ., Pennsylvania State University; M.A ., Pennsylvania State University; M .S. , Shippensburg University of Pennsylvania BRUCE L . WESTON . (1972) PROFESSOR, FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND CULTURES B.S., Northwestern University; M.A., University of Michigan; Ph .D., University of Michigan PAUL D . WILUAMS. (1986) PROFESSOR AND DIRECTOR OF MATH LAB, MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTER SCIENCE B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M .S., Clarkson University; Ed .D., University of Pittaburgh SYLVIA S . WILUAMS . (1965) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY; COORDINATOR, GRADUATE PROGRAM; DIRECTOR, SCHOOL PsYCHOLOGY CLINIC B.A. , Pennsylvania State University; M .A., West Virginia University; Pennsylvania Certified School Psychologist; Licensed Psychologist BEVERLY G. WILLISON. (1978) PROFESSOR, SOCIAL WORK B.A., Duquesne University; M .S.W., University of Pittaburgh; Ed.D., West Virginia University; N.C.C ., L.S.W., A.C .S.W. MAURICE E. WILSON. (1969) PROFESSOR, PSYCHOLOGY B.A., Wofford College; M .A., William and Mary University; Ph .D ., Emory University JAMES WOOD . (1987) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SOCIAL SCIENCE B.A ., Colorado State University; M .A., Arizona State University; Ph .D ., Arizona State University AMY C . WOODWARD. (1984) ASSISTANT DIRECTOR, ADMISSIONS B.S ., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., California University of Pennsylvania WILLIAM A. YAHNER. (1989) INSTRUCTOR AND COORDINATOR, WRITING CENTER, ENGLISH B.S, Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; M .A ., Edinboro University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D. , Indiana University of Pennsylvania ALBERT E . YATES . (1964) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND CHAIR, SPEECH PATHOLOGY AND AUDIOLOGY B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M .A., West Virginia University; CCC Speech Pathology GEORGE YOCHUM . (1989) ASSISTANT PROFESSOR, COMMUNICATION STUDIES B.A ., University of Pittaburgh; M .A., University of Pittaburgh; Ph.D. , University of Pittaburgh JOHN R. YOUNG. (1991) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, EDUCATIONAL STUDIES B.A., Lincoln University; M .Litt. , University of Pittaburgh; Ph .D ., University of Pittaburgh ~GELA K . ZONDOS. (1966) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, SPECIAL EDUCATION B.S ., Slippery Rock University of Pennsylvania; M .A., Michigan State University; Ph.D ., New York University FACULTY AND ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY 376 L . ZoPPB'ITI . (1961) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR, PHYSICAL SCIENCE B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed ., Pennsylvania State University ROBERT EDWIN M. ZUCHELKOWSKI. (1985) ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR AND ASSISTANT CHAIR, ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES B.S., California University of Pennsylvania; Ph.D., West Virginia University BJOLOOICAL AND EMERITI 377 PROFESSORS EMERITI The honorary status of professor emeritus is awarded to retired members of the faculty on recommendation of their academic departments and approval by the President and the Trustees of the University. Faculty members who have only recent retired have not yet had the opportunity to be designated emeriti.) It signifies dedicated service to the University and demonstrates that, though retired from teaching, the emeritus professor maintains a valued relationship with California University of Pennsylvania. Dr. Robert H. Aldstadt (1963-1988) Dr. George S. Allen (1971-1988) Mr. James T. Anthony (1964-1981) Dr. Arthur L. Ball (1964-1984) Mrs. Ruth Barry (1962-1979) Dr. William R. Benedetti (1965-1990) Mr. August J. Bethem (1961-1983) Mr. Richard M. Birch (1957-1989) Dr. William L. Black (1965-1975) Dr. Vernon L. Bloemker (1962-1990) Mr. Gale H. Boak (1967-1986) Mr. J. Herschel Bowlen (1946-1969) Dr. Clarence L. Brammer (1969-1985) Mr. Charles A. Butler (1961-1985) Dr. Merrill G. Campbell (1948-1974) Ms. Mary Jean Cicconi (1969-1991) Mr. Leonard M. Colelli (1958-1982) Dr. Thomas H. Coode (1965-1989) Dr. J. Robert Craig (1957-1982) Dr. Harold K. Crockett (1965-1978) Mr. Wasil Curtioff (1966-1977) Dr. William F. Daniels (1964-1981) Ms. Ethel V. Davis (1969-1991) Mrs. Gertrude Davis (1965-1975) Dr. Mary R. DeCarlo (1954-1968) Mr. Joseph A. Delisi (1968-1985) Mr. Berlie E. Dishong (1964-1986) Mr. Angus H. Douple (1946-1970) Dr. William L. Dovenspilce (1955-1982) Dr. Walter A. Fabian (1969-1984) Mr. Edward E. Fear (1964-1987) Miss Ann D. Fisfis (1968-1987) Dr. Richard E. Frickert (1969-1990) Dr. Henry H. Furio (1969-1979) Dr. Karl W. Gamble (1961-1976) Mrs. Mildred Gath (1966-1980) Mr. Henry R. George (1965-1984) Mrs. Joan M. Glasgow (1972-1982) Ms. Pauline Glod (1959-1979) Mr. Ivan H. Guesman (1968-1982) Dr. William 0. Hambacher (1968-1988) Mrs. Lela T. Hamilton (1953-1968) Dr. George S. Hart (1938-1968) Dr. Arthur G. Henry (1958-1968) Mr. Robert V. Herron (1965-1990) Mr. Francis Herron (1960-1982) Mrs. Eleanore Hibbs (1966-1980 Miss Louise A. Hildreth (1926-1962) Dr. Eugene F. Hilton (1970-1981) Mrs. Merrell Holman (1947-1980) Dr. Jack F. Hoyes (1946-1971) Mrs. Rose G. Hughes (1938-1974) Miss Donna Johnson (1969-1986) Mr. William B. Kania (1961-1988) Mr. John H. Katusa (1966-1986) Dr. Milton C. Kells (1966-1991) Mr. Roger R. Keightley (1963-1991) Dr. Harold E. Kemper (1955-1978) Mr. Curtis W. Kerns (1969-1982) Mr. Benjamin R. Kneisley (1968-1986) Miss M. Isobel Knill (1966-1989) Mr. Daniel Lee LaBute (1964-1991) Ms. Norma Langham (1959-1979) Mr. John R. Lawrence (1966-1990) Mr. John R. Linton (1967-1991) Mr. Leonard Liz.ak: (1966-1991) Dr. W. Ray Lister (1963-1988) Mrs. Rose Lofstead (1957-1979) Mr. Arthur L. Long (1963-1981) Dr. John A. Long (1963-1974) 378 Mr. Norton E. Lownsbery (1969-1986) Ms. Norma E. Maatta (1965-1986) Mr. Samuel Madia (1966-1986) Ms. Margaret Maley (1966-1980) Dr. Wilbur Marisa (1960-1979) Mrs. Ada K. Marsh (1945-1965) Dr. John 0. Marsh (1967-1982) Mr. Schuyler Marshall (1958-1982) Mr. Richard L. May (1967-1989) Mr. John C. McCrory (1958-1984) Mr. James C. McIntyre (1964-1981) Mr. James L. McPaul (1966-1981) Dr. Milton A. Messinger (1969-1991) Dr. Harry L. Monroe (1942-1975) Dr. Albert D. Murden (1971-1982) Miss Doris Nevin (1962-1980) Mr. James Norman (1961-1980) Dr. Joseph C. Nucci (1968-1990) Dr. Mary Catherine O'Brien (1960-1984) Dr. Virjean Parker (1970-1991) Dr. Harold Pash (1969-1982) Dr. Stephen E. Pavlak (1950-1979) Dr. Fred Pollock (1968-1985) Dr. Philip J. Proud (1962-1981) Mr. John Pushkarsh (1966-1982) Miss Louise Rakestraw (1946-1974) Miss Gloria Rhodes (1970-1982) Dr. Daniel E. Rider (1969-1985) Mr. John R. Riggle (1964-1991) Dr. George H. Roadman (1948-1977) Dr. Luis V. Romero (1965-1976) EMERITI Miss Emma Sacco (1928-1957) Dr. Regis J. Serinko (1961-1985) Dr. Irvin Shutsy (1946-1979) Mr. Edward Sikora (1956-1983) Mr. R. Donald Similo (1966-1988) Mr. Charles Slick (1964-1978) Mr. Hubert E. Snyder (1949-1976) Mr. Vetold W. Spomy (1963-1978) Dr. Sarah Stephenson (1968-1987) Mr. John R. Swearingen (1955-1975) Dr. John Tomikel (1965-1982) Dr. Harold W. Traister (1947-1957) Dr. Allison E. Troy (1971-1984) Dr. Alexander N. Tsambassis (1964-1981) Mr. Leonard Volkin (1967-1977) Mr. Frank L. Vulcano (1965-1991) Mrs. Maetroy A. Walker (1969-1990) Mrs. Marian H. Weaver (1954-1976) Dr. Howard R. White (1966-1976) Mrs. Lola M. Willett (1961-1977) Dr. Robert F. Wilseck (1967-1986) Dr. Daniel E. Wilson (1966-1988) Mrs. Miriam Wilson (1966-1984) Mr. Myles B. Witchey (1962-1988) Mr. Donald B. Wodock (1966-1986) Mrs. Henrietta Wood (1959-1978) Mr. Edward Zadoromy (1962-1985) Mr. Jay A. Zeffiro (1970-1988) Mr. George Zemo (1957-1986) INDEX 379 INDEX Abbreviationa . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . 106 Absence• from Clau . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4S, 67 Academic Affain, Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . 352 Academic Development Services . . . . . . . . 121 Academic Dismisaal . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... S7 Academic Programs and Degrees . . . . ... 106 Academic Progreu, Satisfactory . . . . . ... 100 Academic Standing, Good . . . . . . . . . . 47, S7 ACC: Accounting Coul'IICs .... .. .. . . . 147 Accounting, Program in . . . . . .. .. .... 144 Accounting, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . 146 Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Administration and Finance, Univenity Pel'IIOnncl . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Administration and Management, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Administration and Management, Bachelor' s Degree in ... .. .. . . .... 143 Administrative Officen and Staff . . . . . . . 354 Admi88ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Advanced Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Advanced Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Aging : See : Gerontology Aging, Specialist Certificate in ... ... . .. 216 Alcohol and Drug Intervention Program (CHOICES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Alumni Association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Alumni Scholarships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Anesthetist Program and Coul'IICs (RNA) . . . . . . . . .. . .... . 310 ANT: Anthropology Courses . . . . . . . . . . 316 Anthropology, Major in .. .... • . . . . . . 314 Appeal, Financial Aid ... . ... . . . . . . . 102 Appeal, Procedure for Teacher Certification Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Appealing a Grade or other Academic Dcciaiona, Procedures for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S 1 Application, for Admiuion . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Area Degree Programs . . . . l lS, 282, 298, 312 Art, Certification in for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . 123-124 Art Courses (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 123 Art, Department and Major . . . . . . . . ... 122 Associate Degrees (Two-Year Programs): See : Accounting; Banking; Community Living Arrangements; Computer Science Technology; Computer Based Management Systems; Drafting Technolol)'; Early Childhood; Electronics Technoloi)'; Numerical Control Technology; Robotics; Screen Printing Technology ATE: Athletic Training Courses . . . . . . . . 342 Athletic Training, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Athletic, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 6S Attendance at Claascs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4S , 67 Attrition Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Automation Technology, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . 246, 247 Banking, Auociate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . 147 BIO: Biology Course■ ... ... .. ... . . . 13S Biology, Certification in for Teacher Education .. . .. . . . . . . . . . 129 Biology, Department and Majon .. . . . . . . 128 Board of Governon, State System of Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3S0 Budget Plan for Payment of Fee, . . . . . . . . 88 BUS : Busineu Coul'IICs . .. ... . . .. ... 149 Busine88 Administration See also: Administration and Management Business Administration, Major in . . . . . . . 144 Busine88 and Commercial Writing, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Busine88 and Economics, Department and Majon . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Busine88 Economics Major . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Calendar, Academic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Campus and Surrounding Area . . . . . . . . . . 6 Campus Ministry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 37 See also: Counseling and Psychological Services CARE Program for the Learning Diaabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Career Planning, Coul'IIC (XCP) . . . . . . . . 121 CAW: Computer Assisted Workahopa . . . . 279 CCU: Co-Curricular Courses ... ... .. .. 156 Certification for Teachen . . . . . . . . . . . . l 08 Chancellor, State System of Higher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Cheating and Plagiarism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S7 Check, Charge for Bad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Chemistry, Certification in for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Chemistry, Courses (CHE) . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Chemistry, Major in . . . . ... . . . . . . . . 29S CHOICES (Drug & Alcohol 380 Program) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Citizenship, Requirement for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Class Absence ■ Due to Illness . . . . . . . 45 , 67 Claaa Standing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CLEP: See College Level Examination Pro,ram Co-Curricular Activities Course ■ (CCU) .... . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 156 College Level Equivalency Program (CLEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . S l, 85 Colleges: Undergraduate Divisions of the University . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-119 COM: Communication Studies Course■ . •.. 160 Commencement Honora . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54 Communication, Major in, for Teacher Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 See also : Communication Studies Communication Studies Department and Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Communication Studies Course■ (COM) . . . 160 Community College Graduates, Transfer Credits for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Community Living Arrangements, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Community Services, Special Education Major in . . . . . . . . . 328 Computer Applications, Certification in . . . 273 Computer Aaai■ted Workahops (CAW) .... 279 Computer Baaed Systems Management, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Computer Baaed Systems Management, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Computer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Computer Facilities ... .... . . . . . . .... 19 Computer Laboratory, Teacher Education ... 21 Computer Science Technology, Associate Degree in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Computer Science, Courses (CSC) . . . . . . 276 Computer Science, Degree Programs in . . . 270 Confidentiality of Student Records . . . . . . . . 38 Cooperative Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Cooperative Engineering Program . . . . . . . 297 Council of Trustees, University . . . . . . . . 35 l Counseling and Psychological Services . . . . . 68 See also : Campus Ministry Course Numbering System . . . . . . . . .. .. 45 Course Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Creative Writing Major . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Credentials, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 77 Credit Load and Overload . . . . . . . . . . 45, 46 Credits and Credit Houra . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Credits Earned by Examination ... . .... .. 52 CSC : Computer Science Courses . . .. . . .. 79 "Cuts" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 67 INDEX Dean's List . ... . .... . . . ... .. .. . .. 54 Degrees Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 0 Degree■, When Conferred . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Delinquent Account■ . . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . 85 Dental Hygiene, Education Certification, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Development and External Relations . . . 8, 354 Developmental Course■ . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 78 Dining Service■ . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 65 Di■abled : Parking and Service ■ .. •• . . . . . . 69 Di■abled : Program for Learning-Di■abled . .. 26 Dismi■■al , for Academic Reasons . . . . . . . . 57 See also: Withdrawal, Administrative Distinguiahed Service Award . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Dormitories: See Residence Hall ■ Drafting Technology, Associate Degree in .. 247 Driver Education Program . . .. .... . . . . 219 Drop/ Add Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SO Drug & Alcohol Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Dual Majora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 55 Early Admisaion for High School Students . . . 79 Early Childhood, Associate Degree in . . . . 326 Early Childhood, Major in ... . . . . . . . . 185 Early Childhood/Special Education, Major in 186 Earth Science, Certification in for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . .. .... 169 Earth Science Courses (EAS) . . . . . . . . . . 171 Earth Science, Department and Majora .. .. 167 EAS: Earth Science Courses . . . . . . . . . . 171 ECE: Early Childhood Courses . . . . . . . . 189 Economics Courses (ECO) . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Economics, Major in . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 143 EDE: Elementary Education Courses . ... . 187 EDS : Secondary Education Courses . . . . . . 181 EDU (Education) Courses . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Education and Human Services, College of . 108 Educational Foundations, Courses (EDF) .. 181 Educational Studies, Department . . . . . . . . 180 v EEr: Electrical Engineering Course ■ . .. .. 255 Electrical Engineering Technology Major in . 231 Electrical Engineering Technology (EET) Courses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Electrographics, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Electronics Technology, Associate Degree in 25 l Elementary Education, Courses (EDE) . . .. 187 Elementary Education, Department . . . . . . 184 Elementary Education, Major in .. .. . . . . 184 Elementary Education/Special Education, Dual Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Emeriti Faculty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Employment, Student . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ENG: Engliah Course■ ..... . ........ 195 Engineering (Electrical) Technology Major in 255 Engineering, Cooperative Program . . . . . . 297 INDEX English, Certification in for Teacher1iducation . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 English Coones (ENG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 English, Department and Majon . . .. . ... 191 ENS : Environmental Studies Coones .. ... 140 Entnnce Requirements . . . . . . . . .. . .. 74-77 Environmental Educ, ,on Endonement . . . . 131 Environmental Stujies C~ nes (ENS) ... . 140 Environmental Coll8ervation, Resources, Science, and Pollution Control, ~a_f;;n in . . . . . . 129 Equality of Op_portuni~y '\' .. : . . . . . .... 14 ESP: Coones m Special Education . . . . . . 335 Examination, Credits b . . . . . . . .... ... 52 Faculty, Administntion and Profeaaional Staff 355 Faculty, Emeriti . .. . .. ... ... . . . ... 377 Fees and Expe118es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81-89 FIN: Finance Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Finance, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Financial Aid and Scholarships .. . .... 89-103 Financial Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Foreign Languages, Certification in for Teacher Education . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Foreign Languages, Department and Majon . 203 Foreign Students: See International Students Fraternities, Social . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 FRE: French Counes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 French, Certification in for Teacher Education 204 French, Coones (FRE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 French, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 GCT: Graphic Communications Coones . . . 256 General Business Major . . . . . . . . . . .. . 145 General Education, College of Education & Human Services . . . . . . . . 109 General Education, College of Liberal Arts . 115 General Education, College of Science and Technology . . . . . . . . . . . 118 General Science Certification . . . . . . . . . . 298 GEO: Geography Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Geography, Coones (GEO) ... . . . . . . . . 175 Geography Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Geology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 GER: Coones in German . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 German, Certification in for Teacher Education ... .. . ... ... 204 German, Coones (GER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 German, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Gerontology . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .... .. 214 Gerontology, Counes ()CGE) . . . . . . . . . . 216 Gerontology, Major in .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Gerontolou: Aging Specialist Certificate . . 215 GMS : Coones in Military Science (RaTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282, 283 Goals of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Good Academic Standing . . . . . . . . . . 47, 57 381 Governon, Board of, State System of Higher Education Grade Appeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Grade Point Average . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 46 Grade Reporta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 51 Grading System . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Graduate Coones, Undergraduate Credit for . 52 Graduate Credits for Senion . . . . . . . . ... 53 Graduate School . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Graduation Honon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54 Graduation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Grants, Financial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 95 Graphic Communications Technology, Major in .. . . . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . 237 Graphic Communications, Coones (GCT) . . 256 Guidance and Cou118eling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Handicapped, Academic Programs in. See Special Education and Speech Pathology Handicapped: See Disabled Hazing . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . ... 71 Health and Physical Education, Coones (HPE)220 Health, Physical Education and Safety, Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Health Profeaaions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Health Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 HIS : History Counes . . . . . . . . . . . ... . 225 History and Urban Studies Department of . . 223 History, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 History of the Univenity . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Honon Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Honon Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Honor Societies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Honors Convocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Honon, Graduation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 54 Honon, Semester (Dean's List) .. . .. . . . . 54 Honon : See also: Distinguished Service Awards Housing . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Housing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 HSD: Coones in Driven Education and Highway Education . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Human-Resources Manaiement, Major in . . 145 Humanities, Area Degree Program in .. 115, 285 Identification, Social Security Number . . . . . 78 Illneaa, Absence Due to ·. . . . . . . . . . . 45 , 67 Incomplete Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Industrial Arts: See Industry and Technology Industry and Technology, Department .... 230 IND Coones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Industrial Management Technology, Major in 236 Industrial Management Technology: Computer Science Option, Major in . . . . 272 Industrial/Organizational Psychology, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Industrial Technology, Counes (ITE) .. ... 262 382 Industrial Technology, Major in .. . .. . .. 238 Industry Counc1 (IND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Infinnary: See Health Service■ Intercollegiate Athletic ■ • . . . . . . . . . • . . . 65 International Students . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 International Studie ■ (Geography) Major in . 170 Intemahip• . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 116 rrE: Coone■ in Industrial Technology . . . . 262 Journali■m, Major in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Laboratory Coone Requirement, College of Liberal Arts . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Language■, Foreign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Late Payment Fee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Learning Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Learning Di■abled : CARE Program . . . .. . . 26 Learning Reaource Centen . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Liberal Arts, College of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Library, Loui1 L . Manderino . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Library Service,, Department . . . . . . . . . . 267 LIT: Coone■ in Literature . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Literature, Coone■